FCC ID: BEJL06A PCS GSM Phone

 

Part 15.21 statement

" Change or Modifications that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Part 15.105 statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Part 15 Class B Compliance This device and its accessories comply with part15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device & its accessories may not cause harmful interference.

(2) This device & its accessories must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Body-worn Operation This device has been tested for typical body-worn operations with the distance of 0.79inches (2.0cm) from the users body. To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements, a minimum separation distance of 0.79inches(2.0cm) must be maintained from the user's body. Additionally, Belt clips, holsters & other body-worn accessories may not contain metallic components. DOCOMO W-CDMA and GSM/GPRS Systems Thank You for Purchasing the "docomo STYLE series L-06A". Before using your "L-06A", thoroughly read this manual and other manuals provided with your package and other optional devices in order to use the "L-06A" correctly. If you have any questions after reading the manual, "docomo Information Center" listed up on the back of this manual. L-06A is designed to be a convenient tool. Treat it carefully at all times to ensure that it will keep serving you well. Before Using Your FOMA Terminal Because the FOMA terminal uses radio waves, it may not function in locations where radio waves cannot reach, such as in tunnels, underground passages and some buildings, in other areas where radio waves are weak; or when out of the FOMA service area. Even when you are high up in a tall building or condominium and nothing blocks your view outside, your FOMA terminal may not be able to receive or transmit signals. Also, even when radio waves are strong, and you are not moving, communication may still be occasionally interrupted. Be considerate of other people around you when in public or where it is especially crowded or quiet. Because your FOMA terminal uses radio waves to communicate, there is a possibility that third parties may attempt to listen in on your calls. The W-CDMA and GSM/GPRS systems automatically encode signals for all calls so even if someone should somehow be able to listen in on the radio signals, an eavesdropper will hear only noise. Your FOMA terminal sends and receives voice communication as encoded digital data. When you are operating your FOMA terminal while moving from location to location sometimes you may encounter weaker radio waves and the transmitted digital data may not be correctly decoded resulting in sound distortions. If you use a PC, use DOCOMO Keitai datalink to send and save data such as Phonebook entries, mail messages, Schedule events, etc. to the PC. When you use SSL for a secure connection to conduct business, you agree that you are responsible for any actions you take. DOCOMO and the certifier listed below do not guarantee the safety of SSL for any activities of customers while using SSL, and are not liable for any damages incurred through using SSL. Certifiers: VeriSign Japan K.K., Cybertrust Japan Co., Ltd., GlobalSign K.K., RSA Security Japan Ltd., SECOM Trust Systems Co., Ltd. Comodo CA Ltd. This FOMA terminal is supported in the "FOMA Plus-Area" and "FOMA High Speed Area". This FOMA terminal can be used only within the FOMA network or the roaming service area provided by DOCOMO. The FOMA terminal can be used only via the FOMA network provided by DOCOMO and DOCOMO's roaming area. It is recommended that you make a backup of user-defined data

(Phonebook entries, Schedule events, memos, Record Message recordings, voice notes, or video notes) saved in the FOMA terminal by recording them on paper, etc. and storing them at a separate location. DOCOMO is not responsible for lost data due to failure, repair, or replacement of the model of your FOMA terminal. For the first-time user of the FOMA terminal If you have never used any FOMA models before, read this manual in the following order. Doing so will help you understand the preparation and basic operations for using the FOMA terminal. 1. Read the "Safety Precautions" P10 2. Insert and charge the battery pack P42, P45 3. Turn on the power, switch the display language to English, set the time and date, and view your own number P48P49P50 4. Learn the functions of the various keys on the FOMA terminal P26 5. Become familiar with the meanings of the icons that appear on the screen P30, P33 6. Learn how to navigate the menu structure P34 7. Make sure you know how to make/receive calls P52, P67 You can download the latest version of this manual from the DOCOMO website.

"User's Manual (in PDF format)" Download http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/support/manual/index. html

* The URLs and the manuals available from this site may be changed without notice. How to Use This Manual This manual offers you the following methods to easily find a page describing functions or services you want to know about. From the Index When you know the name of a particular function or service which you want to know about, look for it in the index.

] P416 From Easy Search Use a simple word to search for frequently used or convenient functions.

] P4 From the Tabs on the Cover Major content areas are listed on the tabs listed on the cover. Jump to the section of interest.

] Cover See the next page for details. From the Contents ] P6

] P8 From the Main Features From the Menu List ] P346

] P424 From the Quick Manual The quick manual describes basic functions simply. It is easy to carry outsides. Also, when use the FOMA terminal overseas, the Quick Manual (Overseas Use) can always give a great help. Note that the "L-06A" is referred to as the "FOMA terminal" in this "L-06A manual". Reproduction of all or part of this manual without permission is prohibited. The content of this manual may be changed without prior notice. 1 The following chart uses searching "One Touch Key" as an example. From the Index

] P416 Search for a function or service name as shown in the example. From Easy Search ] P4 Search for frequently used or convenient functions as shown in the example. Other Functions To reduce battery consumption P108 To listen to music P210 To exchange information using infrared communication P257 To use One Touch Key function P265 To use the FOMA terminal as an alarm clock P267 From the Tabs on the Cover ]

Cover Search for a function in the order of the tab on the cover first page of the chapter the target page as shown in the example. Camera Music i-ppli Data Management Convenient Functions Character Entry 2 One touch key 27, 265 Open flip 69 Operator name display 333 Options and related devices 23 , 362 Outbox 148 321 Overseas use After coming back to Japan 327 Available services 322 Go to the page with the description of "One Touch Key" on P265 Go to the page with the description of "One Touch Key" on P265 Go to the page with the description of "One Touch Key" on P265 Operation description Steps are provided. P34 Screen The screen that appears in the middle of steps or after steps are completed is provided. Function name This name is used in the index. One Touch Key Using One Touch Key A phone number and a mail address can be assigned to h j k One Touch Keys. You can view the phone number and the mail address with a single keystroke. A frequently used function can be assigned to l a One touch hot key. You can access the function with a single keystroke. Registering a Phone Number and Mail Address to a One Touch Key M[Menu]] (LifeKit)]"One Touch Key"

I [Delete]: Delete the content of the selected key. Set up a number using a Phonebook entry. When selecting a Phonebook entry with multiple mail addresses saved, you need to further specify which addresses are to be registered to the key. Enter a name, phone number, and mail address.

] Select a field ]Enter the Name/Phone number/Mail address

]I [Done]

Cancel registering. Note

<Register direct>

A phone number and a mail address assigned to One touch hot keys is not saved in the Phonebook. Move the cursor to the number of a One Touch Key (1-

3) ]C[Register]]Perform the following operations If you select an already used number, press C [Change]. 265 Display name on the screen This name is displayed on the screen (some items may not be available depending on the operation). Description of options Detailed descriptions or operations of options are provided. Note Necessary information, cautions, or supplementary information is provided. Index Using the index allows a search for each chapter.

*The above page is an example. Screen images and illustrations in this manual only provide examples. They may be different from actual screen images or items. This manual uses the following illustrations to explain the key operations. Actual key Key in this manual This manual describes operations mainly using the default settings. If settings are changed, screen displays or operations may differ somewhat from the ones shown in this manual. The FOMA terminal is set to "Simple Menu" by default. This manual uses the normal menu to explain operations in a simple way.P109 3 Easy Search It is easy to find a function with simple words. To learn about convenient functions for calling To determine whether or not to notify a called party of your phone number P50 Caller ID Notification To place a call on hold P55 Hold To change the volume level of the other party's voice P70 Receiver volume To take actions when you cannot answer calls To place an incoming call on hold without answering P70 On hold To notify a caller that you cannot answer the phone just now P71 Public mode (Drive mode) P72 Public Mode (Power OFF) To record messages on the terminal P73 Record Message To change a ringtone melody or illumination pattern To change a ring tone P98 Select ring tone To change the ringtone or the alarm volume/to mute keypad sounds or Touchpad sounds P99 Volume To set the terminal to vibrate to notify of incoming calls P100 Vibration To activate Manner Mode P102 Manner Mode To change the illumination color or pattern P110 Lighting LED To view or change the screen display To learn the meaning of icons on the screen P30, P33 To change the Stand-by display P103 Stand-by display To display the Calendar on the Stand-by display P104 To change the Main Menu appearance P108 Menu settings To increase the font size P111 Font size 4 Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

To make full use of mail Other Functions To send Deco-mail P134 Deco-mail To send an image or a melody P139 Attach files To sort and save mail automatically P150 Auto sort To make full use of the camera To change the size of captured images P202, P204 Select size To display captured images P239 Picture viewer To use the FOMA terminal with a sense of security To keep Phonebook entries or Schedule events from prying eyes P119 Data access lock To reject incoming calls without caller ID P124 Anonymous caller To reject calls from phone numbers not in the Phonebook P126 Reject unknown caller To reduce battery consumption P108 Power saver mode To listen to music P210 Music Player To exchange information using infrared communication P257 IrDA To use One Touch Key function P265 One Touch Key To use the FOMA terminal as an alarm clock P267 Alarm To use the FOMA terminal as a calculator P286 Calculator To use the FOMA terminal abroad P322 To update the software P385 Software Update For searching other operations, see "How to Use This Manual". P1 Operating procedures for frequently used functions are summarized in the Quick Manual. P424 Easy Search/Contents/Precautions 5 Security Settings 113 Mail 129 i-mode/

i-motion/

i-Channel 173 Camera 197 Passwords, Security Code, PIN Codes, Lock All, Secret Mode, Memory Reject Call, Reset Settings, Clearing Memory etc. What is i-mode Mail?, Mail Menu, Creating/Sending i-mode Mail, Deco-mail, Templates, Attach Files, Receive Option, Check new messages, Received/Sent Mail Logs, etc. i-mode, i-mode Menu, My Menu, Change i-mode Password, Internet Access, Bookmarks, Screen Memo, Downloading, i-Channel Settings etc. Before Using the Camera, Photo-mode, Movie-

mode, Changing the Capture Settings, Camera Settings Contents How to Use This Manual 1 Easy Search 4 Contents 6 Main Features of the L-06A 8 Safety Precautions (ALWAYS FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS) 10 Handling and Care 20 Basic package and Main Options 23 Before Using the Handset 25 Voice/Video Calls 51 Phonebook 79 Part Names and Functions, Display Components, Sub Display Components, Selecting Menu Items, Using the UIM (FOMA Card), Inserting/Removing the Battery Pack, Charging the FOMA Terminal, Power On/Off, Set Date&Time, and others Making Voice/Video Calls, Using Redial/Received Call Logs, WORLD CALL, Receiving Voice/Video Calls, Receiver Volume, Ringtone Volume, Public Mode (Drive Mode/Power OFF), Record Message, and others Available Phonebooks, Saving in the Phonebook, Editing Phonebook Entries, Deleting Phonebook Entries, Number of Phonebook Entries, etc. Sound/

Screen/Light Settings 97 Select Ringtone, Volume, Vibration, Manner Mode, Stand-by Display, Menu Settings, Illumination Settings, Date&Time Format, Select Language etc. 6 Easy Search/Contents/Precautions PC Connection 339 Data Communication, Before Using, Flow Chart for Completing the Data Transfer OBEXTM Setup, Preparing for Data Communication, using CD-ROM, Introduction to DOCOMO Keitai datalink. Appendix/

Troubleshoot ing 345 Menu List, Troubleshooting, Error Messages, Warranty and After-sales Service, Software Update, Main Specifications, Intellectual Property Issues, etc. Index, Quick Manual Index/Quick Manual 417 Music 209 i-ppli 221 Data Management 237 Convenient Functions 261 Character Entry 293 Network Services 305 Overseas Use 321 Playing Music, Downloading Chaku-Uta-Full, Creating a Playlist, etc.

*"Chaku-Uta-Full" is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Inc. What is i-ppli?, Downloading, Activating, Auto Start Set, Deleting i-ppli, etc. Data Box, Picture Viewer, Video/i-motion Player, Melody Player, Infrared Communication, etc. Multiaccess, Multitask, One Touch Key, Alarm, Schedule, Call Duration, Call Cost, Set Call Cost Limit, World Clock, Calculator, Memo, Auto Answer, etc. Input Characters, Input settings, Edit Common Phrases, Using Kuten Code, Editing Dictionaries, Reset Learned Info, Download Dictionaries Network Services Available, Voice Mail Service, Call Waiting Service, Call Forwarding Service, Nuisance Call Blocking Service, Caller ID Request, etc. Overview of International Roaming (WORLD WING), Services Available Overseas, Checking before Using Overseas, Making Calls overseas, Receiving Calls overseas, Network Search Mode, etc. Easy Search/Contents/Precautions 7 Main Features of the L-06A i-ChannelP195 You can receive graphic information such as news or weather forecasts. Also, you can obtain rich content generated in Flash

(P242) by selecting your favorite channels from the Channel list.

* This is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription. International roamingP322 The same FOMA terminal, phone number, and mail address as those used in Japan are available overseas

(supporting 3GGSM area only). In addition, voice/videophone calls, i-mode, i-mode mail, SMS, and network services are available. Variety of Features Quick searchP94 You can easily find a saved phone number in Phonebook by only entering the memory number (within 2 digits) or a part of the phone number (3 digits or more) in Stand-by. Dial sound by 3 languagesP101 Each number dialed can be read aloud. You can choose the language between Japanese, English, and Korean. Dual clock displayP104 In Stand-by, you can simultaneously show the time in two different cities. For example, you can specify a city you stay and compare its time with Japan time. Simple menuP109 The Simple menu has only menu options that are frequently used, such as making a call or using mail. The font size on the display can be enlarged in some part to read easily. Camera functionsP198 Still images (with auto focus) and videos can be captured using camera with 2.00 Mega effective pixels (Up to recorded pixels of 2.00 Mega pixels). Infrared communicationP257 You can send and receive data with devices that support infrared communication. 8 Easy Search/Contents/Precautions World timeP282 You can check date and time in various cities or countries as well as Greenwich mean time. The world map is displayed on the screen that you can check the location of the desired city/region as well as date and time. This can be used to check date, time, and location of your next destination while traveling, etc. Unit converterP283 Units of currency, surface, length, weight, temperature, volume, and velocity can be quickly converted into other units. This can be used to find out how much the purchase you made overseas costs in Japanese Yen, etc. One Touch KeyP265 You can make calls or send mail with few keystrokes to the parties registered to the three buttons h - k beneath the display. You can also access the function assigned to l with a single keystroke. AnimationsP247 You can create an animation concatenating up to 20 still images saved on the FOMA terminal and display them in a slide show. Videophone callsP52 Security settingsP113 Deco-mail/Deco-mail pictogramP134 Chaku-Uta FullP210 Music playerP210 i-ppli/i-ppliDXP222 Various network servicesP305 HIGH-SPEED communication compliantP340 Easy Search/Contents/Precautions 9 Safety Precautions (ALWAYS FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS) Before using your FOMA terminal, read these "Safety Precautions" carefully so that you can use it correctly. After reading the safety precautions, save this manual for later reference. These precautions are intended to protect you and others around you. Read and follow them carefully to avoid injury, damage to the product or damage to property. The signs below indicate the levels of danger or damage that may occur if the particular precaution is not observed. DANGER WARNING CAUTION This sign indicates that incorrect handling has a high possibility of causing death or serious injury. This sign indicates that incorrect handling poses a risk of causing death or serious injury. This sign indicates that incorrect handling poses a risk of causing injury or damage to the product or property. The following symbols show specific actions:

Denotes things not to do (Prohibitions) Dont 10 Easy Search/Contents/Precautions Denotes not to disassemble. Denotes not to touch with wet hands. Denotes not to use where it could get wet. Denotes mandatory instructions

(matters that must be complied with). Denotes to unplug from the outlet. No disassembly No wet hands No liquids Do Unplug The following symbols show specific actions:

General Precautions for FOMA Terminal, Battery Packs, Adapters (Including the Chargers) and UIM P11 Handling the FOMA Terminal P13 Handling the Battery Pack P15 Handling Adapters (Including the Charger) P17 Handling the UIM P19 Handling the terminal near electronicmedical equipment P19 General Precautions for FOMA Terminal, Battery Packs, Adapters (Including the Chargers) and UIM Do Dont DANGER Do not use, store, or leave the FOMA terminal or other devices in locations subject to high temperatures, such as near an open fire, in direct sunlight or inside a car on a hot day. Doing so may cause the battery pack to leak, overheat, explode or ignite, the device to deform or malfunction, or performance or usable lifetime to be diminished. Also, doing so may cause part of the case to become hot and possibly cause burns. Fire, injury, electric shock or malfunction may result. The battery pack may leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. No disassembly Dont No liquids Do not get the devices wet. Device contact with liquids, such as water or pet urine, may cause overheating, electric shock, fire, malfunction, injury, etc. Be careful not to use the devices in areas where they could get wet. Use only the battery packs and adapters

(including the chargers) approved by NTT DOCOMO for this FOMA terminal. Using devices other than those specified by NTT DOCOMO may cause the FOMA terminal, battery pack and other devices to leak, overheat, explode, ignite or malfunction. Battery Pack L02 FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 FOMA Dry Battery Adapter 01 FOMA Portable Charging Adapter 01 FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02

* For information on other compatible products, contact the DOCOMO service counter. WARNING Do not put the battery pack, FOMA terminal or adapter(including the charger) in heating appliances such as microwave ovens, or high pressure containers. The battery pack may leak, overheat, explode or ignite. Also, the FOMA terminal or adapter (including the charger) may overheat, smoke or ignite, or the circuit boards may become damaged. Dont Do not throw the FOMA terminal or devices, or subject them to severe shocks. The battery pack may leak, overheat, explode, or ignite. Also, the devices may malfunction or catch fire. Easy Search/Contents/Precautions 11 Dont Do Do Keep conductive foreign objects (metal, pencil lead, etc.) away from the charging terminals or external connectors. Do not insert such objects into a device. Fire or malfunction may result from a short circuit. Make sure you have the power switched off before you go near a flammable gas such as gasoline fumes.Do not use the charger near such places. Using the terminal or charger in such an environment so may result in a fire. If you notice any strange smells, overheating, discoloration or warping of the terminal, immediately take the following actions:

1. Remove the power plug from the outlet or cigarette lighter socket. 2. Turn the FOMA terminal off. 3. Remove the battery pack from the FOMA terminal. If you continue to use the terminal or devices under the above mentioned conditions, it may overheat, rupture, or ignite; or the battery pack may leak. CAUTION Dont Do not place the FOMA terminal or accessories in places which are unstable such as wobbly tables or sloping shelves. The FOMA terminal or accessories may fall, resulting in injury or malfunction. Do not store the FOMA terminal accessories in humid or dusty places, or in hot areas. Otherwise, the terminal could damaged. Dont Do Do Do If children use the FOMA terminal or devices, a guardian should explain the safety instructions and correct operation. The guardian should also make sure that the instructions are followed during use. Otherwise, injury may result. Keep out of the reach of babies and infants. Accidental swallowing or injury may result. Pay extra attention when you are using the FOMA terminal for an extended period of time while it is connected to the adapter (including the charger). While the battery pack is being charged, if you make a long video call, or constantly use i-ppli, the FOMA terminal, and its components including the battery pack and the adapter

(including the charger) can become warm. Some people who continuously or repeatedly touch a hot FOMA terminal may develop rashes, itching, or eczema depending on their physical health or existing medical conditions, or a low temperature burn may result. 12 Easy Search/Contents/Precautions Handling the FOMA Terminal WARNING Do not directly point the Infrared Port at someone's eyes while exchanging data using infrared communication. Doing so may adversely affect their eyes. Also, aiming it towards other infrared devices may interfere with the operation of these devices. Do not flash a light at a short distance from someone's eyes. Doing so may cause visual disorder. Also, blinding or surprising someone may cause an accident. Do not put the FOMA terminal in the place where it could be impacted by an expanding airbag, e.g. on the dashboard of a car. If the airbag expands, the FOMA terminal could hit you or others, causing accidents or injury and the FOMA terminal could malfunction or be damaged. If you are wearing any imbedded electronic medical device, do not place the FOMA terminal in a pocket close to the location of the device. The FOMA terminal may cause the device to fail. Dont Dont Dont Dont Dont Dont Do Do Do not put anything but a UIM in the FOMA Card slot. Keep water, foreign objects such as electrical conductors, volatile liquids, etc., out of the FOMA terminal. Otherwise, electrical shock, fire or malfunction may result. Do not flash a light directed to a driver of the vehicle. It disturbs driving and may cause an accident. Turn off the FOMA terminal in places where use is prohibited such as in airplanes or hospitals. Nearby electronic or electronic medical appliances may be adversely affected. If the FOMA terminal is set to be turned on automatically, cancel the setting before turning it off. If the medical facility has specific zones where use or possession of handsets is prohibited, follow those regulations. You may be punished for using the FOMA terminal in airplanes, which is prohibited by law. While using Handsfree, do not put the FOMA terminal speaker next to your ear. When you use the headphone/microphone connected to the FOMA terminal to play a game or music, adjust the volume to the appropriate level. Otherwise, hearing loss may result. Also, if you cannot hear ambient sounds, you may become involved in an accident. Easy Search/Contents/Precautions 13 Do Do Do People who suffer from heart ailments should be especially careful about setting vibration and ring tone volume levels. Being startled by alerts from an incoming call could have effects on the heart. IN case of thunder and lightning while using the FOMA terminal outdoors, immediately turn it off and move to a safe place. There is a risk that you may receive an electrical shock or even be struck by lightning. Turn off your FOMA terminal in places near high-precision electronic devices or devices using weak electronic signals. The FOMA terminal may possibly cause the following devices to malfunction:

* Electronic devices that may be affected:

Hearing aids, implanted cardiac pacemakers, implanted defibrillators, other medical electronic devices, fire alarms, automatic doors and other automatically controlled devices. If you are using an implanted cardiac pacemaker, implanted defibrillator or any other electronic medical device, consult the manufacturer or retailer of the device for advice regarding possible effects from radio waves. Do Dont Dont Dont If the display glass or camera lens is broken, avoid touching the broken glass or exposed parts inside the FOMA terminal. The surface of the display or camera lens is covered with a plastic panel so that shattered glass pieces do not scatter easily, however, if you touch the broken glass or exposed parts inside the terminal, injury may result. CAUTION Do not swing the FOMA terminal around. If you swing the FOMA terminal around by its lanyard, someone could get hurt or the device could be damaged. Do not place magnetic media near the FOMA terminal or inside the folded terminal. Information on magnetic media such as cash cards, credit cards, telephone cards or floppy disks may be lost. Do not place a magnetized item near the FOMA terminal. A strong magnetic field may cause malfunction of the terminal. 14 Easy Search/Contents/Precautions Dont If the display is broken and the LCD liquid leaks, do not put the liquid into your mouth, inhale the liquid, or apply the liquid to your skin. If the LCD liquid gets into your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with clean water and seek emergency medical advice. Also, if the liquid gets on your skin or clothes, immediately wipe it off with alcohol and wash with soap and water. Failure to do so may cause blindness or injury to your skin. Dont Do not put the FOMA terminal speaker next to your ear when the ring tone is sounding or a melody is being played on the terminal. Hearing loss may result. Part Material Surface Treatment Confirmation Button ABS Trivalent chrome plating Around the Sub Aluminium alloy Trivalent chrome Display Hinge side Zinc alloy plating Spray Do Be careful not to catch anything such as your finger or a strap in the folded FOMA terminal when you close it. Injury or device failure may result. Handling the Battery Pack Do Do Electronic devices in some types of cars can be affected by use of the FOMA terminal. For safety's sake, do not use the FOMA terminal in such case. You can check the type of battery in your FOMA terminal by reading the label attached to the battery pack. Description Li-ion00 Type Lithium ion battery Itching, rash or eczema may be caused depending on your physical conditions or predisposition. If an abnormality occurs, stop using the FOMA terminal immediately, and then seek medical attention. Metals are used for the following parts:

DANGER Dont Keep all electrical conductors away from the battery terminal contacts. Do not carry or keep the terminal together with accessories made of metal. The battery pack may leak, overheat, rupture or ignite. Easy Search/Contents/Precautions 15 Dont Dont Dont Do Do not use excessive force to insert the battery pack into the FOMA terminal even when you have difficulty in inserting it. Also, check that the battery pack is oriented correctly when you insert it. The battery pack may leak, overheat, rupture or ignite. Do not attempt to incinerate a battery pack. The battery pack may leak, overheat, rupture or ignite. Do not puncture the battery pack, or strike it with a heavy blow. The battery pack may leak, overheat, rupture or ignite. If battery fluid somehow gets into your eyes, immediately flush your eyes with clean water and immediately seek emergency medical advice. Blindness may result. WARNING Dont If an abnormality occurs to the battery pack when it is damaged or deformed by the terminal being dropped, stop using the terminal immediately. The battery pack may leak, overheat, explode, or ignite. Also, the devices may malfunction or catch fire. Do Do Do If normal charging time has elapsed but charging does not complete, stop the charging anyhow. The battery pack may leak, overheat, rupture or ignite. If you see that the battery pack is leaking, or if it smells bad, stop using it. Be sure to keep a leaking battery pack away from open flames since the battery fluid is highly inflammable and could ignite or explode. Make sure that your pets do not bite a battery pack. The battery pack may leak, overheat, explode, or ignite. Also, the devices may malfunction or catch fire. 16 Easy Search/Contents/Precautions CAUTION After its useful life, a battery pack should be properly disposed of. Do not dispose of exhausted batteries with ordinary household waste. Battery packs which are not disposed of properly may ignite, explode or cause environmental damage. Cover the battery terminals with a non-conductive tape and take them to a service counter such as a docomo shop or dispose of them in accordance with procedures for disposing of battery packs set up by your local authorities. Do not charge a wet battery pack. The battery pack may overheat, rupture or ignite. If battery fluid gets on your skin or clothes, immediately stop using the battery pack and rinse with clean running water. Failure to do so may cause injury to your skin. Dont Dont Do Handling Adapters (Including the Charger) WARNING Do not use a damaged adapter (including the charger) or one with a damaged power cord. Electric shock, overheating or ignition may result. Dont Dont Dont Dont Dont Dont Do not use the AC adapter or Desktop Holder in a place with high humidity such as a bath room. You could suffer an electric shock. Use the DC adapter only in a negative (-) ground vehicle. It is not designed for use in a positive (+) ground vehicle. Otherwise, ignition may result. If you hear or see thunder and lightning, do not touch the FOMA terminal or adapter (including the charger). There is a risk that you may receive an electrical shock or even be struck by lightning. Do not short-circuit the Charging Terminals when the adapter is plugged into an outlet or cigarette lighter socket. Also, never touch the Charging Terminals with fingers or other bare skin. Doing so could cause fire, equipment failure, electric shock or other injury. Place the charger or Desktop Holder in a stable location during charging.Also, do not cover or wrap the charger and Desktop Holder with cloth or bedding. The FOMA terminal may disconnect from the charger, or cooling air flow may be restricted by wrapping the device. The terminal may overheat, ignite or fail. Easy Search/Contents/Precautions 17 Do not place heavy objects on the adapter

(including the charger) cord or power cord. Electric shock or fire may result. Dont No wet hands Do not touch the power cord of the adapter

(including the charger), or the outlet with wet hands. You could suffer an electric shock. Do Do Use the adapter only with the specified power source and voltage. Failing to do so may result in fire or malfunction. When you use the FOMA terminal overseas, use an AC adapter appropriate for the location. AC adapter: AC 100V DCadapter:

DC12V24V (for only a negative ground vehicle) Available AC adapter overseas:

AC100-240V (plugs into a home AC outlet) If the fuse of the DC adapter blows, replace it with the specified fuse. The use of an incorrect fuse may cause fire or malfunction. See the user's manual supplied with the adapter for the specified fuse. Do Do Do Unplug Unplug Keep the power plug dust-free. Otherwise, ignition may result. When plugging the adapter (including the charger) into an outlet, plug it in firmly, being careful not to let it contact with any metal objects or bare metal wires. Otherwise, electric shock, a short-circuit or fire may result. Always hold the adapter (including the charger) firmly when pulling it out of the outlet or cigarette lighter socket. If you pull on the cord instead of the adapter or plug, the cord could come loose or be damaged resulting in electric shock or fire. If you are not planning to use the AC adapter for a long period of time, unplug it from the outlet. Otherwise, electrical shock, fire or malfunction may result. If the Adapter gets wet, unplug it immediately from the outlet or cigarette lighter socket. A wet adapter can cause electric shock, smoke or fire. 18 Easy Search/Contents/Precautions Before cleaning, pull the plug out of the outlet or cigarette lighter socket. You could suffer an electric shock. Unplug Handling the UIM CAUTION Be careful not to touch the edge of UIM (IC portion) when removing it. Your hands or fingers may be injured. Do Handling the terminal near electronic medical equipment The description below meets "Guideline on the Use of Radio-communication Equipment such as Mobile Telephones - Safeguards for Electronic Medical Equipment" by the Electromagnetic Compatibility Conference Japan. WARNING Do Be sure to adhere to the following regulations inside medical facilities:

Keep the FOMA terminal out of an intensive care unit (ICU) or a coronary care unit (CCU). Turn off the FOMA terminal in hospital wards. Turn off the FOMA terminal in hospital lobbies and corridors if electrical medical devices could be nearby. If the medical facility has specific zones where use or possession of terminals is prohibited, follow those regulations. If any function which automatically turns on your FOMA terminal is set, cancel the setting before turning it off. Turn off the FOMA terminal in crowded trains or other public places where implanted cardiac pacemaker or defibrillator wearers could be nearby. The operation of an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator may be affected by radio waves. If you use an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator, use the FOMA terminal 22cm or more away from the implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator. Operation of an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator may be affected by radio waves. Patients using electronic medical equipment other than implanted cardiac pacemakers or implanted defibrillators (outside medical facilities for treatment at home, etc.) should check the influence of radio waves upon the equipment by consulting the manufacturer. Operations of electronic medical equipment may be affected by radio waves. Do Do Do Easy Search/Contents/Precautions 19 Handling and Care General Usage Guidelines Do not let the equipment get wet. The FOMA terminal, battery pack, adapter (including the charger) and UIM are not waterproof. Do not use them in places with high humidity such as a bath or where rain may get them wet. If you carry them close to your body, moisture from sweat may corrode the internal parts causing a malfunction. Note that malfunctions deemed to be caused by water are not covered by the warranty, and may be impossible to repair. Since these malfunctions are not under warranty, even when repair is possible, it will be done at the user's expense. Clean the FOMA terminal with a dry, soft cloth (Lens cleaning cloth). The Display of the FOMA terminal sometimes has a special coating so that it is easier to see. If you rub the Display roughly with a dry cloth, it may be scratched. Take care of how you handle the terminal, and use only a dry, soft cloth such as used for cleaning glasses. If water drops are left on the Display, stains or smears may appear or the coating may peel off. Do not use alcohol, thinner, benzene, detergent or other solvents for cleaning, otherwise the printed images may be disappear or discoloration may result. Occasionally clean the connector terminals with a dry cotton swab. If the connector terminals become dirty, the contact may become loose, and the terminal power may be turned off. Wipe the connector terminals with a clean dry cloth or cotton swab. Do not place the equipment near air conditioner outlets. Condensation may form due to rapid changes in temperature, and this may corrode internal parts and cause malfunction. Do not use excessive force using the FOMA terminal or the battery pack. If the FOMA terminal is put under heavy objects in a bag, or if it is sat upon while in your pocket, its LCD, internal PCBs, or the battery pack may be damaged or malfunction. If extraneous devices are inserted to the external connector terminals, the connector may be damaged or malfunction. Carefully read each manual attached to the FOMA terminal , adapter (including the changer) or Desktop Holder. Do not rub or scratch the display with a metal object. Doing so may cause damage or malfunction. Precautions for FOMA Terminal Avoid extreme temperatures. The FOMA terminal should be used within a temperature range from 5 to 35 and a humidity range from 45% to 85%. The FOMA terminal may affect general phones, televisions or radios, etc. in use nearby. Use as far as possible from such appliances. Keep a separate record of any information stored on the FOMA terminal and store the copies in a safe location. DOCOMO assumes no responsibility for the loss of any of your data. Do not drop the FOMA terminal or subject it to shocks. Otherwise, it could damage the terminal. Do not insert devices to the Headphone/Microphone Jack or the external connector terminals crookedly and do not pull devices out without releasing any connector latches. Doing so may cause damage or malfunction. 20 Easy Search/Contents/Precautions Do not fold the FOMA terminal with a strap caught The battery pack may swell towards the end of its useful inside. Doing so may cause damage or malfunction. It is normal for the FOMA terminal to become warm during use or while charging. You can continue to use it even if it is warm. Do not leave the camera directly under the sunlight. Pixels may become discolored or burn out. Close the covers for the headphone/microphone jack and the external connectors when using the terminal. Otherwise, dust or moisture may seep in and cause malfunction. Do not use the terminal with the rear cover removed. The battery pack may fall out. Malfunction or damage may result. Do not stick any thick seal on the face with display, key or button. Malfunction may result. Precautions for Battery Packs Do not attach thick labels on the display or keypad surface. Doing so could damage the terminal. Battery packs are consumables. Depending on the usage, a battery pack may swell as it comes to the end of its life. This is not a malfunction. Purchase a new battery pack as specified in this manual. Charge the battery pack in a place with an ambient temperature of 5 to 35. Be sure to charge the battery pack before you first use the FOMA terminal or after you have not used it for a long time. The actual time that a battery pack holds its charge depends on how the FOMA terminal is used and how close the battery pack is to the end of its useful life. life. This is normal. Pay extra attention to the following points when keep a battery pack for a long term. To keep under the state of full battery (State right after recharging) To keep under the state of completely being exhausted (The FOMA terminal is unavailable to turn on) Leaving a battery uncharged for a long time may lower its performance or shorten its life. The approximate state of 2 battery icon bars is recommended when keeping a battery pack for a long term. Precautions for Adapters (Including Chargers) Charge the battery pack in a place with an ambient temperature of 5 to 35. Charge the battery pack where:

There is very little humidity, vibration, and dust. There are no landline phones, television sets or radios nearby. It is normal for the adapters (including the chargers) to become warm while using or charging the FOMA terminal. You can continue to use it even if it is warm. Use the DC adapter only when the car engine is running. Otherwise, the car battery could go dead. When using a outlet with a latch mechanism, observe the precautions that came with the outlet. Do not subject the adapters to sharp impacts. Also, do not bend the Charging Terminals. Doing so could damage the terminal. Easy Search/Contents/Precautions 21 Precautions for UIMs CAUTION Never use a modified FOMA terminal. Using a modified device violates the Radio Wave Law. The FOMA terminal is given a certificate of conformity to technical standards of specified radio equipment based on the Radio Wave Law. To confirm this, a rating sticker is affixed to the FOMA terminal on which is written. If you modify the internal components of the FOMA terminal by removing screws, the certificate of conformity to technical standards becomes void. Using the terminal with a void certificate of conformity to technical standards violates the Radio Wave Law. Do not drive while using the FOMA terminal. Using a mobile phone while driving is subject to punishment by law. If you receive a call unavoidably, it will inform to the receiver that you will call back by Hands-free, and you must stop the car at a safe place then call back. Do not use excessive force to insert/remove the UIM. It is normal for the UIM to become warm during use. You can continue to use it even if it is warm. Note that NTT DOCOMO will not be liable for malfunctions occurring as the result of inserting and using a UIM with an unauthorized external IC card reader/writer. Always keep the IC portion of the UIM clean. Clean the UIM with a soft, dry cloth (Lens cleaning cloth). Keep a separate record of any information stored on the UIM and store the copies in a safe location. DOCOMO assumes no responsibility for the loss of any of your data. To protect the environment, please bring an old, unused, UIM to a service counter such as docomo shop. Avoid extreme temperatures. Do not scratch, carelessly touch or short circuit the IC portion. Data loss or malfunction may result. Do not drop the UIM or subject it to shocks. Otherwise, it could damage the terminal. Do not bend the UIM or put heavy things on the UIM. Otherwise, it could damage the terminal. Do not insert the UIM with labels or stickers attached into the FOMA terminal. Otherwise, it could damage the terminal. 22 Easy Search/Contents/Precautions Basic package and Main Options Basic package Main Options L-06A

(With Warranty and Back Cover L10) Instruction Manual

(This Book)

* See Quick Manual on P424. FOMA AC adapter 01/02

(With Warranty and Instruction Manual) Manual Manual CD-ROM for L-06A

*This CD contains the

"Manual for Data Communication" and "Kuten Code List" in PDF format. Desktop Holder L02 Battery Pack L02 Other OptionsP361 Easy Search/Contents/Precautions 23 Before Using the Handset Part Names and Functions Main Display Components Sub Display Images Selecting Menu Items Using the UIM (FOMA Card) Inserting/Removing the Battery Pack Charging the FOMA Terminal Checking the Battery Level Battery Level Turning the Terminal On or Off Power On/Off Setting the Date and Time Set date&time Sending the Caller ID Caller ID notification Viewing Your Own Number Own number 26 30 33 34 39 42 43 47 48 49 50 50 25 Part Names and Functions Front Front when the terminal is closed Rear Left Right

* The antenna is inside the FOMA terminal. In order to optimize radio signal reception, do not cover the antenna part with your hand. 26 Before Using the Handset 1 Earpiece/Speaker The other party's voice comes from here. Ring tones, alarm tones, and melodies sound from here. The other party's voice comes from here during a handsfree call. 2 Main DisplayP30 3 hjkl One Touch Keys A phone number and a mail address can be assigned to h/j/k One Touch Key. You can view the phone number and the mail address with a single keystroke. P265 A frequently used function can be assigned to l One Touch Key. You can access the function with a single keystroke. P267 4 K Navigation Button This is used to move the cursor or scroll through the screen. U Up Button Move the cursor up. Press this in Stand-by to open the Record message list screen. (P75). Press this while the Music player, etc. is running to increase the volume. D Down Button Move the cursor down. Press this in Stand-by to open the Phonebook list screen

(P89), and press for 1+ seconds to open the Create contact screen (P82). Press this while the Music player, etc. is running to reduce the volume. L Left Button Move the cursor left. Also, return to the previous screen. Press this in Stand-by to open the Received call list screen

(P59), and press for 1 second to open the Received mail log list screen (P161). R Right Button Move the cursor right. Also, go to the next screen. Press this in Stand-by to open the Redial list screen (P57), and press for 1+ seconds to open the Sent mail log list screen (P161). 5 M Menu Button / Left Soft Key Press this in Stand-by to open the Main menu (P34), and press for 1+ seconds to open the Custom menu (P278). Execute the program indicated for the left soft key.P29 6 g Mail Button Press this in Stand-by to open the Mail menu screen (P130), and press for 1+ seconds to execute Check new messages

(P144, P165). 7 A Start Button Make or answer a voice or video call.P52, P67 Press this in Stand-by to open your recent call history, and press this for 1 second to open the recent sent/received mail history.P61, P161 During character entry, clicking this switches the input mode

(pictographs, symbols, and emoticons).P297 8 C Confirmation Button Execute a selected operation. 9 Dial Keys Press to enter a phone number or characters.P357 Press the 0 button for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to enter "+". P63

! * Public Mode (Drive Mode) Button Enter ":" or "*". Hold the button for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to enable/

disable the Public Mode (Drive Mode).P71

" Mouthpiece During a call, your voice is transmitted through this. During a video capture, it serves as a microphone. Before Using the Handset 27

# I i-mode Button / Right Soft Key Press this in Stand-by to open the i-mode menu screen

(P130), and press for 1+ seconds to open the i-ppli list screen (P223). Execute the program indicated for the right soft key. P29 During character entry, clicking this switches the input mode

(Hiragana, Katakana, alphabetic and numeric characters). P357

$ G Camera Button Press this in Stand-by to open the Still image capture screen

(P200), and press for 1+seconds to open the Movie capture sreen (P203).

% P Power/Off Button Turn the terminal power on/off (press for 2+seconds).P48 Use to end a call, or to stop a function.

& Q Clear/i-Channel Button Restore the previous state. Press this in Stand-by to open the i-channel list screen. P195

( # Manner Mode Button

"#" is entered. Press for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to set/cancel Manner mode. P102

) External Connector Terminal Connect the AC adapter (optional), DC adapter (optional), or FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional).

~ Camera Capture a still image or video. P200, P203 Capture images of surroundings during a video call.

+ Illumination The Photo Light lights or blinks when a call arrives. Lights in red while being charged. Lights or blinks in red when the camera starts. 28 Before Using the Handset

, Sub Display You can view an incoming call or mail, or an alarm with the FOMA terminal closed.P33

- Back Cover Remove the back cover when inserting/removing the UIM or battery pack.P39, P42

. Headphone/Microphone Jack You can connect the flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with switch (optional) here. Do not forcibly pull the cover of the jack.

/ FE Volume Key Use this key to adjust the volume, etc Press this when a call is arriving to adjust the ring tone volume. Press this during a call to adjust the Earpiece volume. Press this on the Playback screen of the Music player to adjust the playback volume. Press this on the List screen to move the scroll screen by screen.

: N Multitask Button If you hold the button for 1+ seconds, the "New task" menu appears.P263 The task list screen opens. P264

; Strap hole

< Infrared Port When performing Infrared communications, point this towards the other device. P258 Soft Keys Available operations on the currently opened screen are displayed as Soft Keys at the bottom of the screen. Press the corresponding Soft Key on the touchpad to perform the assigned function. Different Soft Keys appear depending on the function or display status. Notation of Soft Key Operations This manual describes the Soft Key operations as follows. M [Menu]

The Button Soft Key display 1 Operations performed using M will be displayed. 2 Operations performed using C will be displayed. will also be displayed to indicate the possible direction for Scrolling / Item Selection. 3 Operations performed using I will be displayed. Before Using the Handset 29 Main Display Components The meanings of the icons appearing on the Main Display are as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! "

30 Before Using the Handset 1 2 Strong Weak Signal Strength P48 Self Mode is set P119 Out of Service Area/No Signal Reception P48 Voice call in progress P53 Video call in progress P53

"Reject all calls" is set P123 3 (Blinking) i-mode Connection engaged P175

(Blinking)i-mode transmission / i-channel message reception in progress P175

(Blinking)Engage/disengage packet connection via other devices such as a PC Packet communication is in progress via other devices such as a PC Receiving packets via other devices such as a PC Sending packets via other devices such as a PC Sending/receiving packets via other devices such as a PC 4 (White) There is i-mode mail at the i-mode Center P142

(Pink)

(White) There is a MessageR at the i-mode Center i-mode center mailbox is full P165

(Pink) MessageR mailbox at the i-mode Center is full

(White) There is a MessageF at the i-mode Center P165

(Pink) MessageF mailbox at the i-mode Center is full

(White) There is i-mode mail and MessageR/F at the

(Pink) i-mode Center i-mode Mail and Message R/F mailboxes at i-mode center are full 5 (White) There is unread i-mode mail at the i-mode Center P141

(White) There is an unread SMSP170

(White) There is unread i-mode mail and SMS

(Pink) The FOMA Terminal mailbox is full The UIM's SMS section is full The FOMA Terminal mailbox and the UIM SMS section are full 6 (White) There is an unread MessageRP166 The FOMA Terminal MessageR mailbox is full

(Pink)

(White) There is an unread MessageFP166

(Pink) The FOMA Terminal MessageF mailbox is full Opening or loading an SSL PageP192 i-ppli is runningP223 i-ppli DX is runningP223 7 8 9 A task is currently being executedP263 Several tasks are currently being executed

(Blink) An alarm started but did not sound because

another task was running

Battery levelP47

Lock all is setP118

# (Pink)

(Blue) Manner mode is activatedP102 Original manner mode is activatedP102 The Ring tone for a voice/video call is inactive, and vibration is activeP99, P100 The Ring tone for a voice/video call is active, and vibration is also activeP99, P100 The Ring tone for a voice/video call is inactive, and vibration is inactiveP99, P100 The Ring tone for Mail/Message R/F is inactive, and vibration is activeP99, P100 The Ring tone for Mail/Message R/F is active, and vibration is also activeP99, P100 The Ring tone for Mail/Message R/F is inactive, and vibration is also inactiveP99, P100 Public mode (Drive mode) is setP71 Record message is activeP73 There is an alarm setP267 There is a Schedule event today/To Do task P269, P273 There is a Schedule event today/To Do task with an alarm set P269, P273 Outgoing voice/video calls are restrictedP118 Incoming voice/video calls are restrictedP118 Incoming and outgoing voice/video calls are restrictedP118 Before Using the Handset 31 Note Some characters or symbols appearing on the display may be partially deformed or abbreviated. Icons appearing on the Display are based on the default settings. Depending on changes to your settings, the display of the FOMA terminal may appear differently from the illustrations in the operation manual. The display of the FOMA terminal employs high-

precision production technology, however, there may be instances where there are missing dots or dots that remain on. This is not a manufacturing defect.

Sending Mail is restrictedP118 Receiving Mail is restrictedP118 Sending and receiving Mail is restrictedP118

"Data access lock" is set to "ON"P119

"Secret mode" is set to "ON"P121

"Data access lock" and "Secret mode" are set to

"ON"P119, P121

"Secret mode" to set to "Secret data only mode"

P121

"Data access lock" to set to "ON", and "Secret mode" to set to "Secret data only mode"P119, P121 An external device is connected using a USB cableP343 A UIM is not inserted / an error occurred on the UIM P39 Linking to terminal i-ppli auto start has failedP234 Call costs have exceeded the limit P282 There is Unread Mail (the number of mail messages) There are Missed calls (the number of calls) There are Voice mail messages (the number of messages)P309 There are new messages in Record message (the number of messages) 32 Before Using the Handset Sub Display Images Pressing F/E/N with the FOMA terminal closed displays a clock on the Sub display. Also, icons appear to notify you of an incoming call or mail, or the FOMA terminal status on the Sub display

(The screens listed below show examples). Clock A voice call arriving There is a missed call There is unread Mail/

Message R/F There is a missed call and unread Mail/Message R/F An Alarm is sounding Chaku-Uta Full is being played The battery is being charged Functions cannot be accessed*

The battery is almost completely exhausted. Software is being updated The UIM is not inserted or an error occurred

* This image appears when a function is not accessible because a lock function such as Lock all is activated or another function is running. Before Using the Handset 33 Example: Main menu Note The Sub display shows an image only when the FOMA terminal is closed, and after a certain time, the image disappears automatically. Pressing F/E/N redisplays the image. An image indicating a missed call or unread mail/Message R/F disappears when the FOMA terminal is opened. Simple menu Normal menu Nothing appears on the Sub display even when a call The list of each menu is described at the end of the manual. or mail is sent or received, or a function restricted with a lock function such as All lock is launched. You can select the design for the clock from 4 types. P107 Selecting Menu Items The FOMA terminal allows you to access or set a function, or save items using the main menu or a sub menu. This manual describes functions based on the normal menu. (P109) Simple Menu and Normal Menu L-06A offers a Simple menu (P109) and a normal menu. The Simple menu has only menu options that are frequently used, such as making calls or using mail. The larger font size makes the display easy to read. However, since the font size are enlarged in the simple menu, the menu list on the display might be shortened. 34 Before Using the Handset Simple menu listP356 Normal menu listP346 Selecting Functions from Main Menu You can select a function from the menu by using the navigation button or the dial keys. This manual uses Navigation buttons to select functions for description. Icons and Corresponding Keys Displayed on the Main Menu Menu Icon Corres ponding Dial Key Menu Icon Corres ponding Dial Key Menu Icon Corres ponding Dial Key

(Mail) Phone-book

& logs

(LifeKit)

(Settings) 1 4 7

(i-mode) 2 5 i-ppli

(Data box) MUSIC)

(Camera) Own number) 8 0

(Stationary)

(Service) 3 6 9

Selecting Menu Items This section explains the steps for accessing the Main menu and opening "Backlight" from Stand-by, as an example. 1 Press the M [Menu] button in Stand-by. Main menu appears. 2 From the main menu, press H and move the cursor over (Settings) and press C [Select]

3 On the Setting screen, press H and move the cursor over "Display" and press C [Select]

Setting screen 4 From the display screen, press H and move the cursor over "Backlight" and press C [Select]

Backlight screen Selecting a Function with a Dial Key This section explains the steps for using dial key to open the "Camera Settings" screen from the Main menu, as an example. 1 Press the M [Menu] button in Stand-by. 2 From the Main menu screen, press 8 that corresponds to "Camera". 3 From the Camera screen, press 3 that corresponds to "Camera settings". 8 3 Display screen Main menu screen Camera screen Camera settings screen Before Using the Handset 35 Sub Menu When "Menu" is displayed on a Soft Key, you can access a sub menu to perform various functions. The displayed sub menu items vary depending on the function or the FOMA headset settings. Items that have Sub menus M [Menu]

Menu Phone number entry screen Sub menu Sub menu on a List Screen On the sub menu for a list screen, there are menu options such as "Delete" apply only to the highlighted item and ones such as "Delete all" apply to all items. Move the cursor to the item before pressing M [Menu] when executing an operation that applies to only one item. Note You can move the cursor using H while a sub menu is displayed. Also, you can select a menu option by pressing the dial key corresponding to the Menu number. Using F or E while a sub menu is displayed, you can sometimes move the cursor directly to the top/bottom of the screen or scroll upwards/downwards to display items which are off the screen. For an item that has a sub menu, move the cursor to the item and press C [Select]/R to view the sub menu. Press M [Close]/ Q to close the sub menu. Basic Functions for Each Screen To Return to the Previous Screen/the Stand-by Display Press the following keys to return to the previous screen or pause/cancel the operation to return to Stand-by. QReturn to the previous screen. PReturn to Stand-by. If a confirmation to exit is displayed, press "Yes" to cancel the operation. Note Depending on the current operation on the FOMA terminal, pressing P/Q may not return to Stand-

by/the previous screen. 36 Before Using the Handset Selecting Setting Items Option fields for a setting screen show the currently set options. To change a setting, select an option field and select an item from a list that opens. When is displayed to the { } of an option field, use J to switch items. Note To cancel entering the security code and close the entry screen, press M [cancel]

Notation for Menu Operations This manual explains operations by using steps to be performed mainly from Stand-by. Basically, descriptions of operations are simplified as follows:

Selecting Setting Items H ] C H ] C 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Display" ] "Call display 1 2 3 1 An icon to press to operate. 2 An icon on the main menu. Press H to move the cursor to the item and press C [Select] to select. 3 Menu item names. This manual also uses the phrase

"Perform the following operation" or "select xxx". Press H to move the cursor to the item and press C

[Select] to select. Note The settings may not be switched depending on an option. Authentication For certain functions and services, a password (P114) may be required for confirmation purposes. If the entry screen appears, use dial buttons to enter the password and press C[OK]. If correctly entered, you can complete the steps, or continue to the next step. The entered password will appear as "*"

(Asterisk) marks. Password entry screen (Example:

Security Code Entry Screen) Before Using the Handset 37

 

 

Sub Menu Example Notation Rules Description of steps starting from other than the Standby display At the beginning of the description, the status of the terminal or the screen to open such as "Ringing" or "List screen" is written. Omitting C [Select] in selection operation As shown in 3 in "Example of Operations" (P37), to explain a step to select an icon or a function from a list, operational steps such as pressing C [Select] are omitted. Similarly, to explain steps to enter a password or fix entered characters, the operations for fixing such as C [OK] are omitted. Omitting C when carrying out a function to make into The instruction beginning with "Place check marks" means that you have to enable the checkbox by pressing C to turn to shown beside the desired item. Items displayed on the sub menu may vary depending on the settings or registered items of the FOMA terminal.

[Scroll]

Set the number of lines scrolled after pressing H on a site, Scre

] "1 line"/"3 lines"/"5 lines"/"Page"

[Message list]

Configure Message R/F list screen display. 1 LineDisplay only the subject in one line. 2 LineDisplay the subject and received date and time in two 1 2 3 4 lines. 1 Menu item name. Press H/ F / E to move the cursor to the item and press C [Select] to select. 2 Functional description of the item. 3 Operational description of the item. Perform this step after selecting a 1. 4 Item names, function description of items, and operation description of items after items are selected. Note If multiple sub menus such as the redial list screen and the redial detail screen are collectively described, some menu items that do not actually appear may be included (depending on the settings or screens). 38 Before Using the Handset Using the UIM (FOMA Card) The UIM is an IC card that contains subscription information, such as your phone number. You can only use communication functions including calls, mail, and i-mode communication with a UIM inserted in the terminal. Inserting the UIM into another FOMA terminal allows you to operate multiple FOMA terminal for various purposes. For details on how to handle the UIM, refer to the UIM instruction manual. Inserting/Removing the UIM Use the steps described in "Turning the Power Off" (P48) to turn off the terminal, then turn over the terminal, remove the battery pack, then remove or insert the UIM.P43 Inserting To insert the UIM, close the FOMA terminal and hold it with both hands. Insert the UIM in the direction of the arrow with the IC Removing To remove the UIM, close the FOMA terminal and hold it with both hands. Slide the UIM in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the FOMA Card Slot Note Do not misplace the removed UIM. Security Code for the UIM You can assign two security codes, "PIN1 code" and "PIN2 code", to the UIM.P115 Note Do not use excessive force inserting the UIM to avoid damaging it. Before Using the Handset 39 In this section, the UIM that was inserted when the data or files were obtained is called "your UIM" and any other UIM is

"another UIM". UIM Security Function The UIM security function UIM Operation Restriction is embedded in the FOMA terminal as a security function to protect your data and files. When you download data or files from sites or acquire data attached to mail with the UIM inserted into the FOMA terminal, the UIM operational restriction function is automatically set to these data or files. Data or files with the UIM operational restriction function set are accessible only when the same UIM used when downloading data or files is inserted. The following data/files are restricted:

- File attached to i-mode mail

- MessageR/F with file (melodies/images) attached

- Screen memo

- Images inserted in Deco-mail or signature

- i-motion

- i-pli (including i-pli Stand-by display)

- Image (including animation and Flash movie)

- Chaku-UtaR/Chaku-Uta FullR song

- Melody

- Mail template with motion-restricted data

- Music&Video Channel program

* "Chaku-Uta" is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Inc. 40 Before Using the Handset Note Even if you set the data/file restricted with this function for the Stand-by display wallpaper, etc., the setting will revert to the default if another UIM is inserted or if no UIM is inserted. When you re-insert your UIM, the setting will revert to the original setting you configured. Pre-installed i-ppli programs are not restricted. However, if you delete an i-ppli and then download it, the newlydownloaded i-ppli will be restricted. The following data/files are not restricted with this function:

- Data/files obtained by using Infrared communication, or data communications

- Images captured/edited using your FOMA terminal Even if a different UIM from the time when data/files were obtained is inserted, the data/files restricted with this function can be deleted. Settings that are saved on the UIM are as follows:

- Phone number display - SMS Center settings

- PIN1 and PIN2 codes - Select language

- SMS Validity Period If the UIM is inserted into another i-Channel compatible terminal, the ticker will not appear. The latest information is downloaded and a ticker is shown after you press Q in Stand-by and obtain the channel list. UIM Types Please be aware that the UIM (Blue) has different functions from the UIM (Green/White) as follows:

Function UIM (Blue) UIM (Green/

White) Up to 26 digits Refer ence P83 Up to 20 digits Not available Available Not available Available P322 P314 The number of digits of a phone number that can be saved to the UIM Phonebook WORLD WING Service dialing WORLD WING WORLD WING is DOCOMO's FOMA international roaming service that provides telephone and other types of mobile communications. It allows the subscriber to use the same phone number overseas as in Japan by inserting a UIM(green/white) into a FOMA terminal or a mobile phone designed for overseas use. If you subscribed to the FOMA service after September 1, 2005, a separate subscription is not required. However, if you unsubscribed to the FOMA service subscription or canceled the service, a separate subscription is required. If you initially subscribed to the FOMA service before August 31, 2005 and have not subscribed to

"WORLD WING", a separate subscription is required. This service is not available with some billing plans. If your UIM (green/white) is lost or stolen overseas, contact DOCOMO immediately and temporarily suspend your subscription. For contact information, see "docomo Information Center" on the back of this manual. Call and communication charges after the terminal was lost or stolen are still charged to you. Before Using the Handset 41 Inserting/Removing the Battery Pack Turn off the terminal and hold it closed in your hand. Align the tabs for the rear cover and while pushing it in the direction of 1, slide it in the direction of 2 and push until it clicks to its place. Inserting While pushing the rear cover in the direction of 1, slide the cover in the direction of 2. Lift the cover as shown by 3 Align the metal contacts of the battery pack and the FOMA terminal, attach the battery pack in the direction of 1, and insert the battery pack in the direction of 2 When mounting the battery pack, press it underneath the tab and push it down. 42 Before Using the Handset Note The UIM that is not properly inserted may be damaged by forcibly inserting the battery pack. Do not use excessive force inserting the battery pack to avoid damaging the FOMA terminal charging terminals. Removing While pushing the rear cover in the direction of 1, slide the cover in the direction of 2. Lift the cover as shown by 3 Press down the battery pack in the direction of 1, lift the tab in the direction of 2, and remove in the direction of 3 Charging the FOMA Terminal Use the AC adapter (optional), or DC adapter (optional) designed for the terminal to charge the FOMA terminal. Also use the exclusive battery pack L02 for the FOMA terminal. Desktop Holder L02 (optional) is also available to use. Battery pack lifetime Battery packs are consumables. As they are repeatedly recharged, the available usage time will gradually become shorter. When the usage time after each recharging becomes approximately half of the time for a new battery pack, it is recommended that the current battery pack be replaced with a new one as soon as possible. It is normal for the battery pack to swell towards the end of its operational lifetime. If an i-ppli or video phone is used for long periods of time while the battery pack is being charged, the battery pack lifetime may be shortened. To protect the environmental, be sure to bring the exhausted battery pack to an NTT DOCOMO store, sales agent, or recycle shop. Before Using the Handset 43 Charging For details, refer to the instruction manuals for the FOMA AC Adapter 01/02(optional), FOMA Overseas/Domestic AC Adapter 01 (optional) , FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 (optional) or Desktop Holder L02 (optional). The FOMA AC Adapter 01 can be used only for AC100V. The

"FOMA AC Adapter 02" and "FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use" support from AC100V to 240V. The adapter plug shape is designed for domestic use in Japan

(for AC100V). When you use an AC adapter that allows from 100V to 240V (with automatic voltage adjuster) overseas, a country-tailored plug adapter may still be required. Do not charge the terminal with a transformer designed for overseas trips. Insert the battery pack into the FOMA terminal before charging the battery pack with the AC or DC adapter. The battery pack cannot be charged unless it is in the terminal. Approximate battery pack usage time The battery pack usage time may vary depending on the operating environment and the battery pack deterioration. Network Network mode RContinuous Standby Time Continuous Call Time FOMA/3G 3G Auto GSM Auto Voice call:

Approx. 150 minutes Video call:

Approx. 100 Moving: Approx. 220 hours Moving: Approx. 200 hours Stationary:

Approx. 300 hours minutes Stationary: Approx. Voice call: Approx. 300 hours 170 minutes Continuous call time is approximate duration of time to be spent for talking with normal radio wave reception level. Plug/Unplug the connector slowly and securely while avoiding Continuous standby time is approximate duration of battery time excess force. If you start charging the terminal a fully drained battery pack, the terminal may not be turned on for a while. During a long video call while the terminal is being charged, the inside of the FOMA terminal may become hot and charging may stop. If this happens, try charging again later. Do not charge the battery pack for a long time (several days) with the terminal power turned on. If the FOMA terminal is left with the power turned on for a long time with the charger connected, after charging completes, the charger stops charging and the terminal uses battery power, so battery can become discharged while connected to the charger and the low battery alert may come quickly. In this case, recharge the battery pack properly. Before recharging the battery pack, disconnect the AC Adapter, DC Adapter or Desktop Holder from the terminal and reconnect it. 44 Before Using the Handset while in motion. Depending on the battery level, set functions, operating environment such as ambient temperature, or radio wave reception level (Poor or weak radio wave reception level), battery life can reduced to half. When i-mode communications are performed, the call (communication)/standby time becomes shorter. Even if you do not make calls or perform i-mode communications, the call (communication)/standby time becomes short if you compose i-mode mail, start an i-ppli or an i-ppli Standby display, perform data communications or multiaccess, use the camera, or playback videos or music. Depending on network conditions at your location, time may be shorter than the published values. Continuous standby time in a stationary state is the average usage time in a stationary state with normal radio wave reception level while the terminal is closed. Continuous standby time in motion is the average usage time in a state combining "standstill", "in motion" and "out of service area" in an area with normal radio wave reception level while the terminal is closed. Depending on the battery pack recharge level, set functions, operating environment such as ambient temperature, or radio wave reception level (Poor or weak radio wave reception level), battery life can reduced to half. Estimated battery pack charging time FOMA AC adapter 01/02 FOMA DC adapter 01/02 Approx. 180 minutes Approx. 180 minutes The estimated charging time is the duration of time to charge the battery pack with the FOMA terminal turned off and with a fully drained battery pack. Charging takes longer with the FOMA terminal turned on.r Charging with the AC Adapter 1 Open the External connector terminal cover (1) and flip it over (2) 2 Insert the connector of the AC adapter, with the inscribed arrow side up, straight into the FOMA terminal External connector 3 Connect the AC Adapter plug to an electric outlet Charging starts, and the illumination lights. Power Plug AC100V Outlet 4 After charging completes, pull the AC adapter connector straight out while pressing the release buttons When charging completes, the illumination turns off. Make sure the AC Adapter connector is facing the correct side up. Forcibly trying to remove the adaptor could damage the terminal. Charging using Desktop Holder (optional) 1 Insert the power plug of AC Adapter into an outlet Power Plug AC100V Outlet Before Using the Handset 45 2 Make sure the side with AC Adapter connector

( Desktop Holder side) symbol faced up and insert horizontally into the Desktop Holder. 3 Insert a FOMA terminal into the Desktop Holder along the direction of (1). Charging starts and the illumination turns to red. Pay attention not to be caught by strap. 5 Hold the Desktop Holder and horizontally pull the AC Adapter connector (Desktop Holder side) while pressing the release button on the connector. Make sure to check the face of AC Adapter and insert/remove horizontally. DC adapter (optional) The DC adapter supplies power to the FOMA terminal from a 12V/24V cigarette lighter socket of a car. For details, please see the FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 instruction manual. Note You can set whether to light the Display backlight during charging.P107 During charging, the battery level icon changes in the order of (Blue) in an animation display, and after charging completes, up.

(Blue) lights

<AC Adapter/DC Adapter>

Use the adapter with the specified power source and voltage. Failing to do so may result in fire or malfunction.

<DC Adapter>

The DC adapter is exclusively for a negative ground vehicle (12V/24V). A fuse (2A) is a consumable item. Purchase a replacement fuse from any car parts shop. Do not charge while the car engine is not running to avoid draining the car battery. 4 After finishing charging, remove the FOMA terminal from Desktop Holder After charging finishes, illumination will turn off. 46 Before Using the Handset Battery Level Checking the Battery Level An icon indicating the approximate battery level is displayed at the top of the screen.

(Blue): The battery is full.

(Blue): The battery is getting low.

(Red): The battery is almost completely exhausted. Charge the battery.

(Red): The battery is almost completely exhausted. The terminal will turn itself off in a moment. Charge the battery. Note When an icon indicating battery level is

(Red) or

(Red), the camera and infrared communication are unavailable. When the color of the icon that indicates battery level

(Blue) and the Music player is started, is other than the warning screen indicating the low battery level appears. (This may not appear when the battery level is Blue). Checking Battery Level with the Sound and Display The approximate battery level can be checked through display and sounds 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Others" ] "Battery level"

A warning appears, and a tone indicating the remaining power sounds. The image of the battery level disappears in approximately 3 seconds. Three beeps : The battery is full. Two beeps One beep

: The battery is getting low.

: The battery is almost completely exhaused. Charge the battery. Note When "Keypad tone" is set to "Silent" or "Manner mode" is activated, you will not hear the beep. When the battery pack is running out A warning message indicating that the battery level is low and the battery needs to be charged appears, and the beep tone sounds. (Depending on the settings, the tone may not sound.) The (Red) at the top the screen blinks. After a little while, the terminal turns itself off automatically. Before Using the Handset 47 Power On/Off Turning the Terminal On or Off Turning the Power On 1 When the terminal power is turned off, P (hold down for 2 + Seconds) After the wakeup screen is displayed, the Stand-by display is displayed. Stand-by Screen Note A warning to insert the UIM appears if the UIM is not inserted, or if the UIM is malfunctioning. A call may be disconnected even if the terminal is not in motion and is displayed. Setting Date and TimeP49 Sending Caller IDP50 Changing the Security CodeP116 When the "PIN1 code request" is set to "ON"

The PIN1 code entry screen opens. After the correct PIN1 (P115) code is entered, the Wakeup screen and then the Stand-by display appears. You can make emergency calls (to 110, 119, or 118) even when the PIN1 entry screen is open.P116 When the "Lock all" is set to "ON"

The Security Code is required. When "Out of service area" is displayed at the top of the screen The terminal is out of the service area or in a poor signal area. Move to a location where the icon indicating the signal strength appears. The signal strength is indicated in 4 levels as follows:

Strong Weak Confirm the Welcome mail

"Welcome mail"is pre-saved. Press C repeatedly, the mail is displayed. Or follow the instruction in "Displaying Received Mail" (p.148), the mail is displayed."

Turning the Power Off 1 When the terminal power is turned on, P (for 2+

seconds) in Stand-by The Exit screen opens and the power is turned off. 48 48 Before Using the Handset Before Using the Handset Set date&time Setting the Date and Time You can set to update the time automatically. The Local time zone, Daylight Saving and Date&Time can also be set. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ]

"Date&Time" ] "Set Date&Time"

Date and Time Settings Screen 2 Perform the following operations

[Auto time adjust]

Set whether to update the time on the FOMA terminal based on the time information from the network. ON OFF The date and time are updated automatically. Auto update will not be performed.

[Local time zone]*

Set the time zone for the current date and time. For selecting a country or city from the country/city name list by pressing C

[List], press M [Prev.] or I [Next] to switch the list by page.

[Daylight saving]*

Set whether to use Daylight savings time.

[Set date/time]*

You can manually set the date and time. To set the date, use J to move the cursor to the place to change the date and enter the date with the dial keys (to set the date on the calendar screen, press C [Select] in the date entry field ). Operations on the calendar screenP271 To set the time, use J to move the cursor to the value to change, enter the time with dial keys, and switch between "AM"

and "PM" with C (pressing C in the time entry field opens the time settings screen on which you can enter a time using dial keys and H). Depending on the settings in "Date&Time format" (P111), the display format or order of the date and time may differ. You can set the value between 1980/01/01 and 2099/12/31.

* Available when "Auto time adjust" set to "OFF". 3 I [Done]

Note

<Auto time set Settings>

Time will be updated when turning the power on. Turn the power on again if the time is not updated. Time may not be updated depending on the signal strength. When using the FOMA terminal overseas, the time or time zone may not be updated or displayed depending on the network service in use. set the local time on the World Clock.P282 Time is not updated when an i-ppli is running or the UIM is not inserted. An error of a few seconds may occur. Before Using the Handset 49 Caller ID notification Sending the Caller ID Own number Viewing Your Own Number You can set to show/hide your Caller ID to the network in advance. Your Caller ID (phone number) is valuable information. Be cautious about sending your Caller ID Caller ID notification cannot be set when "Out of service area" is displayed. 1 M [Menu] ] (Service) ] "Caller ID notification"

2 Perform the following operation

[Activate/Deactivate]

Set to show/hide the Caller ID.

[Check setting]

Check the status of the current setting. Note Your Caller ID is displayed only if the other party's phone is capable of displaying it. You can set the Caller ID notification for each dialed call. P61 You can view your own phone number (My Number) saved in the UIM. 1 M [Menu] ] (Own number) To view the saved detailed information Pressing C [Detail] and entering the security code on the own number screen open the own number detail screen. You can also save items other than the own number. P279 If you have saved a phone number other than your own number, mail address, or URL, you can make a call, create i-mode Mail, or connect to a site by moving the cursor to the item and pressing I. Own number screen 50 Before Using the Handset Voice/Video calls Using the Phone / Video Phone Video calls Making Voice/Video calls Using Redial/Received Call Logs Using the Recent Calls Recent calls Showing/Hiding Caller ID for Each Call 184186 Sending Touch-tone Signals Pause Making International Calls WORLD CALL Setting the Prefix to be Added to a Phone Number Prefix dial Making a Call by Specifying a Sub Address Sub Address Reconnecting automatically when a call is disconnected Reconnect Alarm Clarifying Your Voice in Noisy Locations Noise Reduction Answering a Voice/Video call Receiving Voice/Video calls Setting How to Answer Incoming Voice Calls Answer mode Ending or Holding Calls by Closing the FOMA Terminal Close settings 52 52 57 61 61 62 62 65 66 66 66 67 69 70 70 70 71 71 Adjusting the Volume during a Call Receiver volume Adjusting the Ring Volume Incoming call volume 70 When You are Unable to Answer a Voice/Video call Placing a Call on Hold When You Cannot Answer a Call ImmediatelyOn hold Setting the "On Hold Tone" On hold tone Setting the Holding Tone Holding tone Using Public Mode (Drive Mode) Public Mode (Drive Mode) Using Public Mode (Power Off) Public Mode (Power OFF) Checking Missed Calls Missed Call Recording a Voice Message from a Caller When You Cannot Answer a CallRecord Message Recording a Message from a Caller If You Cannot Answer the Call While Ringing Quick Record Message Video call Settings Setting the Image to Send to the Other Party Changing the Video call Settings Video phone settings 72 73 75 73 75 71 76 51 Video calls The Videophone call can be used with a mobile phone that supports DOCOMO's Videophone call service. Because this FOMA terminal does not have an inside camera, so the images sending to the others will be the pictures or images captured by the out side camera. DOCOMO's Video call service complies with "ISO 3GPP*1 standardized 3G-324M*2". DOCOMO's Video calls cannot connect with handsets that support a different form of Video call.

*1 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) is the local standardization organization established for the development of common technical specifications related to 3rd Generation Mobile Communication Systems

(IMT- 2000).

*2 3G-324M is the international standard of 3rd Generation Mobile Video Phone. 64K (64kbps) and 32K (32kbps) are the two types of communication speed when making a video call. Video calls are not available by 32K for this FOMA terminal. This FOMA terminal does not support remote monitoring. 4 Settings icons Zoom AdjustmentP56 Handsfree ON/OFF State DisplayP53 Picture mode (Camera image/Substitute image) P56 Making Voice/Video calls 1 Enter a phone number Up to 80 digits can be entered. However, up to 32 digits can be displayed. Enter a number from "0" to "99" to view the Phonebook entry of the corresponding memory number. Also, entering a number with 3 digits or more finds phone numbers containing the number from the Phonebook.P93 Start from the area code even for a local call. Phone number entry screen C [Save]: Add a new or extra phone number to the Phonebook.P85 I [Mail]: Create i-mode mail to the phone number that you entered.P131 Components of Video call Screen 1 Main window The other party's image appears by default. 2 Sub window Your image appears by default. 3 Call duration Displayed in the format of Minutes: Seconds. 1 2 3 4 52 Voice/Video calls 2 To make a voice call A To make a Video call M [Menu] ] "Video phone call"

A ringback tone sounds from the earpiece, and the

"Calling..." dialing screen is displayed until the other party answers the call. C [Spk on/Spk off]:

Toggle Hands-free ON or OFF. Voice call screen Video call screen Pressing a dial key/*/# during a call allows you to send touch-tone signals. During a voice call During a voice call, screen will display setting status with icons.

/ : Hand free call ON / OFF

/ : Mute enable / Mute disable P55 to : Receive call volume P70 During a Video call I [Substitute image/Camera image]: Switch the image to send between the alternate image and the camera image. 3 To terminate the call P Note If you hear the voice guidance for a Caller ID Request, make the call again sending Caller ID. You cannot switch between a voice/Video call during a call using this FOMA terminal. Closing the FOMA terminal during a call terminates the call when the "Close setting" is set to "End the call", and holds the call when it is set to "On hold". However, if the flat-plug earphone/microphone

(optional) is connected, closing the FOMA terminal will not terminate the call or place the call on hold. The low battery alert sounds from the Earpiece if the battery becomes low during a call. You can continue the call; however, the call will be terminated momentarily when the terminal power is automatically turned off. This FOMA terminal does not support hands-free devices (such as In-car hands-free kit 01) via a USB connection.

<Video calls>

A call cannot be connected if you make a Video call to a phone without Video call capabilities, or if the other party's terminal is out of service area or turned off. If you make a Video call to a phone that doesn't support Video calls, and you have set "Auto redial as voice" to "ON", the call will be disconnected before the connection is established, and the terminal automatically redials the number as a voice call. However, if the other party uses an ISDN 64k connection, or a video phone that does not support the 3G-324M standard (as of March 2009), or you dialed a wrong number, the above action may not be taken. Communication charges may apply. Voice/Video calls 53

<Video calls>

If you make a Video call to an emergency number such as "110", "119" or "118", a voice call will be made automatically. Incoming i-mode mail or Message R/F during a Video call is stored at the i-mode Center. An SMS can be received even during a Video call. There is a digital call charge for sending the Substitute Image. To correct an entered phone number To delete an entered digit, use L ] K to move the cursor to the right of the digit and press Q. To add a digit, use L ] K to move the cursor to the position and enter the digit with a dial key. Screen Display during Dialing The other party's name is displayed if the other party's phone number is saved in the Phonebook. If a Video call could not be made The following messages appear if a Video call could not be made (depending on the other party's mobile phone model or subscribed network services, the displayed messages may not describe the actual situation). Message Check number, then redial. Busy Busy with packet transmission Out of service area/power off Set caller ID to ON Your call is being forwarded Redial using voice call Upper limit has been exceeded. Connection failed Please make your call from the i-mode web page Connection failed Description The phone number is not valid. The other party is on a call (this message may appear when the other party's terminal is performing packet communication depending on the terminal). The other party is in packet communication. The other party's terminal is either out of the service area or turned off. The Caller ID was not sent (when the call is made to the number for Visualnet , etc.). The call is being forwarded. The Call forwarding service is activated, and the forwarding destination does not support Video calls. Your usage fees have exceeded the limit of your plan (Type limit or Family wide limit). The Video call was not dialed from the official i-mode site Information Provider

(when the call is made to V-live). Set the "Caller ID notification" to "Notify"

and redial. This message may appear for other reasons, as well. 54 Voice/Video calls Sub Menu on the Phone Number Entry Screen Voice Call Screen Sub Menu 1 Phone number entry screen (P52)

] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations

[Video phone call]

Make a Video call.

[Caller ID]

Set whether the other party receives your Caller ID when you make a call.P61

[Int. call]

After selecting the country code to make a call, "009130010"

(WORLD CALL) and the country code will be inserted at the beginning of the phone number.P62

[Select prefix]

Add the prefix number at the beginning of the entered phone number. You can add a prefix number only one time.P63

[Multi number]

If you subscribe to Multi number, select the number to use when making a call.P315

[Compose mail]

Create new i-mode mail to the entered phone number.P131

[Add to phonebook]

Add an entry to the Phonebook.P84

[Search phonebook]

Search the Phonebook entry with the number already entered P87 1 Voice call screen (P53) ] M [Menu] ]

Perform the following operations

[New call]*1 Place the active call on hold, and dial another party.

[End active call]

Disconnect the call.

[Hold Place the active call on hold. To cancel, press A or C

[Release].

[Mute]

Enable or disable to mute your voice on the other party's terminal.

[Send my info.]

Create i-mode mail with own number entered in the message text. P131

[Search phonebook]*2 Search for a Phonebook entry.P87

*1 This is not available if you do not subscribe to the Call Waiting service.

*2 This is not available if you make a call using Redial or Received calls, or the Phonebook is accessed. To use this function, terminate applicable applications from the task list screen.P264 Voice/Video calls 55

[Screen size]

Set the display size of the main window.

[Visual preference]

Set the image quality sent to the other party. Prefer img qual Set priority to the image quality. This option Normal is effective when there is little movement. Set the sent video quality and motion to standard. Prefer motion spd Set priority to motion for sent images. This option is effective when there is a lot of movement.

[Search phonebook]*

Search for a Phonebook entry. P87

[Own number]

Display your phone number (Own number).

* This is not available if you make a call using Redial or Received calls, or the Phonebook is accessed. To use this function, terminate applicable applications from the task list screen. P264 Sub Menu During a Video call 1 Video call screen (P53) ] M [Menu] ]

Perform the following operations

[End call]

Disconnect the call.

[Hold Place the active call on hold. To cancel, press C [Camera] or I

[Alternate image].

[Camera image/Substitute image]

Switch the image to send between the alternate image and the camera image.

[Camera set]

Configure the camera for Video calls. Press J to select an icon. After setting, press M [Close]. Zoom Brightness Adjust the brightness of the camera image Zoom the camera image (x1 / x2).

(High / Standard /Low). Night mode Set this when using the camera in a dark place, etc.

[Videophone set]

You can set the display and lighting for Video calls. After setting, press I [Done]. Display settings Other-Me Display the other party's image on the main window and your image on the sub window. Me-Other Display your image on the main window and the other party's image on the sub window. Other only Display only the other party's image. Me only Display only your image. Light Always on Terminal setting In accord with the "Backlight" settings. Always stays on during a call. P107 56 Voice/Video calls Using Redial/Received Call Logs Redial and the Received call logs can be used to make phone calls. Also, the Recent calls (sent and received) can be used to make calls. Redial Calling the Same Party Again Redial maintains a list of the last 30 voice or Video calls. The phone number and the calling date and time are stored in the call logs. If more than 30 calls are made, the most recent 30 calls are retained 1 Stand-by display ] R 1 The name saved in the Phonebook If the caller's name is not saved in Phonebook, the phone number will be displayed. 2 Outgoing phone call type Dialing a voice call Dialing a Video call 1 2 3 3 The other party's phone Redial list screen number If the caller's phone number is not saved in the Phonebook,

"Unregistered" will be displayed. 4 Dialing an international call Calling overseas from Japan Calling from overseas during international roaming Making an international call from overseas during international roaming 5 Which number of Multi Number is used for dialing*

Basic number/Additional number 1/Additional

number 2

* Appears if you subscribe to the Multi number service. 6 Call date and time 2 Move the cursor to the number to redial ] C 1 Outgoing phone call type 2 The name saved in the Phonebook If the number is not saved in the Phonebook,

"Unregistered" is displayed. 3 The other party's phone number 4 "Caller ID" setting when 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Redial detail 4 5 6 dialing Appears when you make a call with the Caller ID (P55) set to "Notify". screen 5 Which number of Multi Number is used for dialing*

The number of Multi number used to dial is displayed as the name registered in "Number setting" (P315).

* : Appears if you subscribe to the Multi number service. 6 Call date and time 7 Call duration 8 Outgoing international call Calling overseas from Japan Calling from overseas during international roaming Making an international call from overseas during international roaming 3 To make a voice call A To make a Video call M [Menu] ] "Video phone call"

Voice/Video calls 57 Note You can make a voice call by selecting an entry on the Dialed Calls list screen and pressing A. You can also make a Video call if you select M [Menu]

] "Video phone call". If the same phone number is saved repeatedly in the Phonebook, the name found first in the Reading search is displayed. A call dialed with "184" or "186" will be recorded as a different Redial entry. Press I [Mail] on the Redial list screen / Redial detail screen, to create i-mode mail to the phone number on the selected Redial entry. Redial List Screen / Redial Detail Screen Sub Menu 1 The Redial list screen (P57)/Redial detail screen (P57)

] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations

[Video phone call]

Make a Video call.

[Compose mail]

Create i-mode mail to the phone number on the Redial screen. P131

[Add to phonebook]

Add a number to a Phonebook entry from the redial list.P84

[Customize call]

You can change the phone number of the redial list (P57) and make a call to the number.

[Change list]*

Switch logs to display. Recent call Recent mail Display the recent mail list screen.P161 Received Calls Display the received call log list screen.P59 Received Mail Display the received mail log list screen.P161 Sent Mail

[Delete]

Delete the selected/displayed redial entry.

[Delete all]*

Delete all redial entries. Display the sent mail log list screen.P161 Display the recent call list screen.P61

* Not displayed on the Detail screen. 58 Voice/Video calls Received Calls Using the Received Call Log The Received call log maintains a list of the last 30 incoming calls and Video calls. Phone numbers and received dates/times are stored in a call log. If there have been more than 30 calls received, the most recent 30 calls are retained. 1 Stand-by display ] L 1 The caller's name saved in the Phonebook If the caller's name is not saved, the phone number will be displayed. If the caller did not send the Caller ID, the reason for No Caller ID is displayed. 2 Incoming phone call type Answered /Missed voice call (including Rejected calls) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Received calls list screen Answered /Missed Video call (including Rejected calls) 3 The other party's phone number 4 Incoming international call Incoming international call from overseas Calling from overseas during international roaming Incoming international call from overseas during international roaming 5 Which number of Multi Number is used for dialing*

The number of Multi number to which the call arrived is displayed as the name registered in "Number settings".

* : Appears if you subscribe to the Multi number service. 6 Received Date and Time 2 Move the cursor to a log entry ] R [View]

1 The name saved in the Phonebook If the phone number is not in the Phonebook,

"Unregistered" is displayed, and if the Caller ID was not received, "User unset" is displayed. 2 Incoming phone call type 1 2 3 4 5 6 Answered/Missed voice call (including Rejected calls) Answered/Missed 7 Redial detail screen videophone call (including Rejected calls) 3 The other party's phone number 4 Incoming international call Incoming international call from overseas Calling from overseas during international roaming Incoming international call from overseas during international roaming 5 Which number of Multi Number is used for dialing*

The number of Multi number to which the call arrived is displayed as the name registered in "Number settings"

(P315).

* : Appears if you subscribe to the Multi number service. 6 Received Date and Time 3 To make a voice call A To make a Video call M [Menu] ] "Video phone call"

Voice/Video calls 59 Note You can make a voice call by selecting an entry on the Received calls detail screen and pressing A. You can also make a Video call by selecting M

[Menu]

] "Video phone call". The reason for no Caller ID is displayed in the log entry of the call without Caller ID.P124 If the same phone number is saved repeatedly in the Phonebook, the name found first in the Reading search is displayed. The phone number dialed to make a dial-in call may be displayed differently from the actual number in the received call log entry. Press I [Mail] on the Received call list/detail screen, to create i-mode mail to the phone number in the selected received call log entry. Sub Menu of the Received Calls List/Detail Screen 1 The Received call list screen (P59)/Received call detail screen (P59)

] M [Menu] ] Performs the following operations

[Video phone call]

Make a Video call.

[Compose mail]

Create i-mode mail to the phone number on the Received calls screen.P131

[Add to phonebook]

Add a number to the phonebook from the Received calls.P84

[Customize call]

You can change the phone number of the Received calls list

(P57) and make a call to the number.

[Change list]*

Switch logs to display. Recent call Display the recent mail list screen.P61 Recent mail Display the recent call list screen.P161 Received Mail Display the received mail log list screen. P57 Display the redial list screenP161 Display the sent mail log list screen.P161 Redial Sent Mail

[Delete]

Delete the selected/displayed Received calls entry.

[Delete all]*

Delete all Received Calls entries.

* Not displayed on the Detail screen. 60 Voice/Video calls Recent calls Using the Recent Calls Up to 60 incoming and outgoing calls can be recorded in

"Recent call log". If there have been more than 60 calls recorded, the most recent 60 calls are retained 1 Stand-by display ] A For subsequent steps and the description of screen components, see "Redial" (P57) and "Received calls" (P59) sections. Note The sub menu of the Recent call list screen/detail screen is the same as the one of the Redial and Received call list screen/detail screen.P58P60 184186 Showing/Hiding Caller ID for Each Call There are 2 ways to show/hide the Caller ID for each call:

adding "184"/"186", or using the sub menu on the Phone number entry screen. Showing/Hiding the Caller ID by Adding 184/186 1 Enter "184" (Do not notify)/"186" (Notify) ]

Enter the phone number 2 To make a voice call A To make a Video call M [Menu] ] "Video call"

Showing/Hiding the Caller ID Using the Sub Example: Using the Sub menu of the Phone number entry screen

] "Not notify"/"Notify"/"Cancel"

1 Enter the phone number ] M [Menu] ] "Caller ID"

2 To make a voice call A To make a Video call M [Menu] ] "Video phone call"

Note You can set to show/hide the Caller ID to the network in advance. P312 Voice/Video calls 61 Pause Sending Touch-tone Signals Enter "P" and a number after the phone number and make a voice call to send a push signal (DTMF) for the number after "P". This is useful when you use, for example, online ticket reservation or balance inquiry services. The signal may not be received depending on the device on the receiving side. 1 Enter the phone number ] Press * 3 times and enter "P" ] Enter the number to send ] A After the call is connected, the number after "P" is displayed. The displayed number is send by pressing A. WORLD CALL Making International Calls WORLD CALL is an international calling service available on DOCOMO mobile phones. FOMA service subscribers are also signed up for WORLD CALL at the time of initial subscription (except subscribers explicitly declining this service). This service is available in approximately 240 countries and regions around the world. Charges for "WORLD CALL" are added to the monthly FOMA service call charges. No initial fee and no fixed monthly charges apply. This service is not available with some billing plans. Even if the Caller ID notification is set, the Caller ID may not be notified or phone number is not displayed correctly, depending on the telecommunication carrier. In this case, you cannot make a call using the Received calls. For details on WORLD CALL, contact the "docomo Information Center" shown at the back of this manual. When using international carriers other than DOCOMO, please contact the carrier directly. Setting Country code: Up to 50 Country codes necessary to make an international call can be saved. Setting International prefix dial: Up to 1 numbers (prefixes) to be added to the beginning of the phone number. Making an international call (including to Japan) selecting registered Country code :Register frequently used country names and country codes in the "Country code list" in

"International call" to make a call quickly. If an overseas party uses the terminal having video call function of telecommunication carrier supporting video calls of FOMA overseas, you can make an International Video call to that party by pressing M [Menu] ] Select

"Video phone call" after the following dialing procedures. For information on the countries where connection can be made and telecommunications carriers, visit the DOCOMO website. The other party's image displayed on the FOMA terminal may blur, and the call may not be connected depending on the other party's terminal. Enter the Phone Number and Make an International Call Enter the number in the following order. 1 "010-Country code- Area Code

(City Code) - Phone Number"

62 Voice/Video calls If the Area Code (City Code) starts with "", remove "0". (In a few countries, like Italy, "0" must not be removed.). An international call can be made by entering "009130-

010-Country code - Area code (City code) - other party's phone number. To make an international Video call M [Menu] and then select ] "Video phone call"

3 Select a dialing method 2 A To make an international Video call M [Menu] and then select ] "Video phone call"

Making an International Call Using "+"

Enter "+" at the beginning of a phone number and dial to replace "+" with an international access code automatically. The WORLD CALL (009130010) is set to be added automatically by default.P63 1 Press 0 (for 1+ seconds) to enter "+" ] Enter

"Country Code - Area Code (City Code) - Phone Number"

You can also press * twice to input "+". If the Area Code (City Code) starts with "", remove "0". (In a few countries, like Italy, "0" must not be removed.) 2 A International callMake a call after converting "+" into an international access code. Original numberMake a call without converting "+" into an international access code. CancelCancel dialing. Note This option is available only inside the FOMA network service area. If the phone number starts with "+81", "+" will not be converted into the International Access Code. Making an International Call Adding International Access Code You can select an international access code from the sub menu and add it to the phone number. 1 Enter "Country code - Area code (City code) - other party's phone number"

If the Area Code (City Code) starts with "0", remove "0".

(In a few countries, like Italy, "0" must not be removed). 2 M [Menu] ] "Select prefix" ] Select an international access code The selected international access code is inserted at the beginning of the entered phone number. 3 A To make an international Video call M [Menu] and then select ] "Video phone call"

Dialed call confirmation screen Note By default, WORLD CALL (009130010) is registered to "Prefix1". P65 Voice/Video calls 63 Making an International Call Easily The International Call settings can be changed. Even if the Caller ID notification is set, the Caller ID may not be notified or phone number is not displayed correctly, depending on the telecommunication carrier. In this case, you cannot make a call using the Received calls. Setting to Add the International Access Code Automatically <Auto assist setting>

You can set whether to add an international access code automatically instead of "+" when you make a call by entering "+" at the beginning of the phone number. 1 M [Menu] ]

(Settings) ] "International dial"

] "Auto assist setting" ] "Auto"/"OFF "

AutoConvert "+" automatically to the number specified in

[IDD prefix code]

Enters the International Dial number used in the Auto Assist Settings. 3 I [Done]

Setting Auto Assist of Country Code

<Auto international dial>

Set whether to automatically replace leading "0", if entered, of a phone number with "+ Country code" during international roaming. Also, you can specify the Country code to be added automatically. 1 M [Menu] ]

(Settings) ]

"International dial"

] "Auto international dial" ] Perform the following operations the IDD prefix setting. None"+" will not be coverted. Setting International Access Codes

<International Prefix Settings>

When "Auto assist setting" is set to "Auto", specify the international access code to be added automatically.

(Settings) ] "International dial"

] "IDD prefix setting"

1 M [Menu] ]

2 Perform the following operation

[IDD prefix name]

Enter the International Dial name used in the Auto Assist Settings. 64 Voice/Video calls

[Auto international dial]

Set whether to add a Country code automatically.

[Target country]

Set a Country code to add. 2 I [Done]

Registering a Country Code <Country code list>

Up to 50 Country codes necessary to make an international call can be saved. 1 M [Menu] ]

(Settings) ]

"International dial" ] "Country code list"

Country code list screen 2 M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations C [Edit: Edit the selected county code.

[Country]

Register a name of the Country code. Up to 7 full-pitch or 14 halfpitch characters can be entered.

[Country code]

5 Up to 5 digits can be entered. 3 I [Done]

Sub menu of the "Country code list" screen 1 "Country code list" screen (P65) ] M [Menu]

] Perform the following operations

[Add new]

Go to Step 2 (P65) in "Registering Country Codes "<Country Code>" here.".

[Edit]

Edit the selected country code. Go to Step 2 (P65) in

"Registering Country Codes "<Country Code>" here.".

[Delete]

Delete the selected country code.

[Delete all]

Delete all country codes. Note

<Edit>

You can edit the pre-installed country codes.

<Delete>

You cannot delete the country code that is set to be added automatically in "Auto international dial" (P64). Prefix dial Setting the Prefix to be Added to a Phone Number Up to 3 numbers (prefixes) to be added to the beginning of the phone number such as an international access code,

"184", or "186 can be saved. 1 M [Menu] ]

] "Prefix dial"

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/Dialing"

Voice/Video calls 65 2 Select a Prefix entry field ] Enter the Number

] I [Done Up to ten digits can be entered as a prefix. Reconnect Alarm Reconnecting automatically when a call is disconnected Note Do not add Pauses and the such to the prefix. If they are present, the call can not be connected. You can set an alarm that keeps sounding until a voice or Video call is reconnected when the call was disconnected due to weak signals. Sub Address Making a Call by Specifying a Sub Address You can set whether digits after ":" in a phone number with a ":" are identified as a sub-address. A sub-address is used to access a specific device connected to an ISDN line or to select contents on "V live". 1 M [Menu] ]

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/Dialing"

] "Sub-address setting" ] "ON"/"OFF"

ON Identify the address after ":" as a sub-address. OFFThe address after ":" will not be identified as a subaddress. Note

":" is not identified as a delimiter of a sub-address if:

- ":" is entered at the beginning of the phone number.

- A specific number such as "184" or "186" is entered at the beginning of the phone number and ":" is entered right after it. 66 Voice/Video calls

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/Dialing" ] "Call 1 M [Menu] ]

feature" ] "Reconnect alarm" ] Select an Alarm Alarm off Set not to sound an alarm. Low alarm Set to Low alarm. High alarmSet to High alarm. Note Duration for the reconnection is available varies depending on the usage and the signal strength. If the signal suddenly worsens, the call may be disconnected without the alarm sounding. The billed airtime will continue during the reconnection attempt. If the call is disconnected, the other party will hear nothing. Noise Reduction Clarifying Your Voice in Noisy Locations Noise Reduction suppresses background noises. The other party can hear your voice clearer even in a noisy place.

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/Dialing" ] "Call 1 M [Menu] ]

feature" ] "Noise reduction" ] "ON"/"OFF"

ON Activate Noise Reduction. OFFDeactivate Noise Reduction. Receiving Voice/Video calls 1 An incoming call arrives The ring tone sounds. PPlace the call on response hold. P70 During a voice call I [Silent]: Stop the ring tone or vibration. Pressing I [Reject]

again rejects the call.

*When "Manner mode" is activated or "Incoming call vol."

Incoming voice Incoming video call screen call screen in "Original manner mode" is set to "Silent", press I

[Reject] to reject an incoming call. When a Video call is arriving C [Image]: Answer the call using the substitute image. 2 A Answer the call. C[Spk on/Spk off]: Toggle Hands-free ON or OFF. Pressing a dial key/*/# during a call allows you to send touch-tone signals. During a Video call I[Substitute image/Camera image]: Switch the image to send between the alternate image and the camera image. 3 To terminate the call, P When the caller sent the Caller ID When the caller is registered in the Phonebook, the phone number and registered name appear. When the caller did not send the Caller ID The reason for no Caller ID is displayed instead of a phone number.P124 Note The incoming call actions such as a ring tone or vibration vary depending on the settings in "Profile" or the settings saved in the Phonebook.P80, P98, P100 When "Manner mode" is activated, the ringtone does not sound. However, if "Original manner mode" is activated, the ring tone may sound depending on the settings.P102 Closing the FOMA terminal during a call terminates the call when the "Close setting" is set to "End the call", and holds the call when it is set to "On Hold". However, if the flat-plug headphone/microphone

(optional) is connected, closing the FOMA terminal will not terminate the call or place the call on hold. Voice/Video calls 67 If you subscribe to the Voice mail, Call waiting or Call forwarding service, when "Arrival call act" is set to

"Answer" and "Set in-call arrival act" is set to

"Activate", a tone during a call sounds if a call arrives during another call. If the tone sounds during a call, the network services are available. P312 However, the tone does not sound while a call is placed on response hold, an active voice call is placed on hold, or a message is being recorded (P74) because calls cannot arrive under these situations. When the Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, an incoming call is not indicated (the ringtone does not sound). Also, even if a call arrives when the display is turned off, the display backlight will not be turned on. If you subscribe to Multi number, the name registered in "Number settings" ( P315 ) appears according to the number to which the call arrived. You can enable "Set mute ring (sec.)" to delay the incoming call actions for a call made from the other party not saved in the Phonebook or without the Caller ID.P125 Use the following functions to reject incoming calls from a caller not saved in the Phonebook or from a specific caller.

- Reject unknown callerP126

- Reject on ListP121 You cannot switch between a voice/Video call during a call using this FOMA terminal. The low battery alert sounds from the Earpiece if the battery becomes low during a call. You can continue the call; however, the call will be terminated momentarily when the terminal power is automatically turned off. This FOMA terminal does not support hands-free devices (such as In-car hands-free kit 01) via a USB connection.

<Voice call>

When "Answer modeis set to "Open flip", you can answer a call by opening the terminal. If it is set to

"Any key answer", you can answer a call by pressing any dial key, * key, or # key.P69

<Video call>

When the Voice mail service is activated using a Video call, an SMS notifies you of a new message. Even if the Call forwarding service is activated, an incoming Video call is not forwarded if the forwarding destination is not a video-phone device supporting 3G-324M. Check the capabilities of the forwarding destination device before setting Call Forwarding. Incoming i-mode mail or Message R/F during a Video call is stored at the i-mode Center. An SMS can be received even during a Video call. Video calls are not available to receive by 32K

(32kbps). 68 Voice/Video calls Incoming Call Screen Sub Menu 1 Incoming call screen (P67) ] M [Menu] ]

Perform the following operations

[Voice mail]*1 Connect the incoming call to the Voice mail service center.

[Call rejection]

Reject an incoming call and hang up.

[Call forwarding]*2 Transfer an incoming call to a specified number.

*1 This is not available unless you subscribe to the Voice mail service.

*2 This is not available unless you subscribed to the Call forwarding service or you have specified a forwarding number. Answer mode Setting How to Answer Incoming Voice Calls You can set to answer an incoming voice call by opening the FOMA terminal (Open flip) or pressing a dial key (Any key answer) in addition to A.

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/Dialing" ]

"Incoming call " ] "Answer mode"

1 M [Menu] ]

2 Perform the following operation

[Open flip]

You can answer a call by opening the FOMA terminal.

[Any key answer]

You can answer a call by pressing a dial key, *, # in addition to A. SEND key only]

You can answer a call by pressing A. Voice/Video calls 69 Close settings Ending or Holding Calls by Closing the FOMA Terminal 1 M [Menu] ]

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/ Dialing" ] "Call feature" ] "Close setting" ] Select conditions when the terminal is closed End the call End the call. On Hold Mute Place the active call on hold. The call continues, however, your voice cannot be heard by the other party. Receiver volume Adjusting the Volume during a Call The Receiver volume can be adjusted in 7 levels from 1 to 7. 1 Incoming call screen (P53) ] FE F: Increase the volume. E: Decreases the volume. Note The adjusted Receiver volume will be retained after the call.

"Receiver volume" in "Volume" (P100) is also changed. 70 Voice/Video calls Incoming call volume Adjusting the Ring Volume The ring volume can be adjusted in 8 levels from 0 to 7. 1 Incoming call volume (P67) ] FE Press each of FE changes the volume. If no action is taken for approximately 2 seconds, the sound volume adjustment screen closes automatically and the volume is set. Note This is not available when Manner mode is activated.

"Incoming call" in "Volume" (P99) is also changed. On hold Placing a Call on Hold When You Cannot Answer a Call Immediately 1 Incoming call screen (P67) ] P The tone set in the "On hold tone" (P71) is played. The image set in the "Response hold image" (P76) appears for Video calls. Voice call hold Video call hold screen screen 2 When you can resume the call A or C [Release]

You can also cancel the hold on a Video call by pressing C [Camera]. If you press I [Substitute Image] to cancel the hold, the alternate image will be sent to the other party. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Call/VT/Dialing" ]

"Call feature" ] "Holding tone" ] "Hold tone 1"/

"Hold tone 2"/"Hold tone 3"

I [Play]: Play back the hold tone. To terminate a voice call/Video call Press P . Note The other party is charged even during a hold. If you subscribe to the Voice mail service/Call forwarding service, you can connect the incoming call to the Voicemail service center/forward the incoming call to the specified phone number.P306, P309 On hold tone Setting the "On Hold Tone"

You can select to play one of the 3 on-hold-tones

(guidance) to the callerwhen you place the call on response hold. 1 M [Menu] ]

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/Dialing" ]

"Incoming call" ] "On hold tone" ] "Hold tone 1"/

"Hold tone 2"/"Hold tone 3"

I [Play]: Play back the hold tone. Holding tone Setting the Holding Tone You can select one of the 3 on-hold-tones to play for the caller on hold. Public Mode (Drive Mode) Using Public Mode (Drive Mode) Public mode (Drive mode) is an automatic response service to assist in observing manners in public locations. When Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, a voice guidance is played to the caller indicating that you are driving or at a place where you cannot talk (such as on a train, bus, or in a movie theater) and cannot answer the call, and the call is disconnected. You can set or cancel Public mode (Drive mode) only in Standby (even when "Out of service area" is displayed). This option is not available during data communication. Voice mail service (*1), Call forwarding service (*1), and Caller ID request service (*2) take priority over Public mode.

*1 Voice calls with the ring time set to other than "0 Sec." the service is activated after the guidance for Public mode.

*2 If the other party sends the Caller ID, Public mode is activated. Public mode is not activated for calls you reject using Nuisance call blocking service. 1 The Stand-by display ] * more than 1 second When a call arrives, a voice guidance is played in Japanese saying that "The person you are calling is currently driving or in the area where mobile phones should not be used. Please call again later" is played. Voice/Video calls 71 When Public mode (Drive mode) is activated Even when a call arrives to your terminal, the ringtone does not sound. appears on the Stand-by display, and the call is recorded in the Received call log. A voice guidance indicating that you are driving or you are at a location where you cannot use the terminal is played to the caller, and the call is disconnected. To deactivate Public mode (Drive mode) Press * (for 1+ seconds) in Stand-by. Note appears at the top of the screen when Public mode (Drive mode) is activated. Even when Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, you can make calls as usual. If Manner mode is activated concurrently, Public mode (Drive mode) settings take precedence. Tones other than from operations (ring tones or alarms, etc.) do not sound when Public mode (Drive mode) is activated. If "Alarm", "Schedule", or "To do" alarm reaches the specified time while Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, the alarm tone does not sound and the alarm screen and illumination does not appear. The alarm setting remains and the icon on the Stand-by display is still displayed. P267 Even if mail arrives when Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, incoming mail actions such as sounding the ring tone, or vibrating the FOMA terminal will not take place. Public Mode (Power OFF) Using Public Mode (Power Off) Public mode (Power Off) is an automatic response service to assist in observing manners in public locations. When Public mode (Power Off) is set, when a call arrives while the power is turned off, a voice guidance is played to the caller indicating that you are at a place where the terminal must be turned off (such as in hospitals, in aircraft, or near priority seats on a train) and cannot answer the call, and the call is disconnected. 1 Enter ":25251" ] A Public mode (Power Off) is activated (there is no change for the Stand-by display). After Public mode (Power Off) is set, when a call arrives while the power is turned off, "The person you are calling is currently in the area where mobile phone use is prohibited and cannot answer the call. Please call again later" is played. After activating Public mode (Power Off) Public mode (Power Off) is activated until it is deactivated by dialing ":25250". Turning the power on does not deactivate the mode. Public mode (Power Off) voice guidance is played even when you are out of service area or in a place with weak signals. A voice guidance indicating that you are at a location where you must turn the terminal off is played to the caller, and the call is disconnected. To deactivate Public mode (Power Off) Enter ":25250" and press A. To confirm the setting of Public mode (Power OFF) Enter ":25259" and press A. 72 Voice/Video calls Missed Call Checking Missed Calls If you could not answer a call, the Missed call notification screen opens on the Stand-by display. The Received calls list screen can be accessed from the icon, allowing you to check the caller. 1 An incoming call terminates The Missed call icon appears on the Stand-by display. The number of the icon represents number of missed calls. Missed call icon

(The number indicates the number of calls). Stand-by 2 C]K to select The Received call list screen (P59) appears. Note After the Received call list screen opens, will disappear. You can also select seconds to clear the icon. and hold Q for 1+

Record Message Recording a Voice Message from a Caller When You Cannot Answer a Call When Record message is activated, if you cannot answer a voice call, the voice guidance is played and the caller's message is recorded. Up to 5 messages can be recorded with up to 15 seconds per message. Record message does not start when a Video call arrives. The FOMA terminal answers the call normally. Setting the Record Message 1 M [Menu] ]

2 Perform the following operation

"Record msg. settings"

C [List]: List of items is displayed.

(LifeKit) ] "Record message" ]

[Activate record msg.]

When activate Record message, set to "ON".

[To answer]*

Enter the time after a call arrives and before Record message starts between 0 and 120 seconds. Voice/Video calls 73

[Answer message]*

Select an answer message. I You can listen to the response message.

*Available when "Activate record msg." is set to "ON". 3 I [Done]

Note appears at the top of the screen when the Record Message is activated.

<Response Time>

If the set Response time is longer than the set ringing time for the Voice mail service/Call forwarding service, a network service takes precedence. If the response time is set shorter than the set "Set mute ring (sec.)" (P125), Record message starts without ringing. When a Call Arrives with Record Message Activated When a voice call arrived, the caller's voice is recorded. The set time has elapsed A call is arriving Playing a response message Recorded Recording a message A new Record message icon appears (the number indicates the number of calls) The Stand-by display opens To talk with the caller while the response message is played or a message is being recorded Press A. To play a recorded message In Stand-by, press COK] J and then select is number of items) or press U for 1+ seconds. The Record Message list screen (P75) is displayed. will disappear after the recorded message is deleted.

(number 74 Voice/Video calls Note When "" is displayed, the terminal is turned off, or

"Public mode (Drive mode)" is activated, messages cannot be recorded. If a call arrives when the Additional guidance is being played or when a message is being recorded in Record message, the call is rejected. Playing/Deleting Messages in Record Message 1 M [Menu] ]

(LifeKit] "Record message" ]

"Record msg. list"

I [Delete]: The selected recorded message is deleted. To delete all recorded messages M [Menu] on the Record Message list screen ] Select "Delete all". Record message list screen 2 Move the cursor to the recorded message ] C [Play]

The recorded message is played. C [Stop]Stop the message. QReturn to the Record Message list screen. Quick Record Message Recording a Message from a Caller If You Cannot Answer the Call While Ringing Even if Record Massage is disabled, you can record the caller's message with easy operation. 1 Incoming Call Screen (P67) ] E for 1+ seconds Caller's message will be recorded after streaming a guidance. Note If 5 messages are already recorded, "Record Message" will not start and you cannot record the caller's message. Setting the Image to Send to the Other Party Substitute image Setting the Substitute Image 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Call/VT/Dialing" ] "Video phone" ] "Substitute image" ] "Default"/"Select image"

] I [Done]

When "Select image" is selected, press D ] C [List] in the "Select file" field and then select from the images saved in "My picture" in "Data box".P239 Voice/Video calls 75

[Display setting]

Set whether the image is displayed on the main window or sub window for Video calls. Other-Me The other party's image is displayed on the main window, and your image on the sub window. Me-Other Your image is displayed on the main window, and the other party's image on the sub window. Other onlyDisplay only the other party's image. Me only Display only your image.

[Send camera image]

Set whether your camera image is sent to the other party. When "OFF" is set, the other party receives the substitute image.

[Screen size]

Set the display size of the main window.

[Visual preference]

Set the image quality sent to the other party. Prefer motion spdThe image is sent with maximized image quality. This option is effective when there is little movement. Normal Set the sent video quality and motion to standard. Prefer img qual Set priority to motion for sent images. This option is effective when there is a lot of movement. Response hold image Response hold image Setting the Response Hold Image Setting the Response Hold Image 1 M [Menu] ]

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/Dialing" ]

"Video Phone" ] "Response hold image" ] "Default"/

"Select image" ] I [Done]

When "Select image" is selected, press D ] C [List] in the

"Select file" field and then select from the images saved in

"My picture" in "Data box".P239 Holding image Setting the Holding Image 1 M [Menu] ]

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/Dialing" ]

"Video phone" ] "Holding image" ] "Default"/

"Select image" ] I [Done]

When "Select image" is selected, press D ] C [List] in the

"Select file" field and then select from the images saved in

"My picture" in "Data box".P239 Video phone settings Changing the Video call Settings

"Video phone" ] "Videophone set"

1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Call/VT/Dialing" ]

2 Perform the following operation C [List]: List of items is displayed. 76 Voice/Video calls Always stays on during a call.

[Light]

Set the talking screen's backlight level. Always on Terminal settingIn accord with the "Backlight" settings.P107

[Auto redial as voice]

You can set whether to automatically redial after switching to a voice call if the terminal of the other party does not support video calls.

[Hand-free switch]

Set whether to use Hands-free during a Video call. 3 I [Done]

Voice/Video calls 77 Phonebook Phonebook on the FOMA Terminal Saving to the FOMA Terminal Phonebook Saving to the UIM Phonebook Saving Contacts to the Phonebook from Received or Dialed Calls Saving/Editing a Group Name Making a Call from the Phonebook Search phonebook Viewing Phonebook Entries Editing a Phonebook Entry Deleting Phonebook entries Checking the Phonebook Capacity and Utilization Number of saved Phonebook entries Phonebook Settings Making a Call with the Least Number of Buttons Dialing Quick Search Displaying the Call/Mail History 80 80 83 84 85 86 88 91 92 93 93 94 95 79 Phonebook on the FOMA Terminal There are two Phonebooks: one is saved on the FOMA terminal (Phone) and the other is saved on the UIM. The following can be saved/set for each Phonebook. Item Number of Entries FOMA terminal Phonebook UIM Phonebook Up to 1000 entries*

Up to 50 Entry Details Name

(Reading) Phone Number Mail Address Group Image Other setting items 1 5 3 1 1 1 31 group 1 Secret code, Ring tone, Mail tone, etc. 11 group Not available Not available

* Depending on the saved contents, 1000 entries may not be saved. Note If you insert your UIM into another FOMA terminal, your Phonebook data is available on it. 80 Phonebook Saving to the FOMA Terminal Phonebook Note that the service counter such as a docomo shop may not be able to copy Phonebook data from your existing FOMA terminal to the new one, depending on the specifications. 1 The Stand-by display ] D (for 1+

seconds) Add to Phonebook screen (FOMA terminal) 2 Perform the following operations

[ Save to]

Select the saving location. This section explains the case where

"Terminal" is specified as the saving destination. When "UIM" is specified as the saving destination, the Add to UIM Phonebook screen is displayed. P83

[ Memory No.]

The smallest un-assigned number is allocated to a new record automatically. You can still re-allocate it to your favorite number from 000 to 999 manually.

[ Name]

Up to 16 full-pitch or 32 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using Kanji, Hiragana, Pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or Katakana.

[ Reading]

Enter or edit when necessary.Up to 32 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using Katakana, alphanumeric characters, or symbols.

[ Phone number]

Up to 26 digits can be entered.

] Enter the phone number ] Select an icon You can select "International dial", "Select prefix" or "Cancel" by pressing M [Menu] on the Phone number entry screen. Press I [Cancel] to cancel the entry.

[ Mail address]

Up to 50 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using alphanumeric characters or symbols.

] Enter the mail address ] Select an icon

[ Secret code]*1 Enter the security code, and set the secret code.

] Enter the Terminal security code ] Select an icon for the phone number/mail address ] Enter the secret code

You can select from among 31 types of groups, from "No group and from "1 (Group1)" to "30 (Group 30)". Groups can be used for the Group search (P87)

Select an image, or i-motion movie to be displayed when sending/receiving calls or when checking a Phonebook entry. Character Set the Character image. Press H to select

(Select a group)]

Image]*2 *3 a category (hair, face, top, bottom, accessories, and scenery), and press J to select an item from the selected category. After the selection, press C [Done]. My picture Select from images saved in "My picture" in the "Data box".P239 i-motion Select a video/i-motion movie saved in

"i-motion" in the "Data box".P249 Take picture Start the camera, and set the captured still Terminal setting In accord with the "Call display" settings. image.P200 P105

[ Ringtone]*2 *3 Select a ring tone for incoming voice/video calls from the caller saved in the Phonebook. Music Select a Chaku-Uta-Full song saved in Melody i-motion

"Music" in the "Data box". P217 Go to Step 3 (P214) in "Setting a Chaku-

Uta-Full Song as a Ring Tone". Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".P254 Select a video/i-motion movie saved in

"i-motion" in the "Data box".P249 Terminal setting In accord with the "Select ring tone" setting. P98

[ Mail ringtone]

Select a ring tone to be played for incoming mail from the sender saved in the Phonebook. Available set items are the same as for Ringtone.

[ URL]

Up to 256 half-pitch characters can be entered.

[ Zip code]

Up to 7 half-pitch characters can be entered. Phonebook 81 Job title]

[ Home address]

Up to 100 full-pitch or 200 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using Kanji, Hiragana, Pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or Katakana.

[ Company name]

Up to 50 full-pitch or 100 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using Kanji, Hiragana, Pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or Katakana.

Up to 50 full-pitch or 100 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using Kanji, Hiragana, Pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or Katakana.

[ Co. zip code]

Up to 7 half-pitch characters can be entered.

[ Co. address]

Up to 100 full-pitch or 200 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using Kanji, Hiragana, Pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or Katakana.

[ Memo]

Up to 100 full-pitch or 200 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using Kanji, Hiragana, Pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or Katakana.

Enter the birthday

[ Substitute image]

Set the substitute image for a video call. Data box Select from images saved in "My picture" in

(Birthday)]

(Secret)]

This option appears when Secret mode (P121) is set to "On". Set this option to "ON" if you want to save the created Phonebook entry as secret data.

*1 For details about the Secret code, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".

*2 If you select "Terminal setting" either for "Select ring tone"

(P95) or "Call display"(P105) and you specify a movie/

i-motion movie with video/audio as the ring tone or call display for a specific caller, this option will be overridden and the movie/i-motion will be invoked and played when a call from that caller arrives.

*3 If you specify a movie/i-motion movie with video/audio for

"Display setting", the same file will be set for "Call display"

automatically, and vice versa. 3 I[Done]

Note

<Secret code>

If you add a new mail address defined as "Phone number

+ secret code@docomo.ne.jp" to the Phonebook, you may not send mail or reply to that contact. Save the mail address in the format "Phone number@docomo.ne.jp"

first, then insert the Secret code.

<Image>

Up to 100K Image can be set. Terminal setting In accord with the "Call display" settings. the "Data box".P239 P105 82 Phonebook

<Secret>

When the Secret mode setting (P121) is set to

"Secret data only mode", the Phonebook entry is saved as secret data. The secret entry is displayed only when the "Secret mode" is set to "ON" or "Secret data only mode". Secret entries cannot be saved in the UIM Phonebook. The names saved in the secret entries are shown in the Redial log, history, or mail list/detail screen only when the "Secret mode" is set to "ON" or "Secret data only mode". The phone numbers and mail addresses are shown when the "Secret mode" is set to "OFF". When the "Secret mode" is set to "OFF", the name, image, melody saved to the secret contact will not be used when you receive a call or mail from the contact. Saving to the UIM Phonebook 1 "Add to phonebook" screen (P80) ] (Save to) field ]

"UIM"

2 Perform the following operations Add to Phonebook Screen (UIM)

(Save to)]

Select the saving location. When "Terminal" is specified as the saving destination, the FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook entry screen is displayed.P83

[ Name]

Up to 10 full-pitch or 21 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using Kanji, Hiragana, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or Katakana.

[ Reading]

Enter or edit when necessary. Up to 12 full-pitch or 25 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using full-pitch katakana, halfpitch alphanumeric characters, or half-pitch symbols.

[ Phone number]

For a green or white UIM, up to 26 digits can be entered. For a blue UIM, up to 20 digits can be entered. You can select "International dial", "Select prefix" or "Cancel" by pressing M [Menu] on the Phone number entry screen. Press I [Cancel] to cancel the entry.

[ Mail address]

Up to 50 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using alphanumeric characters or symbols.

You can select from among 11 types of groups, from "No group"

and from "1 (Group1)" to "10 (Group 10)". Groups can be used for the Group search (P91)

(Select a group)]

3 I[Done]

Phonebook 83 2 Perform the following operations

[New registration]

Add a new entry to the Phonebook. Go to Step 3. The Add to phonebook screen opens with the new entry already entered.

[Add registration]

Select a Phonebook entry to which an item is added. Press M [Menu] on the Phonebook entry screen to change the Phonebook search method.P87

] Select a Phonebook entry to which the item is to be added The Add to phonebook screen with an item already added is displayed. When you add an item to a Phonebook entry on the UIM, the Add to phonebook screen opens with the overwritten contact information. 3 Modify/save the Phonebook entry ] I [Done]

For steps to register, see Step 2 in "Saving to the FOMA Terminal Phonebook" (P80). Note If you attempt to input a string longer than the maximum number of characters allowed, a warning screen notifying of the problem is displayed. Then, the truncated string will be shown on the Add to phonebook screen. Saving Contacts to the Phonebook from Received or Dialed Calls You can save entries to the Phonebook from the list or detail screen of the call history, mail, or SMS that contains a phone number, mail address, or URL. Also, you can save a phone number currently being entered/displayed on the phone number entry screen or web site, etc. 1 Open the screen containing items to save To save phone numbers using Dialed calls list screen

(P57), Dialed calls detail screen (P57), Received calls list screen (P59), or Received calls detail screen (P59):

M [Menu] ] Select "Add to phonebook". To save phone numbers from the "Dialed calls" or

"Received calls" list screen, select the target number from the history first. If the phone number is already saved in the Phonebook, the "Add to phonebook" can not be selected. To save phone numbers from the Phone number entry screen Press C [Save]. To save a sender or recipient mail address Press M [Menu] in the Mail detail screen ] Select

"Store" ] "Store address". If there are several mail addresses, select the one to save first. To save items using other screens Move the cursor to select an item or phone number on the screen and press M [Menu] ] Add to phonebook" ] Select "Add to registration". 84 Phonebook Saving/Editing a Group Name You can group the contacts in the FOMA terminal Phonebook or UIM Phonebook. Up to 31 groups can be saved in the FOMA terminal Phonebook, and up to 11 groups can be saved in the UIM Phonebook (including "No group").

"No group" cannot be edited. Only a category name and members can be saved/edited in the UIM Phonebook. 1 M [Menu] ] (Phonebook&Logs) ] "Search phonebook" ] "Group search" ] Move the cursor to the target group ] I [Set]

I [FOMA card/Phone] : Switch between the terminal and the UIM group settings. J: Display the settings of the selected group. For the operations on the screen (Group list screen) that opens for "Group search", see Step 2 in "Searching Phonebook" (P87) 2 C [Set]

Group settings list screen

(Group name)]

Up to 10 full-pitch or 21 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, or Katakana.

[ Ringtone]*1 *2 Set the ring tone for a call. Music Select a Chaku-Uta-Full song saved in Melody i-motion

"Music" in the "Data box". P217 Go to Step 3 (P214) in Setting a Chaku-Uta-

Full Song as a Ring Tone. Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the

"Data box".P254 Select from videos/i-motion movies saved in

"imotion" in the "Data box".P249 Terminal setting In accord with the "Select ringtone" setting. P98

[ Mail ringtone]

Set the ring tone for incoming mail. Available set items are the same as for " Ringtone".

Add an image to a group. My picture Image]*1 *2 Select from images saved in "My picture" in the "Data box". P239 i-motion Select from videos/i-motion movies saved in Take picture Start the camera, and set the captured still

"imotion" in the "Data box". P249 Terminal setting In accord with the "Call display" settings. image. P200 P105 3 Perform the following operations Group settings screen Phonebook 85

[ Accept/Reject]

Set to accept/reject calls by groups.

] Enter the Terminal security code ] "Not set"/"Reject call"/

"Accept call"

*1 If you select "Display setting" either for "Select ring tone"

(P98) or "Call display" (P105) and you choose movie/

i-motion with video/audio as the ring tone or call display for a specific caller, this option will be overridden and the movie/i-

motion will be invoked and played when a call from that caller arrives.

*2 If you specify a movie/i-motion movie with video/audio as the ring tone for "Display setting", the same file will be set for

"Call display" automatically, and vice versa. 4 I [Done]

Note

<Accept/Reject call>

The setting in "Accept/Reject call" (P91) in the Phonebook takes precedence. Sub Menu on the Group Setting List Screen 1 Group setting list screen (P85) ] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations

[Reset]

Reset the selected group settings. The group name is restored to its default.

[Move]

Change the display position of the selected group.

] Locate the new display position ] C [OK]

86 Phonebook

[Set]

Edit the selected group settings. P85

[Reset all]

Reset all group settings and group order. Search phonebook Making a Call from the Phonebook To search Phonebook entries set as secret, set the "Secret mode" to "ON" in advance.P121 Calling after Invoking the Phonebook You can quickly make a call after invoking the Phonebook. 1 Stand-by display ] D The entries found by the default search method appear in the Phonebook entry list screen.P94 Phonebook Contact list screen

(Example: When searching a data) 2 Select a Phonebook entry The Phonebook detail screen opens with the phone number displayed. When multiple phone numbers are saved in the Phonebook entry Press H to select the number to dial. Press A to display the saved number in the Phone number selection screen. Use H to move the cursor to the phone number ] C [Select] to make a call. 3 I [Send]

You can also make a call by pressing C [Display] ] C

[Send] after you highlight the desired phone number on the Phonebook detail screen. To make a video call Select M [Menu] ] "Call function" ] "Video phone call". Note If the "Secret mode" is set to "Secret data only mode"

(P121), only Phonebook entries set as Secret (P82) can be searched/displayed. Searching Phonebook You can use various ways to search a Phonebook entry. 1 M [Menu] ] (Phonebook&Logs) ] "Search phonebook"

I [Default]: The highlighted search method is set as the search method of the Phonebook list screen that opens when you press D in Stand-by. is displayed to the default search method. The default search method is indicated Search Phonebook screen 2 Perform the following operations Show all data]

Display all Phonebook entries for readings starting with ( line to line) line and "others" (for readings other than the Japanese Kana syllables). Press J to switch the reading line. You can switch the displayed line by pressing the keys 1 to 0, * ( line to line, and others) corresponding to reading lines. Group search]

Phonebook entries are searched/displayed per group (Group list screen). Switch between FOMA terminal (Phone) Phonebook and UIM Phonebook with J. Select a group with H ] C [Select] to display Phonebook entries saved in the group. In the group list screen, you can perform the following operations.

- Scroll the screen by page using F/E.

- You can move the cursor by entering a group number (1 to 31) with dial keys. Phonebook 87 Reading search]

Enter a part of the contact name "reading", and search all Phonebook entries. Up to 32 half-pitch characters can be entered for a reading. All Phonebook entries are displayed when a reading is not entered. You can search readings using other than the leading character. Memory No. search]

All Phonebook entries in the FOMA terminal (phone) are displayed every 50 entries. Press J to switch to the display by memory number. The UIM Phonebook can not be displayed. Phonebook entries can also be displayed by entering memory numbers with dial keys. Phone No. search]

Enter a part of a saved phone number to search all Phonebook entries. Up to 26 digits can be entered for a phone number. All Phonebook entries are displayed when a phone number is not entered. You can search phone numbers using other than the leading digits. Domain search]

Display Phonebook entries with mail addresses saved, per domain name. Press J to switch the target domain. Register a domain to be searched in advance. P94 Sub Menu on the Group List Screen 1 "Search phonebook" screen (P87) ] "Group search"

] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations.

[View UIM/View phone]

Switch between the UIM Phonebook and FOMA terminal (Phone) Phonebook group search screens and display them.

[Set]

The Group setting screen (P85) is displayed.

[Select]

Select the highlighted group. Viewing Phonebook Entries 1 Stand-by display ] D 1 Saving locations for Phonebook entries Save in the FOMA terminal

(Phone) Phonebook(An icon assigned to "Phone Number 1"

is displayed). Save in the UIM Phonebook 2 Phonebook entry image display When an image is assigned to the phonebook entry, it is displayed on the screen. 1 2 Phonebook list screen 88 Phonebook 2 Select a Phonebook entry When an image is assigned to the phonebook entry, it is displayed on the screen. The same icon as on the Add to Phonebook screen is displayed for each item. P80 Search Phonebook detail screen Operations on the Phonebook list screen Select a Phonebook entry with a phone number and a mail address saved, and press A to make a call or press I [Mail] to create mail. If multiple phone numbers or mail addresses are registered, the Phone number or mail address selection screen opens. Operations on the Phonebook detail screen After selecting a saved phone number, mail address, or URL, the following items appear at the lower right soft key. You can perform the following operations by pressing I. Send

: Make a voice call to the selected phone number.

: Create a message using the selected phone number/ mail address. P131 Mail Connect : Connect to the site of the selected URL. Sub Menu in the Phonebook List Screen 1 Phonebook list screen (P88) ] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations

[Mail/URL]

Create mail or access a URL. Compose mail

: Create i-mode mail addressed to the mail address or phone number in the selected Phonebook entry P131 Attach to mail Create i-mode mail with the selected Phonebook entry attached. P131 Compose SMS : Create an SMS message addressed to the phone number in the selected Phonebook entry.P168 Connect to URL : Connect to the URL saved in the currently selected Phonebook entry.

[Call function]

Select the calling method. If multiple phone numbers are saved, after selecting the calling method, further select the number from the Phone number selection screen. Video phone call : Make a video call. Customize call

: Make a call after changing the registered phone number. Int. Call(Japan) : When you make a call from overseas to a phone number in Japan saved in the phonebook, the Country Code for Japan "+81"

is added automatically at the beginning of the phone number. If the phone number has a leading "0", it is automatically deleted. Phonebook 89

[Add new]

Create a new Phonebook entry. P80

[Edit]

Edit the selected Phonebook entry. P91

[Copy]

Copy the selected Phonebook entry. to the UIM*1 to the phone*2

: Copy the selected Phonebook entry to the UIM.

: Copy the selected Phonebook entry to the terminal. Delete all Phonebook data saved on the UIM.

[Delete]

Delete saved data from the Phonebook. Focused data : Delete the selected Phonebook entry. all in phone Delete all Phonebook data on the terminal. all in UIM

[Multiple choice]

Select multiple Phonebook entries to copy or delete. After you select the storage location to save multiple phonebook entries from "Phone"/"UIM" (FOMA terminal (Phone) Phonebook/UIM Phonebook), perform the following operations.

] Place check marks next to the entries to select ] M [Menu]

Copy to UIM*1

: Copy the selected Phonebook entries to the UIM. Copy to phone*2 Copy the selected Phonebook entries to the terminal. Delete Delete the selected Phonebook entries. Mark/Unmark Delete or unmark all entries saved in the Phonebook.

[Search by]

Re-search the Phonebook by another search method. P87 90 Phonebook Send all data saved in the terminal Phonebook. Send all data saved in the UIM Phonebook.

[Send Ir data]

Send a Phonebook entry to an external device using infrared transmission. P259 Focused data : Send the selected Phonebook entry. all in phone all in UIM

[Create domain list]*3 Create a list of domains to be searched using "Domain search". P94

*1 This appears for the FOMA terminal Phonebook.

*2 This appears for UIM Phonebook.

*3 This appears only for the Domain search. Sub Menu in the Phonebook Detail Screen 1 Phonebook detail screen (P88) ] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Mail/URL]

Create mail or access a URL. Compose mail

: Create i-mode mail addressed to the mail address or phone number saved in the displayed Phonebook entry. P131 Attach to mail Create i-mode mail with the displayed Phonebook entry attached. P131 Compose SMS Create an SMS addressed to the phone number in the displayed Phonebook entry. P168 Connect to URLAccess the URL saved in the selected Phonebook entry.

[Call function]

Select the calling method. Video phone call : Make a video call. Customize call

: Make a call after changing the registered phone number.

[Accept/Reject call]

Set to accept or reject calls per phone number in the FOMA terminal Phonebook. Selecting is available when the cursor has been moved to a phone numbers. Int. call (Japan) : When you make a call from overseas to a A phone number saved in the "Reject on List" (P123) cannot be phone number in Japan saved in the phonebook, the Country Code for Japan "+81"

is added automatically at the beginning of the phone number. If the phone number has a leading "0", it is automatically deleted. set to "Accept call".

] Enter the security code ] "Not set"/"Reject call"/"Accept call"

*1 This appears for the terminal Phonebook.

*2 This appears for the UIM phonebook.

[Edit]

Edit the displayed Phonebook entry. P91

[Copy]

Copy item to the UIM*1 to the phone*2

: Select and copy from the contents of the displayed Phonebook entry.

: Copy the displayed Phonebook entry to the UIM.

: Copy the displayed Phonebook entry to the terminal.

[Delete]

Delete the displayed Phonebook entry.

[Send Ir data]

Send the displayed Phonebook entry using infrared transmission. P259 Editing a Phonebook Entry 1 Phonebook detail screen (P88) ] M [Menu] ] [Edit] ]

Edit the entry Use the same steps in "Saving to the FOMA Terminal Phonebook" (P80) or "Saving to the UIM Phonebook" (P83) to edit the entry. To save a Phonebook entry to another memory number A new memory number is added if the existing memory number is changed and saved. The original Phonebook entry is left intact.

(Enter memory number) ] Enter any un-assigned memory number (000-999) 2 Press I [Done] when finished editing ] "Yes"

Phonebook 91 Selecting and Deleting Multiple Phonebook Entries If either of the terminal (Phone) Phonebook or UIM Phonebook is displayed, Phonebook entries will be deleted from the displayed (active) Phonebook. 1 Phonebook list screen (P88) ] M [Menu] ]

[Multiple choice] ] "Phone"/"UIM"

2 Place check marks next to the entries to delete ] M

[Menu] ] "Delete"

After placing check marks next to all unnecessary entries, select "Delete". 3 "Yes"

The selected Phonebook entries will be deleted. Deleting Phonebook entries Deleting One or All Entries Example: To delete a Phonebook entry from the Phonebook entry list screen 1 Move the cursor to the Phonebook entry on the Phonebook entry list screen (P88) ] M [Menu]

]"Delete" ] Select a deleting method Focused data : Delete the selected Phonebook entry. all in phone Delete all Phonebook entries saved on the all in UIM FOMA terminal. The security code is required to delete. Delete all Phonebook entries saved on the UIM. The security code is required to delete. 2 "Yes"

The selected/displayed Phonebook entry will be deleted. To delete a Phonebook entry from the Phonebook detail screen You can delete only one Phonebook entry at a time from the Phonebook detail screen. Phonebook detail screen (P88) ] M [Menu] ] "Delete"

] "Yes"

92 Phonebook Number of saved Phonebook entries Checking the Phonebook Capacity and Utilization You can check the available space in the terminal/UIM Phonebook. 1M [Menu] ]

(Phonebook&Logs) ] "No. of Phonebook"

"Secret entry" is displayed when the "Secret mode" is set to

"On" or "Secret data only mode". Phonebook Settings You can specify Phonebook entries or images to be invoked from the Stand-by display. 1M [Menu] ] (Phonebook&Logs)

] "Phonebook settings"

2 Perform the following operations:

[Default mode]

Set the search method to be invoked when accessing the Phonebook list screen directly from the Stand-by display.

[Create domain list]

Create a list of domains to be searched using the Domain search. Select an unfilled column in the list and enter a domain name.

] Enter a domain name ] C [Set]

[Display image]

Set whether to display the image assigned to the Phonebook entry.

To edit the domain name Select the domain you want to edit from the list ] C

[Select] ] Edit the domain name. You cannot edit "@docomo.ne.jp" in the domain list. To delete the entered domain name Select the domain you want to delete from the list ] M

[Menu] ] Select "Delete". Phonebook 93 I [Mail] :If you enter a 1- or 2-digit number, i-mode mail with the address found in the Phonebook entry already entered will be created. If you enter 3 or more digits, an i-mode mail can be created to an address containing the entered number sequence. P131 H : When you enter a 1- or 2-digit number, the Phonebook entries assigned to the previous and subsequent memory numbers will be displayed. If you enter 3 or more digits, select a phone number to call. J : If the entered number has 2 or fewer digits, you can select phone numbers saved in the accessed Phonebook entry. Note When "Dialing Quick Search" in the "Dialing" is set to

"OFF", this function does not work. P106 This function does not work when you enter a 2-digit number which begins with "0" such as "01" because it is not recognized as a memory number. This function does not work for the UIM phonebook. Dialing Quick Search Making a Call with the Least Number of Buttons In Stand-by, you can enter a 1- or 2-digit memory number with dial keys from "0" to "99" to make a call to the phone number saved in the corresponding FOMA terminal Phonebook entry. If you enter a 3 or more digits, the phone numbers saved in the FOMA terminal Phonebook which contain the number sequence you entered are displayed on the screen. Example: To access a Phonebook entry by entering a memory number 1 Enter a 1- or 2-digit number ] A The content of the Phonebook entry of the entered phone number or the corresponding memory number is displayed. If you enter 3 or more digits The phone numbers saved in the Phonebook containing the entered number sequence will be displayed. D ]

Press H to select a phone number and press A. M [Menu]: Display the sub menu of the Phone number entry screen. P55 94 Phonebook Displaying the Call/Mail History 1 M [Menu] ] (Phonebook&Logs) ] [Call/Mail history]

] Select the log to be displayed Received calls Show logs for received voice/video calls. P59 Show redial logs for voice/video calls.P57 Redial Received mailsShow received mail logs.P161 Sent mails Show the Sent mail logs.P161 Note Received mails can be accessed from the Stand-by display by pressing L. Redial can be accessed from the Stand-by display by pressing R. Phonebook 95 Sound/Screen/Light Settings 101 100 98 99 Tone Settings Changing the Ring tone Select ring tone Setting the Volume of Ring Tone, Alarm, etc.Volume Notifying of Incoming Calls/Mail or Alarm Time with Vibration Vibration Setting the Sound When a Key is Pressed Select effect tone Notifying of a Call Almost Disconnected with Alarm Sound Quality alarm 102 Setting Ring Time Duration for Incoming Mail Mail ring duration Muting Terminal Tones Manner Mode Changing Manner Mode Manner mode set Screen/Light Settings Changing the Appearance of Stand-by Display Standby display Setting the Image for Incoming Calls Call display Setting the Display of the Dialing Screen Dialing Setting a Wake-up DisplayWake-up display Displaying an Image Saved in a Phonebook Entry on the Incoming Call Screen Display phonebook image 102 102 103 103 105 106 106 107 Setting the Clock on the Sub Display Sub display clock Setting the Back Light of the Main Display Backlight Using the Power Saving Mode for the Main Display Power saver mode Setting a Theme for Display ColorsColor theme Changing the Appearance of Main Menu Menu settings Switching to Normal Menu Normal Menu Setting Incoming Lighting/Blinking Colors or Patterns Lighting LED Changing the Font Size Font size Setting the Time Format Date&Time format Switching the Display Language to English Select language 107 107 108 108 108 109 110 111 111 112 97 Select ring tone Changing the Ring tone You can change the ring tone for voice/video calls, mail, etc. In addition to the pre-installed ring tones and melodies, i-motion movies, melodies and Chaku-Uta songs, Chaku-Uta-Full songs downloaded from i-mode sites or websites can be set as ring tones.

[Message R]

Select the ring tone for a Message R. Available set items are the same as for voice call.

[Message F]

Select the ring tone for a Message F. Available set items are the same as for voice call.

[SMS]

Select the ring tone for SMS. Available set items are the same as for voice call.

"Select ring tone"

1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Sounds&Vibration" ]

2 Perform the following operations:

C [List]: The ring tone settings screen of the selected item opens.

[Voice call]

Select the ring tone for a voice call. Music Select from Chaku-Uta-Full songs saved in "Music" in the "Data box". P217 Go to Step 3 (P214) in Setting a Chaku-Uta-Full Song as a Ring Tone. i-motion Select from videos/i-motion movies saved in

"imotion" in the "Data box".P249 Melody Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".P254

[Video call]

Select the ring tone for a video call. Available set items are the same as for voice call.

[Mail]

Select the ring tone for mail. Available set items are the same as for voice call. 98 Sound/Screen/Light Settings 3 I [Done]

Note The name of a ring tone is its file name. The following file formats can be set for a ring tone

(however, some files such as restricted files or files including only movies or sounds may not be set). SMF, MFi, MP4 (Mobile MP4), and AMR When a video/i-motion movie is set as a ring tone

(Chakumotion), the "Call display" (P105) will be changed accordingly. Audio only videos/i-motion movies can be set for

"Mail", "Message F", "Message R" and "SMS" ring tones. When a video/i-motion movie with graphics is set as a ring tone, the incoming display will be automatically reset to the default if you change the ring tone to a video/i-motion movie without graphics. Graphic only videos/i-motion movies cannot be set as a ring tone. List of the Pre-installed Ring tones 11 Alarm01 23 Power On 01 02 12 Alarm02 24 Power Off 13 Alarm03 25 Ring01 03 14 Alarm04 26 Ring02 15 Message01 27 Ring03 04 05 16 Message02 28 Ring04 06 17 Message03 29 Ring05 18 Message04 30 Ring06 07 08 19 Message05 31 Ring07 09 20 Message06 21 Message07 10 22 Message08 Volume Setting the Volume of Ring Tone, Alarm, etc. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Sounds&Vibration" ]

"Volume"

2 Perform the following operations J : Adjust the sound volume of the selected item. When the volume level is set to the lowest, "Silent" is displayed and the tone does not sound. Every time the volume is adjusted, the tone for the item sounds* in the new volume (Except "Receiver volume").

* : The default tone sounds for the item with imotion or Chaku-Uta-Full set as the ring tone. However, if you select a Chaku-Uta-Full in "Full song ring tone", the Chaku-Uta-Full will be used as the ring tone. C [Select]: Volume setting screen of the selected item is displayed.

[Incoming call]*

Adjust the ring tone volume for a voice/video call.

[Mail/Message/SMS]*

Adjust the ring tone volume for Mail/Message R/F.

[Alarm/Schedule]*

Adjust the alarm tone volume for Alarm/Schedule.

[Keypad tone]

Adjust the volume of the keypad sound.

[Flip tone]

Adjust the volume of a sound when the FOMA terminal is opened/closed.

[Menu effect]

Adjust the main menu operation sound volume. Sound/Screen/Light Settings 99

[Power On/Off]

Adjust the volume of the sound when the terminal is turned on/off.

[Popup tone]

Adjust the volume of the sound when the popup window is displayed.

[Receiver volume]

Adjust the earpiece volume. It cannot be muted.

* Maximize the volume to display "Step" and to increase the sound volume progressively. 3 I [Done]

Note Adjust the receiver volume while making a call.P70 Vibration Notifying of Incoming Calls/Mail or Alarm Time with Vibration You can set the terminal to vibrate when a call or mail arrives or at a Schedule alarm time. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Sounds&Vibration" ]

"Vibrator"

2 Perform the following operations:

J : Set the vibration pattern of the selected item. Every time the vibration pattern is changed, the terminal vibrates in the new pattern. C [List]: Vibration pattern setting screen of the selected item is displayed.

[Incoming call]

Set the vibration pattern for an incoming voice/video call.

[Mail/Message/SMS]

Sets the vibration pattern for incoming mail/Message R/F.

[Alram/Schedule]

Set the vibration pattern for the Alarm/Schedule alert. 3 I [Done]

100 Sound/Screen/Light Settings Select effect tone Setting the Sound When a Key is Pressed You can set the sound effects when a key is pressed or a function is performed. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Sounds&Vibration" ]

"Select effect tone"

[Power On]

Select the effect sound when the terminal is turned on. Music Select from Chaku-Uta-Full songs saved in "Music"

in the "Data box" P217 Go to Step 3 (P214) in Setting a Chaku-Uta-Full Song as a Ring Tone. i-motion Select from videos/i-motion movies saved in

"imotion" in the "Data box".P249 Graphics only videos/i-motion movies cannot be set. Melody Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".P254

[Power off]

Select the effect sound when the terminal is turned off. Available set items are the same as for Power on. Select effect tone screen

[Low battery alert]

Set whether to sound an alarm when the battery level is low. 2 Perform the following operations:

C [List]: List of the options for the selected item is displayed.

[Dial sound]*

Select the effect sound when a dial key,* key, or # key is pressed on the Stand-by screen or the Phone number entry screen (P52). If set to "Japanese", "English", or "Korean", the numbers entered with dial keys will be read aloud.

[Flip tone]*

Select the effect sound when the FOMA terminal is opened/

closed.

[Menu effect]*

Select the effect sound when a main menu item is selected.

* Press M [Play] on the Sound effect select screen to sound the effect tone selected by pressing J. Press M [Mute] to not sound the tone. You can also check the effect sound by pressing I [Play] and H on the Sound effect list screen. However, you can not check the effect sound when setting to

"Silent" in "Volume". 3 I [Done]

Sound/Screen/Light Settings 101 Quality alarm Notifying of a Call Almost Disconnected with Alarm Sound The FOMA terminal uses this function to sound an alarm tone during a voice or videophone call warning you that the signal quality is deteriorating and the call is likely to be disconnected. If the signal rapidly deteriorates, the call may be disconnected without warning. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ]"Call/VT/Dialing" ]

"Call feature" ] "Quality alarm" ] "Alarm off"/

"Low alarm"/"High alarm"

Mail ring duration Setting Ring Time Duration for Incoming Mail You can set how many times or for how long the ring tone sounds when mail arrives.

"Mail ring duration"

1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Sounds&Vibration" ]

2 Perform the following operations:

C [List]: List of items is displayed.

[Mail ring]

OFF 1 cycle Set not to sound a ring tone. Ring once (maximum 30 seconds) with the length setting of music or melody that is set as a ring tone. Select time Set the duration of the ring tone. ] D ] Enter ring time between 1-30 seconds in the ring time field 102 Sound/Screen/Light Settings 3 I [Done]

Manner Mode Muting Terminal Tones Turn off the tones that sound from the terminal so as not to disturb others. 1 # (1+ seconds) To cancel Manner Mode Press # (for 1+ seconds) in Stand-by. Note There are 2 types of Manner Mode: "General manner"

and "Original manner mode".P102 appears at the top of the screen when Manner Mode is activated. A notification screen appears when you attempt to play a melody, video, or i-motion movie, when Manner Mode is activated. Even when Manner Mode is activated, the camera shutter tone sounds. While "Manner mode" is active, incoming voice/videophone call, mail/message, and alarm/schedule alert are notified with vibration. The vibration pattern follows "Vibrator" settings (if "OFF" is set, "Pattern 1" is applied). Manner mode set Changing Manner Mode Selects the action of Manner Mode from "General manner"

and "Original manner mode". The setting of the set Manner mode can be changed for the Original manner mode. Example: To change the settings of the Original manner mode 1 M [Menu] ]

(Settings) ] "Sounds&Vibration" ]

"Manner mode set" ] Move the cursor to the "Original manner" ] I [Edit]

To select the Manner mode type

"General manner"/"Original manner"

] Press C. The Manner mode setting will terminate. 2 Perform the following operations:

J : Select the vibration pattern or volume of the selected item. When the volume level is the lowest, "Silent" is displayed and the tone sound not sound. C [List]: Vibration patterns and volume setting screen of the selected item is displayed.

[Incoming call vib.]

Set the vibration pattern for an incoming voice/video call.

[Mail/SMS vib.]*

Sets the vibration pattern for incoming mail/Message R/F. Available set items are the same as for incoming call vib.

[Alarm/Schedule vib.]*

Set the vibration pattern for the Alarm/Schedule alert. Available set items are the same as for incoming call vib.

[Incoming call vol.]*

Adjust the ring tone volume for an incoming voice/video call.

[Mail/SMS vol.]*

Adjust the ring tone volume for incoming mail/Message R/F.

[Alarm/Schedule vol.]*

Adjust the alarm tone volume for Alarm/Schedule.

[Effect/Popup tone]

Adjust the effect sound or volume when the popup is displayed.

[Low battery alert]

Set whether to sound an alarm when the battery level is low.

* When the volume level is set to the highest, (Step up) is displayed to increase the sound progressively. 3 I [Done]

Stand-by display Changing the Appearance of Stand-by Display Set the items (Wallpaper, Clock, Calendar, Schedule) to be shown on the Stand-by display. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Display" ] "Stand-by Display"

Stand-by display Sound/Screen/Light Settings 103 2 Perform the following operations:

C [List]: List of the options for the selected item is displayed. M [Preview]: The selected preview screen is displayed.

[Wallpaper]

Set an image to be displayed as the Wallpaper. Image Select from images saved in "My picture" in the

"Data box".P239 i-motion Select from videos/i-motion movies saved in

"imotion" in the "Data box".P249

] D ] in the image name field, C [List] ] Select an image

[Display items]

Set the display of the Clock or Calendar on the Stand-by display. Do not show The Clock and the Calendar will not be displayed. Clock Calendar*1 Calendar+Schedule*1 The Clock will be displayed. The Calendar will be displayed. Display a calendar and schedule events for today.

[Clock type]*2 Set the display of the Clock. Small digital Reduce the display size of the digital clock. Large digital Enlarge the digital clock to fit to the screen. Analog Dual clock Set to display the analog clock on the screen. Display the time/date of two countries or regions, and cities on the Stand-by display. Select the city, area, or country for the clock displayed on the bottom using the "Second city".

[2-nd city]*3 Set the city for the second clock.

] C [List] ] Do not show Select a city by using J

*1 This cannot be selected if a Flash movie is set as Wallpaper.

*2 This appears when "Clock" is selected in "Display items".

*3 This appearswhen "Dual clock" is selected in "Clock type". 3 I [Done]

Note Some data may not be set for the Stand-by display. The video/i-motion movie or Flash movie set as the Wallpaper starts when the FOMA terminal is opened and stops when the terminal is closed. You can use P to start or stop. Web To function is not available from a video/i-motion movie set as the Wallpaper. When the stand-by screen is displayed, Flash image or GIF animation, such as clock, will stop playing after a certain time.

<Display items>

If "Clock" is selected, "Clock type" will be set to "Dual Clock" automatically when the time zone option in

"Auto time set" (P49) or "Local time zone"(P49) is set to other than GMT+9:00(not in Japan)

<Clock type>

You can only select "Dual Clock" when the time zone option in "Auto time set" (P49) or "Local time zone"(P49) is set to other than GMT+9:00(not in Japan). 104 Sound/Screen/Light Settings After you set this option, the following screen will be displayed after you press C in Stand-by and highlight the clock ] C[OK].

- Small digital, Large digital, Analog, Alarm list screen

(P267) will be displayed.

- "Dual Clock"

The "Time and Date settings" screen (P49) opens when you select the Home clock located in the upper part of the screen, and the "Stand-by display"

screen opens when you select the Sub clock located on the lower part of the screen.

<Calendar type>

After this option is set, Stand-by screen ] C

]alendar display ] C [OK] to display the Calendar screen of the schedule (P271). After this option is set, Stand-by screen ] C

]chedule display ]C [OK] to display the Schedule list screen (P272). The Calendar screen of the schedule also displays from the Stand-by screen using the same way of setting to [Calender]. Call display Setting the Image for Incoming Calls Set an image shown on the screen when a call arrives. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Display" ] "Call display". 2 Perform the following operations:

C [List]: List of the options for the selected item is displayed. M [Preview]: The selected preview screen is displayed.

[Incoming voice call]

Set an image shown on the screen when a voice call arrives. Image Select from images saved in "My picture" in the

"Data box".P239 i-motion Select from videos/i-motion movies saved in

"imotion" in the "Data box".P249

] D ] on the image name field, C [List] ] Select an image

[Incoming video call]

Set an image to be displayed on the incoming voice call screen. Set items and operations are the same as in "Incoming voice call". 3 I [Done]

Note An audio only video/i-motion movie cannot be set as the Call display. When a movie/i-motion movie with sound is set for the Call display, the "Select ring tone" (P98) will be set to the same video/imotion movie. If you use a video/i-motion movie with sounds as a caller's image and you change it to a video/i-motion movie without sounds, the ring tone settings are restored to the default automatically. Sound/Screen/Light Settings 105 Wake-up display Setting a Wake-up Display Set the Wake-up screen that opens when you turn the terminal power on. display"

1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Display" ] "Wake-up 2 Perform the following operations:

C [List]: List of items is displayed. M [Preview]: The selected image is shown.

[Wake-up display]

Set an image shown on the screen when the terminal is starting. Image Select from images saved in "My picture" in the

"Data box". P239 i-motion Select from videos/i-motion movies saved in

"imotion" in the "Data box". P249

] D ] on the image name field, C [List] ] Select an image 3 I [Done]

Note Flash movies cannot be set as the wake up screen. Dialing Setting the Display of the Dialing Screen Set the screen displayed when numbers are entered in Stand-by. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Display" ] "Dialing"

2 Perform the following operations:

C [List]: List of the options for the selected item is Display numbers with decoration set to OFF. displayed.

[Motion dialing]

Set the display method of the entered numbers. Digital Display numbers in a digital design. Painting Display numbers in a painting design. OFF

[Dialing quick search]

Set whether to search a Phonebook entry when the corresponding number for the entry is entered with 1 digit or 2 digits.

[Dialing font color]

Set the font color of the number entered when "Motion dialing" is set to "OFF". 3 I [Done]

106 Sound/Screen/Light Settings Display phonebook image Displaying an Image Saved in a Phonebook Entry on the Incoming Call Screen When a call with Caller ID from the caller saved in the Phonebook arrives, the image set in the Phonebook will be displayed. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Call/VT/Dialing" ]

"Incoming call" ] "Display phonebook image" ]

"ON"/"OFF"

Note The priority order for images displayed on an incoming call is as follows:

1 Image set to a Phonebook entry 2 Image set to a Group in the Phonebook 3 Image set for the Call display Sub display clock Setting the Clock on the Sub Display You can change the design of the clock shown on the sub display. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Display" ] "Sub display clock" ] Select a clock Backlight Setting the Back Light of the Main Display You can set the main display backlight (Backlight). 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Display" ] "Backlight"

2 Perform the following operations:

C [List]: List of the options for the selected item is displayed.

[Display duration]

Set the Display backlight duration of the main display between 10-180 seconds.

[Display brightness]

Set the backlight level of the main display.

[AC connected]

Set the lighting when the AC charger is connected. Display setting In accord with the setting in "Display duration"

Always on Light is always on. and "Display brightness". 3 I [Done]

Sound/Screen/Light Settings 107 Power saver mode Using the Power Saving Mode for the Main Display Menu settings Changing the Appearance of Main Menu Set the backlight brightness of the main display to the lowest level in the power saving mode. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Others" ] "Power saver mode" ] "ON"/"OFF"

Color theme Setting a Theme for Display Colors You can select a combination of screen colors and a menu format. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Display" ] "Color theme"

] "Illumination dot"/ "Sparkling wine"

Illumination dotDisplay the menu options as a list of icons with the black-based color scheme. Sparkling wine Display the menu in a list with bright wine-red color scheme. Menu guidance Displaying Guidance for the Main Menu You can set whether to display the guidance for the icon selected on the Main Menu. 1 Select M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Display" ] "Menu settings" ] "Menu guidance" ] "ON"/"OFF"

Menu Customization Changing the Display Format of the Main You can change the display format of the Main menu. Also, you can save up to two combinations of Main menu icons. Example: Changing the combination of Main menu icons 1 Select M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Display" ] "Menu settings" ] "Menu customization" ] "Customize 1"/"Customize 2"

Select a name of the combination of icons from "Customize1" or "Customixe2". To open a preview screen of the main menu, move the cursor to an item to change and press M [Preview] on the

"Menu customization" screen. Customization Screen 108 Sound/Screen/Light Settings When you do not wish to change the combination of icons Select "Color theme setting". The main menu display will be in accord with the "Color Theme setting". Menu customization terminates. Switching from Simple Menu to Normal Menu 1 Press the M [Menu] button in Stand-by. Simple menu appears. 2 Move cursor to an icon to change ] C [Change] ]

Select a new icon ] I [Done] ] "Yes"

Select an icon from images saved in "My picture" in the "Data box". To cancel changing of the icons Select "No" on the confirmation screen for saving. 2 Press I [Settings]

3 Press H to move the cursor over "Off", and press C

[Select]

The menu is switched to the normal menu. To initialize the main menu to the default settings On the customization screen you want to restore M [Menu] ] "Restore to default" ] Select "Yes"

To restore the Simple menu Select M [Menu] ] I [Settings] ] "ON"

Note JPEG or GIF images in 80x70 pixels or smaller can be used as icons for customization. The first frame will be displayed when you use an animation GIF as menu icon. Normal Menu Switching to Normal Menu When purchasing, a menu is set to "Simple Menu" that contains only In Simple Menu, the font size for Phonebook entries and mail message text will be enlarged.Simple menu can switch with Normal menu. Note The Simple menu offers larger fonts for menu items, Phonebook entries, Redial/Received calls, Sent mail/

Received mail, mail list/detail screen, i-mode, and characters being entered. The font size cannot be changed. To use a menu option not displayed in the Simple menu, select "Normal menu". The default main menu appears temporarily. Sound/Screen/Light Settings 109 Lighting LED Setting Incoming Lighting/ Blinking Colors or Patterns You can set the incoming or alarm illumination to ON or OFF, or set a combination of illumination colors for each item. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Display" ] "Lighting LED"

2 Perform the following operations:

C [List]: List of the options for the selected item is displayed.

[Lighting]

Set whether to light/blink the illumination light.

[Incoming voice call]*

Set an illumination pattern/color for an incoming voice call.

[Incoming video call]*

Set illumination pattern/color for an incoming video call.

[New mail]*

Set illumination pattern/color for incoming mail.

[New message R]*

Set illumination pattern/color for an incoming Message R.

[New message F]*

Set illumination pattern/color for an incoming Message F.

[New SMS]*

Set illumination pattern/color for an incoming SMS.

[New Voice mail]*

Set illumination pattern/color to indicate that a new message is recorded at the Voice mail center. To light the illumination when a new message is being recorded, select "Tone/Vibration message notification" (P306)

] "Yes".

[New Record message]*

Set illumination patter/color to indicate that a new message is recorded in Record message.

[Playing music]*

Set illumination pattern/color when music is played.

[Alarm]*

Set illumination pattern/color when an alarm is activated.

[Schedule/To do list]*

Set illumination pattern/color for the set time of a Schedule event/To do list task.

[During call]*

Set illumination pattern/color during a call.

[Missed call]*

Set whether to light the illumination if you missed a call.

[Unread message]*

Set whether to light the illumination when there is an unread message.

* Available when "Lighting LED" is set to "ON"

3 I [Done]

Note A color cannot be selected for Pattern 5 - 7. The illuminations for "Missed call" and "Unread message" light/blink up to 6 hours, and other illuminations light/blink up to 30 seconds. 110 Sound/Screen/Light Settings Font size Changing the Font Size You can change the font size for menu items, Phonebook entries, Redial/Received calls, Sent mail/Received mail, mail list/detail screen, i-mode, and characters being entered. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Display" ] "Font size"

]"Normal"/"Large"/"User set"

Normal The standard font size is used for all items. Large The larger font size is used for all items. User setYou can set a font size for each item.

] D ] Select an item ] Change the font size 2 I [Done]

Date&Time format Setting the Time Format You can set the display format for date/time.

"Date&Time format"

1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Date&Time" ]

2 Perform the following operations:

C [List]: List of the options for the selected item is displayed.

[Date format]

Set the display format for the date.

] "DD/MM/YYYY"/"MM/DD/YYYY"/"YYYY/MM/DD"

[Time format]

Set the display format for the time.

] "12-hour"/"24-hour"

Note When "Simple menu" is set to "On", the font size 3 I [Done]

cannot be changed.

"Small" can be selected for "Mail" and "i-mode" (the same font size as in Mail settings and i-mode settings will be used). Note yyyy=year, mm=month, and dd=day in the display. Sound/Screen/Light Settings 111 Select language Switching the Display Language to English You can switch the language of the displayed on the FOMA terminal between Japanese and English. 1 M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Others" ] "" ]

""/"English"

Note When set to English, "Select language" is displayed as " (Bilingual)"

The setting of this function is recorded on the UIM. If another UIM is inserted into the phone, the setting on another UIM has priority. 112 Sound/Screen/Light Settings Security Settings Rejecting Calls from an Unknown Caller Reject unknown caller Resetting Various Functions Reset settings Deleting Saved Data All at OnceClear memory Other "Security Settings"

Other "Security Settings"

126 127 127 128 Passwords Passwords 114 Changing the Security Code Change Security code 116 116 Setting the PIN codes PIN code Unblocking a Blocked PIN 117 Restricting Terminal Operations Lock Functions Locking the Terminal to Prevent Use by Others Lock all Disabling Making/Receiving Calls Disabling Phonebook or Schedule Viewing Data access lock Restricting Call/Mail/Data Transfers Setting Redial/Received Call Log Display 118 118 117 119 Display call/mail logs Displaying Secret Data Secret mode Rejecting Calls from a Specific Number Reject on List Rejecting All Incoming Calls Reject all calls Setting Actions When Calls Arrive from Unknown Callers Anonymous caller Muting Ring tones for Unknown Callers Set mute ring (seconds) 121 121 121 123 124 125 113 Passwords Some functions of the FOMA terminal require a password. In addition to the Security Code, there are the network security code and the i-mode Password. These passwords help you utilize your terminal. Entered security code, network security code, and i-mode password are displayed as "*". Security Code The Security Code is set to "0000" by default, however, you can change the code yourself.P116 If the Security Code entry screen opens, enter the 4-8 digit Security Code and press C[OK]. Warning about Passwords Avoid setting a password using your birthday, a part of your phone number, your address or room number, 1111 or 1234, that can be easily guessed by others. Be sure to write down the set passwords and store them in a separate location. Do not reveal your passwords to others. DOCOMO is not responsible for damage caused by misuse of your security codes by others. If you forget your passwords, you need to bring an ID

(driver's license, etc.), the terminal and the UIM to a service counter such as a docomo shop. For details, contact a "docomo Information Center" on the back of this manual. Security Code Entry Screen Network Security Code The Network security code is a 4-digit number to be used for confirming subscriber's identity at an acceptance of order at a docomo shop, docomo Information Center, or

"(User support)" and accessing network services. You can set any number at subscription, and can change the number yourself. If you have "docomo ID/ Password" for "My docomo" which is a total support site for a PC, you can change the Network security code from a PC. From i-mode, you can change the Network security code by accessing "

(user support)" then "

(Settings (Confirmationchangeuse))". For "My docomo" and "(User support)", see the back of this manual. 114 Security Settings i-mode Password PIN Unblock Code The 4-digit "i-mode password" is required to add/remove from my menu, or change message service, fee based i-mode services or cancellation. (Some other information service providers may set passwords for their sites) The i-mode password is set to "0000" by default, however, you can change it at any time. Access "iMenu" ] "ENGLISH" ]

"Options" ] "Change i-mode Password" if you are using i-mode. The PIN Unblock Code is an 8-digit number used to unblock the PIN1 or PIN2. P116 You cannot change it. If you fail to enter the correct PIN Unblock code 10 times in a row, the UIM will be completely locked. Input PIN 1 code Passed Define new PIN1/PIN2 codes PIN1/PIN2 codes Failed 3 times in a row Input PIN unlock code Input PIN 2 code Failed 10 times in a row Contact docomo shop service counter You can assign PIN1 and PIN2 codes to the UIM. These codes are set to "0000"

by default, however, you can change them yourself.P117 The PIN1 code is a 4- to 8-digit number

(code) required to identify the user every time the UIM is inserted into the terminal or the terminal power is turned on in order to prevent unauthorized use. The PIN1 code entry is required to make or receive calls, and operate the terminal. The PIN2 code is a 4- to 8-digit number used to reset outgoing call charges, incoming call charges (if any) and the total of both, to reset total call charges. If the PIN/PIN2 code entry screen opens, enter the 4- to 8-

digit PIN/PIN2 codes and press C[OK]. Use the PIN1 and PIN2 codes you set previously if you PIN1 code entry screen

(Example: for PIN1 code) purchase a new terminal but keep the same UIM. Security Settings 115 Change Security code Changing the Security Code The security code can be changed. 1 M[Menu] ]

] "Change Security code"

(Settings) ] "Lock/ Security"

Making emergency calls (to 110, 119 or 118) when the PIN1 entry Screen is Open You can make emergency calls (to 110, 119 or 118) even when the PIN1 code entry screen is open after the terminal is turned on.

] I[Emergency] ] Move the cursor to the emergency number ] C [OK]/A. 2 Enter the current security code The Change Security code screen opens. 3 Enter a new security code 4 Enter the Security code you entered in Step 3 again. ChangePIN1/PIN2 code Changing PIN1/PIN2 Code Set "PIN1 code request" to "ON" before changing the PIN1 code. PIN code Setting the PIN codes PIN1 code request Requiring the PIN1 Code when the Terminal is Turned Set the FOMA Terminal so that it displays PIN1 Code entry screen and cannot be used without entering the PIN1 code at startup. 1 M[Menu] ]

] "PIN code" ] Enter the Terminal

(Settings) ] "Lock/ Security"

2 "Change PIN1 code"/"Change PIN2 code" ] Enter the current PIN1/PIN2 code The new PIN/PIN2 code entry screen opens. 3 Enter the new PIN1/PIN2 code (4- to 8-digit) The new PIN/PIN2 code re-entry screen opens. 4 Re-enter the PIN1/PIN2 code entered in Step 3 1 M[Menu] ]

(Settings) ]"Lock/ Security" ] "PIN code" ] Enter the security code ] "PIN1 code request"

] "ON"/ "OFF" ] Enter PIN1 code 116 Security Settings Unblocking a Blocked PIN Lock Functions If you enter an incorrect PIN1/PIN2 code three times in a row and the PIN lock screen opens, enter the PIN unblock code to cancel the lock. You need to set a new PIN 1/PIN2 code after unblocking the PIN code. 1 PIN Lock screen ] Enter the PIN Unblock code (8 digits) The new PIN1/PIN2 code entry screen opens. 2 Enter the new PIN1/PIN2 (4- to 8-digit) The re-entry screen for confirmation opens. 3 Re-enter the PIN1/PIN2 code entered in Step 2 Lock Function Lock all Call/Mail lock Self mode Data access lock Display call/

mail logs Secret mode Description Lock the terminal to prevent unauthorized use. To prevent unauthorized use of the FOMA terminal, you can disable making calls, entering an address with dial keys, answering calls, or displaying mail. You can disable all network functions, such as making/receiving calls, using i-mode, or sending/receiving mail. You can specify certain functions to lock. You can hide Redial, Received calls, Sent mail log, and Received mail log. You can keep someone from displaying the Phonebook entries, Schedule events, or To Do tasks set as secret data. Refer ence P117 P118 P119 P119 P121 P121 Security Settings 117 Lock all Locking the Terminal to Prevent Use by Others You can lock the terminal to prevent anyone from using it. When Lock all is activated, the only operations you can perform are turning power On/Off, making emergency calls, answering Incoming voice/video calls, and canceling Lock all. 1 M[Menu] ]

] "Lock all" ] Enter the security code ] "Yes"/"No"

(Settings) ] "Lock/ Security" ] "Lock"

Calling Emergency Numbers (110, 119, or 118) During Lock all Emergency numbers (110, 119, and 118) can be called during Lock all.

] I[Emergency] ] Move the cursor to the emergency number ] C[OK]/A. To Cancel Lock all Enter the security code. If an incorrect security code is entered 5 times, the terminal automatically turns itself off. 118 Security Settings Disabling Making/Receiving Calls Call/Mail lock Disabling Outgoing or Incoming Communications You can disable making calls, entering an address with dial keys, answering calls, or displaying mail.

] "Lock" ] "Call/Mail Lock" ] Enter the security code

(Settings) ] "Lock/ Security"

1 M[Menu] ]

2 Perform the following operations:

C[List]: List of items is displayed.

[Call/Mail Lock set]

Set whether to activate the Call/Mail Lock.

[Dialing call lock]*

Disable the following operations. Making calls entering numbers with dial keys Making calls using Received calls or mail history Making calls to a phone number in the redial list (while allowing calls to a number saved in the Phonebook or an emergency number such as "110", "119", or "118") Saving, editing, or deleting Phonebook entries (including sending or receiving via infrared communication)

[Send mail lock]*

Disable the following operations. Entering a mail address with dial keys Sending mail to an address in the redial or received call log

(while allowing mail to an address saved in the Phonebook) Performing data communications connecting to a PC, etc. Saving, editing, or deleting Phonebook entries (including sending or receiving via infrared communication)

[Incoming call lock]*

Disable incoming calls. While activated, a missed call icon will not be displayed and the Received call log cannot be viewed.

[Received mail display lock]*

Prevent to display sent/received Message R/F. While activated, an icon indicating incoming mail will not be displayed, and mail in the FOMA terminal and received mail log can not be viewed.

* Available when "Call/Mail lock" is set to "ON". 3 I[Done]

Self mode Stopping All Incoming/Outgoing Calls You can disable all network functions, such as making/

receiving calls, using i-mode, or sending/receiving mail. Infrared data communication is also not available. 1 M[Menu] ]

mode" ] "ON"/"OFF" ] "Yes"

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/ Dialing" ] "Self Note Self mode is deactivated if you call an emergency number (110, 119, or 118). When Self mode is activated, callers will hear a message indicating that the terminal is off or out of service area. The Voice mail service and the Call forwarding service still work in Self mode. All mail, Message R/F and SMS received while in Self mode will be stored at the i-mode center and the SMS center (respectively). To receive them, deactivate Self mode, and check new messages/SMS. Data access lock Disabling Phonebook or Schedule Viewing You can lock specified functions and require the security code to use the terminal, or restrict the use of the terminal. 1 M[Menu] ]

(Settings) ]"Lock/ Security"

] "Lock" ] "Data access lock" ] Enter the security code 2 Perform the following operations:

C[List]: List of items is displayed. Security Settings 119

[Data access Lock set]

Set whether to activate the Data access lock. After setting the Data access lock, the security code is required to use the selected functions.

[Phonebook]*

The Phonebook can not be used until the Security code is entered. In the Redial list or logs, the phone number or mail address sent by the caller/sender will be displayed instead of the name saved in the Phonebook. Receiving Phonebook entries using infrared communication

[i-mode]*

i-mode can not be used until the Security code is entered. i-mode connections such as "Web to" other than from the i-mode menu screen become unavailable. i-Channel tickers will not be displayed. Software will not be updated. Receiving Bookmarks using infrared communication becomes unavailable.

[i-ppli]*

i-ppli can not be used until the Security code is entered. Receiving i-ppli using infrared communication becomes becomes unavailable. unavailable.

[Data box]*

The files in the Data box can not be used until the Security code is entered. Receiving data such as images or melodies to be saved in the Data box using infrared communication becomes unavailable.

[Record message]*

The Record message can not be used until the Security code is entered. If the Record message is set to "ON" and locked, is not displayed on the Stand-by screen even when a message is recorded.

[Schedule]*

The Schedule function can not be used until the Security code is entered. An alarm set for a Schedule event will not sound. Receiving schedule events using infrared communication becomes unavailable.

* Available when "Data access Lock set" is set to "ON". 3 I[Done]

Note In the following situations, you can access the functions by entering the security code.

- To access a function from the Main menu or Custom menu

- press a button assigned for accessing the function in Stand-by

- To access the function from the New task screen

(P263) or Task List screen(P264) 120 Security Settings Display call/mail logs Setting Redial/Received Call Log Display You can disable display of redial, received call, sent mail, and received mail logs.

(Settings) ]"Lock/ Security" ]

"Display call/mail logs" ] Enter the security code 1 M[Menu] ]

2 Perform the following operations:

The items set to "OFF" will not be displayed. C[List]: List of items is displayed. Secret mode Displaying Secret Data You can set whether to display a secret Phonebook entry/

Schedule event. 1 M[Menu] ]

(Settings) ]"Lock/ Security"

] "Secret mode" ] Enter the security code ] Select a Secret mode setting OFFDisplay only data other than secret data. Secret modeDisplay secret and general data. Secret data only modeDisplay only secret data.

[Redial logs]

Set whether to display the redial list.

[Received call logs]

Set whether to display Received calls.

[Sent mail logs]

Set whether to display the sent mail log.

[Received mail logs]

Set whether to display Received mail. 3 I[Done]

Note If "Received call logs" is set to "OFF", recorded messages in Record message cannot be played. Reject on List Rejecting Calls from a Specific Number You can reject calls from the specific parties stored in the list. This function is available only when the caller sends Caller ID. It is recommended that you set the Caller ID request concurrently. Security Settings 121

[Reject number]

Specify the phone number to reject. M[Search]: Search and set a phone number from the Phonebook. The name saved in the Phonebook is displayed on the list. C[Select]: Enter and set a phone number. The entered phone number is displayed on the list. 3 I[Done]

Note If the reject on list is not empty, save a new phone number by pressing ] M[Menu] ] "Add new". To delete a saved phone number Select the number to delete from the Reject on list screen ] M[Menu] ] "Delete"/"Delete all" ] "Yes"

To edit a saved phone number Select a phone number to edit on the Reject on list screen ] M[Menu] ] Select "Edit"

Saving a Phone Number to Reject You can register up to 20 phone numbers to be rejected. 1 M[Menu] ]

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/ Dialing" ]

"Incoming call" ] "Accept/Reject call" ] Enter the security code ] "Accept/ Reject set" ] Move to the cursor to "Reject on list" ] I[List] ] I[Add]

Reject on List screen 2 Perform the following operations:

[Reject types]

Select actions for rejected calls. C[List]: List of items is displayed. SilentReceive a call without the ring tone. will be displayed on the list. Disconnect callIncoming call actions will not take place. will be displayed on the list. 122 Security Settings Setting the Reject on List 1 M[Menu] ]

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/Dialing" ]

"Incoming call" ] "Accept/Reject call" ] Enter the security code ] "Accept/Reject set" ] "Reject on list"

To Release Select "Accept" on the "Accept/Reject call" screen. Note When the Reject call list is activated, and a call from a party registered in the Reject call list arrives, appears on the Stand-by display and the call is recorded in the Received call log as a missed call. The other party hears a busy signal. i-mode mail or SMS messages are received regardless of rejection settings. Reject all calls Rejecting All Incoming Calls You can mute the ring tone for all incoming calls or disconnect calls before incoming call actions take place. 1 M[Menu] ]

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/ Dialing"

] "Incoming call" ] "Accept/Reject call" ] Enter the security code ] "Accept/ Reject set" ] "Reject all calls" ] "Silent"/ Disconnect call"

SilentReceive all calls with the muted ring tone. Disconnect callIncoming call actions for all incoming calls will not take place. To Release Select "Accept" on the "Accept/Reject call" screen. Note When a call arrives when "Disconnect call" is set, the call is not indicated, appears on the Stand-by display

(with the number of the calls), and the call is recorded in the Received call log as a missed call. The other party hears a busy signal. i-mode mail or SMS messages are received regardless of rejection settings. Security Settings 123 Anonymous caller Setting Actions When Calls Arrive from Unknown Callers You can set whether to accept or reject calls without Caller ID per reason for no Caller ID. 1 M[Menu] ]

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/ Dialing"

] "Incoming call " ] "Anonymous caller" ] Enter the security code

[Pay phone]

Set an option for calls made from payphones. Set items and operations are the same as in "User unset".

[Not support]

Set an option for calls made from overseas or from a fixed line phone via forwarding services, from which Caller ID cannot be sent. (Caller ID may be sent depending on the carrier.) Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta FullR Song as a Ring Tone" (P215) if selected a Chaku-Uta FullR song saved in

"MUSIC". 2 Perform the following operations:

C[List]: List of items is displayed. 3 I[Done]

[User unset]

Set options for calls without Caller ID because the caller chose not to send Caller ID. Disable Reject call Silent alert Cancel the setting. Reject a call. Receive a call without the ring tone. You can select an image saved in "My picture" in the

"Data box" for the Incoming call screen. P239

] D ]

Select the Image field ] "Image"/"i-motion" ]

Alert setting You can select a file from the "Data box" for the Incoming call screen or the ring tone. Incoming call screen ] D ] Select field

] "Image"/"i-motion" ]

Select a file Ring tone ] D ] Select field ] "Music"/"i-

motion"/"Melody" ] Select a ring tone Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta-Full song as a Ring tone" (P214) if you select "Music". 124 Security Settings Note When User unset is activated, if a call without Caller ID set to be rejected arrives, the call will not be indicated, is displayed on the Stand-by screen, and the call is recorded in Received call log as a missed call. The other party hears a busy signal. Calls are rejected even when the Voice mail or Call forwarding service is activated. However, if Ringing Time is set to 0 second or the FOMA terminal is out of service area or turned off, network services start. i-mode mail or SMS messages are received regardless of rejection settings. If you specify a movie/i-motion movie with video/audio as the ring tone or call display in "Select ring tone"

(P98) or "Call display"(P105), this option will be overridden and the movie/i-motion will be invoked and played when a call from that caller arrives in spite of the following selecting.

- If you select to "Silent alert"

- If you select "Display setting" either for "Select ring tone" or "Call display". If you specify a movie/i-motion movie with video/audio as the ring tone for "Display setting", the same file will be set for "Call display" automatically, and vice versa.

<User unset>

If the Caller ID Request service is activated, it takes precedence over the settings of "Anonymous caller". The caller hears a message requesting Caller ID. Set mute ring (seconds) Muting Ring tones for Unknown Callers You can set the terminal not to ring when a call arrives from a caller not saved in the Phonebook or without Caller ID. This prevents nuisance calls such as "one ring calls"

that are disconnected after a short ringing time. 1 M[Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Sounds&Vibration" ]

"Set mute ring (sec.)"

2 Perform the following operations:

C[List]: List of items is displayed.

[Set mute ring time]

Set whether to activate Set mute ring time. When set to "ON", the following items can be selected.

[Mute time]*

You can set the mute time from when a call arrives until the ringing action starts between 1 and 99 seconds.

[Missed call logs]*

Set whether to show the Received call logs for the call that was terminated within the time specified in "Mute time".

* Available when "Set mute ring time" is set to "ON". 3 I[Done]

Security Settings Security Settings 125 Note When a relevant caller calls while this function is activated, incoming call actions, such as sounding the ring tone, will not take place for the set time;

however, the Incoming call screen opens. This option works even when Secret mode is set enabled and a call from a caller whose Phonebook entry is set as secret arrives.

<Set mute ring (seconds)>

If the Ring Delay is set longer than the response time of the Voice mail/Call forwarding service, network services start without the ringing action. If the Ring Delay is set longer than the response time of "Record message", the Record Message starts without the ringing action. You cannot activate "Set mute ring (sec.)" when

"Reject unknown" is set to "ON". Reject unknown caller Rejecting Calls from an Unknown Caller You can set to reject calls from callers not saved in the Phonebook. This function is available only when the caller sends Caller ID. It is recommended that you set the Caller ID request and

"Anonymous caller" concurrently. 1 M[Menu] ]

(Settings) ] "Call/VT/ Dialing" ]

"Incoming call" ] "Accept/Reject call" ] Enter the security code ] "Reject unknown" ] "ON"/"OFF"

Note The terminal does not start incoming call actions for a rejected incoming call, however, the call is recorded in the Received call log. The other party hears a busy signal. Calls are rejected even when the Voice mail or Call forwarding service is activated. However, if the ringing time is set to 0 second, network services start. i-mode mail or SMS messages are received regardless of rejection settings. When "Set mute ring (sec.)" is set to "On", or when

"Data access lock" is set to "On" and a check mark is placed next to "Phonebook", you cannot activate

"Reject unknown". 126 Security Settings Reset/Clear Restoring Various Function Settings to Their Defaults You can restore the settings of various functions to the defaults. For functions that can be restored to the defaults, see the "Menu List" (P346). 1 M [Menu]]

(Settings) ]"Others"]"Reset/ Clear"

]"Reset settings"]"Yes" ] Enter the security code. Note Perform "Reset settings" only when the battery level is sufficient to complete the task. While resetting, applications/communications are not available Clearing Memory Deleting All Saved Data at Once You can delete the saved data. 1 M [Menu]] (Settings) ]"Others"]"Reset/ Clear"

]"Clear memory"

2 Place check marks next to the items to be deleted ]

I [Done] ] "Yes" ] Enter the security code Pre-installed data Delete default data in the "Data User Data Delete all data other than default data in the "Data box". box". PIM data Delete data in the "Phonebook" and

"Stationery". Note The total call duration and total call cost will not be deleted. Protected data is also deleted. Data saved in the UIM will not be deleted. The mail "Welcome Mail" will not be deleted.

<User Data>

After deleting the user data, the ticker of the i- Channel will not appear. When the information is automatically updated, or you download the latest information by pressing Q the ticker reappears automatically.

<Pre-installed data>

Some files that are used for default settings will not be deleted. Usage of WOW LG If the registered data when purchasing of i-ppli, Deco-mail pictures, Decomail pictographs, Wallpaper

(Stand-by display), Frames, Stamps, or Melodies is deleted, download the deleted data from "WOW LG".*

"i menu"]""]""

]"WOW.LG"

*Fees for packet communication will be charged. Security Settings 127 Function name/

Service name Suspending/reopening mail functions Limiting mail size Keitai-osagashi Service imadoko-search Purpose Refer ence see "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version". Note The priority when setting to prevent nuisance call at the same time is "Nuisance call blocking service"

"Reject on List/Anonymous caller". Other "Security Settings"

In addition to the security functions described in this chapter, the following functions and services are available. Please use them for your convenience Function name/

Service name Nuisance call blocking service Caller ID request service Software update Receive option Purpose To reject "nuisance call"

To reject a call from a caller without Caller ID To update software on the FOMA terminal when necessary To accept only necessary mails when receiving a large amount of i-mode mails Refer ence P311 P312 P385 P142

"i-mode Disaster Message Board" Service Spam Mail Prevention

(Reject mail with URLs)

(Reject/Receive Mail Settings)

(Kantan Mail Settings)

(Reject mass i-mode Mail Senders)

(Reject SMS)

(Reject Unsolicited Ad Mail)

(Confirm Settings) 128 Security Settings see "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version". Mail What is i-mode Mail?

Displaying the Mail Menu Mail Menu Creating i-mode Mail/Deco-mail Creating and Sending i-mode Mail Creating and sending i-mode mail Creating and Sending Deco-mail Deco-mail Decorating the Text Creating Deco-mail Using a Template Template Attaching a File Attach file Receiving/Operating i-mode Mail When i-mode Mail is Received Automatic Reception of Mail Selecting and Receiving i-mode Mail Receive option Checking for New i-mode Mail Check new message Replying to i-mode Mail Replying to i-mode Mail Forwarding i-mode Mail to Another Receiver Forwarding i-mode Mail Registering Mail Addresses/Phone Numbers to the Phonebook Playing/Saving an Attached File from i-mode Mail 130 130 131 134 135 137 139 141 142 144 144 145 145 146 Operating Mail BOX Displaying Mail in Inbox/Outbox or Unsent Messages Inbox/Outbox/Unsent message Using Mail History Using Mail Logs Received Mails/Sent Mails/Recent Mails Configuring Mail Settings Setting FOMA Terminal Mail Functions Settings Mail setting Using the Message Service When Receiving Message R/F Receive Message Checking for New Message R/F Check new message Viewing New Message R/F Message R/MessageF Using SMS Creating and Sending SMS SMS Compose/Send Automatically Receiving SMS (Short Message Service) Messages Receive SMS Checking for SMS (Short Message Service) Messages Check new SMS Configuring SMS Settings SMS Settings 148 161 162 164 165 166 168 170 171 171 129 What is i-mode Mail?

Upon subscription to i-mode, you can send and receive email via the Internet, as well as between i-mode terminal. In addition to the message text, a total of 2MB in 10 files

(JPEG, etc.) can be attached. Also, i-mode mail can be decorated by changing the font color, size, or background color of the message text. In addition, you can insert Deco-mail pictographs from the many pre-installed ones that can be inserted in the same manner as Pictographs, to easily create and send expressive mail. For details about i-mode mail, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version". Mail Menu Displaying the Mail Menu 1 The Stand-by display ] g ] Perform the following operations:

[Inbox]

Display the received mail folder list screen.P148

[Outbox]

Display the sent mail folder list screen.P149

[Unsent message]

Display the unsent maillist screen.P149

[Compose message]

Create new i-mode mail.P131

[Check new messages]

Receive i-mode mail stored in the i-mode Center by checking new messages.P144

[Receive option]

You can check subjects of i-mode mail stored in the i-mode Center, and select mail to be received, or deleted without reception from the i-mode Center.P142

[SMS]

Compose new SMS, or receive SMS stored in the SMS Center by checking new SMS. P168P170

[Template]

Display a list of saved templates. P138

[Mail setting]

Set mail functions. P162 i-mode menu screen 130 Mail Creating and sending i-mode mail Creating and Sending i-mode Mail 1 The Stand-by display ] g ]"Compose message"

Receiver Subject Message The total number of bytes of characters and decoration in the message text Compose i-mode mail screen 2 Select (Receiver) field ] "Direct input" ] Enter the address Up to 50 half-pitch characters can be entered. The address can be selected from Sent mail logs, or Received mail logs or PhonebookP132

(Select (Subject) field ] Enter the subject Up to 15 full-pitch or 30 half-pitch characters can be 3 4 entered.

(Select (Message text) field ]

Enter the message Up to 5000 full-pitch or 10000 halfpitch characters can be entered. 5 I[Send]

Message text entry screen Note To decorate mail P134 To send with attachments P139 You can insert a line feed in the message text. The line feed is counted as 1 full-pitch character. A space is counted as 1 half-pitch character when press R. Characters may not be sent correctly to the receiver depending on the signal strength. Entire words of Subject may not be received depending on the model or type of mobile of receiver. Half-pitch katakana and pictographs (E-Moji) except for mail exchanged between i-mode terminal may not be displayed correctly. The secret code is added automatically when mail whose address is set with the secret code is sent. However, the address of the sent mail does not display the added secret code. Even if i-mode mail is sent successfully, an error message

"Transmission failed" may appear depending on the signal strength. If you use Deco-mail pictographs in mail, the mail is automatically sent as Deco-mail. If you send a mail with emotional pictographs to the other carrier's mobile phone, they will be automatically replaced with the similar pictographs that the carrier/mobile phone supports. However, they may not be displayed properly depending on the mobile phone type or its functions. i-mode mail that is successfully sent will be saved in the Outbox. If the total number or total size of the stored sent mail exceeds the limit, the oldest messages will be overwritten first. Protect sent messages that you want to keep. Mail 131 i-mode Mail Creation Screen Sub Menu 1 i-mode mail creation screen(P131) ] M[Menu] ]

Perform the following operations:

[Send]

Send mail. Preview]

Display a preview of the mail to be sent. Save]

Save mail that is being created or edited as unsent mail. Add address]

Send mail to several addresses Up to five addresses can be added. Sent addressSelect an address from the Sent mail logs. Rcv. addressSelect an address from the Received mail logs. Open phonebookSelect an address from the phonebook. Direct inputEnter the receiver address directly.

[Delete address]

Delete a selected receiver address.

[Cng. rcv. type]

Change to ToChange the selected receiver to To. The mail address entered in the To field will be shown to the recipient. Change to CcChange the selected receiver to Cc. You can specify additional addresses to send a copy of the same mail to other recipients in addition to the direct recipients. The mail address entered in the Cc field will be shown to other recipients. The mail address may not be displayed depending on the recipient's terminal, device or mail software. Change to BccChange the selected receiver to Bcc. You can specify addresses of recipients of the copy, however, the identity will not be shown to other recipients. The mail addresses entered in the Bcc field will not be shown to other recipients.

[Attach file]

Add a new attached file / View/play or delete the attached file. P140

[Template]

Load templateOpen a template to create Deco-mail.P137 Save templateSave the current Deco-mail as a template.

[Activate camera]

Photo modeCapture and attach a still image.

] Take a still picture ] C[OK]

Video modeCapture and attach a video.

] Take a video ] C[OK]

[Header/Sign.]

Attach headerAttach the set header. Attach SignatureAttach the set signature.

[Delete body]

Delete the message text.

[Delete mail]

Delete mail that is being composed. Note

<Add address>

When selecting a Phonebook entry with multiple mail addresses saved, you need to further specify which addresses are to be added for recipients.

<Cng. rcv. type>

This option is not available when no address is entered.

<Template>

If the message text is already entered, a confirmation screen whether to delete the text opens. To load the template, select "Yes". 132 Mail Message Text Entry Screen Sub Menu 1 Message text entry screen(P131) ] M[Menu] ]

Perform the following operations:

[Decorate mail]

Open the palette to select the decoration to Deco-mail

(Decoration).P135

[Range choice]

Specify the range of text to decorate. Go to Step 2 in "Changing Decoration"(P137). This option cannot be selected when no text has been entered in the message.

[Common phrases]

Enter or edit Common phrases.P297

[Edit character]

Select a character/decoration in the body and copy/cut/paste. Undo the last entry or pasting of characters.P301

[Edit dictionary]

Edit a dictionary stored in the FOMA terminal.P302

[Quote]

Quote the contents of a phonebook entry.P296

[Input setting]

Configure the character entry.P296

[Special input]

Enter a space, line feed, or Kuten code.P297

[Header/Sign.]

Attach aheaderAttach the set header. Attach asignature.Attach the set signature.

[Jump]

TopMove to the top of the displayed message text. BottomMove to the bottom of the displayed message text.

[Property]

Display detailed information about the attached file.

[Preview]

Open the preview screen of the message text. Mail 133 Deco-mail Creating and Sending Deco-mail 3 Select (Message text) field ]

M[Menu] ] "Decorate mail"

You can create your own designed mail by adding decorations such as changing font size, font color or background color, or inserting images while editing an i-mode mail message. Deco-mail up to 100KB can be sent. Up to 20 images within 90KB can be inserted. When a Deco-mail non-compatible terminal receives a Deco-mail, the mail contains a URL to browse or the message with only text will be shown in some Deco-mail incompatible terminals. If insert the Pictographs (E-Moji) into text, it will change into Deco-mail. The set decoration appears at the cursor position Message text entry screen 1 The Stand-by display ] g ]"Compose message"

2 Enter the receiver and subject Entering the receiver and subject Steps 2 and 3 in

"Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P131) 134 Mail Palette display screen 4 Use the palette to decorate the message text To select a decoration before entering characters For operations, see "Decorating the Text" (P135). To decorate entered characters For operations, see "Changing Decoration" (P137). 5 I[Body]

To view the Deco-mail message M[Menu] ] Select "Preview". 6 C[Set] ] I [Send]

Note If you exchange Deco-mail with non Deco-mail i-mode terminal, the decorations may not be displayed correctly . After decorated text is deleted, the decoration codes may remain and this may result in a reduction in the number of characters available to enter to the text. Cancel any decoration before deleting the text. When you delete the text by pressing Q for 1+ seconds, the text including any decoration will be deleted. If a template contains an image that cannot be sent by mail, the image may be deleted. Decorating the Text 1 Message text entry screen (P131) ] M[Menu] ]

"Decorate mail" ] Perform the following operations:

I[Body]: Switch from palette functions to character entry.

(Edit decoration)]

Specify the range of text to decorate.P137 This option cannot be selected when no text has been entered in the message.

(Undo)]

(Cancel decoration)]

Delete decoration in the line at the cursor. Restore a set decoration to the previous state. Set a font size. Set the color for characters.

] Select a color ] Enter text

(Font color)]

(Font size)]

(Background color)]

Set a background color of the message text. Make characters blink. To finish entering characters that blink, select

(Blink)]

(Blink :

End).

(Ticker)]

Set a ticker to the text. Characters entered between and appear as a ticker. To finish entering characters to be the ticker, select

(Ticker : End).

(Swing)]

Set the text to swing. Characters entered between and swing. To finish entering characters to swing, select End).

(Swing :

(Word alignment)]

Set a position to enter characters or insert an image.

(Center)/

(Right)

(Left)/

(Insert line)]

(Insert image)]

Insert a line in message text. DataboxInsert an image saved in "My picture" to the messagel text. ] Move the cursor to the folder ] C[Open] ] Select an image. Still image photo graphyCapture and insert a still image.

] Take a still picture ] C[OK]

Mail 135

(Cut)]

(Copy)]

Specify the range and copy text, an image, or a line.

] Use K to select the start point ] Use K to select the end point Specify the range and cut text, an image, or a line.

] Use K to select the start point ] Use K to select the end point Paste the copied or cut data after the cursor. Copy all decorations set to the line at the cursor. After copying decorations using "Copy Decoration", you can paste them in the line at the cursor. Delete all set decorations.

(Reset all settings)]

(Paste decoration)]

(Copy decoration)]

(Paste)]

Note

<Copy/Cut>

When characters with "Ticker" or "Swing" set are selected and copied or cut, "Ticker" or "Swing" will not take effect.

<Font size>

The size of Deco-mail pictographs cannot be changed.

<Font color>

Pictographs (E-Moji) are also displayed in the specified color. To restore the default color, select "

(Default)" from the color palette.

<Blink>

When characters set to blink are displayed on the preview screen or the Compose message screen, the characters stop blinking after a certain period of time.

<Insert image>

Up to 90KB or 20 images can be inserted. The number of available attachments may be reduced depending on the file size. If the maximum number of images or size is exceeded, a warning message appears. By default, images are saved in the "Decomail picture"

and "Decomail pictograph" folders. If the same image is inserted more than once, it is considered that one image is inserted. 136 Mail Changing Decoration 1 Mail Message text entry screen(P131) ] M [Menu] ]

"Decorate mail" ] Select

(Edit decoration) 2 Use K to specify the start point I[SelAll]: Select the entire message. 3 Use K to select the end point ] Select Decoration Operate DecorationP135 Template Creating Deco-mail Using a Template Templates are form data for Deco-mail with decorations such as the font size and image insertion already set. In addition to the pre-installed templates, you can use templates downloaded from sites. 1 i-mode mail screen(P131) ] M [Menu] ] "Template" ]

"Load template" ] "Yes"

If the mail has message text entered, the entered text will be deleted and the template will be loaded. 2 Select a template ] C [Select]

The selected template is inserted in the message text. Selecting a template then pressing J allows you to select the template while viewing. You can edit the message text after inserting a template. Mail 137 Creating a New Template Editing Templates Create user-defined templates. Created templates are saved in the "Template" of Mail menu. 1 The Stand-by display ] g] "Template" ] M[Menu] ]

"New template"

You can edit user-defined templates. 1 The Stand-by display ] g ] "Template"

2 Creating Templates Decorating operationsP135 3 After creating a Template ] C[Set] ] C[Select] ]

Edit the title ] I[Done]

Note Undecorated text cannot be saved as a template. Template list screen 2 Select a Template ] C[Edit] ] Edit the template Decorating operationsP135 3 After editing the template ] C[Select] ] "Overwrite save"/"New save"

SaveSave the edited template over the source template. New saveSave the edited template as a new template.

] C[Select] ] Edit the title 4 I[Done]

138 Mail Template list screen sub menu 1 Template list screen (P138) ] Move the cursor to a template ] M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[New template]

Create a new template.P138

[Edit template]

Edit the selected template.P138 Edit title]

Edit the title of the selected template.

[Info]

Display the selected template's properties. Sort]

Display the properties of the selected template. Delete]

Delete oneDelete the selected template. Del. selectedSelect and delete templates.

] Place check marks next the templates to delete ] I[Done] ] "Yes"

Press M[Menu] and select "Select all" or "Release all". Delete allDelete all templates.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

[Memory status]

Display the number of saved templates. Attach file Attaching a File You can send i-mode mail with images or melodies attached. Up to 2MB or 10 files can be attached. The number of available attachments may be reduced depending on the file size. The following file types can be attached:

- Images (JPEG, GIF)

- Videos/i-motion movies

- Melodies

- Phonebook entries

- Schedule events

- To Do

- Bookmarks A file prohibited to be attached to mail or to be output from the FOMA terminal cannot be attached. 1 i-mode mail creation screen(P131) ] M[Menu] ]

"Attach file" ] Perform the following operations:

Mail 139

[Attach file]

ImageSelect from images saved in "My picture" of the "Data box".

] Move the cursor to the folder ] C[Open] ] Select an image MovieSelect from videos/i-motion movies saved in "imotion" of the "Data box".

] Move the cursor to folder ] C[Open] ] Select a movie MelodySelect from melodies saved in "Melody" of the "Data box".

] Move the cursor to folder ] C[Open] ] Select a melody PhonebookSelect a Phonebook entry. CalendarSelect a schedule event saved in the FOMA Terminal.

] Select a date ] Select the Schedule event To DoSelect a To Do task saved in the FOMA Terminal BookmarkSelect from bookmarks saved in "Bookmark" of

"i-mode".

] Move the cursor to the folder ] C[Open] ] Select a bookmark 2 Select a receiver address and send the message For further operations, see [Creating and Sending i-mode Mail] (P131) Note Attached GIF images and melodies cannot be received with an i-mode terminal using the mova service. A video/i-motion movie over 2MB cannot be attached. Reduce the size under "Clipping" to the available size before attaching it. P253 Depending on the recipient terminal, a video may be displayed coarsely or as sequential still images. It is recommended that you use the following settings to capture a movie if you send it to the terminal models which are not corresponding to 2M bite terminal models. Size restriction: 500KB, Select Size: QCIF

(176144), Quality: Super fine Some i-motion movies may not be attached. Playing/Displaying/Deleting an Attached File 1 Compose message screen (P131) ] Select a desired attachment field with a file attached ] Perform the following operations)

[Add attach]

Add an attach file.P140

[Del. attach]

Delete the selected attachment.

[Play/disp file]

Play or display the attached file. 140 Mail Automatic Reception of Mail When i-mode Mail is Received When the FOMA terminal is in the service area, i-mode mail is automatically sent from the i-mode Center. 1 After the i-mode mail is received, appears at the top of the screen When the reception is completed, the Reception result screen opens. The previous screen returns if no operation is performed for approximately 30 seconds. Selecting "Mail" opens the Inbox list screen. Until the Detail screen of received i-mode mail is opened, appears at the top of the screen and (the number indicates the number of messages) appears on the Stand-by screen. Reception result Screen Note When new i-mode mail is delivered, other i-mode mail and/ or Message R/F stored in the i-mode Center are received at the same time. When Receive option for i-mode mail has been set, sent i-mode mail is stored in the i-mode Center. You can check the subject of i-mode mail stored in the center before selecting and receiving the mail. P142 If mail is received from a terminal that is capable of setting To, Cc, or Bcc, you can check how the mail was addressed to you using the FOMA terminal. P151 Melodies, videos and still images can be received as attachments to i-mode mail. Incompatible files may be automatically deleted at the i-mode Center. If an attached file is deleted, "Del. attach" is added is inserted to the message text. Files attached to a mail cannot be saved in the FOMA terminal when the FOMA terminal does not support the file type but can be forwarded. Up to 100KB of i-mode mail including attachments can be automatically downloaded. Attachments over 100KB can be manually downloaded from the i-mode center.P146 You can set whether to receive attached melodies or images under "Receive attach file".P162 If the size of a received mail exceeds the number of characters set under "iMenu" ] "English" ] "Options"

]"Mail Settings" ] "Limit Mail Size", you can select and download the attached file or the data whose name appears in the message text. P146 If the total number or total size of the received mail

(i-mode mail and SMS) stored in the FOMA terminal exceeds the limit, the oldest read messages will be overwritten first. Protect the received messages you want to keep. Incoming mail is saved at the i-mode Center when:

- Power is off

- A video call in progress

- Self mode is activated

- The terminal is out of service area

- The "Receive option set" is set to "ON"

- The Inbox is full with protected or unread mail Mail 141 When mail is kept at the i-mode Center, or appears. When the terminal power is off or the terminal is out of service area, these icons may not be displayed even there is i-mode mail at the i-mode Center. If multiple i-mode mail messages or Message R/F are received concurrently, the ring tone set to the i-mode mail or Message R/F received the last sounds. Displaying New i-mode Mail 1 After the i-mode mail is received, the screen ]"Mail" ] Select a folder appears at the top of 2 Select mail to be displayed Received mail 142 Mail Note Images attached to i-mode mail may not be properly displayed. Incompatible attachments cannot be saved to the

"Data box", however, they can be forwarded. The following shows the available file type of display/playback/save when attached in i-mode mail.

- Images available to use as a Deco-mail pictogram

- Movie/i-motion

- Melody

- Schedule

- To Do

- Bookmark Receive option Selecting and Receiving i-mode Mail You can check the subject of i-mode mail stored in the i-mode Center, and select mail to be received or deleted at the i-mode Center before downloading all new messages. To use the Receive option, set "Receive option" to "ON" in advance. Setting the Receive option Set "Receive option" to "ON" to receive selected i-mode mail. 1 The Stand-by display ] g ] "Receive option" ]

C [Select] ] select "ON" ] I [Done]

After this option is set, i-mode mail will not be received automatically. Note Set "Receive option" to "OFF" in "Receive option set"

(P162). If i-mode mail arrives when the Receive option is set 1 The Notification of received mail screen opens Press C [Select] or Q/P to close the notification screen. Notification of received mail screen Note or indicating the incoming i-mode mail will not be displayed, and the mail ring tone will not sound. The i-Channel ticker stops while the Notification of received mail screen is displayed. Setting the Receive Option for i-mode Mail After "Receive option" is set to "ON", perform the following steps to select and receive i-mode mail:

1 The Stand-by display ] g ] "Receive option"

For subsequent steps, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version". Icons displayed on the Receive option screen indicating attachments Icon File type An image is attached. An i-motion movie is attached. A melody is attached. Another type of file is attached. Note Even when "Receive option set" is set to "ON", all messages will be received when "Check new messages" is used. If you do not want to receive mail, delete "Mail" from the items to be checked.P162 Receive option can also be performed from "iMenu". Select "iMenu" ] "(Menu List)" ]

" (Receive Option)". Mail 143 Check new message Checking for New i-mode Mail Replying to i-mode Mail Replying to i-mode Mail i-mode mail that could not be received because the FOMA terminal was out of service area or from other reasons are stored in the i-mode Center. You can receive stored i-mode mail by checking to the i-mode Center. appears at the top of the screen when mail is kept at the i-mode Center. You can select items to check (mail or Message R/F) under

"Check new messages" (P162). You cannot check new messages while out of the service area. 1 Stand-by display ] g (for 1+ seconds) When checking is completed, the check result screen opens. Note Even when i-mode mail is kept at the i-mode Center, may not appear on the screen if mail arrived while the FOMA terminal power was turned off. You can reply to the sender of i-mode mail. Replying can be made by entering new text or quoting the text of received i-mode mail. 1 Received mail detail screen(P148) ] M[Menu] ]

"Reply" ] "Reply"/ "Reply quoted"

You can reply to mail also by pressing I [Reply] on the Received mail detail screen. If the mail is sent to multiple receivers, you can select

"Reply all" or "Rep. quoted all". 2 Enter the subject and the message text

"Re:" is added to the subject. When replying by quoting, ">" is added at the beginning of the quoted message. Editing the subject and message.(P131). 3 I[Send]

Note After exceeding the storage capacity of Outbox, a reply cannot be created. Delete mail saved in Outbox before replying. The reply to received Deco-mail with quotation has original decoration and images entered in the message text. However, restricted images will not be entered. 144 Mail Forwarding i-mode Mail Forwarding i-mode Mail to Another Receiver You can forward received i-mode mail to another receiver. 1 Received mail detail screen (P148) ] M[Menu] ]

"Forward"

2 Enter the receiver

"Fw:" is added to the subject. Editing the receiver and message text (P131). 3 I[Send]

Note When a file that is prohibited from being attached/distributed from the FOMA terminal is attached/pasted to an i-mode mail to be forwarded, the file will be deleted. After the storage capacity of the Outbox is exceeded, you cannot forward the mail. Delete mail saved in the Outbox before forwarding. The forwarded Deco-mail has original decoration and images entered in the message text. However, restricted images will not be entered. Registering Mail Addresses/ Phone Numbers to the Phonebook You can save mail addresses/phone numbers from mail to the Phonebook. To register an address/phone number from the message text 1 Received mail detail screen (P148) ] Move the cursor to the addresses/number to save ] M[Menu] ]

"Store" ] "Add to ph.book"

2 "Yes"

Go to Step 2 in "Saving Contacts to the Phonebook from Received or Dialed Calls" (P85). To save a receiver, sender address, or phone number 1 Received mail detail screen(P148) ] M [Menu] ]

Select "Store" ] "Store address"

If there are multiple recipients/senders, further select the addresses/phone numbers to register. Go to Step 2 in "Saving Contacts to the Phonebook from Received or Dialed Calls" (P85). Mail 145 Playing/Saving an Attached File from i-mode Mail You can play or save an image, melody, video or i-motion movie attached or pasted to i-mode mail. Retrieve Selected Attached File When the size of a received message including attachments exceeds 100 KB, you will need to download the attachments from the i-mode Center. All the attached files selected are downloaded regardless of the setting of "Receive attach file" option in "Mail setting" of

"Communication". Expired files cannot be downloaded. 1 Received mail detail screen (P148) ] Select a file name Note If the available space of the Inbox is smaller than the file size, the attachment cannot be retrieved. Displaying/Playing/Saving//Deleting an Attached File 1 Received mail detail screen (P148) ] Move the cursor to the attached file C[Select]: Display/Play the selected attachment. 2 M[Menu] ] "Attach file" ] Perform the following operations:

[Save]

Save the selected attachment. Obtained images will be saved in "i-mode" folder in "My picture"

of the "Data box". (If the image can be used as a Deco-mail pictograph, it will be saved in "Deco-mail pictogram" folder.) Movies/i-motion movies will be saved in the "i-mode" folder in

"imotion" of the "Data box". Melodies will be saved in the "i-mode" folder in "Melody" of the

"Data box". Phonebook entries will be saved to the Phonebook in the FOMA terminal. Schedule events will be saved to Schedule in the FOMA terminal. To Do tasks will be saved to the To do list in the FOMA terminal. Bookmarks will be saved in "Bookmark" in the "i-mode" folder. Attached files other than the above cannot be saved.

[View/Play]

Play/Display the selected attachment.

[Delete]

Delete the selected attachment. 146 Mail Note Large i-mode mail may be rejected by the i-mode Center, and an error message may be returned to the source address. i-mode mail that is 100KB (with attachments included) or smaller can be automatically downloaded. Attachments larger than 100KB can be manually downloaded from the i-mode center. Set a size limit for i-mode mail messages in advance. An image that is larger than the screen is reduced and displayed. Some images, videos/i-motion movies may not be displayed or played. When "Melody auto play" is set to "ON", an attached melody is played automatically when you open a received i-mode mail. Software that supports i-motion mail is required to play it on a PC. Saving Attached Images 1 Received mail detail screen (P148) ] M[Menu] ]

"Inline image"

2 Select an image ] Perform the following operations:

[Save inline img]

Save the selected image in the "i-mode" folder in "My picture" of the "Data box".

[Prop inline img]

Display detailed information about the selected image. Mail 147

 

 

Inbox/Outbox/Unsent message Displaying Mail in Inbox/ Outbox or Unsent Messages 2 Select a folder I[Reply]: Reply to the sender and/or multiple recipients. P144 To display contents of a folder with security set, enter the Terminal Security code. Displaying Received Mail Up to 1000 incoming i-mode mail and SMS messages can be saved in the Inbox. However, the savable number depends on the amount of the data. By default, "Welcome mail" mail is saved. This mail does not include any charge. It is not possible to send e-mail back to "Welcome mail". 1 The Stand-by display ] g ] "Inbox"

Inbox list screen 3 Select a message JOpen the previous or next mail. I[Reply]: Reply to the sender and/or multiple recipients. P144 Received mail list screen Received mail 148 Mail Displaying Sent Mail Up to 500 i-mode mail, SMS, and unsent messages can be saved in the Outbox. However, the savable number depends on the amount of the data. 1 The Stand-by display ] g ] "Outbox"

3 Select a message JOpen the previous or next mail. I[ReEdit]: Open the Compose message or SMS screen.P131, P168 Sent mail details screen 2 Select a folder Displaying Unsent Messages Outbox list screen Messages saved as Unsent message are included in the maximum number of savable messages in the Outbox. 1 The Stand-by display ] g ] "Unsent message"

I[Delete]: Delete i-mode mail or SMS. Sent mail list screen Unsent message screen 2 Select a message The Compose i-mode mail or SMS screen opens depending on the type of the selected mail, and the unsent mail can be edited. Mail 149 Auto sort Sorting Sent/Received Mail Automatically to Folders Set conditions for automatically saving mail in specified folders. This option is not available with the default "Inbox" and "Outbox". 1 Received mail folder list screen(P148)/Sent mail folder list screen (P149) ] Move a cursor to a folder ]

M[Menu] ] "Auto sort"

I[Phonebook]: Select and set sort to mail addresses from the Phonebook. 2 M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Address]

Set mail address as a sorting condition. You can specify more than one mail address. Sent addressSelect an address from the sent mail logs. Rcv. addressSelect an address from the received mail logs. Open phonebookSelect and set sort to addresses from the Phonebook. Direct addressDirectly enter and set a mail address.

[Subject]

Set a mail subject as a condition.

[Reply invalid]*

Route messages with Reply impossible to the selected folder.

[Switch view]

Select a view to display the condition of "Auto sort" setting. NameDisplay the name saved in the Phonebook. AddressDisplay the mail address.

[Release]

Select a view to display the condition of "Auto sort" setting. Release oneDelete the selected Auto sort condition. Release selSelect and delete the auto-sort condition.

] Place check marks next to the conditions to be deleted ]

I"Done" ] "Yes"

Press M[Menu] to select "Mark all", "Unmark all", or "Switch view"

Release allDelete all conditions set to the selected folder.

* This icon is not displayed for the sent mail. Note You cannot set multiple conditions such as

"Address", "Subject", and "Reply impossible" to the same folder concurrently. The same sorting conditions as ones set to another folder cannot be set. If set to sorting mail address, set domain name

(including after @). For example, when set from Outbox address list or Inbox address list, if receiving or sending mail using only the phone number, the domain name is not included. For this condition, sorting will not be recognized. 150 Mail Received/Sent/Unsent Mail Screen Components Received/Sent Mail Folder List Screen 1 2 Received mail list screen/Received mail detail 1 2 4 3 3 5 2 4 Received mail list screen Received mail detail screen Example: Inbox list screen 1 Displayed folder name 2 Received date and time 1 Folder name 2 Number of unread messages This is displayed on the Inbox list screen. Icons displayed on the Inbox/Outbox screen Icon

(Gray)

(Blue) Description

"Inbox"/"Outbox" (Default folders) User defined folder Auto sort Security is set Unread mail On the Received mail list screen, messages received before today have the date displayed, and messages received today have the time displayed. 3 Sender's phone number/mail address If the phone number or mail address is saved in the Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears.*

* When the name is set to appear in "Switch view" P155 4 Subject

"SMS" is displayed for an SMS message. 5 Address types and multiple recipients If you send mail to multiple recipients, their address types

(To or Cc) are displayed. If the mail address is saved in the Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears. Mail 151 Icon

( ) (Gray)

( ) (Blue)

( ) (Blue)

Description Deleted attachment (Example. For a still image) Attached file un-retrieved or failed to be retrieved (Example: For a still image) Attached file partially retrieved

(Example: For a still image) Attached file set with UIM restriction function Subject The message was sent with the address as To, Cc, or Bcc Multiple recipient address types other than own address (To/Cc)

* Different icons indicated with ( ) appear on a detail screen. Icons displayed on the Received mail list screen/ Received mail detail screen Icon

/ / / ) Description Unread i-mode mail/SMS/SMS report request Read i-mode mail/SMS/SMS report request Replied Forwarded Sender mail address to which the reply cannot be sent Invalid multiple recipient addresses to which the reply cannot be sent Protected. Unread/read SMS saved in the UIM Received date and time The received date and time of SMS is not in Japan time A melody is attached. The i-ppli can be started from the message text. Melody/Still Image/Video/Phonebook entry/ Schedule event/Bookmark/other file is attached. Files of multiple types attached Multiple files of the same type attached Damaged file 152 Mail Icons displayed on the Outbox list screen/Outbox detail Outbox list screen/Outbox detail screen 1 2 4 3 screen Icon

5 3 2 4 Sent mail list screen Sent mail details screen 1 Displayed folder name 2 Sent date and time On the Outbox list screen, messages sent before today have the date displayed, and messages sent today have the time displayed. 3 Recipient phone number/mail address If the phone number or mail address is saved in the Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears.*

* When the name is set to appear in "Switch view"P158 4 Subject

"SMS" is displayed for an SMS message. 5 Receiver type Indicate the receiver type of the sent mail (To, Cc, or Bcc).

Description Sent i-mode mail or SMS i-mode mail sent to multiple recipients Failed to be sent Mail that failed to be sent to multiple recipients Protected. SMS saved in the UIM Sent date and time A melody is attached. The i-ppli can be started from the message text. Melody/Still Image/Video/Phonebook entry/ Schedule event/Bookmark/other file is attached. Files of multiple types attached Multiple files of the same type attached A file set with UIM restriction function is attached. Subject Sent as To/Cc/Bcc

* Different icons indicated with ( ) appear on a detail screen. Mail 153 Unsent mail list screen Received Mail Folder/Sent Mail Folder List Screen Sub Menu 1 2 3 Unsent mail list screen 1 Saved date and time Messages saved before today have the date displayed, and messages saved today have the time displayed. 2 Subject

"SMS" is displayed for an SMS message. 3 Recipient phone number/mail address If the phone number or mail address is saved in the Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears.*

* : When the name is set to appear in "Switch view"P160 Icons displayed on the Unsent mail list screen Icon Description Unsent i-mode mail Unsent SMS

* Other than the above, same icons as for sent mail are used. 1 Inbox list screen(P148)/Outbox list screen (P149) ]

M[Menu] ] Perform following operations:

[Manage folders]

Create folderCreate a folder. Rename folderChange the name of the selected folder. Sort folderSelect the display position of the folders and sort folders. Fold. securitySet or release security to the selected folder.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

[Delete]

Delete oneDelete the selected folder.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

Del. all read*Delete all read messages in Inbox.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

Delete allDeletes all messages in Inbox/Outbox.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

[Auto sort]

Set conditions for mail to be saved automatically in specified folders. P150

[Send all Ir data]

Send all mail in Inbox/Outbox via infrared.P259

] Enter the security code ] Enter the password ] "Yes"

[Memory status]

Display number of messages in Inbox/Outbox.

[Open folder]

Display contents of the selected folder.

* This item is not displayed for sent mail. 154 Mail Note

<Manage folders>

If I[Add] is pressed on the Inbox/Outbox list screen, a folder can be added.

<Rename folder/Sort folders/Delete one/Auto sort>

This option is not available for the default "Inbox" and

"Outbox" folders.

<Delete>

A folder containing protected mail cannot be deleted. Protected mail or SMS saved in the UIM are not deleted. If "Delete one" is selected for a folder with unread mail, a confirmation for deletion appears. Select "Yes"

to delete. Received Mail List Screen Sub Menu 1 Received mail list screen (P148) ] Move the cursor to mail ] M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Move]

Move thisMove the displayed mail to another folder. Move selectedSelect mail and move them to another folder.

] Place check marks next to the messages to move ] I[Done]

] Select a destination folder Press M[Menu] to select "Mark all", "Unmark all", or "Switch view"

Move allMove all mail in the folder to another folder.

[Delete]

Delete oneDelete the selected message. Del. selectedDelete selected message.

] Place check marks next to the messages to be deleted ]

I[Done] ] "Yes"

Press M[Menu] to select "Mark all", "Unmark all", or "Switch view"

Del all readDeletes all read messages in the folder.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

Delete allDelete all mail in the folder.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

SMS rmv. in fd.Delete all SMS reports in the folder.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

Mail 155

[Ir exchange]

SendSend selected mail via Infrared. Send allSend all mail in the folder via infrared.P259

] Enter the security code ] Enter the password ] "Yes"

UIM]

Copy to UIMCopy the selected SMS to the UIM. Move to UIMMove the selected SMS to the UIM. Copy from UIM Copy the selected SMS to the terminal. Move from UIMMove the selected SMS to the terminal.

[Memory status]

Display the number of messages in Inbox. Note

<Delete>

If there are unread messages, a confirmation for deletion appears. Select "Yes" to delete.

<Filter>

Addresses matched completely and subjects matched even partially are displayed.

[Display settings]

Switch viewSet the mail display method. SortSet conditions to rearrange the messages. Filter]

Display messages that meet certain conditions. AddressDisplay only mail from a specific address

] Select an item ] Select/input the address SubjectDisplay mail with a specific subject. UnreadDisplay only unread mail. ReadDisplay only read mail. ProtectedDisplay only protected mail. Not protectedDisplay only unprotected mail. ImageDisplay only mail with an image attached. i-motionDisplay only mail with an i-motion movie attached. Melody: Display only the mail with melody attached. Mail: Display only i-mode mail. SMS: Display only SMS/ SMS arrival All: Display all the mails in folder.

[Read all]

Mark all mail in the folder as read. Protect on/off]

Mark all mail in the folder as read. One on/offProtect or unprotect the selected mail. Select on/offSelect and protect or unprotect mail.

] Place check marks next to the messages to be protected ]

I[Done] ] "Yes"

Press M[Menu] to select "Mark all", "Unmark all", or "Switch view"

Protect allProtect all mail in the folder. Unprotect allUnprotect all mail in the folder. 156 Mail Received Mail Detail Screen Sub Menu 1 Received mail detail screen (P148) ] M[Menu] ]

Perform the following operations:

[Reply]

Reply to the displayed mail.P144

[Forward]

Forward the displayed mail.P145

[Move]

Move the displayed mail to another folder. Delete]

Delete the displayed mail. Protect on/off]

Protect or unprotect the displayed mail.

[Store]

Save phone numbers or email addresses from the displayed mail to the Phonebook. P145

[Attach file]

Save, play/view, or delete files attached to the displayed mail. P146

[Inline image]

Save images contained in the displayed mail or view detailed information.P147

[Display settings]

ScrollSet the number of lines scrolled when H is pressed on the mail display screen. Font sizeSet a font size for the message text on the Message display screen.

[Copy]

Copy contents of the displayed mail. BodySelect and copy contents of text.P301 SubjectCopy the subject. SenderCopy the destination. If there are multiple addresses, select an address from the Mail address list screen.

[Save template]

Save Deco-mail as a template.

] C[Select] ] Edit the title ] I[Done]

Export]

Ir exchangeSend the displayed mail via IrDA. UIMCopy or move the displayed SMS to the UIM, or copy or move the selected SMS from the UIM to the terminal. Note

<Protect>

Up to 1000 messages can be protected.

<Delete>

Protected mail cannot be deleted. Mail 157 Sent Mail List Screen Sub Menu 1 Sent mail list screen (P149) ] Move the cursor to mail

] M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Edit]

Edit and send sent mail.P131, P170

[Move]

Move thisMove the displayed mail to another folder. Move selectedSelect mail and move them to another folder.

] Place check marks next to the messages to move ] I[Done]

] Select a destination folder Press M[Menu] to select "Mark all", "Unmark all", or "Switch view"

Move allMove all mail in the folder to another folder. Delete]

Delete oneDelete the selected message. Del. selectedSelect and delete messages.

] Place check marks next to the messages to be deleted ]

I[Done] ] "Yes"

Press M[Menu] to select "Mark all", "Unmark all", or "Switch view"

Delete allDelete all mail in the folder.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

[Display settings]

Switch viewSet the mail display method. SortSet conditions to rearrange the messages. Filter]

Display messages that meet certain conditions. AddressDisplay only mail sent to a specific address.

] Select an item ] Select/input the address SubjectDisplay only mail with a specific subject. ProtectedDisplay only protected mail. Not protectedDisplay only unprotected mail. ImageDisplay only mail with an image attached. i-motionDisplay only mail with an i-motion movie attached. MelodyDisplay only mail with a melody attached. Mail: Display only i-mode mail. SMS: Display only SMS/SMS arrival All: Display all the mails in folder. 158 Mail Protect on/off]

One on/offProtect or unprotect the selected mail. Select on/offSelect and protect or unprotect mail.

] Place check marks next to the messages to be protected ]

I[Done] ] "Yes"

Press M[Menu] to select "Mark all", "Unmark all", or "Switch view"

Protect allProtect all mail in the folder. Unprotect allUnprotect all mail in the folder.

[Ir exchange]

SendSend selected mail via Infrared. Send allSend all mail in the folder via infrared.P259

] Enter the security code ] Enter the password ] "Yes"

UIM]

Copy to UIMCopy the selected SMS to the UIM. Move to UIMMove the selected SMS to the UIM. Copy from UIM Copy the selected SMS to the terminal. Move from UIMMove the selected SMS to the terminal.

[Memory status]

Display the number of messages in Outbox. Note

<Filter>

Addresses matched completely and subjects matched even partially are displayed. Sent Mail Details Screen Sub Menu 1 Sent mail details screen (P149) ] M[Menu] ]

Perform the following operations:

[Edit]

Edit and send sent mail.P131P170

[Move]

Move the displayed mail to another folder. Delete]

Delete the displayed mail. Protect on/off]

Protect or unprotect the displayed mail.

[Store]

Save phone numbers or email addresses in the displayed mail to the Phonebook. P145

[Attach file]

Save, play/view, or delete files attached to the displayed mail. P146

[Inline image]

Save images contained in the displayed mail or view detailed information.P147 Mail 159

[Display settings]

ScrollSets the number of lines scrolled when H is pressed on the mail Display Screen. Font sizeSet a font size for the message text on the Message display screen.

[Copy]

Copy contents of the displayed mail. BodySelect and copy contents of text.P301 SubjectCopy the subject. SenderCopy the destination. If there are multiple recipients, select addresses to copy.

[Save template]

Save Deco-mail as a template.

] C[Select] ] Edit the title ] I[Done]

Export]

Ir exchangeSend the displayed mail via IrDA. UIMCopy or move the displayed SMS to the UIM, or copy or move the selected SMS from the UIM to the terminal. Note

<Protect>

Up to 500 messages can be protected.

<Delete>

Protected mail cannot be deleted. Unsent Mail List Screen Sub Menu 1 Unsent mail list screen (P149) ] Move the cursor to mail ] M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

Delete]

Delete oneDelete the selected message. Del. selectedSelect and delete messages.

] Place check marks next to the messages to be deleted ]

I[Done] ] "Yes"

Press M[Menu] to select "Mark all", "Unmark all", or "Switch view"

Delete allDelete all unsent messages.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

[Display settings]

Switch ViewSet the mail display method. SortSet conditions to rearrange the messages. Filter]

Display messages that meet certain conditions. AddressDisplay only mail sent to a specific address.

] Select an item ] Select/input the address SubjectDisplay only mail with a specific subject. ImageDisplay only mail with an image attached. i-motionDisplay only mail with an i-motion movie attached. MelodyDisplay only mail with a melody attached. MailDisplay only i-mode mail. SMSDisplay only SMS. All: Display all the mails in folder.

[Ir exchange]

SendSend selected mail via Infrared. Send allSend all unsent messages via infrared. P259

] Enter the security code ] Enter the password ] "Yes"

[Memory status]

Display number of unsent messages. 160 Mail Received Mails/Sent Mails/Recent Mails Using Mail Logs Sent mail logs. Also, up to 60 entries of sent/received mail will be saved in "Recent mail". These logs can be used to compose mail, and save addresses to the phonebook. If the maximum number of recordable entries has been exceeded, the oldest entries will be overwritten first. Example: When displaying the received mail logs 1 The Stand-by display ] L (Hold for 1 seconds) To display Sent mails logs The Stand-by display ] R (for 1 seconds) To display recent mail The Stand-by display ] A (for 1 seconds) Example:

Received Mail History List Screen 2 Select an entry in the log I[Mail]: Create mail to the receiver or sender of the selected entry. 1 2 3 Example:

Received Mail History List Screen 1 The name saved in the Phonebook 2 Other party's mail address 3 Receive/Sent date & time Icons displayed on the received mail log/send log/Recent Mails Icon Description Received mail Sent mail Received SMS Sent SMS Mail and SMS that were Received/Sent while Roaming*

* The received/sent date and time is shown in the local time. Mail 161 Received Mail Log/Sent Mail Log/Recent Mail Sub Menu 1 Press H to move the cursor to the received/sent log

] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

Mail setting Setting FOMA Terminal Mail Functions Settings Auto sort Configuring Network Settings 1 The Stand-by display ] g ]"Mail setting" ]

"Communication" ] Perform the following operations:

[Receive option set]

To enable/disable the Receive option (P142), set whether to receive i-mode mail automatically. OnMail will not be received automatically. OffMail will be automatically received. iI[Done]

[Receive attach file]

Specify attached files to be retrieved when i-mode mail is received.

] Place check marks next to items to be downloaded ]

I[Done]

[Check new messages]

Specify request items when using "Check new messages".

] Place check marks next to the items to check ] I[Done]

[Video phone call]

Make a video call to the selected log entry.

[Compose mail]

Create mail to the address or sender of the selected log entry. Go to Step 3 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P131).

[Add to phonebook]

Save the mail address of the selected log entry to the phonebook. Go to Step 2 in "Saving Contacts to the Phonebook from Received or Dialed Calls" (P85). Save only unsaved mail addresses.

[Customize call]

Edit the phone number of the selected log entry and dial.

[Change list]*

Recent callDisplay all incoming and outgoing call log entries. Recent mailDisplay all incoming and outgoing mail log entries. Received callsDisplay Received calls. Received MailDisplay received mail log entries. RedialDisplay phone redial log entries. Sent MailDisplay Sent mail log entries. The item for the currently displayed log is not shown.

[Delete]

Delete the selected log entry.

[Delete all]*

Delete all entries from the mail logs.

* This option does not appear on the Received mail logs/Sent mail logs/Recent mail detail screen. 162 Mail Note

<Receive option set>

When this option is set to "ON", i-mode mail cannot be received automatically. Incoming i-mode mail is kept at the i-mode Center, and the Receive notify screen

(P143) appears.

<Attach File>

If the attached file set not to be received arrives, the file name is contained in the message text. You can select and receive attachments. P146 Edit Editing Header/Signature/Quotation 1 The Stand-by display ] g ] "Mail setting" ] "Edit" ]

Perform the following operations:

[Edit header]

Set a header to be inserted to i-mode mail text.

] C[Edit] ] Enter a header

[Edit signature]

Set a signature to be inserted to i-mode mail text.

] C[Edit] ] Enter a signature

[Edit quotation]

Set a symbol indicating quotation from received mail used for replying by quoting.

] C[Select] ] Enter a quotation symbol ] I[Done]

[Auto attach]

Set whether to automatically attach a header or signature when composing i-mode mail.

] Place check marks next to items to be attached ] I[Done]

Display Configuring Display Settings 1 The Stand-by display ] g ] "Mail setting" ] "Display" ]

Perform the following operations:

Font size]

Set a font size for text on the Mail detail screen.

[Scroll]

Set the number of lines scrolled when H is pressed on the Mail detail screen or the Preview screen

[Mail list]

Set how to display mail on the Mail list screen.

[Folder security]

Set security for Inbox/Outbox and Unsent message in the Mail menu. To display security-enabled mail, the security code must be entered.

] Enter the security code ] Place check marks next to items to enable ] I[Done]

[Melody auto play]

Set whether to automatically play attached or pasted melodies on the Mail display screen.

[Receiving display]

Set whether to notify with a ring tone or Receive results screen when i-mode mail or Message R/F is received while operating the FOMA terminal (displaying other than Stand-by display). Alarm modeOpen the Received results screen. Operation modeFOMA terminal operations will take precedence without the Received result screen being displayed. Mail 163 Note

<Receiving display>

Even if Alarm mode is being set, depending on the function which is being used, the result of receiving message will not be displayed. Others Configuring Other Settings 1 The Stand-by display ] g ] "Mail setting" ] "Others" ]

Perform the following operations:

Receive Message When Receiving Messages R/F When the terminal is in the service area, Messages R/F are sent automatically from the i-mode Center. When Messages R/F arrives, the display, ring tone or vibration notifies you of new messages. Up to 100 each MessageR or MessageF can be saved.However, the number of savable messages varies depending on the message size.

[Check setting]

Confirm the contents set in "Mail setting".

[Reset setting]

Reset the contents set in "Mail setting" to the default.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

Note

<Reset Settings>

The header and signature will be reset. Viewing New Message R/F When Message R/F arrives, the newest message appears automatically.

"Message auto-display" can be configured to allow the detail screen to automatically open after a Message R/F arrives. P165 1 Automatically Receiving a Message R/F When it Arrives After Message R/F is received, the reception result is displayed. The previous screen returns if no operation is performed for approximately 30 seconds. 164 Mail Auto-display Message Displaying Messages R/F Automatically Set how to automatically display Message R/F. 1 The Stand-by display ] I ] "i-mode setting" ] "Display"

] "Auto-display" ] Perform the following operations:

Message R preferredIf a Message R and F are received simultaneously, MessageR is automatically shown. Message R OnlyOnly MessageR is automatically displayed. Message F preferredIf a Message R and F are received simultaneously, MessageF is automatically shown. Message F OnlyOnly Message F is automatically displayed. Auto-display offMessages are not displayed automatically. Melody Auto Play Playing a Melody Automatically When Message R/F is Displayed Set how to automatically display Message R/F. Set whether to automatically play a melody when Message R/F is displayed. 1 The Stand-by display ] I ]"i-mode setting" ] "Display"

] "Melody auto play" ] "ON"/"OFF"

Check new message Checking for New Messages R/F Message R/F that were not received because the terminal was out of service area are stored at the i-mode Center, and , or will appear at the top on the screen. Checking new messages downloads the stored Messages R/F. You cannot check new messages when the terminal is out of service area. Item to check ( i-mode mail or Messages R/F) in "Check new messages" (P162). 1 g(for 1+ seconds) in Stand-by When checking is completed, the Reception result screen opens. 2 "Message R"/"Message F"

Note Incoming Message R/F is saved at the i-mode Center when:

- Power is off - A video call in progress

- Self mode is activated - The terminal is out of service area

- The FOMA Terminal MessageR/F mailbox is full Mail 165 Icons displayed on the Message R/F list/detail screen Icon

( ) (Gray)

( ) (Blue)

( ) (Blue)

( ) Description Unread Messages R/F Read Messages R/F Protected. Received date and time A melody/still image/video is attached. Multiple files are attached. Damaged attachment or attachment that failed to be downloaded Deleted attachment (Example. For a still image) Attachment that is not downloaded

(Example: For a still image) Attached file partially retrieved

(Example: For a still image) Attachment with UIM security function activated Subject

* Different icons indicated with ( ) appear on a detail screen. Message R/MessageF Viewing New Message R/F When Messages R/F arrive from the i-mode Center, appears at the top of the screen.

, 1 The Stand-by display ] I] "Message" ] "Message R"/

"Message F"

1 Received date and time 2 Subject 1 2 Example:

Message R Screen 2 Select a Message R/F I[Delete]: Delete the selected Message R/F 1 Received date and time 2 Subject 1 2 Example:

MessageR Screen 166 Mail Messages R/F List Screen Sub Menu 1 MessageR/F List screen (P166) ] Move the cursor to a message ] M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

Delete]

Delete oneDelete the selected Message R/F. Delete selectedSelect and delete Message R/F.

] Place check marks next to the Messages R/F to delete ]

I[Done] ] "Yes"

Press M[Menu] to select "Mark all", "Unmark all", or "Switch view"

Del all readDelete all read Messages R/F.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

Delete allDelete all Message R/F.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

[Display settings]

Switch ViewSet the display method of the Message R/F list screen. 1 linesDisplay only the subject in one line. 2 linesDisplay the subject and received date and time in two lines. SortRearrange Message R/F by the set conditions.

[Filter]

Display only the Message R/F that meet certain conditions. SubjectDisplay only the Message R/F with a specific subject. UnreadDisplay only the unread Message R/F. ReadDisplay only the read Message R/F. ProtectedDisplay only the protected Message R/F. Not protectedDisplay only the unprotected Message R/F. ImageDisplay only the Message R/F with attachments. MelodyDisplay only the Message R/F with a melody attached. AllDisplay all Message R/F.

[Read all]

Mark all Message R/F to "read". Protect on/off]

One on/offProtect or unprotect the selected Message R/F. Select on/offSelect and protect/unprotect Messages R/F.

] Place check marks next to the Messages R/F to delete ]

I[Done] ] "Yes"

Press M[Menu] to select "Mark all", "Release all", or "Switch view"

Protect allProtect all Messages R/F. Unprotect allUnprotect all Messages R/F.

[Memory status]

Display the number of Messages R/F. Note

<Delete>

If there are unread Messages R/F, a confirmation for deletion appears. Select "Yes" to delete. Mail 167 Note

<Protect>

Up to 100 each Message R/F can be protected.

<Delete>

Protected messages cannot be deleted. SMS Compose/Send Creating and Sending SMS You can send and receive SMS to/from parties of overseas carriers other than DOCOMO. Visit DOCOMO website for countries and overseas carriers available. 1 The Stand-by display ] g ]"SMS" ] "Compose SMS"

Compose SMS Screen Messages R/F Detail Screen Sub Menu 1 MessageR/F detail screenP166] M[Menu] ]

Perform the following operations:

Delete]

Delete the displayed Message R/F. Protect on/off]

Protect or unprotect the displayed Message R/F. Add to ph.book]

Save the mail address or phone number contained in the message text of the displayed Message R/F to the phonebook.

] Select the address to save to the phonebook ] "Yes" Go to Step 2 in "Saving Contacts to the Phonebook from Received or Dialed Calls" (P85).

[Attach file]

Save/play/display an attachment of the currently displayed Message R/F. Perform the following steps to save attachments.

] Select the attachment ] "Save" ] "Yes" Perform the following steps to play/display the attachment.

[Inline image]

Save an image inserted in the currently displayed Message R/F.

] Select the image ] "Save" ] "Yes"

To view information about the selected image, select "File property".

[Background Image]

Save the background image used in the displayed Message R/F.

] "Save" ] "Yes"

To view information about the image, select "File property"

[Display settings]

This option is not available. 168 Mail 2 Select (Receiver) field ] "Direct input" ] Enter the phone number Up to 21 digits (including "+" can be entered. You can select "Int. call", "Select prefix" or "Cancel" by pressing M [Menu] on the Phone number entry screen. Press I [Cancel] to cancel the entry. The address can be selected from the Phonebook, Sent mail logs and Received mail logs.P169 3 Select (Body) field ] Enter the message text The number of characters which can be entered differs depending on the settings in "SMS input character". P172 4 I[Send]

Note For a destination of an overseas carrier other than DOCOMO, enter in the order of "+" (Press 0 for 1+

seconds), "Country Code" and "other party's mobile phone number". For the mobile phone number, skip the leading "0", if any. Numbers may be entered in the order of "010", "Country Code" and the "other party's mobile phone number" (to reply to overseas SMS received, enter "010"). Characters may not be sent correctly to the other party depending on the signal strength. When you send an SMS to a receiver who uses a foreign carrier and some of the characters you send are not supported by the carrier, those characters may not be displayed correctly. Even if you set "Activate/Deactivate" to "Not notify", your Caller ID is sent to the other party. You cannot reply to SMS sent with Unknown ID or from a public phone. When sending mail, the excluding "Pictographs"

, will be changed to half byte space. Mail 169 Create SMS Screen Sub Menu 1 Create SMS screen (P168) ] M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Send]

Send SMS. Save]

Save SMS being created or edited as Unsent mail.

[Add address]

Sent addressSelect an address from the Sent mail logs. Rcv. addressSelect an address from the Received mail logs. Open phonebookSelect an address from the phonebook. Direct inputEnter the receiver address directly.

[Report request]

Set whether to request an SMS delivery notification when SMS is delivered.P170

[Validity period]

Set the duration a sent SMS can be kept undelivered at the SMS center.P172

[Delete body]

Delete the message text.

[Delete SMS]

Delete the SMS being composed. Receive SMS Automatically Receiving SMS

(Short Message Service) Messages When the FOMA terminal is in the service area, SMS is automatically received. Up to 1000 received SMS messages including i-mode mail can be saved. However, the savable number depends on the amount of the data. 1 When SMS is received appears at the top of the screen When the reception is completed, the Reception result screen opens. The previous screen returns if no operation is performed for approximately 30 seconds. Selecting "SMS" opens the Inbox list screen. Until the Detail screen of received SMS opens, appears at the top of the screen and (the number indicates the number of messages) appears on the Stand-by screen. Reception result screen 170 Mail Viewing New SMS 1 Received result screen (P170) ] "SMS" ] Select a folder SMS Settings Configuring SMS Settings 2 Select the SMS to display SMS Report Set whether to request an SMS delivery report after the SMS is delivered. If this option is set to "ON", an SMS report request indicating that the SMS has been delivered to the receiver will be sent to you. 1 The Stand-by display ] g ] "Mail setting" ] "SMS" ]

"SMS report request" ] "ON"/"OFF"

Note An SMS report will show the sent time and the number of the receiver. Received Mail Details screen Check new SMS Checking for SMS (Short Message Service) Messages SMS that could not be received because the terminal was out of service area (or for other reasons) are stored in the SMS Center. You can receive stored SMS by checking the SMS Center. You cannot check new messages while out of the service area. 1 The Stand-by display ] g ]"SMS" ] "Check new SMS"

When the reception is completed, the Reception result screen opens. Mail 171 SMS Validity Period SMS Center

* You usually do not need to change this setting. You can specify the SMS center. 1 M[Menu] ]

(Settings) ] "International roaming" ]

"Network" ] "SMS center" ] Perform the following operations:

[SMSC]

DOCOMOSet DOCOMO as the SMS center. OthersSet a carrier other than DOCOMO as the SMS center.

[Address]

When "Others" is selected for "SMS center", enter the connection address of the SMS center.

[Type of number]

Set when "Others" is selected for "SMS center". unknownIf you do not know whether the SMS center phone number is for international calls, select this option. internationalIf the SMS center phone number is for international calls, select this option. 2 I[Done]

Set the length of period that a sent SMS will be kept at the SMS center delivered because the recipient terminal is out of service area, etc. If "0 day" is selected, sending the SMS message is retried after a while, then the message is deleted from the SMS center. 1 The Stand-by display ] g ] "Mail setting" ] "SMS" ]

"SMS Validity Period" ] Select a period SMS input character Set the maximum number of characters that can be entered in an SMS message text. 1 The Stand-by display ] g ] "Mail setting" ] "SMS" ]

"SMS Validity Period" ] Select a period Japanese (70 characters)Set the maximum number of characters to 70. English (160 characters)Set the maximum number of characters to 160. Japanese may not be entered. 172 Mail i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel i-mode Displaying the i-mode Menu i-mode Menu Accessing Sites Accessing Sites Operations on i-mode/Web Sites Saving Entries in My Menu My Menu Changing the i-mode Password Change i-mode Password Opening a Web Site Internet Access Saving and Quickly Displaying a Site/Homepage Bookmarks Save Site Contents Screen Memo Downloading Images/Melodies from a Site Downloading Data from Sites Useful i-mode Functions Using the Phone ToMail ToWeb Toi-ppli To Functions 174 174 175 177 179 180 180 181 183 186 Phone To/Mail To/Web To/i-ppli To function 188 189 Configuring i-mode Settings Configuring i-mode Settings i-mode setting Using Security Certificates Manipulating SSL Certificates SSL Certificate Info 192 Using i-motion i-motion Downloading i-motion Movies from Sites i-motion Download Using i-Channel i-Channel Displaying the i-Channels Configuring i-Channel Settings i-Channel Setting 195 195 196 193 193 173 i-mode i-mode is a service that allows the display of an i-mode supporting FOMA terminal (i-mode terminal) to be used with online services such as site access, Internet access, or i-mode mail. i-mode is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription. For details about i-mode, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version". Before Using i-mode Contents of sites and web sites are generally protected by copyright law. Data, such as text or images you download to the i-mode terminal from sites or web sites, can be used only for personal entertainment, but cannot be used, in whole or in part, as it is or after modification, for sale or redistribution, without the consent of the copyright holders. If you insert another UIM or turn the terminal power on without the UIM, depending on the model of the terminal, still images, videos, melodies, mail attachments (still images, videos or melodies), screen memos, or Messages R/F cannot be viewed or played. When a file with UIM restrictions is set as the Stand-

by display or ring tone, the setting will revert to its default if a different UIM is inserted or the terminal power is turned on without a UIM. i-mode Menu Displaying the i-mode Menu You can use i-mode functions from the i-mode Menu. 1 The Stand-by display ] I ] Perform the following operations:

i-mode menu screen

[iMenu]

Connect to the i-mode Center.P175

[Bookmark]

Open the Bookmark folder list screen.P182

[Screen memo]

Open the Screen memo list screen.P184

[Last URL]

Open the last viewed i-mode site or web site.P177

[Go to location]

Enter a URL to connect to the Internet.P180

[Message]

Display a list of Message R/F.P166 174 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

[i-Channel]

Open the i-channel menu screen.P196

[Check new messages]

Check whether i-mode mail or Message R/F is stored at the i-mode Center.P165

[i-mode setting]

Configure the terminal i-mode functions.P189 Accessing Sites You can use various services offered by IP (Information Providers). Services vary depending on the Information Provider. Some sites require a separate subscription. 1 i-mode menu screen(P174) ] "iMenu" ]

"/(Menu list/Search)"

appears at the top of the screen during i-mode communication. C[Select]

2 Select an item (link) I [Bookmark]: Save the URL of the current page as a Bookmark. P: Exit i-mode. Select "Yes". Note When a number appears in front of a linked item, press the corresponding Dial Key to access the site. It may not be possible to connect to some sites. Some sites may require the "serial number of your mobile phone/UIM" to be sent in order to gain access. The "serial number of your mobile phone/UIM" is sent to the Information Provider (IP) so that the IP can recognize you and provide customized information. The serial number is also used to judge whether the contents that the IP provides can be used on your mobile phone. The "serial number of your mobile phone/UIM card" is sent via the Internet to the IP and it may be seen by a third party. This action does not reveal your postal address, age, or sex to the Information Provider. When information about the music played by your mobile phone is required from the website, a confirmation screen for sending music information appears. When "Yes" is selected, the information

(title, artist name, play date/time) of the music played by your mobile phone is sent. The music information to be sent is used by the IP (Information Provider) to provide you with customized information, etc. Press I [Stop] to cancel a page download. Site Display Screen Sub Menu 1 From the currently accessed site ] M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel 175

[Bookmark]

SaveSave the URL of the current site as a Bookmark. Go to Step 2 in "Saving in Bookmarks" (P181). ListOpen the Bookmark folder list screen.P182 SaveSave the current page as a Screen memo.P181 ListOpen the Screen memo list screen.P182

[Save image]

Save images contained in the current page.P186

[Show properties]

Show URLDisplay the URL of the current page. Page properties Display the URL and title of the current page. CertificatesIf the current page is an SSL page, the SSL certificate is displayed.

[Go to location]

Input addressYou can access a web site by entering its URL. Go to Step 2 (P180) in "Opening Web Site". URL historyYou can visit a web site by selecting an entry in the URL history. Go to Step 2 in "Using the URL History" (P181).

[Home]

Connect to the URL set as "Home".

[Reload]

If the site is updated, the updated page opens. Compose message]

Create i-mode mail with the URL of the open page pasted in the message text. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P131). Select from the following options when a linked item is selected. This pageAttach the URL of the current page. Link pageAttach the URL of the link.

[Change char code]

If characters are not displayed correctly, change the character encoding.

[Add to phonebook]

Save a phone number or mail address on the web page to the Phonebook.P179

[Retry]

Play an animation/Flash movie contained in the current page from the beginning.

[Settings]

Image displaySet whether to display images contained on the current page. Sound effect Set whether to play sound effects in the Flash movie contained on the current page. i-motion type Specify the i-motion type to download. P194 Note

<Change character encoding>

If characters are not displayed correctly, repeat the steps. However, after the character code is changed 4 times, the default character encoding returns. Characters may not be displayed correctly even after repeatedly changing the encoding. The new character encoding is valid only for the open site.

<Image display>

Images may not be displayed correctly even if set to

"Display". In this case, appears. 176 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel To download an SSL page The screen to the right opens when you access an SSL site. After the download is completed, the SSL page opens and appears on the top of the screen. To return to a normal site The screen to the right opens when you return to a non-SSL site. Select "Yes" to return to a normal site, and disappears. Note If the SSL Certificate has already expired or the site does not support SSL, a warning indicating that this site may not be secure may appear. To connect, select "Yes". However, your personal information

(credit card number or contact address) may not be sent safely. Last URL Open the Most Recently Accessed Web Page After i-mode is terminated, the URL of the last open page is saved in "Last URL". You can re-connect to the most recently accessed page using Last URL. 1 i-mode menu screen (P174) ] "Last URL" ]

C[Connect]

Operations on i-mode/Web Sites This section describes basic operations on i-mode/Web sites (pages). Going Back to the Previous Page/Going The FOMA terminal temporarily saves the displayed site data in a Cache. Data saved to the cache can be displayed, without revisiting the site, by pressing J. However, the site will be reloaded if the data is larger than the cache size, or if the site requires the latest information always be loaded. Entered characters or settings at the site will not be stored in the cache. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel 177 Terminating i-mode deletes data from the cache. Example: Pages are displayed in the order of Screen

"A" "B" "C" "B" "D"

If opening the pages in the order "A" "B" "C", then returning to "B", and opening "D", "C" is deleted from the cache. Pressing J displays "B" "D". L L L Paging order Reverse paging order starting from screen "D"

Selecting Links or Items Selecting Links or Items You may need to perform operations using the following items while connected to i-mode. For details, refer to

"Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version". Name Radio button Display example Details

(Not selected) You can select only 1 item.

(Selected) Check box

(Not selected) You can select multiple items.

(Selected) Note Page navigation may differ when a Flash movie is Text box displayed. Pull down menu You can enter text. Select a text box to open the text entry screen. Select an item from a list of options. Click pull down menus to display the items. Note

<Text Box>

You can enter a Phonebook entry or your own number saved in the FOMA terminal into a text box by performing the following steps: M[Menu] ] "Quote" ]

"Phonebook"/"Own number"

178 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Displaying Flash Movies The FOMA terminal supports Flash, an animation technology using images and sounds. You can access sites that provide various kinds of animations using the terminal. You can also download a Flash file and set it for the Stand-by display. Note Even if a Flash file is displayed, the animation may not work correctly. Some Flash files use data about your FOMA terminal. To allow Flash files to use the data, set "Use phone info" to "Yes". If the Flash movie contains audio, it will be played in the volume set from the Flash playback screen

(P242). To turn off sound effects, set "Sound effect"

to "OFF".P189 If you play a Flash file with vibration set, the terminal vibrates regardless of the "Sounds&Vibration" (P100) settings on the terminal. Flash movies are not displayed if "Images" is set to

"OFF". P190 Flash movies may appear differently depending on the location they are saved, the Data box, or Screen memo. Flash sound effects are not played if they are set to the Stand-by display / Call Display. Adding a Mail Address/Phone Number to Phonebook You can save a phone number or mail address displayed at a site to the Phonebook. 1 From the currently accessed site ] Move the cursor to a phone number/mail address ] M[Menu] ] "Add to ph.book" ] "Yes"

Go to Step 2 in "Saving Contacts to the Phonebook from Received or Dialed Calls" (P85). My Menu Saving Entries in My Menu Frequently accessed sites can be saved in My Menu for quick connection. Up to 45 entries can be saved in My Menu. Some sites cannot be saved in My Menu. 1 Display a site to save ] Select "(Store in My Menu)"

Item names may vary depending on the site. 2 Select i-mode password text box ] Enter the i-mode password ] "OK"

The entered i-mode password is masked by asterisks ":". i-mode passwordP180 Note When you subscribe to a fee-based site in "

(Menu list)", the site is added to My Menu automatically. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel 179 Accessing a Site from My Menu 1 i-mode menu screen (P174) ] "iMenu" ] "English iMenu" ] "My Menu" ] Select the site to access Change i-mode Password Changing the i-mode Password

"i-mode Password" (4 digit) is required to subscribe to and unsubscribe from message services or fee-based i-mode sites, or configure mail settings. The password is set to

"0000" by default. Change it to a number of your own choice. Do not reveal your i-mode password to others. 1 i-mode menu screen(P174) ] "iMenu" ] "English ]

"Options" ] "Change i-mode Password"

2 Select the "Current Password" text box ] Enter the i-mode password (4 digits) Internet Access Opening a Web Site You can view a web site by entering its URL. A URL consists of half-pitch alphanumeric characters and symbols. 1 i-mode menu screen (P174) ] "Go to location"

2 "Input address" ] Enter the URL ] C[Set]

Up to 256 half-pitch characters can be entered. Note Web sites that do not support i-mode may not be displayed correctly. When the same URL as a history entry is accessed, the old URL is overwritten and the entry is shown as the latest URL in the history. 3 Select "New Password" text box ] Enter a new i-mode password (4 digits) Using the URL History 4 Select the "New Password (Confirmation)" text box ]

Enter the new i-mode password (4 digits) Up to 10 previously entered URLs are stored in the URL History. You can access a web site by using the URL history. 5 "Select"

Note If you forget the i-mode password, you need to bring a picture ID such as your driver's license to a service counter such as a docomo shop to have the i-mode password reset to "0000". 180 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel 1 i-mode menu screen (P174) ] "Go to location" ] "URL history"

URL history list screen 2 Select the URL to access Note If more than 10 URLs are saved in the history, the oldest URL will be overwritten first. The URL visited will be re-displayed at the top of the URL history. URL History List Screen Sub Menu 1 URL history list screen (P180) ] Move the cursor to a URL history entry ] M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Connect]

Connect to the selected entry in the URL history.

[Edit URL]

Edit and connect to the URL of the selected history entry.

] Edit URL ] C[Set]

[Delete]

Delete oneDelete the selected URL history entry. Del. selectedSelect and delete an entry in the URL history.

] Place check marks next to the URL history entries to delete ]

I[Done] ] "Yes"

Press M[Menu] and select "Mark all" or "Unmark all"

Delete allDelete entire URL history.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

[Compose message]

Create i-mode mail with the URL of the selected history entry already pasted in the message text. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P131). Bookmarks Saving and Quickly Displaying a Site/Homepage Save frequently accessed sites or web sites in Bookmarks to display the page quickly. Saving in Bookmarks Up to 100 URLs can be saved in the Bookmarks folder. 1 From the currently accessed site ] I[BK.mark]

2 Edit the title ] I[Done] ] Select a destination folder If there is already the same URL saved, a confirmation screen to overwrite appears. Select "Yes". Note Up to 256 half-pitch characters can be entered for a URL saved as a Bookmark. Up to 12 full-pitch or 24 half-pitch characters can be saved for a Bookmark title. If the maximum number of Bookmarks has been saved, a confirmation screen appears. Select "Yes" ]

Select a folder ] Select Bookmark to delete ] Select a destination folder. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel 181 Accessing Web Sites from Bookmarks 1 i-mode menu screen (P174) ] "Bookmark"

I[Add]: You can add a folder. Up to 16 full-pitch or 32 half-pitch characters can be entered for a folder name. Bookmark Folder List Icons displayed on the Bookmark folder list screen Icon

(Gray)

(Blue) Description

"Bookmark" (pre-installed folder) User defined folder 2 Select a Folder Bookmark Folder List Screen Sub Menu 1 Bookmark list screen (P181) ] Move the cursor to folder ] M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Manage folder]

Create folderYou can add a folder. Up to 16 full-pitch or 32 half-pitch characters can be entered for a folder name. Rename folderEdit the selected folder name. Sort folderSort the selected folders. Delete]

Delete oneDelete the selected folder.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

Delete allDelete all Bookmarks.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

[Send all Ir data]

Send all bookmarks via Infrared.(P259)

] Enter the security code ] Enter the password ] "Yes"

[Memory status]

Display the number of saved bookmarks. Note

<Rename folder/Sort folder/Delete 1 folder>

The pre-installed "Bookmark" folder cannot be renamed, moved, or deleted.

<Delete one>

If there is a bookmark in the folder, a confirmation appears. Select "Yes" to delete. Bookmark list screen 3 Select the Bookmark URL to access I[URL]: Display the URL. 182 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Bookmark Folder List Screen Sub Menu 1 Bookmark list screen (P181) ] Move the cursor to a bookmark ] Select the bookmark ] M [Menu] ]

Perform the following operations:

[Connect]

Connect to the selected bookmark site. Edit title]

Edit the title or URL of the selected Bookmark.

] Edit the title or URL ] I[Done]

[Move]

Move thisMove the selected bookmarks to another folder. Move selectedSelect and move a bookmark.

] Place check marks next to the bookmarks to move ] I[Done] ] Select a destination folder

] Press M[Menu] and select "Mark all" or "Unmark all"

Move allMove all bookmarks in the folder to another folder. Delete]

Delete oneDelete the selected bookmark. Del. selectedSelect and delete bookmarks.

] Place check marks next to the bookmarks to delete ]

I[Done] ] "Yes"

Press M[Menu] and select "Mark all" or "Unmark all". Delete allDelete all bookmarks.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

[URL]

Display the URL of the selected Bookmark.

[Copy URL]

Copy the URL of the selected Bookmark. Compose message]

Create i-mode mail with the selected bookmark attached. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P131). Ir exchange]

SendSend the selected bookmark via Infrared. Send allSend all bookmarks in the folder via infrared.(P259)

] Enter the security code ] Enter the password ] "Yes"

[Memory status]

Display the number of saved bookmarks. Screen Memo Save Site Contents You can save the currently open page as a screen memo. Saved Screen memo pages can be opened without connecting to i-mode. Saving Screen Memos Up to 50 Screen memos can be saved. However, fewer pages can be saved if the saved pages are long. Up to 100 Kbytes per page can be saved. 1 From the currently accessed site ] M[Menu]

] "Screen memo" ] "Save" ] "Yes"

Note If the maximum number of Screen memos have already been saved, a prompt appears to ask whether you want to select and delete a memo. To select, choose "Yes" ] and select a Screen memo to delete. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel 183 Viewing Screen Memos 1 i-mode menu screen (P174) ] "Screen memo"

Screen memo list screen 2 Select the Screen memo to view The Screen memo detail screen is displayed. I[URL]: Display the URL. Note The information saved in a Screen memo is from the time it was saved. The memo may not contain the latest information. Screen Memo List Screen Sub Menu 1 Screen memo list screen(P184) ] Move the cursor to a Screen memo ] M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations

[Display]

View the selected Screen memo. Edit title]

Edit the title of the selected Screen memo. Up to 12 full-pitch or 24 half-pitch characters can be entered for a title. Delete]

Delete oneDelete the selected Screen memo. Del. selectedSelect and delete a Screen memo.

] Place check marks next to the Screen memos to delete ]

I[Done] ] "Yes"

Press M[Menu] and select "Select all" or "Release all". Delete allDelete all bookmarks.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

URL]

Display the URL of the selected Screen memo. Protect on/off]

One on/offDisable/Enable the protection for the selected Screen memo. Select on/offSelect a Screen memo and protect or unprotect it.

] Place check marks next to the Screen memos to protect ]

I[Done]] "Yes"

Press M[Menu] and select "Select all" or "Release all". Unprotect allUnprotect all Screen memos.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

[Memory status]

Display the number of Screen memos 184 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Screen Memo Detail Screen's Sub Menu 1 Screen memo details screen ] M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations Delete]

Delete the Screen memo that is currently displayed.

[Protect on/off]

Protect or unprotect the displayed Screen memo. Note

<Delete>

Protected Screen memos cannot be deleted. Unprotect them before deleting.

<Protect on/off>

Up to 10 Screen memos can be protected. The number of Screen memos that can be protected may vary depending on the data size.

[Save image]

Save an image contained in the Screen memo. Go to Step 2 in

"Saving Images from a Site or Screen memo" (P186). Show properties]

URLDisplay the URL of the displayed Screen memo. Page propertiesDisplay the URL and the title of the displayed Screen memo. CertificatesIf the displayed Screen memo is an SSL page, the SSL certificate is displayed.

[Add to Phonebook]

Save a phone number or mail address on the web page to the Phonebook.P179

[Retry]

Play a Flash movie or an animation contained in the Screen memo from the beginning.

[Sound effect]

Set whether to play sound effects of the Flash movie contained in the displayed Screen memo. OnThe Flash movie sound effects will be played. OffThe Flash movie sound effects will not be played. Edit title]

Edit the title of the displayed Screen memo. Up to 12 full-pitch or 24 half-pitch characters can be entered for a title. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel 185 Downloading Data from Sites You can download files or data such as images or melodies from sites and save them to the FOMA terminal. Save image Saving Images from a Site or Screen Memo You can save images contained in the displayed site or Screen memo to the terminal. Obtained images will be saved in the "i-mode" folder in "My Picture" of the "Data box". The format types of image file available to save are JPEG and GIF of up to 100Kbytes size. Example: To save the image displayed on a web page 1 From the currently accessed site ] M[Menu] ] "Save image"

2 "Select image" ] Select an image To save the background image from a site Select "Save background". Note Images cannot be saved if "Images" is set to "OFF". Each image file name must be unique in the same folder. Some images saved on the FOMA terminal may not properly display even if they are displayed on the site. Some obtained images may not be displayed correctly. Image files in JPEG, GIF, or Progressive JPEG*

formats cannot be displayed after they are saved if the size (pixels) exceeds the following. However, they can be output to external devices such as being attached to mail.

- JPEG image files that exceed 1600x1200 pixels

- GIF or Progressive JPEG image files that exceed 800x600 pixels

* Progressive JPEG is an image format that is used in the Internet. The image looks coarse at the beginning of the download and the image sharpness improves as the download progresses. A savable image has a dotted border. 3 "Yes"

186 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel i-melody Downloading Melodies from Sites Download Templates Downloading Templates from a Site Downloaded melodies will be saved in the "i-mode" folder in

"Melody" of the "Data box". You can download templates for Deco-mail. Downloaded templates are saved in the "Template" (P138) of 1 From the currently accessed site ] Select a melody After the download completes, a confirmation appears. 2 "Save"

PlayPlay the downloaded melody. File propertyDisplay information about the downloaded melody. BackReturn to the site without saving the melody. Note Download may not be possible depending on the site. Each melody file name must be unique in the same folder. Some downloaded melodies may not be played correctly. Some downloaded melodies may have a section to be played already specified. These melodies will be played entirely in the playback, however, when the melody is set for a ring tone, only the specified part is played. the Mail menu. 1 From the currently accessed site ] Select a template After the download completes, a confirmation appears. 2 "Save"

PreviewDisplay the downloaded template. File propertyDisplay information about the downloaded template. Compose mailUse a downloaded template to create Deco-mail. BackReturn to the site without saving the template. 3 I[Done]

To rename and save a file, select C[Edit] ] Rename the file ] Press I[Done]. Download Dictionaries Downloading Dictionaries from a Site Downloaded dictionaries will be saved in "Download Dictionary"

(P303). Up to 10 dictionaries can be saved. However, no more than five dictionaries are available at one time. 1 From the currently accessed site ] Select a dictionary After the download completes, a confirmation appears. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel 187 2 "Save"

ViewDisplay information about the downloaded dictionary. BackReturn to the site without saving the dictionary. 3 Select a saving destination If you are only using four or fewer dictionaries, a confirmation whether to enable the downloaded dictionary appears. Select "Yes" to enable it. Note Using Downloaded DictionariesP303 Phone To/Mail To/Web To/i-ppli To function Using the Phone ToMail To Web Toi-ppli To Functions When a phone number, mail address or URL is highlighted on a web page or in mail, you can use it to easily make a call, send i-mode mail or access the web site. Phone To, AV Phone To, Mail To, or Web To function in mail sent from a PC may not be available. Phone To/AV Phone To Function Make a voice call (Phone To)/video call (AV Phone To) to the highlighted phone number at a site or in mail. 1 Select a phone number ] Perform the following operations Make CallMake a voice call. Video phoneMake a video call. CopyCopy the selected phone number. Add to phonebookAdd the selected phone number to the Phonebook. Go to Step 2 in "Saving Contacts to the Phonebook from Received or Dialed Calls" (P84). Note The Phone To/AV Phone To function may not be available depending on the site. Mail To Function You can send mail to an Email address highlighted on a site page or in mail. 1 Select a mail address Go to Step 3 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail"

(P131). Note The Mail To function may not be available depending on the site. Web To Function Access a URL highlighted on a site page or in mail. 1 Select a URL When you access a URL shown in mail, press C[Connect] after Step1. 188 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Note The Web To function may not be available depending on the site. How a URL is displayed may vary depending on the site. The Web To function may be available using a highlighted item other than a URL. i-ppli To Function You can start i-ppli from a URL highlighted on a site or in i-mode mail. If a check mark is not placed next to "Site i-ppli to"(P233) or

"Mail i-ppli to" in "Set i-ppli to", the i-ppli will not start. 1 Select i-ppli information ] "Yes"

Note Some i-ppli, that immediately start directly from the site using the i-ppli To function, may not be saved. i-mode setting Configuring i-mode Settings Set the functions for i-mode or Message R/F. Network Configuring Network Settings 1 i-mode menu screen (P174) ] "i-mode setting" ]

"Communication" ] Perform the following operations:

[Connection timeout]

Set the time until the connection is automatically terminated if no response was returned due to network traffic.P191

[Check new messages]

Specify request items when using "Check new messages".

] Place check marks next to the items to check ] I[Done]

Display Configuring Display Settings 1 i-mode menu screen (P174) ] "i-mode setting" ]

"Display" ] Perform the following operations

[Images]

Set whether to display images or Flash movies contained on site pages or Screen memos.

[Sound effect]

Set whether to play sound effects of Flash movies contained on sites or Screen memos.

[Use phone info]

When a Flash image is displayed on a site or in a Screen memo, information saved on the terminal may be required. Set whether to use the information from the phone in this case. Font size]

Set the font size for sites, Screen memos, or message text in Message R/F. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel 189

[Scroll]

Set the number of lines scrolled with each H press on sites, Screen memos, or Message R/F.

[Message list]

Set the display method of the Message R/F list screen. 1 lineDisplay only the subject in one line. 2 linesDisplay the subject and received date and time in two lines.

[Auto-display]

Set how Messages R/F are displayed automatically.P165

[Melody auto play]

Set whether to automatically play a melody when a Message R/ F is displayed.P165 Note

<Images>

Images may not be displayed correctly even when

"Images" is set to "ON". In this case, appears.

<Sound effect>

Even if "Sound effect" is set to "ON", some sound effects may not sound depending on the Flash movie.

<Use phone info.>

When this option is set to "Yes", the battery level, signal strength, Date & Time, Ring Volume, Language, and terminal model information may be sent to the IP (Information Provider) via the Internet, and a third party may intercept the information. Home Configuring the Home Setting To set the home URL, select "Home" from the site display screen sub menu. 1 i-mode menu screen (P174) ] "i-mode setting" ]

"Home"

2 Select "Enable" ] Select the "http" field ] Enter the URL ] I[Done]

Note If "Home" is set to "Disable", even selecting "Home"

does not open the specified page. The URL entered in the "http://" field will remain intact. Others Configuring Other Settings 1 i-mode menu screen (P174) ] "i-mode setting" ]

"Others" ] Perform the following operations:

[Check settings]

Check the options set in "i-mode setting".

[Reset settings]

Reset the options set in "i-mode setting" to the default.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

190 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Connection timeout Setting the Connection Timeout Set the time until the connection is automatically terminated if no response was returned due to network traffic. 1 i-mode menu screen (P174) ] "i-mode setting" ]

"Communication" ] "Connection timeout" ] "60 seconds"/"90 seconds"/"Unlimited"

If "Unlimited" is selected, the connection will not be automatically terminated. Note Even if this option is set to "Unlimited", the connection attempt may be terminated because of the signal strength. Host Selection Changing the Access Point from i-mode

* If you use the i-mode service of DOCOMO, do not change the access point. Set an APN (Access Point Name) when you use services other than i-mode (DOCOMO). i-mode and i-mode mail become unavailable when you connect to an APN other than DOCOMO. Adding Access Points 1 M[Menu] ]

(Settings) ]

"International roaming" ] "Network" ]

"Host selection"

2 I[Add] ] Enter the security code ]

Perform the following operations:

Host selection screen

[Host name]

Enter the host name within 15 full-pitch or 30 half-pitch characters.

[Host number]

Enter the number of the access point within 99 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.

[Host address]

Enter the host address within 30 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.

[Host address 2]

Enter the host address for i-channel within 30 half-pitch alphanumeric characters. 3 I[Done]

Changing the Access Point 1 Host selection screenP191] Select the access point to change i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel 191 Host Selection Screen Sub Menu 1 Host selection screen (P191) ] Move the cursor to an access point ] M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

This option is not available while "i-mode" is selected. SSL Certificate Info Manipulating SSL Certificates You can view an SSL Certificate, or set a certificate valid or invalid.

[Add new]

Add a new access point.P191

[Edit]

Edit the access point settings.

] Enter the security code ] Edit the settings ] I [Done]

[Delete]

Delete the selected access point.

] "Yes" ] Enter the security code

[View]

Display the selected access point settings. C[Edit]: Edit the access point settings. Note Pake-Hodai/Pake-Hodai Full/Pake-Hodai Double is not applied to packet communication with an APN other than "i-mode". When an access point is changed, the i-Channel ticker does not appear. When the information is updated or you download the latest information by pressing Q in Standby, the ticker will appear automatically. If the current access point is deleted, "i-mode" will be set as the default host. 192 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel 1 i-mode menu screen (P174) ] "i-mode setting" ] "Certificates"

C[Select]: Display the contents of the selected certificate. Certificate list screen Icons displayed on the Certificate list screen Icon Description Valid certificate Invalid certificate 2 Move the cursor to a certificate ] I[Invalid] / [Valid]

Certificate List Screen Sub Menu 1 Certificate list screen (P192) ] Move the cursor to a certificate ] M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Certificate Info]

Display detailed information about the selected certificate.

[Valid/Invalid]

Set the selected certificate to valid or invalid. Certificates used for SSL communication These certificates are issued by an authentication company, and are saved on the terminal by default. i-motion i-motion movies are videos with graphics and audio. They can be obtained from i-motion sites, played, saved, and set as the Stand-by display or a ring tone, etc. i-motion Types There are 2 types of i-motion movies. Standard type There are 2 formats of the Standard type. 1 The format in which an i-motion movie can be played after download (Up to 500KB) 2 The format in which an i-motion movie can be played during the download (Up to 500KB) Some standard type i-motion movies cannot be saved. Std/Streaming types You can play this type of i-mode movie while it is being downloading. Up to 2MB of i-motion movie can be played. The data will be deleted after playback. It cannot be saved on the FOMA terminal. Note i-motion movies that can be downloaded and played are in the MP4 (Mobile MP4) format. i-motion movies in the ASF format cannot be downloaded or played. i-motion Download Downloading i-motion Movies from Sites Up to 1000 i-motion movies can be saved. However, the savable number depends on the amount of the data. Downloaded i-motion movies are saved in the "i-mode" folder in

"i-motion" of the "Data box". 1 From the currently accessed site ] Select an imotion movie When "i-motion auto play" is set to "ON", an i-motion movie is played automatically after being downloaded. Operations during PlaybackP250 Std/Streaming-Type i-motion movies The Playback confirmation screen opens. Select "Yes"

to play the i-motion movie while it is being downloaded. When "i-motion type" is set to "Standard type", you cannot play the i-motion movie during the download. Switch the type to "Std/Streaming", and download the imotion movie again.P194 2 After the downloadQ ] "Save"

PlayPlay a downloaded i-motion movie. File propertyDisplay detailed information about the downloaded i-motion movie. BackReturn to the Site display screen without saving the i-motion movie. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel 193 Note Depending on the connected site or i-motion movie, some i-motion movies may not be downloaded, or played during the download. If you play a movie while downloading it, the movie may stop playing or the picture may become distorted due to signal strength. Each i-motion file name must be unique in the same folder. Some i-motion movies cannot be saved on the FOMA terminal. Some i-motion movies have playback restrictions. appears for an i-motion movie with fixed number of plays set. appears for the i-motion movie with the playback expiration or playback restrictions set. Expired i-motion movies cannot be played. Some downloaded i-motion movies may not play correctly. When a Link is Set in Ticker When a ticker is set in an i-motion movie, the ticker is displayed during playback. If a phone number, a mail address, or an URL is included in the ticker, you can use Phone To, AV Phone To, Mail To, or Web To functions after the ticker is finished. 1 After an i-motion playback is finished ] Select an item i-motion Auto Play Setting Whether to Play an i-motion Movie Setting Whether to Play an i-motion Movie Setting Whether to Play an i-motion Movie Automatically Automatically Automatically Set whether to play an i-motion movie automatically when it is downloaded from a site or mail. 1 i-mode menu screen (P174) ] "i-mode setting" ]

"i-motion" ] "i-motion auto play" ] "ON"/"OFF"

Note Even if this option is set to "OFF", streaming-type i-motions will be automatically played. i-motion type Specifying a Type of i-motion Movie to Download Set the type of the new i-motion movie to download from a site. 1 i-mode menu screen (P174) ] "i-mode setting" ]

"i-motion" ] "i-motion type" ] Select the type Standard typeOnly standard-type i-motion movies will be downloaded. Std / StreamingThe standard or streaming type i-motion movies will be downloaded. 194 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Note To download streaming type i-motion movies,

"Std/Streaming" must be set. i-Channel i-Channel is a service through which provides information such as news or weather forecasts to i-Channel compatible terminal. (Only Japanese) The latest updated information receives automatically that is displayed in a ticker on the Stand-by display. Press Q to open the channel list with the updated information. Moreover, you can obtain useful information by selecting favorite channels from the channel list. The view of i-Channel listP195 i-Channel is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription (an i-mode contract is necessary for this subscription). There are 2 types of i-channel "Basic channels" provided by DOCOMO and "Favorite channels" provided by IP

(Information Service Provider). "Basic channels" are provided by DOCOMO. They are saved by default and immediately become available upon subscription to i-Channel. Packet communication charges do not apply to automatic update of information delivered to "Basic channels". "Favorite channels" are provided by an IP

(Information Provider) other than DOCOMO and are available when you register your favorite channels. The i-Channel service fee does not include Packet communication charges for automatic update of information delivered to "Favorite channels". However,

"Basic channels" and "Favorite channels" require packet communication charges for viewing detailed information from a channel list, in addition to the i-Channel service fee. The i-Channel service charge does not include the packet communication charges for auto-updating the "Basic channels" information that is delivered during International Roaming. For details about i-Channel, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version". Displaying the i-Channels If you subscribed to i-Channel, information appears in a ticker on the Stand-by Display as the information is received. To display the ticker automatically , set "Ticker display" to "ON". P196 When Public mode (Drive mode) is set, the ticker will not be displayed. 1 Stand-by display ] Q Q Ticker Ticker Channel list 2 Select a channel The site is connected and detail information appears. LThe Channel list screen returns. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel 195 Note While information is being received, blinks. Even when the information arrives, a ring tone does not sound nor does the terminal vibrate. The illumination does not light/blink either. Information may not be received when the terminal power is turned off, while the terminal is out of service area, or when the signal reception is weak. Press Q in Stand-by to receive information. Then the obtained information will be displayed automatically in the ticker on the Stand-by display. Also, information may not be received if the default settings are kept. In this case, hold down Q. The information will be received and it will be displayed in the ticker on the Stand-by display automatically. In some conditions, information may be received only when a channel list is displayed. If you change the access point in "Host selection" of

"i-mode setting", the access point of i-Channel is also changed. (Normally, you do not need to change the settings). The ticker will not appear after i-Channel is canceled. When an i-motion movie is set to the Standby display, the ticker will not appear during playback. There may be a warning of failure to acquire channel information if:

- the i-Channel access point has been changed

- The UIM has been replaced i-Channel Setting Configuring i-Channel Settings You can set whether to display the ticker on the Stand-by display or to set the ticker display speed. All i-channel information on the FOMA terminal can be deleted. 1 I ] "i-Channel" ] Perform the following operations:

[i-Channel list]

Open the Channel list screen. Ticker setting]

Ticker displaySet whether to display a Ticker on the Stand-by display. Ticker speedSet the ticker display rate. Reset i-Channel]

Delete the i-Channel data downloaded in FOMA terminal to reset Ticker Display to its default status when purchasing. Note

<Ticker display>

If you cancel the i-mode service before canceling i-channel, the "Ticker display" setting remains. 196 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Camera Before Using the Camera Capturing Still Images Photo-mode Capturing Movies Movie-mode Changing the Capture Settings Changing the Camera Settings Camera Settings 198 200 203 205 206 Copyrights and Portrait Rights You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute contents such as text, images, music, or software downloaded from web sites on the Internet, or images captured by the cameras of this product without permission from the copyright holder except when the copy or quote is for personal use that is allowed under Copyright Law. Note that it may be prohibited to capture or record live performances or exhibitions even for personal use. Refrain from taking portraits of other persons and uploading such portraits to websites without their consent, as this violates portrait rights. Please be considerate of other people's privacy when capturing and sending pictures using camera-equipped mobile phones. 197 Even in Manner mode, the shutter tone sounds at a fixed volume. The shutter tone sounds from the Speaker even when a Flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch

(optional) is connected to the FOMA terminal. Using the Camera To take a still image or movie using camera. Make sure to open the FOMA terminal when using camera. The image will be displayed the same as the one shown in the FOMA terminal. (Not mirror image) Before Using the Camera Notes for Capturing Images The camera employs high precision technology, but some pixels or lines may seem brighter or darker than others. Also, when you capture images in places with insufficient lighting, noises seen as white lines increase. This is normal. Clean the lens with a soft cloth before capturing. If the lens is stained with fingerprints or oil, the captured image may appear out of focus or blurred. Do not leave the terminal in a warm place or under a direct sunlight for a long period of time. The quality of captured images or video may deteriorate. If you capture under a fluorescent light, mercury lamp or sodium lamp flickering at high speed, flickering such as stripes may appear. The color tone of still images or movies may vary depending on the capturing timing. Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight for a long period of time and do not point at the sun or a bright light directly. The image may become discolored or the camera may fail. Do not cover the lens with your fingers, hair or the terminal strap when capturing. Capturing a fast moving object may result in an image slightly distorted from the image displayed on the screen at the time of capturing, or the image may be blurred. When the battery level is low, you may not be able to save captured still images or movies. Check the battery level before using the camera. Captured still images or movies may differ from the actual subjects in brightness or color tone. 198 Camera Capture Screen Components The meanings of marks (icons and others) on the still image photography/video capture screen are as follows:

1 2 3 4567 8 1 Camera-modeP201, P204 8 Continuous modeP201

Still image 1 2 3 4 69!

Movie capture Photo-mode Movie-mode 2 Image sizeP201, P204 UXGA (12001600) SXGA (9601280) VGA (640480) CIF (352288) Wallpaper (240x320) QCIF (176x144) Sub-QCIF (128x96) Phonebook (120x160) Menu-icon (80x70) 3 QualityP201, P204 Super fine Fine Standard 4 White balanceP202, P204 Daylight Cloudy Incandescent Fluorescent 5 BrightnessP205 Brightness level 6 Night modeP202, P204 7 Auto timerP202 3sec 5sec 10sec Auto Manual 9 Size restrictionP204 No restriction 2MB 500KB

! TypeP204 Sound+Video Movie only Sound only

" Shooting frame

# Capture progress bar Display the elapsed capture time with a bar.

$ Number of available shots

(Still image capture screen)/

Maximum capturing duration

(Movie capture screen)P389, P390

% Elapsed capture time/Maximum capture time Display the elapsed capture time/

Maximum capture time

& Control Keys Keys available for navigation Camera 199 Save Format of Still Images or Movies Still Image File Movie File MP4(Mobile MP4) QCIF (176x144) Sub-QCIF (128x96) File Format JPEG Resolution UXGA (12001600) SXGA (9601280) VGA (640480) CIF (352288) Wallpaper (240x320) QCIF (176x144) Sub-QCIF (128x96) Phonebook (120x160) Menu-icon (80x70) Encoding Format File Extensi on File Name The year, month, date, hour and minute of the time of Video: MPEG-4 Voice: AMR

.3gp

.jpg capture will be added automatically. Example: If taken at 10:10:10 seconds on 2009/05/1 Photo-mode: "P2009_0501_101010"

Movie-mode: "V2009_0501_1010_0"*

Maximum Approx.1600Kbytes File Size

* The video file name does not contain the capture time in Approx. 80Mbytes seconds. 200 Camera Photo-mode Capturing Still Images Captured still images are stored in the "Camera" folder under

"My Picture" in the "Data box" on the FOMA terminal. 1 Stand-by display] G Still image capture screen Key operations on the still image capture screen Key C [Take]

H J M[Menu]

I[ ]

Q[Cancel]

Description Shutter Zoom Brightness controls Display sub menu Display "My picture" folder list screen*

Exit Photo-mode

* If a still image is already saved in "Camera" folder in "My picture", the still image list screen in "Camera" is displayed. 2 Frame the shot ]C [Take]

After an image is captured, the Confirm save screen opens, and you can select whether to save the image. 3 C [Save] ] Select the saving destination folder ] C

[OK]

The confirmation save screen is appeared, press C [OK] to save the captured image and the still image captured screen returns. To cancel saving Press I[Cancel]. Press I [Mail] on the Confirm save screen to create i-mode mail with the captured still image attached. Confirm save For images captured with "Continuous mode"

You can select, delete, or display images to save on the Confirm save screen. To save selected images, select images to save and press C [Save] or M [Menu] ] "Save selected". The

"Specify saving destination" screen opens. To save all captured images, press M [Menu] ] "Save all". The Specify saving destination screen opens. To send selected images via mail, select images to send and press M [Menu] ] "Send via mail". To delete selected images, select images to delete and press M [Menu] ] "Delete". To display only the selected images, press I [View]. When "Auto saving" (P206) is set to "ON"

If you press C [Take], a still image is captured and automatically saved in the destination specified under

"Auto saving" (P206). Note Even when Manner mode is activated, the shutter tone sounds when capturing. When a still image is being displayed, the illumination keeps red. While taking the video, the illumination blinks. Still Image Capture Screen sub menu 1 Still image capture screenP200] M [Menu] ]

Perform the following operations No frame is attached. Select a frame from "My picture". Camera-mode]

Change modes Shoot with frame]

Add a frame to the subject when capturing an image. Off Choose frame Continuous mode]

Capture continuous (sequential) images when the shutter is pressed. Up to 6 continuous images smaller than CIF 352288 pixels, or up to 4 images of CIF 352288 pixels. Off Auto No continuous capturing. Take continuous pictures by pressing the shutter once. Images are captured with approx. 0.7 second intervals. Manual Take continuous pictures by repeatedly pressing the shutter. Camera 201 Night mode]

Activate when capturing images in dark places. Effect]

Add an effect when capturing images. White balance]

Set hue/tint for the image. When set according to the capturing conditions, a naturally colored image can be produced. Auto timer]

Set the number of seconds from the time the shutter is pressed until the picture is taken. Select size]

Set the image size to take. Quality]

Select the image quality of still images. Confirm Save Screen sub menu 1 Confirm Save screen (P200)]M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[New picture]

Return to the still image capture screen.

[Send via mail]

Create i-mode mail with the captured image attached.P131

[Edit image]

Edit the captured still image.P244

[Delete]

Cancel save and delete the still image.

[Set as wallpaper]

Set the captured image as the Stand-by display wallpaper. Note If the "Select size" is set to "UXGA (1200x1600)

,SXGA (960x1280)", the zoom feature cannot be used.

<Continuous mode>

When "Continuous mode" is set, the picture size is reduced to "CIF (352x288) " if the "Select size" is set larger than "CIF (352x288)". When "Continuous mode" is set, the "Auto timer" is disabled. 202 Camera Movie-mode Capturing Movies Captured still images are stored in the "Camera" folder under

"My Picture" in the "Data box" on the FOMA terminal. 1 Stand-by display]G (For 1+

seconds) 3 To stop capturing ]C After a movie is captured, the Confirm save screen opens, and you can select whether to save the video. From the Confirm save screen, select M [Menu] ]

"Play" to play the video. 4 C [Save] ] Select a destination folder ] C [OK]

Press C [OK] to save the captured video. After that, the Movie capture screen appears. To cancel saving Press I[Cancel]

Press I[Mail] on the Confirm save screen to create i-mode mail with the captured video attached. Key operations on the Movie capture screen Movie capture screen Confirm save screen Key C H Description Start capturing/End capturing Zoom*1 Brightness controls*1 Display sub menu Display "i-motion" folder list screen*2 Exit Movie-mode J M[Menu]

I[ ]

Q[Cancel]

*1 This is available during a movie capture.

*2 If a still image is already saved in "Camera" folder in "i-motion", the video list screen in "Camera" is displayed. 2 Frame the shot]C Start capturing a movie. When "Auto saving" (P206) is set to "ON"

C [Start capturing] Capturing ends, and the captured video automatically will be saved in the destination specified under "Auto saving" (P206). The Confirm save screen opens and the Movie capture screen returns. Note Even when Manner mode is activated, the shutter tone sounds when capturing starts and ends. When movie capture screen is being displayed, the illumination keeps red. While capturing movie, the illumination blinks. Video capturing will be terminated when it is interrupted by a call. After the call is terminated, the Confirm save screen appears. Camera 203 Movie Capture Screen Sub Menu Confirm Save Screen sub menu 1 Movie capture screen (P203) ]M [Menu]]Perform the following operations:

1 Confirm Save screen (P203)]M[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[New movie]

Return to the Movie capture screen.

[Send via mail]

Create i-mode mail with the captured movie attached.P131

[Delete]

Cancel saving the movie and delete it.

[Set as wallpaper]

Set as the Stand-by display wallpaper. Camera-mode]

Change modes Size restriction]

Limit the file size of a captured movie. Night mode]

Activate when capturing images in dark places. Effect]

Add an effect when capturing images. White balance]

Set hue/tint for the image. When set according to the capturing conditions, a naturally colored image can be produced. Select size]

Set the image size to take. Quality]

Set the image quality of movies. Type]

Set whether graphics or sounds are to be included in movies. Common mode]

Movies captured when "Common mode" is activated can be played regardless of the type or model of the FOMA terminal. Note When "Common mode" is set to "ON", "Quality" is not available. 204 Camera Changing the Capture Settings Set the image zoom magnification. Available maximum magnifications are as follows:

Using Zoom Set the Camera functions according to the capturing conditions The maximum zoom of each image size is shown below. Camera mode Photo mode Movie mode Image size SXGA (1280x960) SXGA (1280x960) VGA (640x480) CIF (352x288) Wallpaper (240x320) QCIF (176x144) Sub-QCIF (128x96) For the Phonebook

(120x160) Menu-icon (80x70) QCIF (176x144) Sub-QCIF (128x96) Zoom Maximum magnification 10steps 10steps Approx.1.8 Approx.2.1 Approx.2.2 Approx.2.7 Approx.2.8 Approx.3.4 Approx.2.1 Approx.2.3 1 Still image capture screen (P200) / movie capture screen (P203) ] Use H to set zoom Zoom Zoom Settings

(Example: Still image capture screen) Adjusting Brightness Adjust the brightness (exposure) of the image. The brightness can be set from -2 to +2. 1 Still image capture screen (P200) / movie capture screen (P203) ] J Select brightness (exposure) of the image Brightness Display brightness

(Example: Still image capture screen) Camera 205 Camera Settings Changing the Camera Settings Saving Option Set whether to save the captured still image/movie automatically. 1 M [Menu] ]

(Camera) ]"Camera settings"

]"Saving option"]Perform the following operations:

C [List]: List of items is displayed.

[Auto saving]

Set whether to save the captured image automatically.

[Save picture to]*

Specify the saving destination for a still image.

[Save movie to]*

Specify the saving destination for a movie.

* This appears when "Auto saving" is set to "On". 2 I [Done]

Setting the Auto Timer Set the number of seconds from the time the shutter is pressed until an image is captured. The Auto Timer is not available for movie capturing.

[Auto timer]

1 Still image capture screen (P200)]M[Menu]]

2 "None"/"3sec"/"5sec"/"10sec"

(the number represents the number of seconds) appears at the top of the screen. 3 C [Take]

Auto timer starts. An image is captured after the set number of seconds automatically. After the shutter button is pressed, Illumination flashes before the image is captured. 206 Camera Setting the Shutter Sound 1 M [Menu] ]

]"Shutter sound"]Select a shutter tone Selecting an item plays the sound.

(Camera) ]"Camera settings"

Tuning Flicker The flicker on the screen under a fluorescent light, etc. may be reduced. 1 M [Menu] ]

(Camera) ]"Camera settings"

]"Flicker tuning" ] Select the tuning method Auto Suppress the flicker automatically. 50Hz Select this option in the location where the frequency of the power is 50Hz. 60Hz Select this option in the location where the frequency of the power is 60Hz. Camera 207 Music Chaku-Uta-Full This FOMA terminal can play back Chaku-Uta-Full songs. Download a Chaku-Uta-Full songs using i-mode. Before downloading Chaku-Uta-Full songs from a Web site, read the license agreement (license and prohibited activities, etc.) carefully. Chaku-Uta-Full songs saved in the FOMA terminal can be played for personal use only. When playing music, do not violate a third party's intellectual property rights such as copyright, or other rights. Do not copy or move Chaku-Uta- Full songs saved in the FOMA terminal to a PC. Playing Music Saving a Chaku-Uta-Full song Playing a Chaku-Uta-Full Song Using Playlist Managing Folders, Playlists, and Chaku-Uta-Full Songs Playing Chaku-Uta-Full Songs Suitable for Special Listening Circumstances Music life 210 210 210 215 217 219 209 Playing Music You can play music with the FOMA terminal in one of the following 2 ways:

Playing music with the Music player Play a Chaku-Uta-Full song downloaded from a site. Playing an i-motion movie Play an audio only i-motion movie downloaded using i-mode and saved in the Data box. P249 Saving a Chaku-Uta-Full song Downloading a Chaku-Uta-Full song Up to 1000 Chaku-Uta Full songs of up to 5MB each can be saved. Downloaded Chaku-Uta-Full songs will be saved in the

"i-mode" folder or "Music" in the "Data box". 1 Access a site that provides Chaku-Uta- Full songs ]

Select a Chaku-Uta-Full song to download After the download completes, a confirmation appears. 2 "Save" ] Select save location Play : Play the downloaded Chaku-Uta-Full song. File property : Display information about the downloaded Chaku-Uta-Full song Back : Return to the Web site without saving the Chaku-Uta-Full song. Note Each Chaku-Uta-Full song name must be unique in the same folder. Playing a Chaku-Uta-Full Song You can play a Chaku-Uta-Full song saved in the FOMA terminal. Available Chaku-Uta-Full File Format File Format Bit rate The number of songs that can be saved The number of playlists that can be created MP4 MPEG-4 AAC: 8-128 Kbps HE-AAC: 8-128 Kbps Enhanced aacPlus: 16-48 kbps Approx. 1000 songs Up to 10 1 M [Menu] ]

following operations:

(MUSIC)]"Music player"]Perform the 210 Music MUSIC screen

[Music life]

Play Chaku-Uta-Full songs suitable for special occasions or circumstances.P219

[Playlists]

Display, create, or play a Playlist.P215

[All songs]

Up to 50 songs saved in the FOMA terminal will be displayed. P211

[Artist]

Sort and display Chaku-Uta-Full songs in the "All songs" folder by artist.

[Genre]

Sort and display Chaku-Uta-Full songs in the "All songs" folder by genre.

[Album]

Sort and display Chaku-Uta-Full songs in the "All songs" folder by album. Note To play the last played song, in Stand-by select M

[Menu]]

(MUSIC) ] "Recent played"

Sorting conditions for Artists, Genre and Album is in accordance with the detailed information about a Chaku-Uta-Full song. When you enjoy the programs overseas, the actual expiration date may be earlier or later than the date displayed for the program. Continuously Playing Chaku-Uta-Full Songs You can continuously play all songs saved in the FOMA terminal, or only songs specified by artist name, genre, or album title. Example: To play music in "All songs"

1 Music Player screen (P210)]"All songs"

Chaku-Uta-Full 2 Move the cursor to a Chaku-Uta-Full song ] C "Play"

Chaku-Uta-Full songs will be played in the order of appearance starting from the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song. 3 1 2 6 7 5 4 Music player screen Music 211 1 Album title, artist name and song title 2 Playback progress bar/Elapsed time/Total time The bar shows the playback elapsed time. 3 Volume 4 Shuffle setting This appears when "Shuffle ON" is selected 5 Repeat setting Current song All songs 6 Jacket image/Stand-by image/Lyrics 7 Playback status Key operations on the Music player screen Key Description C C (for1+seconds) H F /E L /R L/R(Hold down)

1-5 7/9 8 I[List]

P 212 Music Pause/Play Cue the songup to the beginning, then pause Adjust the volume Cue the song up to the beginning or play the previous/Play the next song Rewind/fast forward while being pressed Switch the Shuffle setting Switch the Repeat setting Change the screen design Display the previous/next image Switch Jacket image/Lyrics/Hide Open the Chaku-Uta-Full list screen is displayed at the right side of the song title while list screen is displayed. Quit the Music player Note The music continues even if you close the FOMA terminal when the Music player screen is open. Playback is paused for the following occasions. The playback will resume automatically after the operation completes.

- When a voice or video call arrives

- When i-mode mail or SMS is received

- When an alarm sounds Sound effects such as the key tone do not sound during Chaku-Uta-Full playback. Sub Menu on the Chaku-Uta-Full List Screen 1 Chaku-Uta-Full list screen (P211) ]Move the cursor to a Chaku-Uta-Full song]M [Menu] ]Perform the following operations:

C [Play] : Play from the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song. I [Playlist]: Add the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song to a playlist.P217

[Play]

Play from the selected Chaku-Uta-Full songs.

[Add to playlist]

Add the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song to a playlist.P217

[Multiple choice]

Select and play multiple Chaku-Uta-Full songs Operations during playback are the same as for a Playlist.P215

]Place check marks next to Chaku-Uta-Full songs to play

]I [Play]

Press M [Menu] to select "Play", "Add to playlist", or "Mark/

Unmark". Selecting "Add to playlist" allows you to add Chaku-

Uta-Full songs with check marks to a playlist.

[Set repeat]

None Playback is not repeated. Current songThe Chaku-Uta-Full song in playback is repeated. Play all Play all Chaku-Uta-Full songs on the Chaku-Uta-Full list screen repeatedly.

[Jacket image]

Display or save the Jacket image to the Data box. P214

[Lyric]

Display or save the Lyrics to the Data box. P214

[Set as tone]

Set the Chaku-Uta-Full song in playback as a ring tone. P214

[Player skin]

Change the appearance of the Music player screen.

[Connect to URL]

Access the site if the Chaku-Uta-Full song in playback contains a URL.

[Search]*

Specify "Title", "Artist", "Album", "Genre", or "Year" to search for a Chaku-Uta-Full song.

]Select an item]Enter the item]I[Search]

All Chaku-Uta-Full songs that match all specified conditions are displayed.

[Sort]

Set conditions to rearrange Chaku-Uta-Full songs.

[File property]

Display or edit the information of the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song.

] Select an item ]I[Edit] ] Edit the item Some items cannot be edited.

* This will not appear on the Chaku-Uta-Full list screen in Artists/Genre/Album. Sub Menu on the Music Player Screen 1 Music player screen (P211)]M[Menu]]Perform the following operations:

Go to MUSIC]

Open the MUSIC screen while a Chaku-Uta-Full song is being played.P210

[List]

Open the Chaku-Uta-Full list screen.P211

[File property]

Display the information of the Chaku-Uta-Full song in playback.

[Shuffle ON/ShuffleOFF]

Enable or disable shuffle play. Music 213 Setting a Chaku-Uta-Full song as a Ring 1 Music player screen (P211)] M [Menu]]

"Set as tone"

Note To select a Chaku-Uta-Full song as Alarm, setting the Chaku-Uta Full wanted to "ON" in advance is required. If selecting "Alarm tone", further select which alarm. Some Chaku-Uta-Full songs cannot be set as a ringtone. 2 Select a ring tone type Voice ringtone Set as a ring tone for a voice call. Video ringtone Set as a ring tone for a video call. Mail tone Set as a ring tone for i-mode mail. Message R tone Set as a ring tone for Message R. Message F tone Set as a ring tone for Message F. SMS Alarm tone Set as a ring tone for SMS. Set as an alarm tone. 3 Select a range to set as the ring tone

[Full song ring tone]

Set the entire Chaku-Uta-Full song in playback as a ring tone.

[Point ring tone]

If the Chaku-Uta-Full song in the playback has already a range specified, this option can be selected.

[Free point ring tone]

Specify and set starting and ending points as a range for the ring tone.

]Use J to find a start point]M[Start]]J UseJto find an end point]M [Done]

214 Music Viewing Images or Lyrics Contained in a Chaku-Uta-Full Song You can view and save Jacket images, Stand-by images, or Lyrics contained in a Chaku-Uta-Full song. 1 Music player screen (P211)]M [Menu] ]"Jacket image"/"Lyric"]Perform the following operations:

[Next image]

View the next image or lyrics.

[Previous image]

View the previous image or lyrics.

[Full view]

View an image or lyrics to fit the screen.

[Display ON / OFF]

Show/hide the image or lyrics.

[Save in databox]

Save the displayed image or lyrics to "i-mode" in "My Picture" in the "Data box". Using Playlist You can specify the order in which to play Chaku-Uta-Full songs in a Playlist. You can play any songs in the order of your choice from all songs saved in the FOMA terminal. Charging with the AC Adapter 1 Playlist screen (P215) ] Select a Playlist Setting a Chaku-Uta-Full song as a Ring Up to 10 Playlists and up to 50 Chaku-Uta-Full songs per Playlist can be saved. 1 Music player screen (P210)]"Playlists"

List screen for Chaku-Uta Full in Playlists 2 Move the cursor to a Chaku-Uta-Full song ] C "Play"

Chaku-Uta-Full songs will be played in the order of appearance starting from the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song. Sub Menu on the Playlist List Screen 1 Playlist screen (P215)]Move the cursor to a Playlist]M[Menu]]Perform the following operations:

Playlist screen 2 I [New] ]Enter a Playlist name Up to 30 full-pitch or half-pitch characters can be entered. 3 Place check marks next to Chaku-Uta-Full songs to add]I[Done]

M [Menu]: You can select "File property", "Mark all",

"Unmark all", or "Sort".

[Play]

Play the selected Playlist.

[New playlist]

Create a Playlist.P215

[Rename]

Change the Playlist name.

[Copy playlist]

Copy the selected Playlist and create a new Playlist.

]"OK" ] Enter a new playlist name Music 215

[Delete playlist]

Delete the selected Playlist.

[Multiple choice]

Select and delete Playlists.

] Place check marks next to Playlists to delete]I[Delete]]"Yes"

Press M [Menu] to select "Delete" or "Mark/Unmark". Note

<Rename/Delete playlist>

These options are not available for "All songs" and

"Quick playlist".

<Copy playlist>

This option is not available for "All songs". Sub Menu on the Playlist Chaku-Uta-Full List Screen 1 Playlist Chaku-Uta-Full list screen (P215) ]Move the cursor to a Chaku-Uta-Full song]M [Menu]

]Perform the following operations:

I[Add]: Add the displayed Chaku-Uta-Full song to a playlist.

[Play]

Play from the selected Chaku-Uta-Full songs.

[Add songs]

Add the displayed Chaku-Uta-Full song to a playlist.

] Place check marks next to Chaku-Uta-Full songs to add ]

I[Done]

You can select "File property", "Mark all", "Unmark all", or "Sort"

using M [Menu].

[Move]

Change the order of the selected Chaku-Uta-Full songs.

[Delete from list]

Delete the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song from the playlist.

[Multiple choice]

Select and play multiple Chaku-Uta-Full songs operations during playback are the same as for a Playlist.P215

] Place check marks next to Chaku-Uta-Full songs to play ]

I [Play]

Press M [Menu] to select "Play", "Delete from list", or "Mark/

Unmark".

[Search]

Specify "Title", "Artist", "Album", "Genre", or "Year" to search for a Chaku-Uta-Full song.

] Move the cursor to an item ]Enter the item]I[Search]

All Chaku-Uta-Full songs that match all specified conditions are displayed. Press M [Menu] to select "Play", "Add to playlist", "Save",

"Multiple choice", "Sort" or "File property". Selecting "Save"

deletes Chaku-Uta-Full that were not found from the Playlist.

[Sort]

Rearrange Chaku-Uta-Full songs based on the sort.

[File property]

Display or edit the information of the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song.

] Move the cursor to an item ]I[Edit] ] Edit the item Some items cannot be edited. 216 Music Adding a Chaku-Uta-Full Song to a Playlist 1 Music player screen (P210)]"All songs"

2 Move the cursor to a Chaku-Uta-Full song to add]I[Playlist]] Select a Playlist The Chaku-Uta-Full song is added to the selected Playlist. I[New]: Create a new Playlist with the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song. To add multiple Chaku-Uta-Full songs M[Menu]]"Multiple choice"]Place check marks next to Chaku-Uta-Full songs to save]M[Menu]]Select

"Add to Playlist". Adding a Chaku-Uta-Full Song to the Quick Playlist Press A for 1+ seconds on the Chaku-Uta-Full list screen (P211) to save the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song to the "Quick playlist". This option is useful to collect your favorite Chaku-Uta-Full songs. To play the saved Chaku-Uta-Full song, select the "Quick playlist" on the Playlist screen. Managing Folders, Playlists, and Chaku-Uta-Full Songs Chaku-Uta-Full songs are saved in the "Music" folder in the Data box. Delete or move a Chaku-Uta-Full song from the Data box. 1 M[Menu]]

(Data box)]"Music"

Performing these steps may start playing an available Chaku-Uta-Full song. In this case, press Q. I [Switch]: Switch between list and picture display. 2 Move the cursor to a folder ]C [Open] ] Move the cursor to a Chaku-Uta-Full song ] M [Menu] ]

Perform the following operations:

Managing Playlists

"Playlist" ] Move the cursor to a playlist ] M [Menu]

Refer to "Sub Menu on the Playlist List Screen"

(P285) for information on the sub menu items. Files]

Play Move Copy Play the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song. Move the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song to another folder.

]Select the destination folder]I [Move]

Copy the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song to another folder.

]Select the destination folder]I [Copy]

Delete the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song. Delete Delete all Delete all Chaku-Uta-Full songs in the folder. Rename Change the display name of the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song. Reset name Reset the display name of the selected file to its default name.

[Multiple choice]

Select and delete multiple Chaku-Uta-Full songs

]Place check marks next to songs to delete]I [Delete]

]"Yes"

Music 217 Note When the "Playlist" folder is open, press I [New] to create a new Playlist.P215 If a Chaku-Uta-Full song saved in a Playlist is deleted, the Chaku-Uta-Full song will be removed from the Playlist. Icons appear for Chaku-Uta-Full songs in the "Data Icon Description Play count is limited but still playable/

in blue)/

( in orange Reached the limit and not playable in blue)/ Not expired (Playable)/

( in orange Expired (Not playable) File with UIM restriction function activated You can move/copy multiple Chaku-Uta-Full songs by performing the following steps:

] Place check marks next to Chaku-Uta-Full songs to move or copy]M[Menu] ] "Move"/"Copy" ] Enter the security code ] Select the destination folder ] I "Move"/"Copy"

Press M [Menu] to select from "Mark", "Mark all", "Unmark", and "Unmark all".

[File property]

Display or edit the information of the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song.

]Move the cursor to the item ]I [Edit] ]Edit the item Some items cannot be edited. Move the cursor to an edited item and press M [Restore to default] OK to undo editing.

[Send viacompose mail]

This option is not available.

[Set as]

Set the selected Chaku-Uta-Full song as a ring tone.P214

[List view/Grid view]

Switch between list and picture display.

[Sort]

Set conditions to rearrange Chaku-Uta-Full songs.

[Memory info.]

Display the status of storage space of the "Data box".

[New folder]

Create a new folder. 218 Music Sub Menu while a Folder Selected 1 Move the cursor to the certificate]M [Menu] ]

Performs the following operations:

[Rename]

Edit a folder name

[New folder]

Create a new folder. Delete]

Delete the selected folder.

[List view/Grid view]

Switch between list and picture display.

[Sort]

Set conditions to rearrange Chaku-Uta-Full songs in a folder.

[Memory Info]

Display the status of storage space of the "Data box".

[Folder property]

The folder size, the number of files in the folder, and the number of folders in the folder are displayed. Note The "Playlist" folder cannot be renamed or deleted.

<New folder>

You cannot create a sub folder in a user-defined folder. Music life Playing Chaku-Uta-Full Songs Suitable for Special Listening Circumstances You can play Chaku-Uta-Full songs suitable for use when commuting, playing sports, or going to bed. 1 "Music player" screen (P210) ]"Music life"]Perform the following operations:

[Train]

Vocal sound is emphasized so that lyrics can be clearly heard even in a low volume when you commute. Playlist Select from "All songs", "Quick playlist" or your playlist. C [List] : List Playlists. Vocal Place emphasis on vocal sounds.

[Sports timer]

Songs are played for a set period. You can use this option as a timer when you want to run for a certain time. The selected Playlist is repeatedly played for the specified time period. Playlist Select from "All songs", "Quick playlist" or your playlist. C [List] : List Playlists. Playing time Enter the playback time. 1Up to 1200 minutes can be entered. Music 219

[Sleeping]

You can set an off timer to stop the playback automatically when lying in bed listening to music. The volume is gradually reduced for about five minutes, and fades out about 50 seconds before stopping the playback. The selected Playlist is repeatedly played for the specified time period. Playlist Select "All songs", "Quick playlist" or your playlist. C [List] : List songs from the Playlist. Playing timeEnter a value of minutes until the playback stops.1Up to 1200 minutes can be entered. 2 I[Play]

220 Music

 

 

i-ppli What is an i-ppli?

Downloading i-ppli from a Site Starting an i-ppli Start an i-ppli from a Site or Mail i-ppli To Function Automatically Starting i-ppli Auto start set Viewing Various Information Deleting i-ppli Using Various i-ppli Functions 222 222 223 233 233 234 235 235 221 What is an i-ppli?

"i-ppli" is software for i-mode compatible mobile phones. Downloading various software from i-mode sites allows updating stock price or weather information automatically, playing games without connecting to a network, or using the FOMA terminal more conveniently. Packet communication charges apply. When using overseas, packet communication charges differ from domestic charges. P322 For details about i-ppli, refer to the "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version". Downloading i-ppli from a Site Downloading i-ppli from a Site You can download an i-ppli from a site and save it to the FOMA terminal. Up to 500KB of an application can be downloaded. Up to100 downloaded applications can be saved. This number may be reduced by the software data size. 1 From the currently accessed site ] Select a program I [Cancel]Cancel downloading. When "Display SW info" is set to "Display"

Software information is displayed. C [OK] ] "Yes" to download the program. 2 After the download is completed ] "Yes"

The downloaded software starts. Depending on the software, after the software is downloaded, a screen where you set operating condition may be displayed. The settings can be changed from

"Software set" later. P226 222 i-ppli Note At the start of downloading, a confirmation screen may appear notifying you that the application will use

"the phoneinformation data (stored data and serial number of your mobile phone/UIM)". Press "Yes" to start downloading. Select I [Detail] to check the details of the phone information to be used. In this case, the "serial number of your mobile phone/UIM" is sent to the IP (Information Provider) over the Internet, and it could be intercepted by a third party. However, this action does not reveal your phone number, postal address, age, or gender to the IP or others. If you attempt to re-download software that has already been downloaded with a different UIM, a confirmation asking whether to overwrite appears. Select "Yes" to overwrite. If the maximum number of software programs which can be saved is exceeded or if there is not enough memory space, a confirmation for deletion of another i-ppli appears. If there is not enough free memory space, you can select i-ppli to delete, checking the required memory space to store the new application. Select "Yes" to delete ] Place check marks next to i-ppli to delete ] I [Delete]. ] Select "Yes" to delete the marked software and to start the download. If the download of software fails due to weak signal reception, the software cannot be saved. Even if the download of software fails due to weak signal reception after old software was deleted to increase the available space on the terminal, the old software cannot be restored. Some software that starts immediately after being downloaded cannot be saved. Downloading a Mail-Connected i-ppli Note the followings if you download a mail-connected i-ppli. If you download a mail-connected i-ppli, a folder specific to the mail-connected i-ppli is created in Inbox and Outbox. A reated folder takes the downloaded mail-connected i-ppli name and it is unchangeable. Up to 17 (100 including all other i-pplis) mail-connected i-pplis can be saved. If you attempt to download a mail-connected i-ppli, which will use an existing folder for a mail-connected i-ppli saved in the FOMA terminal, the attempt will be denied. If there is only a folder for a mail-connected i-ppli left in the FOMA terminal, you can download a mail-connected i-ppli which uses that folder. If the folder is not used, you can delete it and create a new folder. A mail-connected i-ppli will not be downloaded if you do not create a folder for it. You cannot delete a folder if a mail-connected i-ppli that uses that folder still exists in the FOMA terminal. If you delete folders that no mail-connected i-ppli uses, folders created in both Inbox and Outbox are deleted at once. If you delete folders that no mail-connected i-ppli uses, you can choose whether to delete all folders automatically created at once. You cannot delete folders, however, if they have any protected messages in them. Display Software info What is an i-ppli?

View i-ppli Information at download time Set whether to display software information before downloading the software. 1 M [Menu] ] "ippli" ] "ippli settings" ] "Display SW info" ] "Display"/"Not display"

Starting an i-ppli 1 The Stand-by display ]

I (for 1+ seconds) Software list screen Icons on the Software List screen Icon Description Standard i-ppli i-ppli DX Auto-start set i-ppli i-ppli downloaded from an SSL site i-ppli 223 2 Select software If "Network set" of "Software set" is set to "Confirm every session", a confirmation whether to allow the communication appears. Select"Yes"/"No"

To exit an i-ppli P ] Select "Yes". To start software from other software Some software can start a specified i-ppli without returning to the Software list screen. If the software to be started is not saved in the FOMA terminal, you need to download it. If the software to be started is not specified, select a software following the instruction on the screen. If a security error occurs If you attempt to perform operations that are not permitted for the software, a security error is indicated and the error is recorded in "Security error history". P234 If a problem occurs with the software If a problem occurs with the software, you can check the contents using the Trace info. P234 To i-ppli creators If software does not behave as expected while being created, you may want to refer to the Trace info. 224 i-ppli Note Some software performs communication while running. You can change the settings in "Network set" of "Software set" to not automatically perform communication.P225 If there is an incoming voice or video call when the software is running, you can answer the call pausing the software. After the call is terminated, the previous screen returns. Even when the software is running, you can receive mail or Message R/F. The software keeps running, and , , appears at the top of the screen. To view the received mail or Message R/F, terminate the software. Images used by an i-ppli* or data you enter may be automatically sent to a server via the Internet.

* Images used by the i-ppli include: images captured with Camera that is started from a Camera-linked

(linkage) application, images obtained using infrared communication function of the i-ppli, images downloaded from a site or web site, and images obtained from the Data box by the i-ppli. You cannot start software downloaded using a different UIM. Depending on i-ppli, the tone may not sound. Depending on the software, an IP (Information Provider) can access programs saved on your terminal and directly disable their use. In this case, the software cannot be run or updated, however, it can still be deleted, or the software information can still be shown. To use the software again, signals to enable the software must be sent. Contact your IP. Depending on the software, the IP may send data to a program saved on your terminal. In the event that the IP disables/re-enables the software or sends data, your terminal performs communication and blinks. Packet communication charges do not apply in this case. Software List Screen Sub Menu 1 Software list screen (P217) ] Move the cursor to software ] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Set ippli TO]

Set conditions to start the selected software. P233

[Auto start time]

Set whether to start the selected software automatically, and set the date and time to start if the auto start is specified. P233

[Software set]

Set the selected software.P225 Software info]

Display the selected software information such as a name and version of the i-ppli . The displayed items differ depending on the software. Upgrade]

Upgrade the selected software.

[Delete]

Delete software. P235 Note

<Upgrade>

During an update, a confirmation may appear notifying you of the use of terminal data (stored data or serial number of the terminal/UIM)". Select "Yes" to start downloading. Select I [Detail] to check the details of the terminal data to be used. In this case, the "serial number of your mobile phone/UIM" is sent to the IP (Information Provider) over the Internet, and it could be intercepted by a third party. However, this action does not reveal your phone number, postal address, age, or gender to the IP or others. Setting i-ppli Operating Conditions Set operating conditions for each software program. You can set an application to perform communications automatically while it is running or decide separately whether to allow it to browse icon information, Phonebook, etc. Some items may not be changed depending on the software. 1 Software list screen(P223) ] Move cursor to the program

] M [Menu] ] [Software set] ] Perform the following operations:

Network set]

Set whether to allow communications while software is running. Icon info]

Set whether to permit the use of icons for i-mode mail, Message R/F, in/out of service area, battery level, or Manner Mode when the software starts.

[View P.book/call records]

Set whether to allow software to browse the Phonebook and call history when the software is started. Change ring tone/image]

Set whether to allow software to automatically change an image or melody set for a ring tone or the Stand-by display when the software is started i-ppli 225 Note Depending on the settings, the software may not connect to the network or icon information (unread messages or battery level, etc. will not be sent).

<Network Set>

When this is set to "No", the software may not start, or realtime information may not be provided. When this is set to "Yes", the software automatically connects to the network. While connected, packet communication charges apply.

<Icon info>

When set to "Yes", information about the status of the terminal as indicated by the presence of icons for unread mail, messages, battery level, Manner Mode, inside the service area, and outside the service area may be sent to Information Providers (IP) via the Internet in the same manner as the "serial number of your mobile phone/UIM" is sent. The icon information may be intercepted by a third party. Software that needs Icon data may not function if this is set to "No". Pre-installed i-ppli The software you deleted after purchasing is available to download from "WOW LG" of i Menu site. P128 Various games to train the brain are available. You can play game by selecting either right brain or left brain or measure the abilities. 1 Software list screen (P223) ] "" ] C The menu screen opens. 2 Perform the following operations:

Push I [(Exit)] to exit.

[ (Start the game)]

Start the game. For each game, use H to select an item.

(Left brain) You can select out of 4 games to buff up the left brain ] Move the cursor to the game to play ] C ] Move the cursor to the level with which you want to play ] C

(Right brain) You can select out of 4 games to buff up the right brain..] Move the cursor to the game to play ] C ] Move the cursor to the level with which you want to play ] C

(Test) Measure the left-brain/right-brain skills.

] Move the cursor to the game to play ] C

] Move the cursor to the level with which you want to play ] C 226 i-ppli

[ (Environment settings)]

Adjust sound in 8 levels or reset the history and score of game. Push I [(Back)] to back to menu screen.

[ (Help)]

Display the description of the game and how to play it. Push I [(Back)] to back to menu screen.

[ (Game result)]

Shows recorded game results by graphs or numeric values. Push I [(Back)] to back to menu screen.

[ (Exit)]

Exit the game. Operations during the game Move the cursor to select an item. Key 19 M [OK] /[ (Check)]

I [ (Pause)]

I [ (Back)]

Description Select an answer. Select an item. Suspend the game. You can select from " (Resume)"/"

(Exit)". Close the paused screen. Sudoku Puzzle Enter a number from 1 - 9 in an empty cell. However, the same number cannot be entered more than once for each vertical or horizontal row, or for a block of 3x3 cells framed with a thick line. 1 Software list screen (P223) ] "Sudoku Puzzle"

The menu screen opens after the game title screen. 2 Perform the following operations:

[ (Start the game)]

Start the game. Select a level.

[ (Ranking)]

Open the list of high scores.

[ (Options)]

Set whether to sound the tone or display hints. Selecting " (Reset)" restores the settings and the high score entries to their defaults.

[ (Help)]

Display the description and rules for the game.

[ (Exit)]

Terminate the i-ppli.

* Press I [ (Menu)] to return to the menu screen. i-ppli 227 Operations during the game Elapsed time

[ (Start)]

Start the game.

[ (Stage)]

Press J to select the finished stage.

[ (Help)]

Display the description and how to play the game.

[(Sound on)/(Sound off)]

C toggles the sound effects on or off. Operations during the game Move the cursor and select Key K C I [ (Menu)]

Description Move the cursor Select Selecting " (Yes)" ends the game, and the menu screen opens. Restart the game. Return to the previous screen. Key K M [(Erase)]

I

[ (Pause)] " (Save)", " (Start a new Description Move the cursor Delete the entered number Pause the game. You can select from game)", " (Restart)", and "

(Exit)"

Only one session can be saved. Enter a number 19 C]J]C Halloween Fever This is a puzzle in which you try to erase 3 or more adjacent same type of monsters at once. The game ends when all the monsters are erased. Think carefully about the order of the monsters to delete. If there are any remaining monsters at the end, you will lose. 1 Software list screen (P223) ] "Halloween Fever"

The menu screen opens. 2 Perform the following operations:

Press I [(Exit)] to exit. 228 i-ppli Battle Reversi This is a chess game in which you try to surround the playmate's chess pieces on every side with your pieces, and the playmate's chess pieces will become to yours. The one who has more chess pieces at the end of game will be the winner. 1 Software list screen (P223)]"Battle Reversi"

The game title list screen appears. 2 Press any button The menu screen appears. 3 Perform the following operations Press I [(Exit)] to exit.

[(Single mode)]

A mode to play with a pretend playmate. The game starts after you selected your character, your chess pieces color (white or black) and playmate's character. Press I [(back)] to go back to menu screen before game starts.

[(Battle mode) A mode to play with your friend with your cellphone. The game starts after you selected your character, your chess pieces color (white or black) and playmate's character. Press I [(back)] to go back to menu screen before game starts.

(Data box) Display every game's result (scores in win, draw or loss games, etc.). Press M [(Character)] to show your signed up character. Press I [(back)] to go back to menu screen.

(Environment settings) Set or reset time limit or sound. Press I [(back)] to go back to menu screen.

(Key map) Display buttons description that using in this game. Press I [(back)] to go back to menu screen.

(Help) Display game content and operations. Press I [(back)] to go back to menu screen. Operations during the game Select where to put your chess piece with cursor i-ppli 229 Key K / 2 / 8 / 4

/6 C/5 I [(pause)]

Description Move the cursor Game Operation Select items Selecting "(Yes)" ends the game and show result screen. Selecting I

[(end)] to end the game. Use cursor to choose the thrown card Key J /4/6 U /2 D /8 C /5 M [(Title)]

I [(Start)]

I [(Pass)]

Description Move cursor Choose a card Cancel the card chosen Throw the card chosen Press "Yes" to end the game and show title screen. Press "End" to end the game. Start a game Pass Switch between sound ON and sound OFF Try to throw a higher card than the previous player. Players are ranked in the order of ascending priorities who finished cards earlier. 1 Soft List Display (P223)]" "

Menu is displayed. 2 Next Press M [(end)] to end this game.

[PRACTICE GAME]

One game COM competition mode.

[RANKING GAME]

5 games COM competition mode.

[CONTINUE]

Restart the game was paused. Choose the game if game data was saved.

[RANKING GAME]

More detail rules, and sound ON/OFF can be set. 230 i-ppli GravityArrow Enjoy mahjong with the pretend playmates. 1 Soft List Display (P223)]" GravityArrow "

Menu is displayed. 2 Next Press M[(End)] to end this game

[GAME START]

Start the game.

[SOUND ON/SOUND OFF]

Press C to switch the Sound ON/OFF Game Operation The scores now Key K /2/8/

4/6 C /5 M [(Pause)]/

[(Restart)]

I [(Title)]

Description Move the ball Switch the ball Pause/Restart Press "Yes" to end the game and show title screen. Press "End" to end the game. Switch between sound ON and sound OFF i-ppli 231 Enjoy mahjong with the pretend playmates. 1 Soft List Display (P223)]" "

Menu is displayed. 2 Next Press M[(End)] to end this game

[GAME START]

Start the game.

[SOUND ON/SOUND OFF]

Press C to switch the Sound ON/OFF Game Operation Key J /4/6 C /5 M [(Score)]

I [(Title)]

Description Move cursor Decide the tile will be thrown Show score Press "Yes" to end the game and show title screen. Press "End" to end the game. Switch between sound ON and sound OFF FOMA(FOMA Communication Environment Check Application) The screen image only provides an example. It may differ from actual one. Only displayed at

Choose the tile with cursor FOMA(FOMA Communication Environment Check Application) is an application to confirm if the FOMA terminal is in a FOMA HIGH-SPEED Area. When using FOMA (FOMA Communication Environment Check Application), please agree with the "Usage and Warning" section. When confirming the Communication Environment, the diagnostic result may differ, depending on the Communication Environment (weather, radio wave, network, etc.), even if you use the FOMA terminal at same place, same time (sometimes

"Out of service area" may be displayed). Using other functions while using this application may cause an application error. 232 i-ppli i-ppli To Function Start an i-ppli from a Site or Mail Auto Start Time Setting Start Date/Time Set whether to start software from a site, mail, or via infrared communication. 1 Software list screenP223 ] Move the cursor to software ] M [Menu] ] "Set ippli to" ] Place check marks next to software to be started Site i-ppli toStart the software from a site. Mail i-ppli toStart the software from mail. Ir i-ppli toStart the software via infrared communication. 2 I [Done]

Auto start set Automatically Starting i-ppli Date and Time need to be set in advance to start an i-ppli automatically. P48 Auto Start Setting to Automatically Start i-ppli You can set whether to start i-ppli automatically. 1 M [Menu] ] "ippli" ] "ippli settings" ] "Auto start set"

] "ON"/"OFF"

Set the date and time when the software starts automatically. This option can be set for to up to 3 software programs. 1 Software list screen(P223) ] Move the cursor to the software ] M [Menu] ] "Auto start time" ] Perform the following operations:

[Time interval set]

Applications will be started automatically with set intervals.

[Start time set]

Place check marks when you want to set the time when the i-ppli automatically start.

[Time]*

Set the time and date for auto-start. To set the date, use J to move the cursor to the place to change the date and enter the date with the dial keys (to set the date on the calendar screen, press C [Select] in the date entry field ). Operations on the calendar screen P271 To set the time, use J to move the cursor to the value to change, enter the time with dial keys, (pressing C [Select]

the time entry field opens the time settings screen on which you can enter a time using dial keys and H ). Depending on the settings in "Date&Time format" (P52), the in display format or order of the date and time may differ.

[Repeat]*

Select a repeating pattern for auto-start. 1 Time The software starts automatically only once at the set date and time. i-ppli 233 DailyThe software starts automatically at the set time every day. WeeklyThe software starts automatically at the set time on the specified days of the week every week. Place check marks next to the days to auto-start every week

* Can be set by marking "Start time set"

2 I [Done]

Note The software will not automatically start when:

- The FOMA terminal power is turned off

- A call or communication is in progress

- Another function is running

- "Lock all" is set (even from the security code entry screen)

- An "i-ppli" in "Data access lock" currently is "ON"

(even from the security code entry screen)

- The Auto-start time is the same as the scheduled time for software update, an alarm, Schedule event, or To Do alarm

- The i-ppli was downloaded using another UIM

- The i-ppli has "Network set" to "Confirm every session"

- The same i-ppli has a set intervals to start within 10 minutes Software will not start at the set time if other software is running at that time. Also, the software may not start while other functions are running. If auto starts fails, appears on the Stand-by display. Selecting the icon displays the Auto start info (P234). disappears after the Auto start info is viewed. i-ppli information Viewing Various Information 1 M [Menu] ] [ippli] ] [ippli info] ] Perform the following operations:

Security error history]

Display a log of errors of software that was terminated due to a security errors. I [Delete]: Delete the selected error history entry. Auto start info]

You can check whether software automatically started. You can view the information and the latest date and time when software started for up to 3 software programs set to start automatically. Start : The software automatically started successfully Start : The software failed to start automatically Start : The software has not started because the set time has not arrived Trace info]

Display trace information for the software. I [Delete]: Delete trace information for the software. Note History or information which is not traced will not be shown. 234 i-ppli Deleting i-ppli 1 Software list screen(P223) ] Move the cursor to software

] M [Menu] ] [Delete] ] Perform the following operations:

This itemYou can delete the selected software. Selected itemsSelect and delete items.

] Place check marks next to the software to be deleted ] I [Delete] ] "Yes"

All itemsDelete all software.

] Enter the security code ] "Yes"

Note When "Auto start time" is set, a confirmation for disabling the option appears. Select "Yes" to disable. Using Various i-ppli Functions Some i-ppli use terminal functions and connect to sites. You need to download i-ppli that support the function in advance. For some i-ppli, operations may be different, or functions may not be available. Using the Camera from an i-ppli When the camera is started by an i-ppli, captured images will not be saved in "My picture" in the "Data box", however, they are saved and used as a component of the i-ppli. 1 Capture an image with the camera using an i-ppli Using Infrared Communication from an i-ppli 1 Perform infrared communication using an i-ppli Note You may not be able to exchange data with some devices even if they have the infrared capability. You can also start an i-ppli by receiving i-ppli activation data via infrared communication. When infrared communication is in progress, any connection with sites or reception of Mail will be cancelled. i-ppli 235 Data Management Data box Making Full Use of Still Images Displaying Images Picture viewer Editing Still Images Edit Still Images Creating Animations Animation Making Full Use of Videos Playing Videos/i-motion Movies Video/i-motion Player Editing Videos/i-motion Movies Edit Videos/i-motion Movies Making Full Use of Melodies Playing Melodies Melody player Exchanging Data via Infrared Communication Using Infrared Communication IrDA Exchanging Data One Piece at a Time Send IrDA/Receive Ir Data Receiving or Sending All Data Send All via IrDA/Receive All IrDA 238 239 244 247 249 253 254 257 259 259 237 Data box The Data box contains the items and folders shown in the following tables. Data obtained from sites or i-mode mail are saved in folders according to their categories. Up to 20 folders can be added to My picture, Music, i-motion, or Melody. Files saved in My picture, Music, i-motion, or Melody can be moved to other folders within the category. My picture i-mode Camera Decomail picture Decomail pictograph*

Preinstalled Data transfer Item Animation Music i-mode Playlists i-motion i-mode Camera Preinstalled Data transfer Still images, etc. obtained from sites or mail Still images captured by the Camera Pictures for Deco-mail provided by default Deco-mail pictographs pre-installed or downloaded from web sites or mail Still images provided by default Still images, etc. obtained via infrared communication Still images that can be used for frames or stamps User defined animations, etc. Chaku-Uta-Full downloaded from a site Playlists created with the Music player Videos/i-motion movies downloaded from sites or mail Videos captured by the Video Camera Videos provided by default Videos, etc. obtained via infrared communication Melody i-mode Preinstalled Data transfer Melodies, etc. downloaded from sites or mail Melodies provided by default Melodies, etc. obtained via infrared communication

* Pictographs (E-Moji) will be saved directly into the "Pictographs

(E -Moji)" folder. Except for Pictographs (E-Moji), others will not be saved in "Pictographs (E -Moji)" folder. Descriptions of Displayed Name, File Name, and Title Still images, Flash movies, videos/i-motion movies, and melodies saved in the FOMA terminal have more than one name. Displayed Name Names that appear on list screens in the Data box, or on Display/playback screens Names that appear on a PC or other terminals Names for management of the L-06A (they cannot be edited) File Name Title*

* Still images and Flash movie files do not have titles. Icons displayed on the file list screen Icon

( *1

Description Display the list screen of the next higher folder Files that can be sent/cannot be sent File restricted 238 Data Management Icon

*2 / /

Description File with UIM restriction activated A file prohibited to be redistributed File type (JPEG/GIF/MP4 (file extension: mp4)

/MP4 (file extension: 3gp)/SMF/MFi/Others

(unsupported files))

*1 Appears in a list view.

*2 Icons that appear on the screen vary depending on the type of the list screen. Picture viewer Displaying Images You can display still images you have captured, or obtained from sites or i-mode mail. Available File Formats File Format*

Pixels File Size File Extension JPEG, GIF JPEG: Up to 1200 x 1600 pixels Progressive JPEG, GIF: Up to 800x600 pixels Up to 2MB jpg, gif

* Even if a file is in a compatible file format, it may not be displayed depending on the file. 1 M [Menu] ] Data box ] "My picture"

I [Switch]: Switch between list and picture display. My Picture Screen 2 Move the cursor to a folder ] C [Open]

I[Mail]: Display the Compose message screen with the selected file attached. Icons displayed on the list screen P238 1 2 Still image file list screen 1 Display name of the selected file 2 Type of the selected file Data Management 239 Sub Menu on the My Pictures Screen 1 My Picture screenP239] Move the cursor to a folder

] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

Rename]

Change the name of the selected folder. Up to 30 full-pitch or half-pitch characters can be entered.

[New folder]

Create a folder. You cannot create a sub folder in a user-defined folder.

[Delete]

Delete the selected folder.

[List view/Grid view]

Switch how to display folders. Sort]

You can sort folders by setting a condition.

[Memory Info.]

Display the status of storage space of the "Data box".

[Folder property]

Display the name of the selected folder and the number of files in the folder. 3 Move the cursor to a file ] C [View]

1 2 Still image file list screen 1 Sequential number/number of saved files Display the sequential number of the current file and the total number of saved files in the folder. 2 Display name of the file Available File Formats Key J C [Full]

I [Mail]

Description Display the previous/next file Display a full image, hiding the Soft keys/return to the original display size Send the displayed image by mail P131 Note An i-mode mail with the selected image attached can be created by pressing I [Mail] on the still image file list screen. Some images not captured with L-06A may not be displayed on the Still image file list screen. 240 Data Management Sub Menu on the Still Image File List Screen 1 Still image file screen (P239) ] Move the cursor to a file ]

M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

Files]

ViewDisplay the selected file. EditEdit the selected file. P244 MoveMove the selected file to another folder.

] Select a destination folder ] I [Move]

CopyCopy the selected file to another folder.

] Select a destination folder ] I [Copy]

DeleteDelete the selected file. Delete allDelete all files in the folder.

] "Yes" ] Enter the security code RenameChange the display name of the selected file.

[Multiple choice]

Select and delete files.

] Place check marks next to files to delete ] I [Delete] ]

"Yes"

You can move/copy multiple files by performing the following steps:

] Place check marks next to files to move/copy

] M [Menu] ] "Move"/"Copy" ] Select the destination folder

] I [Copy]/[Move]

You can also select "Delete", "Mark", "Mark all", "Unmark", or

"Unmark all" by pressing M [Menu].

[File property]

Display the file name, size and type, etc. of the selected file. P243

[Send via]*

MailCreate i-mode mail with the selected file attached. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P131). IrDASend a file using Infrared communication. Set as]

Set the selected file as the Stand-by display or Call display Stand-by displaySet as the Stand-by display. Voice call displaySet as a Voice call display. Video call displaySet as a Video call display. Wake-up displaySet as the Wake-up display.

[List view]

Switch the display format of files.

[Sort]

Sort files by specifying a condition.

[Memory info.]

Display the status of storage space of the "Data box".

[New folder]

This item is not available.

* This is not available for Flash files. Sub Menu on the Still Image Display Screen 1 Still image display screenP240

] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Edit image]*

Edit the displayed file. P244 Delete]

Delete the displayed file.

[Edit title]

Edit the name of the displayed file. Data Management 241

[File property]

Display the file name, size and type, etc. of the displayed file. P243 Send via]*

MailCreate i-mode mail with the selected file attached. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P131). IrDASend a file using Infrared communication. Full screen]

View the image in Full screen. (In Full screen view, the following operations are available.) C/Q: Restore the full image to the original display. J: Display the next/previous image. Zoom]

Display an enlarged image. M[+]: Enlarge the image I[-]: Restore the previous zoom ratio K: Move the display position The entire image and the displayed area appear at the lower right of the screen. Set as]

Set the displayed file as the Stand-by display or Call display. Stand-by displaySet as the Stand-by display. Voice call displaySet as a Voice call display. Video call displaySet as a Video call display. Wake-up displaySet as the Wake-up display.

[View settings]

Set the display method of an image, a zoom ratio, or interval between animation frames. P243

* This is not available for Flash files. Viewing Flash Movies You can view Flash movies downloaded from a site, etc. Available File Formats File Format*

File Size File Extension Flash Up to 100KB swf

* Even a file in a compatible file format may not save/play depending on the file.

(Data box) ] "My picture"

1 M [Menu] ]

2 Move the cursor to a folder ] C [Open]

3 Move the cursor to a file ] C [View]

1 2 Flash movie playback screen 1 Sequential number/number of saved files Display the sequential number of the current file and the total number of saved files in the folder. 2 Display name of the file 242 Data Management Key operations on the Flash movie playback screen Information displayed on the File property screen Key J C [Full]

I [Retry]

F /E H Description Display the previous/next file Display a full image, hiding the Soft keys/

return to the original display size Play the Flash movie from the beginning Enlarge the image/return to the previous ratio Move the display position when the image is enlarged The entire image and the displayed area appear at the edge of the screen. Sub Menu on the Flash Playback Screen 1 Flash playback screenP242] M [Menu]

The sub menu on the Flash playback screen is the same as the "Sub Menu on the Still Image Display Screen" (P241). However, "Edit image" and "Send via"

are not available. Viewing Image Information 1 Still image list screen (P239)/Still image display screen

(P240)/Flash playback screen (P242) ] M [Menu] ]

"File property"

I [Edit]: Edit properties. Item File name File size File type*

Date & Time

(Saved) Display size*

File restriction Source Description Display the file name Display the file size Display the file format Display the saved date and time Display the resolution Display whether the file is restricted Display the source

* This is not displayed for a Flash file. Setting the View of a Still Image Set the display method of an image, a zoom ratio, or interval between animation frames. 1 Still image display screen (P240)/Flash playback screen

(P242)/Animation list screen (P247) ] M [Menu] ]

"View settings" ] Perform the following operations:

View type]

NormalDisplay the image in its original size. Fit to screenDisplay the image enlarged to fit the screen. Zoom type]

NormalZoom in on an image enlarged to fit the screen. Same magnificationZoom in on an image displayed in its original size.

[Animation interval]

Set the interval between animation frames. 2 I [Done]

Data Management 243 Restricting Files You can restrict files. The recipient cannot send or forward a restricted file received by mail. 1 Still image display screen (P240)

] M [Menu] ] "Edit image"

The File property screen opens. 1 Select a file to restrict ] M [Menu] ] "File property"

2 Move the cursor to the "File restriction" field ] I [Edit] ]

"File Restricted"

Note This option cannot be changed for a file downloaded from a site. Edit Still Images Editing Still Images You can edit still images. The edited still image is saved in the same folder as the source file. Only JPEG files can be edited. However, it may not be possible to edit some files. Editing a still image repeatedly may reduce the image quality or increase the file size. 244 Data Management 2 M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

screen Still image edit

[Save]

Save the edited still image. Go to Step 5. Rotate]

LeftRotate the image 90 degrees counterclockwise. RightRotate the image 90 degrees clockwise. 180Rotate the image 180 degrees. Mirror]

Left/RightFlip the image horizontally. Up/DownFlip the image vertically. Resize]

You can change the image size. P245 Crop]

You can cut out a part of an image. P246

[Insert]

You can add a frame, stamp, or text. FrameAdd a frame to an image.

] Select a folder ] Select a frame After selecting a frame, you can select "Change frame"

or "Rotate" by pressing M [Menu]. StampAdd a stamp to an image. P246 TextYou can add text to an image. P246

[Retouch]

Change the brightness, contrast, or color tone of an image.

] Use J to switch to the item to retouch

] C[Select]

Adjust the item with J. If selecting "Auto level" or "Auto enhance", the image is adjusted automatically. If selecting "Color adjust" or "Level adjust", adjust each color with K. Pressing M[List] also enables you to select the item to retouch. Effect]

Set special effects to an image.

]Use J to switch to the item to set ] C [Select]

Depending on items, adjust with J. If selecting "Rotation" or "Spotlight", adjust each item with K. Pressing M[List] also enables you to select the item to set.

[Send via mail]

Create i-mode mail with the edited image attached. Undo]

Cancel the performed operation and restore the previous state. 3 C [OK]

To cancel editing Press I [Cancel]. 4 C [Save]

To restore to the previous state Press I [Undo]. 5 "New file"

To overwrite the original file Select "Original file". Note

<Frames>

Frames are in four sizes: CIF (352x288), QVGA

(240x320), QCIF (176x144), and Sub-QCIF (128x96). You can only select a frame of the same size as the source image.

<Retouch>

A source image larger than 640 x 480 pixels cannot be retouched.

<Effect>

An effect cannot be added to a source image larger than 640 x 480 pixels or with either side smaller than 8 pixels. Changing the Image Size 1 Still image edit screen (P244) ] M[Menu] ] "Resize"

2 Select an image size 3 C[OK]

Go to Step 4 (P244) in "Editing Still Images". Note An image cannot be resized when the vertical or horizontal size of the source image is smaller than 8 pixels. If a size with different proportions than the source is selected, the original proportions will be retained for the resized image. Data Management 245 Cropping an Image 1 Still image edit screen (P244) ] M[Menu] ] "Crop"

2 Select a cropping size ] Use K to move the frame to the area to be cropped ] C [Select]

When "User define" is selected Use K to move the cursor to a start point ] C[Select]

]K to move the cursor to an end point ] C[Select] to set the area to crop. 3 C[OK]

Go to Step 4 (P244) in "Editing Still Images". Note An image cannot be resized when the vertical or horizontal size of the source image is smaller than 8 pixels. To rotate the stamp M [Menu] ] Select from "Rotate" ] "Left"/"Right"

and"180". 3 I[Done]

Go to Step 4 (P244) in "Editing Still Images". Note A Stamp cannot be added to a source image larger than 640 x 480 pixels or with either side smaller than 24 pixels. Pasting Characters You can add text to an image. You can also change the font color or size, rotate the text, or paste speech bubbles. 1 Still image edit screen (P244) ] M[Menu] ] "Insert" ]

"Text"

Adding a Stamp 1 Still image edit screen (P244) ] M[Menu] ] "Insert" ]

"Stamp"

2 Select a folder ] Select a stamp ] K to move the stamp to the position ] C [OK]

To add another stamp Press M [Menu] ] "Change stamp" ] select a folder ]

select a stamp ] K to move the stamp to the position ]

C [OK]. 2 Enter the text to paste 3 M[Menu] ] Modify text

[Edit text]

Change the pasted text.

[Font size]

Specify the font size.

[Font color]

Change the pasted text color. 246 Data Management

[Rotate]

Rotate the text.

[Comic]

Add a speech bubble. 4 Use K to specify the location 5 I[Done]

Go to Step 4 (P244) in "Editing Still Images". Note Text cannot be added to an image when the vertical or horizontal size of the source image is smaller than 24 pixels or when the source image size is larger than 640x480. Animation Creating Animations You can create an animation with up to 20 frames using saved still images. Up to 30 animations can be created. Up to 640 x 480 pixels of still images can be used for creating the animation. 1 M[Menu] ]

(Data box) ] "My picture" ] "Animation"

Animation list screen 2 I[New] ] Enter a display name of the file 3 C[Add] ] Move the cursor to a folder ] C [Open] ]

Select an image Selecting an image displays the registered image file name. To delete an added image Move the cursor to an image to delete and Press M

[Delete]. 4 Repeat Step 3 to save images ] I [Done]

Data Management 247 Viewing Animation 1 Animation list screen(P247) ] Move the cursor to an animation ] C[View]

Animation display screen Key operations while viewing animation Key J C [Full]

Description Play the previous/next animation Display a fit-to-screen animation, hiding the Soft keys/return to the original display size Image File Selection Screen Sub Menu You can perform the following operations from the selection screen to save images:

I [View]The selected image is displayed. 1 From a screen where an image is selected (P247) ] M

[Menu] ] perform the following operations:

[Select]

Add the selected image file to the animation.

[View]

Display the selected file.

[File property]

Display the file name, size and type, etc. of the selected file. P243

[List view/Grid view]

Switch the display format of files.

[Sort]

Sort files by specifying a condition.

[Memory info.]

Display the status of storage space of the "Data box".

[New folder]

The item not available to use. Sub Menu on the Animation List Screen 1 Animation list screen (P247) ] Move the cursor to an animation ] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Add images]

Add images to the selected animation.

[Delete]

Delete the selected animation.

[Edit title]

Edit the display name of the selected animation. Up to 30 full-pitch or half-pitch characters can be entered. 248 Data Management

[Set as stand-by]

Set the selected animation as the Stand-by display.

[View settings]

Set the display method of an image, a zoom ratio, or interval between animation frames. P243 Animation Display Screen Sub Menu 1 Animation display screenP248] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Delete]

Delete the selected animation.

[Edit title]

Change the display name of the displayed animation. Up to 30 full-pitch or half-pitch characters can be entered.

[Full screen]

View the animation in Full screen. (In Full screen view, the following operations are available.) C/Q : Restore the full image to the original display. J : Display the next/previous animation.

[Set as stand-by]

Set the selected animation as the Stand-by display.

[View settings]

Set the display method of an image, a zoom ratio, or interval between animation frames. P243 Video/i-motion Player Playing Videos/i-motion Movies You can play video clips you have captured, or i-motion movies obtained from sites or i-mode mail. Available File Formats File Format*

Encoding Method MP4 file MP4 (Mobile MP4) Graphics: MPEG-4 and H.263 Audio: AMR and AAC File Extension mp4 and 3gp

* Even a file in a compatible file format may not play depending on the file. 1 M [Menu] ]

I[Switch]: Switch between list and

(Data box) ] "i-motion"

picture display. i-motion movie Data Management 249 2 Move the cursor to a folder ] C [Open]

I [Mail]: Display the Compose message screen with the selected file attached. Icons displayed on the list screen P238 i-motion File list screen 3 Move the cursor to a file ] C [Play]

Key operations on the i-motion playback screen Key C I J L (Hold down) R (Hold down) F/E H Description Pause/Play Stop Play the previous/next file While being pressed, rewinds the movie/sound While being pressed, fast forwards the movie/sound Adjust the volume When Link is Set in The Ticker After i-motion playback ends, a confirmation screen opens asking whether to use Phone To/AV Phone To/Web To/Mail To. To use the function, select an item. 2 1 3 4 5 Note Some files may not be played and rewound during playback. i-motion movie playback screen When you fast forward or rewind an i-motion movie during playback, the i-motion movie is paused. 1 Display the name of a file 2 Playback progress bar Shows the playback elapsed time. 3 Volume 4 Control Keys Indicates available navigation keys. 5 Elapsed time/total time 250 Data Management Sub Menu on the i-motion Screen 1 i-motion screen (P249) ] Move the cursor to a folder ]

M [Menu]

The sub menu of the i-motion screen is the same as the

"sub menu on the My Picture Screen" (P240).

[File property]

Display the file name, size and type, etc. of the selected file. P253

[Send via]

MailCreate i-mode mail with the selected file attached. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P131). Sub Menu on the i-motion File List Screen 1 i-motion file list screen (P250) ] Move the cursor to a file

] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

Files]

PlayPlay the selected file. MoveMove the selected file to another folder.

] Select the destination folder ] I [Move]

CopyCopy the selected file to another folder. Select the destination folder I [Copy]

DeleteDelete the selected files. Delete allDelete all files in the folder.

] "Yes" ] Enter the security code RenameChange the display name of the selected file. Reset nameReset the display name of the selected file to its default name.

[Multiple choice]

Select and delete files.

] Place check marks next to files to delete ] I [Delete] ]

"Yes"

You can move/copy multiple files by performing the following steps:

] Place check marks next to files to move/copy ] M [Menu]

] "Move"/"Copy" ] Select the destination folder

] I [Copy]/[Move]

You can also select "Delete", "Mark", "Mark all", "Unmark", or

"Unmark all" by pressing M [Menu]. IrDASend a file using Infrared communication. Set as tone]

Set the selected file as a ring tone, etc. Voice ringtoneSet as a ring tone for a voice call. Video ringtoneSet as a ring tone for a video call. Mail toneSet as a ring tone for mail. Message R toneSet as a ring tone for Message R. Message F toneSet as a ring tone for Message F. SMSSet as a ring tone for SMS. Alarm toneSet as an alarm tone. Set as display]

Set the selected file as the Stand-by display or Call display Stand-by displaySet as the Stand-by display. Voice call displaySet as a Voice call display. Video call displaySet as a Video call display. Wake-up displaySet as the Wake-up display.

[List view/Grid view]

Switch the display format of files.

[Sort]

Sort files by specifying a condition.

[Memory info.]

Display the status of storage space of the "Data box".

[New folder]

This item is not available. Data Management 251

[File property]

Display the file name, size and type, etc. of the file in playback. P253 Note While the sub menu is accessed, the video/i-motion movie in playback is paused.

<Set as/Set as display>

Videos/i-motion movies, that were sent to a PC or another FOMA terminal via Infrared communication or DOCOMO Keitai datalink and sent back to the FOMA terminal, cannot be set as Chaku-motion or an incoming call screen. Sub Menu on the i-motion Playback Screen 1 i-motion playback screen(P250) ] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Play]

Play an i-motion movie.

[Send via mail]

Create i-mode mail with the selected file attached. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P131). Set as tone]

Set the file in playback as a ring tone. Voice ringtoneSet as a ring tone for a voice call. Video ringtoneSet as a ring tone for a video call. Mail toneSet as a ring tone for mail. Message R toneSet as a ring tone for Message R. Message F toneSet as a ring tone for Message F. SMSSet as a ring tone for SMS. Alarm toneSet as an alarm tone. Set as display]

Set the selected file as the Stand-by display or Call display Stand-by displaySet as the Stand-by display. Voice call displaySet as a Voice call display. Video call displaySet as a Video call display. Wake-up displaySet as the Wake-up display.

[Expand]

Display a fit-to-screen video/i-motion movie, hiding Soft keys, etc. Press Q to restore its original display size.

[Mute/Unlock mute]

Mute or un-mute the sound.

[Edit]

Edit the video/i-motion in playback. P253 252 Data Management Viewing Video/i-motion Movie Information 1 i-motion file list screen (P250)/i-motion playback screen

(P250) ] M [Menu] ] "File property"

I [Edit]: Edit properties. Information displayed on the File detail screen Item File name File size File type Date & Time

(Saved) Play time Display size Audio File restriction Ringtone Receive display Title Creator Copyright Description Source Description Display the file name Display the file size Display the file format Display the saved date and time Display the file playback duration Display the resolution Display the sound format Display whether the file is restricted P244 Display whether the file can be set as a ring tone Display whether the file can be set as the Stand-by display or Call display Display the default title of the file Display creator information Display copyright information Display the file description Display the source Edit Videos/i-motion Movies Editing Videos/i-motion Movies You can edit videos/i-motion movies. The edited video/imotion movie will be saved in the same folder as the source file. The preinstalled files cannot be edited. Some files may not be edited. The Ticker displayed on i-motion movies cannot be edited. Extracting a Frame of a Video as a Still

(Capture) You can extract a still image from a video/i-motion movie. The extracted image is saved under the "Camera" folder in

"My picture" in "Data box". 1 i-motion playback screen (P250) ] Display the image to be extracted as a still image Operations during i-motion playback ] P250 2 M [Menu] ] "Edit" ] "Capture"

Extracting a Video (Trimming) You can extract a part of a video/i-motion movie. The trimmed movie/i-motion will be saved in the folder saving the file of original edition. Data Management 253 1 i-motion playback screen (P250) ] M [Menu] ] "Edit" ]

"Clipping" ] Perform the following operations:

1 M [Menu] ]

(Data box) ] "Melody"

[500KB]

Extract the video beyond the starting point to 500KB or smaller and save it.

[2MB]

Extract the video beyond the start point to 2MB or smaller and save it.

[Bound]

Crop and save the video from the selected starting point to a selected ending point.

] Press C to play a video/i-motion ] At the start point to clip M [Start] ] At the end point to clip M [End]

Melody player Playing Melodies You can play pre-installed melodies or melodies downloaded from sites. Available File Formats File Format*

File Extension SMF and MFi mid and mld

* Even a file in a compatible file format may not play depending on the file. 254 Data Management Melody screen Melody file list screen 2 Move the cursor to a folder ] C [Open]

Icons displayed on the list screen P238 3 Move the cursor to a file ] C [Play]

I [Mail]: Display the Compose message screen with the selected file attached. 2 1 3 4 5 Melody playback Screen 1 Display the name of a file 2 Playback progress bar Shows the playback elapsed time 3 Volume 4 Control Keys Available navigation keys are shown. 5 Elapsed time/total time Key operations on the Melody playback screen Key C J F/E H Description Pause/Play Play the previous/next file Adjust the volume Sub Menu on the Melody Screen 1 Melody screen (P254) ] Move the cursor to a folder ] M

[Menu]

The sub menu of the Melody screen is the same as the

"Sub Menu on the My Picture Screen" (P240). However,

"List displaypicture display" is not displayed. Sub Menu on the Melody File List Screen 1 Melody file list screen (P254) ] Move the cursor to a file ]

M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

Files]

PlayPlay the selected file. MoveMove the selected file to another folder.

] Select the destination folder ] I [Move]

CopyCopy the selected file to another folder.

] Select the destination folder I [Copy]

Delete the selected file. DeleteDelete the selected files. Delete allDelete all files in the folder.

] Yes ] Enter the security code RenameChange the display name of the selected file. Reset nameReset the display name of the selected file to its default name.

[Multiple choice]

Select and delete files.

] Place check marks next to files to delete ] I [Delete] ]

"Yes"

You can move/copy multiple files by performing the following steps:

] Place check marks next to files to move/copy ] M [Menu]

] "Move"/"Copy" ] Select the destination folder

] I [Copy]/[Move]

You can also select "Delete", "Mark", "Mark all", "Unmark", or

"Unmark all" by pressing M [Menu].

[File property]

Display the name, size and type, etc. of the selected melody. P257

[Send via]

MailCreate i-mode mail with the selected melody attached. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P131). IrDASend a file using Infrared communication. Data Management 255 Set as]

Set the selected file as a ring tone, etc. Voice ringtoneSet as a ring tone for a voice call. Video ringtoneSet as a ring tone for a video call. Mail toneSet as a ring tone for mail. Message R toneSet as a ring tone for Message R. Message F toneSet as a ring tone for Message F. SMSSet as a ring tone for SMS. Alarm toneSet as an alarm tone.

[Sort]

Sort files by specifying a condition.

[Memory info.]

Display the status of storage space of the "Data box".

[New folder]

This option is not available. Sub Menu on the Melody Playback Screen 1 Melody playback screen (P254) ] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Send via mail]

Create i-mode mail with the melody in playback attached. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P131).

[Set as]

Set the file in playback as a ring tone. Voice ringtoneSet as a ring tone for a voice call. Video ringtoneSet as a ring tone for a video call. Mail toneSet as a ring tone for mail. Message R toneSet as a ring tone for Message R. Message F toneSet as a ring tone for Message F. SMSSet as a ring tone for SMS. Alarm toneSet as an alarm tone.

[Mute]

Mute or un-mute the sound.

[File property]

Display the file name, size and type, etc. of the melody in playback. P257 Note While the sub menu is accessed, the melody playback is paused. 256 Data Management Viewing Melody Information 1 Melody file list screen (P254)/Melody playback screen

(P254) ] M [Menu] ] "File property"

I [Edit]: Edit properties. Available File Formats Item File name File size File type Date & Time

(Saved) Play time Display size Audio File restriction Ringtone Title Source Description Display the file name Display the file size Display the file format Display the saved date and time Display the file playback duration Display the resolution Display the sound format Display whether the file is restricted P244 Display whether the file can be set as a ring tone Display the default title of the file Display the source IrDA Using Infrared Communication You can exchange Phonebook entries, Schedule events or Bookmarks with a device equipped with infrared communication capabilities. Available Data for Transfer Data type Receiving capability One All item items Sending capability One All item items Number of pieces to be stored Phonebook entries

(Personal info) Schedule events To Do*1 Received mail Sent mail Unsent mail Image files*2 Videos*2 Melodies*3 Bookmarks*4 Memo See P80 Up to 500 Up to 200 Up to 50 Up to 1000 Up to 1000 Up to 1000 Up to 1000 Up to 100 Up to 50

*1 Received To Do tasks with the alarm set prior to the set time may not be correctly saved.

*2 Up to 2 MB of data per file can be sent or received.

*3 Up to 100 KB of data per file can be sent or received.

*4 Received Bookmarks may not be filtered depending on the other party's terminal model. Data Management 257 Saving destination of data received via Infrared Data type Storage Location Phonebook entries Schedule events To Do Received mail Sent mail Unsent mail Still images Movies Melodies Bookmarks Memo Phonebook entries Schedule events To do list Inbox Outbox Unsent message The "Data transfer" folder in "My picture" in the "Data box"

The "Data transfer" folder in "i-motion" in the

"Data box"

The "Data transfer" folder in "Melody" in the

"Data box"

The "Bookmark"folder Memo Performing Infrared Communication Use infrared devices within a distance of approximately 20 cm. Do not move the FOMA terminal until the data exchange completes. If you hold the FOMA terminal in your hand, be sure to hold it securely, so that it does not shake. 258 Data Management Cautions on Data Transfer Calls, i-mode, and data transfer are not available during infrared communication because the terminal is in the same status as out of service area. Data may not be transferred depending on the other party's FOMA terminal conditions. Depending on the other party's terminal model, the filter setting of received mail or Bookmarks, or category setting of Phonebook entries may not be reflected, or the content of Deco-mail may not be saved correctly. Infrared communication between the L-06A terminal and a non-FOMA device may result in data not being received or displayed correctly. Communication may take a while depending on the amount of data to be transferred. Also, the data may not be received. Communications may not be performed successfully under direct sunlight, directly under a fluorescent light, or near another infrared device, due to possible interference. Attachments to i-mode mail are also forwarded. However, some types of attachments may not be forwarded. When a message text contains pictographs (E-Moji) or symbols, they may not be displayed correctly on a recipient terminal or PC that is not capable of displaying them. Depending the type of the receiving device, all subjects of mail may not be received. Infrared communication is not available when Lock all, Data access lock is set, or when Self mode is activated. Large size mail may not be sent correctly. Only downloaded attachments are forwarded when mail is forwarded. Receiving Data One Piece at a Time 1 M [Menu] ]

(LifeKit) ] "Receive Ir data" ] "Receive"

] "Yes"

2 Perform infrared transmission operations on the sending device Start infrared communication. 3 "Yes"

Send IrDA/Receive Ir Data Exchanging Data One Piece at a Time Send All via IrDA/Receive All IrDA Receiving or Sending All Data Sending Data One Piece at a Time Set the receiving device to infrared receiving mode before sending data. Example: Sending one Phonebook entry 1 Stand-by display ] D Move the cursor to a Phonebook &

Logs entry ] M [Menu] ] "Send Ir data" ] "Focused data"

] Yes"

Note A warning appears if the destination cannot be found. Verify the distance and angle with the other party. You can exchange all data in a batch with a PC or another FOMA terminal. To exchange all data, a session code is used to identify the sender and receiver correctly. The session code is any 4- digit number and should be entered both in the sending and receiving devices before sending/receiving data. Sending All Data Set the receiving device to the infrared receiving mode before sending data. Example: Sending all Phonebook entries on the FOMA terminal 1 Stand-by display ] D ] M [Menu] ] "Send Ir data" ] "all in phone"

Data Management 259 If a Phonebook entry has an image set, a warning indicating that it may take a while to send is displayed. Select "Yes" to send. 2 Enter the security code ] Enter the session code ] "Yes"

Start infrared communication. Note A warning appears if the destination cannot be found. Verify the distance and angle with the other party. Files in "My picture", "i-motion" and "Melody" cannot be sent as a batch (one file can be sent at a time). Receiving All Data Receiving all data overwrites the data on the FOMA terminal and deletes all saved data including protected mail. Verify that important data has been saved elsewhere before sending or receiving all data. 1 M [Menu] ]

] "Yes"

(LifeKit) ] "Receive Ir data" ] "Receive all"

2 Enter the Security code ] Enter the session code 3 Perform infrared transmission operations on the sending device Start infrared communication. 4 "Yes"

260 Data Management Convenient Functions Multi-access Multi-Access 262 Multitasking Multitasking 263 Using One Touch Keys One touch key 265 Sounding an Alarm at Set Times Alarm 267 Managing Schedule Events Schedule events 269 273 Managing To Do Tasks To Do list Managing Anniversaries Remembering dates 276 Quick Access to Frequently Used Functions 278 Custom Menu Registering Your Name and Image Own number 279 Checking Call Duration/Call Cost 280 Setting a Call Cost Limit Set call cost limit 281 Using the World Time World time 282 Using the StopwatchStopwatch 283 Using the Unit Converter Unit converter 283 Using the Calculator Calculator 286 Using Memos Memo 287 Talking Using the Flat-plug Earphone/microphone with Switch 288 Automatically Answering a Call Connecting the Flat-plug Earphone/microphone with Switch Auto Answer Chiming the Hour Hour indication Checking Memory Usage Memory status 290 290 291 261 Multi-Access Multi-access Multi-access is a function that allows the use of three lines

(voice call, packet communication, and SMS) concurrently. Communication Type Voice call Packet communication including i-mode, i-ppli, i-mode mail, and PC connections SMS Available Lines 1 line 1 line 1 line Note Combinations of Lines. During Multi-access, communication charges apply for each connected line. During a video call, Multi-access is disabled except for incoming SMS. Making a Voice Call during Packet Communication By invoking the New task (P263) screen, a voice call can be made during packet communication such as i-mode. Example: Making a voice call during i-mode operation 1 i-mode screen(P175)] N (1+seconds) ]"Dialing"

Main menu appears. 2 Enter a phone number ] A Note To return to the i-mode screen from the Voice call screen press N and select "i-mode". Receiving a Voice Call during Packet Communication A voice call can be received during packet communication such as i-mode. Example: Receiving a voice call during i-mode operation 1 A call arrives The Incoming call screen opens. 2 A Note To return to the i-mode screen from the Voice call screen press N and select "i-mode". Using Other Communications during a Voice Call During a voice call, you can perform operations such as sending/receiving mail or connecting to i-mode. 262 Convenient Functions Sending Mail 1 Voice call screen ] N (1+ seconds)]"Mail"

2 Create and send mail Note Creating and sending mail P131P168 Receiving Mail An icon (P35) to notify of incoming mail appears at the top of the screen. Multitasking Multitasking This FOMA terminal provides multitasking that allows you to start and operate multiple applications concurrently. Task manager Launching a New Function To launch a new function while another function is running, open the New task screen (Task manager). 1 While using an application]N (for 1+

seconds) Unavailable functions are grayed out. Connecting to i-mode Voice call screen New task Screen 1 Voice call screen ] N (1+ seconds)]"i-mode" ]"iMenu"

2 Select an application to start Available applications vary depending on the currently Note To return to the Voice call screen, press P ] Select

"Yes"

running application and its operating status. Dialing The Phone number entry screen opens.P52 Mail The Mail menu screen opens.P130 i-mode The i-mode menu screen opens.P174 Convenient Functions 263 ippli The Software list screen opens.P223 Search phonebook The Search phonebook screen opens.P87 Photo-mode The Still image capture screen opens.P200 Schedule The Month view calendar screen opens.P269 To do list The To do list screen opens.P273 Memo The Memo list screen opens.P287 Calculator The Calculator screen opens.P286 Own number The Own number screen opens.P50 Note Combinations of Applications P359 264 Convenient Functions Switching/Viewing Applications To switch or view applications, open the Task list screen. 1 While using an application]N Select New task on the Task list screen to open the New task screen that allows you to launch another application. The running applications are listed Task list Screen 2 Use K to select an application The screen for the selected application will be displayed. Terminating an Application Close the currently displayed application and open the previously displayed application. 1 While using an application]Q/P To close an application, make it current application first. Repeat these steps to close other applications. One Touch Key Using One Touch Key A phone number and a mail address can be assigned to h j k One Touch Keys. You can view the phone number and the mail address with a single keystroke. A frequently used function can be assigned to l a One touch hot key. You can access the function with a single keystroke. Registering a Phone Number and Mail Address to a One Touch Key 1 M[Menu]] (LifeKit)]"One Touch Key"

I [Delete]: Delete the content of the selected key.

[Search phonebook ]

Set up a number using a Phonebook entry. When selecting a Phonebook entry with multiple mail addresses saved, you need to further specify which addresses are to be registered to the key.

[Direct input]

Enter a name, phone number, and mail address.

] Select a field ]Enter the Name/Phone number/Mail address

]I [Done]

[Cancel]

Cancel registering. Note

<Register direct>

A phone number and a mail address assigned to One touch hot keys is not saved in the Phonebook. 2 Move the cursor to the number of a One Touch Key (1-

3) ]C[Register]]Perform the following operations If you select an already used number, press C [Change]. Convenient Functions 265 Sub Menu on the One Touch Key List Screen 1 One Touch Key list screen (P265) ]M [Menu] ]

Perform the following operations

[Copy from Phonebook]

Set up a number using a Phonebook entry. Selected slot Register the Phonebook entry of the Memory number from 000 to 002 based on the selected One Touch Key number (1-3). All (1-3) Register the Phonebook entries of the Memory numbers from 000 to 002 to One Touch Key h/j/k.

[Register direct input]

Enter a name, phone number, and mail address for the selected One Touch Key.

] Select a field ] Enter the Name/Phone number/Mail address

] I [Done]

[Delete]

Delete the content of the selected One Touch Key. Note

<Register direct>

A phone number and a mail address assigned to One touch keys is not saved in the Phonebook. 266 Convenient Functions Making a Call/Composing Mail Using One Touch Key 1 Stand-by screen h/j/k 2 The content of the One Touch Key appears. To make a call A or C [Call]

To compose mail g or I [Mail]

Using sub menu M [Menu]]Perform the following operations:

[Video call]

Make a video call.

[Compose mail]

Compose i-mode mail.P131

[Compose SMS]

Compose an SMS message.P168

[Change]

Change the contents of the One Touch Key.

[Int. call (Japan)]

When you make a call from overseas to a phone number in Japan saved in the Phonebook, the Country code for Japan "+81" is added automatically at the beginning of the phone number. If the phone number has a leading "0", it is automatically deleted. Note You can also make a call by pressing h/j/k for 1+ seconds in Stand-by. During International roaming, a message appears and you can select

"International call", "Normal call", or "Cancel". Assigning a Frequently Used Function to One Touch 1 M[Menu] ] (LifeKit) ] "One Touch Key" ] Move the cursor to "My One Touch Key" ] C[Register]

A list of functions that can be assigned to One Touch Key appears. 2 Select an item ] Select a function Accessing a Function Using a One Touch Key 1 Stand-by display ]l Note You can also select a function to access from My One Touch key menu that appears when l is pressed for 1+ seconds in Stand-by (items in My menu cannot be changed). Alarm Sounding an Alarm at Set Times The FOMA terminal can be used as an alarm clock. Up to 10 alarms can be registered. 1 M[Menu]] (Stationery)]"Alarm"

Press I to set the selected alarm

"On"/ "Off". Alarm list screen Icons displayed on the Alarm list screen Icon Description Alarm set to "ON". Alarm with "Set repeat" set. Convenient Functions 267 2 Move the cursor to an alarm to be edited ]C[Edit]

3 Perform the following operations:

C[List]: List of the options for the selected item is displayed.

(ON/OFF list)]

Set whether to enable the alarm.

[(Set time)]

Set the time for the alarm to sound.

(Set repeat)]

Select a repetition type. If you select "Daily except holiday", the alarm does not sound on Sundays and holidays set in "Set holiday" (P272). If "Weekdays" is selected, perform the following steps to specify the days of the week for the alarm to start:

] D ] C [List] on "Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa" field ] Place check marks next to days of the week ]I [Done]

(Alarm tone)]

Select an alarm tone. Music Select from Chaku-Uta-Full songs saved in "Music"

in the "Data box.P217 Go to Step 3 (P214) in "Setting a Chaku-Uta-Full Song as a Ring Tone". i-motion Select from videos/i-motion movies saved in

"imotion" in the "Data box".P249 Melody Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".P254

(Memo)]

Up to 7 full-pitch or 15 half-pitch characters can be entered. The entered text is displayed on the Alarm screen after the alarm starts.

(Turbo alarm)]

Set whether to enable the Turbo Alarm that increases its volume levels up to the maximum volume and vibrates the terminal.

(Snooze)]

Select an interval between snooze tones. To deactivate Snooze, select "OFF". 4 I[Done]

Sub Menu on the Alarm List Screen 1 Alarm list screen (P267)]M[Menu]]Perform the following operations

[Edit]

Edit the selected alarm.P267

[Turn On/Turn Off]

Set the selected alarm "ON"/"OFF".

[Multiple choice]

Select alarms and set whether to enable the alarms.

] Place check marks next to the alarms ]M [Menu] ]

"On"/"Off"

You can also select "Mark/Unmark" ] "Mark all", "Mark" *,

"Unmark" *, or "Unmark all" by pressing M [Menu].

* Either one appears depending on the alarm status. 268 Convenient Functions When the alarms for "Alarm" and "Schedule"/"To Do"

reach the specified time The following actions are performed by function. Alarm The alarm screen appears, the alarm tone sounds and the illumination lights. To stop the alarm, press C[OFF]. Unless you stop the alarm, the alarm tone repetitively rings 12 times at 5 minute intervals, then stops. You can press I [Snooze] to temporarily stop the alarm with its (Snooze) activated. When the snooze interval time is up, the alarm starts ringing again. While the alarm tone is ringing with (snooze setting) activated, the alarm counter will be reset right after you press I [Snooze], then the alarm will starts ringing over from scratch. Schedule events The schedule alarm screen appears, the alarm tone sounds and the illumination lights. To stop the alarm, press C[OK] and then C[OFF] on the Schedule detail screen. To sound the alarm tone again, select I[Snooze] ]

Select a snooze interval. If the alarm for Schedule is not stopped, the alarm tone sounds again in about 5 minutes regardless of the setting of the snooze interval time. To Do The To Do alarm screen appears, the alarm tone sounds and the illumination lights. To stop the alarm, press C[OK] and then C[OFF] on the To Do detail screen. When the alarm for Alarm, Schedule and To Do are set to the same time The priority order for the alarm is Alarm Schedule alarm To Do alarm. When Public mode (Drive mode) is set Alarm will not sound. Alarm will be notified at the set time after the following day. Alarm for a Schedule event/To do task will not be notified afterward and remains on the Stand-by display. To delete the icon, delete the relevant Schedule event/To do task or change alarm setting to "No alarm". Schedule events Managing Schedule Events Registering Schedule Events You can save a schedule event such as a meeting or appointment. Up to 200 Schedule events and up to 100 holidays can be saved. 1 M[Menu]]

(Stationery)]"Schedule"]Move the cursor to the day to be saved in Schedule ] I [New]

] Perform the following operations C[List]: List of the options for the selected item is displayed. When the cursor is in the time setting field, you can stop creating a schedule event by selecting M [Cancel] ]

"Yes". Convenient Functions 269

(Start Date)]

Specify the date to start the Schedule event. To enter a date, use J to move the cursor to the position and enter a number with dial keys. Press C [List] to select the day from a calendar.

(End Date)]

Specify the date to complete the Schedule event. To enter a date, use J to move the cursor to the position and enter a number with dial keys. Press C [List] to select the day from a calendar. The end date cannot be set earlier than the start date.

(Set time)]

Specify the times to start/end the Schedule event. All day Save the schedule event for a whole day without specifying time. Set time After setting, use D to move the cursor and enter the start and end time of the schedule event. Use J to move the cursor to the position and enter the time with dial keys and switch between "AM" and

"PM" with C (pressing C in the time field opens the Time settings screen that allows you to enter time with dial keys and H). The end time cannot be set earlier than the start time. Depending on the settings in "Date&Time format"

(P111), the display format or order of the date and time may differ.

(Category)]

Select a category for the Schedule event. Icons vary depending on the selected category.

(Subject)]

Up to 200 full-pitch or 400 half-pitch characters can be entered. Up to 2 subjects are displayed at the bottom of the Monthly view screen. 270 Convenient Functions A subject is required to register a Schedule event. The summary is displayed on the Alarm screen that opens when alarm starts.

(Summary)]

Up to 20 full-pitch or 40 half-pitch characters can be entered.

(Set alarm)]

Set whether to be notified with an alarm tone of the set starting date and time. If you select other than "No alarm", perform the following steps to select the alarm tone.

] D ] C [Select] on field ] Select a type of the alarm tone Music Select from Chaku-Uta-Full songs saved in "Music" in the "Data box.P217 Go to Step 3 (P214) in "Setting Chaku-Uta-Full as a Ring tone". i-motion Select from videos/i-motion movies saved in "imotion"

in the "Data box".P249 Melody Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".P254

(Set repeat)]

You can set a schedule event to recur periodically. Select "Once"

not to repeat. If "Weekdays" is selected, perform the following steps to specify the day of the week:

] D ] C [List] on "Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa" field ] Place check marks next to days of the week ] I [Done]

(Secret)]

This option appears when Secret mode (P121) is set to "ON". Set this option to "ON" if you save the created schedule event as secret data. 2 I [Done]

Note

<Secret>

When the "Secret mode" (P123) is set to "Secret only mode", the Schedule entry is saved as secret data. The secret Schedule is displayed when the "Secret mode" is set to "On" or "Secret only mode". At the set time of a secret Schedule event while the

"Secret mode" is set to "OFF", the alarm tone sounds, however, the description of the event will not appear, and "Secret" appears on the notification screen. Viewing Schedule Events You can view settings of a schedule event from the Calendar screen. 1 M[Menu]]

(Stationery)] "Schedule"

1 The day when a schedule event is set 2 A schedule event saved for the highlighted day Up to 2 events will be displayed. Schedule events that have passed their start times will not be displayed. 13: Switch the view to yearly. 79FE : Switch the view to monthly. 5Return to the current date. On the Monthly view, blue indicates Saturdays, and red indicates Sundays and holidays. You can switch between the Monthly and Weekly view of the Calendar screen.P272 2 Select a day to view J: Switch to the previous/next day. 2 3 1 4 5 1 2 Calendar screen Schedule list screen 1 Date 2 Icon indicating a "Category"

3 Start time-End time, Subject 4 Icon indicating a schedule event set for other than Japan time Appears if the schedule event's "Local time zone" (P48) is set to other than "GMT+9:00" (outside of Japan). 5 Alarm icon Appears when the alarm is set to sound. Convenient Functions 271 3 Select the event to view The Schedule detail screen opens. Note National Holidays are based on "

1743

(law relating to national holidays and old-age persons' welfare, as amended (Law No. 43, 2005))". Spring Equinox Day and Autumnal Equinox Day are released in an official gazette on February 1 and may not be exact (as of March, 2009). Switching the Calendar View The Calendar screen can be viewed on monthly basis or weekly basis. Perform the following steps to switch views temporarily.

] On the Calendar screen M [Menu] ] "Weekly view" /

"Monthly view"

Perform the following steps to switch default.

] In calender screen M[Menu]] "Settings" ] default view field C[List] ] "Monthly view"/"Weekly view"

An "All day" schedule event is set for the day Set time for the schedule event Use H to scroll the screen to view the hidden hours Weekly view 272 Convenient Functions Sub Menu on the Calendar View 1 Month view screen (P271)/Week view screen (P272)

] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Add new]

Register a new Schedule event.P269

[Set holiday]

Set or release a selected day as a holiday. To set a day as a holiday, select "Set holiday" ] select an option from the following ] enter a "Holiday name" ] I [Done]. On the day Weekly Set the highlighted day as a holiday. Set the day of the week of the highlighted day Monthly Set the date of the highlighted day as a as a weekly holiday. Annually Set the date of the highlighted day as an monthly holiday. annual holiday. Duration(2-31) Set a period from 2 to 31 days as holidays from the highlighted day. Enter the number of days in the "Duration (2-31)" field. To cancel holidays, select "Clear holiday" ] "Yes". Select "Yes"

on the Confirmation of deletion of repeat screen for a holiday set as "Weekly", "Monthly", "Annually", or "Duration (2-31)".

[Week view/Month view]

Switch the view by week or by month.P271

[Go to date]

The Calendar for the specified day appears. Use J to move the cursor to the position in the "Go to date" field, and enter the date and time with dial keys.

[Delete]

Register a new Schedule event.P269 Previous entries Delete all events scheduled prior to today. All entries Delete all Schedule events.

[Send all via IrDA]

Send all Schedule events via IrDA.P259

[Memory info.]

Schedule events and holidays status will be displayed. If "Secret mode" is set to "ON" or "Secret data only mode", the number of pieces of secret data is shown in "Secret".

[Reset holiday]

Restores the default holiday set in "Set holiday".

[Settings]

Configure how the Calendar screen will be displayed. Default view Configure the display format of the Monthly view type Select a starting day of the week from Calendar screen when launching Schedule. Sunday or Monday.

[Multiple choice]*2 You can select and delete scheduled events set to the selected day.

] Place check marks next to the schedule events to delete

] I [Delete] ] "Yes"

You can select "Mark all" or "Unmark all" from "Delete" or "Mark/

Unmark" by pressing M [Menu].

[Go to date]*2 The Calendar for the specified day appears. Use J to move the cursor to the position in the "Enter date you want to go to" field, and enter the date and time with dial keys.

[Delete]

Delete the selected schedule event and holiday.

*1 Not available when you are using the default or "Set holiday"

Weekly start time Configure the starting time displayed in the configuration. Week view.

*2 Not displayed on the Schedule detail screen. Sub Menu on the Schedule List Screen/Detail Screen 1 Schedule list screen (P271)/Detail screen ] M

[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

To Do list Managing To Do Tasks

[Add new]

Register a new Schedule event.P269

[Send via]*1 Send the selected schedule events as an i-mode mail attachment or via Infrared communication.

[Edit]*1 Edit the selected Schedule event.P269 Registering To Do Tasks Up to 50 To Do tasks can be entered. Convenient Functions 273 1 M[Menu]]

] Perform the following operations:

C [List]: List of the options for the

(Stationery)]"To do list"] I [New]

selected item is displayed. When the cursor is in the due date setting field, you can stop creating a To Do task by selecting M [Cancel] ]

"Yes". New Memo Creation Screen

(Category)]

Select the category of the To Do task. Icons vary depending on the selected category.

(Subject)]

Up to 200 full-pitch or 400 half-pitch characters can be entered. The subject is displayed on the To Do list screen. A Subject is required to register a To Do task. The summary is displayed on the Alarm screen that opens when the alarm starts.

(Summary)]

Up to 20 full-pitch or 40 half-pitch characters can be entered.

(Due date)]

Set the due date of the To Do task. To set the date, use J to move the cursor to the place to change the date and enter the date with the dial keys (to set the date on the calendar screen, press C [Select] in the date entry field ). Operations on the calendar screenP271 To set the time, use J to move the cursor to the value to change, enter the time with dial keys, and switch between "AM"

and "PM" with C (pressing C in the time entry field opens the time settings screen on which you can enter a time using dial keys and H). 274 Convenient Functions Depending on the settings in "Date&Time format", the display order or format for the date and time may differ.P111

(Priority)]

Select a priority of the To Do.task Icons vary depending on the selected priority.

(Status)]

Select a status of the To Do task. Icons vary depending on the selected status. When "Completed" is selected, the due date and the subject will be crossed out, and the task appears after To Do tasks with status other than "Completed" on the To Do list screen.

(Set alarm)]

Set whether to be notified with an alarm tone at the set due date and time. If you select other than "No alarm", perform the following steps to select the alarm tone. D ] C [Select] on field ] Select a type of the alarm tone Music Select from Chaku-Uta-Full songs saved in "Music" in the "Data box". P217 Go to Step 3 (P214) in "Setting a Chaku-Uta-Full Song as a Ring Tone". i-motion Select from videos/i-motion movies saved in "imotion"

in the "Data box". P249 Melody Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box". P254 2 I [Done]

Viewing To Do Tasks You can list and view registered To Do tasks. 1 M[Menu]] (Stationery)]"To Do list"

Saved To Do tasks are listed in the order of HighlowNo Priority. When two or more To Do tasks have the same level of Priority, the task with earlier due date is listed first. When To Do tasks have same due date, the one with earliest registered date is listed first. For To Do tasks with "Status" set to "Completed", the due date and the subject are crossed out and the task appears after To Do tasks with status other than "Completed". 1 2 3 4 5 To Do List Screen 1 Icon indicating a "Status"

2 Due date and subject 3 Priority

/ / "High"/"Low"/"No priority"

4 To Do task with the alarm set 5 Icon indicating a To Do task set for other than Japan time Appears if this To Do task was registered while the terminal

"Local time zone" (P49) is set to other than "GMT+9:00". 2 Select a To Do task to view The To Do detail screen opens. Sub Menu on the To Do List/Detail Screen 1 To do list screen (P275) or To Do detail screen ] M

[Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Add new]

Create a new To Do entry.P274

[Send via]

Send the selected To Do tasks as i-mode mail attachment or via Infrared communication.

[Edit]

Edit the selected To Do task.P274

[Change status]

Change the "Status" of the selected To Do task.P274

[Multiple choice]*

You can select and delete To do tasks.

]Place check marks next to To do tasks to delete ]I

[delete] ] "Yes"

You can also select "Mark all" or "Unmark all" from "Mark/

Unmark" by pressing M [Menu].

[Delete]

Delete the selected To Do task.

[View calendar]

Display the current date of the calendar.

* This does not appear on the To Do detail screen. Convenient Functions 275 Remembering dates Managing Anniversaries You can display the number of days until an important event on the Stand-by screen or find the number of days quickly by using the Date counter and Date search. Date counter Registering in Date Counter Up to 30 important events can be tracked for remaining days. 1 M[Menu]] (Stationery)]"Remembering dates" ]

"Date counter" ] I [Add] ] Performs the following operations:

(Category)]

Select the event category. Icons vary depending on the selected category. Press C [List] to select a category and icon from the Icon list screen. 2 I[Done]

Checking the Number of Days Remaining Using the Date Counter You can find the number of days remaining until the saved event. 1 M[Menu]] (Stationery)]"Remembering dates" ]

"Date counter"

Date Counter Registration Screen

(Date) Specify the date of an event. To enter a date, use J to move the cursor to the position and enter a number with dial keys. Memo Up to 40 full-pitch or 80 half-pitch characters can be entered. The memo is displayed on the Date counter list screen. You cannot save events to the Date Counter without a memo. 276 Convenient Functions 1 2 Date Counter List Screen 1 Counter display Display with - : Show the elapsed days from the set date to today. Display with + : Show the remaining days from today to the set date. 2 Icon to display on the Stand-by display An event that is to be displayed on the Stand-by screen. 2 Select an event to find the days The Event detail screen opens. To display the remaining days on the Stand-by display You can select one of the registered events and show the days remaining until that event on the Stand-by display. Perform the following steps from the

"Date counter" screen to display the remaining days:

]Move the cursor to the event ]

M [Menu] ] "Display on stand-by screen"

Category and remaining days for an event Sub Menu on the Date Counter List/Detail Screen 1 Date counter list (P276)/detail screen ] M [Menu] ]

Perform the following operations:

[Add new]

Save a new event.P276

[Edit]

Edit the selected event.P276

[Display day on stand-by screen/Cancel displaying]*

Specify whether to show the Date counter for the selected event on the Stand-by display.

[Multiple Choice]*

You can select and delete events.

]Place check marks next to events to delete]I [delete]

]"Yes"

You can also select "Mark"*, "Mark all"*, "Unmark"*, "Unmark all"*

from "Delete" or "Mark/Unmark" by pressing M [Menu].

* Items displayed vary depending on the status of an event.

[Delete]

Delete the selected event.

* This does not appear the Detail screen. Using Date Search You can find the date when the designated days passed after the starting date. For example, you can easily find the date 100 days after today. You can check out the date up to 9999 days after today. Convenient Functions 277 1 M[Menu]] (Stationery)]"Remembering dates" ]

"Date search"]Perform the following operations:

I [Reset]: Reset the set value.

[From]

Specify the date to start searching. Use J and dial keys to enter the date.

[After]

Enter the number of days after the starting date using dial key. For example, to find the date 100 days after "From", enter

"100".

[Result]

Show the date when the designated days passed. Custom Menu Quick Access to Frequently Used Functions You can quickly access frequently used functions by saving them to the Custom menu. Creating the Custom Menu You can save up to 10 frequently used functions to the Custom menu. You can also change the default functions. Example: To register a function to an unused custom menu number [Menu 8]

1 M[Menu] (for 1+ seconds) ] Move the cursor to

"Menu 8" ] I [Add]

The "Add new" screen opens. To change the assigned function Select the function ] Press I [Edit]

2 Select a function The selected function will be registered to the Custom menu number. A currently registered function cannot be registered again. Using the Custom Menu 1 The Stand-by screen ] M [Menu] (for 1+ seconds) You can also perform the following steps:

M [Menu] ] I [Custom]

2 Select a function to access Custom menu screen 278 Convenient Functions Sub Menu on the Custom Menu Screen 1 Custom menu screen (P278) ] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

2 M [Menu]]"Edit"

The Edit own number screen opens.

[Add new]*1 Select and register a function selected from the list.P278

[Open]*2 Start the selected function.

[Edit]*2 Change the registered function.

[Delete]*2 Delete the selected function.

[Delete all]

Delete all registered functions.

*1 This appears when an unused menu number is selected.

*2 This appears when a registered function is selected. Own number Registering Your Name and Image You can store your personal information in the FOMA terminal. 1 M [Menu] ]

the security code The Own number detail screen opens.

(Own number)] C [Detail] ] Enter 3 Enter the information] I [Done]

For steps to register, see Step 2 in "Saving FOMA Terminal Phonebook (Phone) Contacts" (P80). You cannot set secret data. The pre-installed own number cannot be changed or deleted. Note If you change a mail address using i-mode, the address saved to this function will not be updated automatically. Sub Menu on the Own Number Detail Screen 1 Own number detail screen ]M[Menu]]Perform the following operations:

[Mail/URL]

Create mail using the saved mail address, or connect to a site to the saved URL. Compose mail Create i-mode mail addressed to other than Attach to mail Create i-mode mail with Own number own number or own mail address. information attached. Compose SMS Create an SMS message addressed to other Connect to URL Connect to the saved URL. than own number. Convenient Functions 279

[Edit]

You can edit items on the Own number detail screen.P279

[Send Ir data]

Send the information on the Own number detail screen via infrared communication.P260 Copy item]

You can copy the contents of saved items on the Own number detail screen.

[Customize call]

Change the saved number other than own number, and make a call to the new number. Use C [Save] to save the phone number to the Phonebook.

[Reset]

Delete all registered personal information. Call costs are stored in the UIM. When a different UIM is used, the stored call costs appear (storing started in December, 2004). The displayed call duration and call cost can be reset. The displayed call duration and cost are approximate values and may be different from actual ones. Note that call cost does not include the consumption tax. Note The call duration/cost for i-mode communication and packet communication is not included. For checking i-mode usage charges, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version". Checking Call Duration/Call Cost You can check the last and accumulated call duration and costs of voice and video calls. Voice call duration and digital communication duration (video call duration) are displayed for Call duration. Call duration includes both incoming and outgoing calls. Call cost includes only outgoing calls. However, calls made to toll free numbers or the information number (104) have "0 YEN"

or " YEN" displayed. Call duration Checking Call Duration You can check the duration of the previous and accumulated duration of voice and video calls. 1 M[Menu]]

(Phonebook & Logs) ]"Call duration"

[Last voice Call]

Display the duration of the latest voice call.

[Last video Call]

Display the duration of the latest video call. 280 Convenient Functions

[Total voice Call]

Display the total duration of voice calls from the last reset until now.

[Total video Call]

Display the total duration of video calls from the last reset until now.

[Last video call cost]

Display the previous video call cost.

[Total calls cost]

Display the total cost of calls from the last reset until now.

[Reset date & time]

Display the last reset date and time. Note The displayed Call duration returns to 0 (zero) seconds and starts counting when the duration exceeds 99hours, 59minutes and 59seconds. The ringing and dialing durations are not counted. Note International call costs of WORLD CALL are counted. Call costs to use other international telephone services are not counted. To reset individual items for "Call duration" settings Move the cursor to the item to reset ]I [Reset] ]Enter the security code ] Select "Yes". To reset all items for "Call duration" settings You can reset all items at one time.

] M [Menu] ] "Reset all" ] Enter the security code ]"Yes"

Resetting Total Call Costs 1 M [Menu]] (Phonebook & Logs) ]"Call costs"

]Check call costs 2 I [Reset] ] Enter the PIN2 code ] "Yes"

Call costs Checking Call Costs Call cost includes only outgoing calls. Set call cost limit Setting a Call Cost Limit Set the limit of total call cost as threshold so that you will be notified when the cost reached the limit. 1 M[Menu]] (Phonebook & Logs) ]"Call costs"

]Check call costs 1 M [Menu] ] (Phonebook & Logs) ] "Call costs" ] "Set call cost limit"

[Last voice call cost]

Display the previous voice call cost. 2 Enter the security code ] Perform the following operations:

Convenient Functions 281

[Set limit]

Set whether to limit total call costs.

[Call cost limit]

Set the limit of the total call cost.

[Notification]

Select how to indicate that the total call cost has reached its limit. OFF Sound+Icon You will be notified with the call cost icon + the You will not be notified. call cost tone. Icon You will be notified with the call cost icon. If the limit is exceeded The call cost icon appears on the Stand-by display. When you set "Set call cost limit" to "Sound+Icon", the call cost tone sounds after the call that reached the limit. To hide the Call cost icon

] M [Menu] ] (Phonebook & Logs) ] "Call costs" ]

"Delete call cost icon"

World time Using the World Time You can view the date and time in major cities around the world stored in the FOMA terminal. 1 M [Menu]] (Stationery) ] "World time"

C [Change]: Change the selected city. The World time setting screen opens. 2 1 World time list screen 1 Home icon Indicates the city set as Home.

* The home city set in the World time is linked with the city set in "Local time zone" in "Set Date&Time"(P48). Changing the city in one setting changes the other city automatically. Therefore, you cannot change the Home city if "Auto time set" in "Set Date&Time" is set to "ON". 2 The currently specified city and time 2 I [Add]

C [List]: Open the list of cities and select a city. Press M [Prev.] or I [Next] to switch the city name list by page. 1 2 World time setting screen 1 The currently selected city name, date, and time 2 Date and time of Home (own country) 282 Convenient Functions 3 Press J to select a city to add The selected city is added to the World time list screen. Stopwatch Using the Stopwatch Sub Menu of the World Time List Screen 1 World time list screen (P282) ] M [Menu] ] Perform the following operations:

[Change home City]*1 Change the city set as Home.

[Change City]*2 Change the selected city.

[Daylight Saving]*1 Set whether to use Daylight savings time.

[Analog Clock On/Analog Clock Off]

Set whether to display the analog clock on the World time list screen.

[Delete]*2 Delete the selected city.

[Delete all]*2 Delete all cities except the Home city.

*1 This option is not available when "Auto time set" is set to

"ON".

*2 This option is not displayed when the home city is selected. You can use the FOMA terminal as a stopwatch. 1 M [Menu]]

(LifeKit)]"Stopwatch"

C [Start]/[Stop] : Start or stop counting. I [Reset]: Reset the counted result. I [Lap]: Displayed during the counting Each press of this key displays the lap time at that moment at the bottom of the screen. Unit converter Using the Unit Converter You can convert the units for measuring currency, area, length, weight, temperature, volume, or speed. Converting Currency Units This option is useful in occasions such as exchanging from yen to dollars. Convenient Functions 283 Setting the Exchange Rate Before converting, set the exchange rate. 1 M [Menu]] (Stationery)]"Unit converter" ]

"Currency"

Currency unit field Value entry field

[(Exchange rate field)]

Set the exchange rate. Up to 10 digits (including the decimal point) can be entered. Up to 2 digits can be entered after the decimal point. For example, to exchange between US dollars and yen (example: one US dollar is 120 yen), set 120 to "YEN" and 1 to "USD". M [.]/#: Enter the decimal point. Q : Delete from the last entered digit. 4 I [Done]

Convert Currencies Currency exchange screen Convert the one currency to another based on the rates set for those 2 currencies. 2 Select the currency unit field] M [Rate]

"YEN", "USD", "Euro", and "Currency 1-3"

are registered by default. 3 Perform the following operations:

[(Currency name field)]

Press C [Select] to change the currency. Up to 10 full-pitch or 20 half-pitch characters can be entered.

"YEN" in the top row cannot be changed. 1 Select two currencies from the Currency unit field in the Currency exchange screen (P284) C [List]: The Currency list screen opens. 2 Enter the amount in the value entry field of the source currency The converted amount will be displayed in the other value entry field. You can enter/convert in either value entry field. Up to 10 digits (including the decimal point) can be entered. However, if the converted value exceeds 14 digits (including the decimal point) or 2,147,483,647, no more digits can be entered. If the currency in the Currency unit field is changed after the amount was entered, the new amount will be displayed in the lower value entry field using the amount in the upper value entry field as the source. 284 Convenient Functions

#Enter the decimal point. Q: Delete from the last entered digit. I [Reset]: Delete all entered numbers. Converting Area Units Convert one defined area unit to another type of defined area unit. 1 M [Menu]] (Stationery)]"Unit converter" ]

"Surface"

2 Select a unit in the Surface unit field (two places) C [Unit]: The unit list screen opens. 3 Enter the value in the value entry field of the source surface The converted value will be displayed in the other value entry field. You can enter/convert in either value entry field. The description of the values is the same as for the Currency conversion screen.P284 Converting Temperature Units You can convert temperature between Fahrenheit (F) and centigrade (). 1 M [Menu]] (Stationery)]"Unit converter" ]

"Temperature" ] Enter the temperature either in

"Celsius" or "Fahrenheit"

The converted temperature will be displayed in the other value entry field. You can enter/convert in either value entry field. From -40 to 309, or up to 10 digits (including-(minus) and the decimal point) can be entered. M [-]: Enter - (minus) before the value.

#Enter the decimal point. Q : Delete from the last entered digit. I [Reset]: Delete all entered numbers. Converting Length, Weight, Volume, and Speed 1 M [Menu]] (Stationery)]"Unit converter" ]

"Length"/"Weight"/ "Temperature"/"Volume"/"Velocity"

Perform the same subsequent steps as in "Converting Area Units" (P285). Convenient Functions 285 Calculator Using the Calculator You can use the Calculator to perform arithmetic operations, and calculations with functions. 1 M [Menu]] (Stationery)]"Calculator"

1 2 1 Arithmetic operation (+, , , (/), =):

Calculator Use K, C. 2 Keyboard Use *, or #. 2 Calculating

*Enter the decimal point.

# : Enter ( ) parentheses. Q : Delete from the last entered digit. I [AC]: Clear all entered numbers and calculated results. Sub Menu on the Calculator Screen 1 Calculator screen (P286) ] M [Func.] ] Perform the following operations:

Switch the sign (+/-) of the entered number.

[sin]

Perform the trigonometric function.

[cos]

Perform the trigonometric function.

[tan]

Perform the trigonometric function.

[log]

Calculate the logarithm of a number.

[ln]

Calculate the natural logarithm of a number. Calculate the natural logarithm of the specified positive value

(logarithm with the base of e).

[exp]

Calculate the value of a number raised to an exponential level. 286 Convenient Functions

[sqrt]

Calculate the square root of a number.

[deg]

Set the unit of angle to "degree".

[rad]

Set the unit of angle to "radian". Radian expresses an angle using the constant number (180 degrees equal radians). One radian (360 degrees/2 is approximately 57.29578 degrees; One degree (2/360 degrees) is approximately 0.01745 radian (where =3.141592653). Memo Using Memos Creating Memos Create and save a memo. Up to 50 memos can be saved. 1 M [Menu]] (Stationery)]"Memo"] I [New] ]

Perform the following operations:

C [List]: List of items opens.

(Category)]

Select a type (category) of Memo. Icons vary depending on the selected category.

(Subject)]

Enter a memo. Up to 50 full-pitch or 100 half-pitch characters can be entered. A blank memo cannot be saved. 2 I [Done]

Viewing Modifying a Memo You can list and view saved memos. 1 M [Menu]] (Stationery)]"Memo"

2 Select a memo to view The Memo detail screen opens. C [Edit]: The new memo creation screen opens. I [Mail]: The Compose message screen with the Memo List screen contents of "Category" and "Memo" already inserted in the message text opens. Convenient Functions 287 Sub Menu on the Memo List Screen/Memo Detail Screen 1 Memo list screen (P287)/Detail screen ]M [Menu]

]Perform the following operations:

[Add new]

Save a new memo.P287

[Send via]

Send the selected memo as an i-mode mail attachment or via Infrared communication. You can also send all memos via Infrared communication.

[Edit]

Edit the selected memo.P287

[Delete]

Delete the selected memo.

[Multiple choice]*

Select and delete memos.

]Place check marks next to memos to delete ] I [delete] ]

"Yes"

You can also select "Mark all" or "Release all" from "Mark/

Unmark" by pressing M [Menu].

* This is not displayed on the Detail screen. Talking Using the Flat-plug Earphone/microphone with Switch You can connect a flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch

(optional) to the FOMA terminal to make and receive calls. Configuring Switch Actions Specify the phone number to call using a memory number of the Phonebook in the FOMA terminal while connecting the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch. The phone number saved as "Phone number 1" in the terminal Phonebook will be specified. 1 M [Menu]] (Settings)]"Call/VT/ Dialing" ]

"Earphone" ] Perform the following operations:

[Switch call]

Selecting "ON" allows you to make calls by pressing the switch of the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch. 288 Convenient Functions

[Memory number]*

Enter the memory number of the Phonebook. This option can be selected from the Phonebook search screen by pressing C [Search].

* Set "Switch call" to "ON" to make this setting available. 2 I [Done]

Making a Call Using the Switch Press the switch of the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch to make a voice call to the number assigned to the memory number of the Phonebook set under the Earphone setting (P288). 1 Press the switch of the Flat-plug Earphone/

Microphone with Switch once 2 To end the call, press the switch of the flatplug earphone/microphone with switch for 1+ seconds. Receiving a Call Using the Switch 1 A call arrives ] Press the switch of the flatplug earphone/microphone with switch Answer the call. When a video call arrives, the camera image is sent to the other party. To reject incoming calls without answering Press the switch of the flat-plug earphone/ microphone with switch for 2+ seconds. 2 To end the call, press the switch of the flatplug earphone/microphone with switch for 1+ seconds. Answering a Call during a Call If you subscribe to the Call waiting service and activated the service, when a voice call arrives during another voice call, you can answer the second call by pressing the switch of the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch. 1 A call arrives ] Press the switch of the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch The active voice call is placed on hold and you can answer the incoming call. The connecting 3-way screen opens. To reject incoming calls without answering Press the switch of the flat-plug earphone/ microphone with switch for 2+ seconds. To activate the held call during the 3-way connection Press the switch of the flat-plug earphone/ microphone with switch for 2+ seconds. 2 To end the call, press P While the Connecting 3-way screen is displayed, you cannot terminate the call by pressing the switch of the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch. Note When using the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch, a call will not be terminated or placed on hold if the terminal is closed during the call regardless of

"Close setting" (P70). Convenient Functions 289 Auto Answer Automatically Answering a Call Connecting the Flat-plug Earphone/microphone with Switch You can set to answer a call automatically when the flatplug earphone/microphone option with switch is connected after the set ring time has elapsed. 1 M [Menu]] (Settings)]"Call/VT/Dialing" ]

"Incoming call"]"Auto answer"]Perform the following operations:

[Auto answering]

Selecting "ON" allows you to answer calls automatically using the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch.

[Delayed time]*

Enter the time until the call is automatically received.

* Set "Auto answering" to "ON" to make this setting available. 2 I [Done]

Note If you set Auto Answer ring time (duration) to earlier time than the start of the Voice mail or Call forwarding service, or Record message, this function takes precedence. Hour indication Chiming the Hour Set whether to sound a tone each hour, on the hour. 1 M [Menu]] (Settings) ]"Date&Time" ] "Hour indication" ] Perform the following operations:

[Set sound]

Specify the tone. Press C [List] to open the Set sound list screen. Press J to sound the selected tone. From the list screen, press I [Play] ]H to sound the tone. However, if Popup display in Volume Setting is set to mute, Set sound will not be confirmed.

[Time]

Set the time to sound the tone. Use J to move the cursor to the position and enter the time with dial keys, and switch between "AM" and "PM" with C

(pressing C in the time field opens the Time settings screen that allows you to enter time with dial keys and H). Depending on the settings in "Date&Time format", the display order or format for the date and time may differ.P111 2 I [Done]

Note The indication volume sounded when confirming settings and notifying every hour follows

"Alarm/Schedule".P99 290 Convenient Functions Memory status Checking Memory Usage You can check used and free space of the FOMA terminal memory. The space used in the FOMA terminal includes the files/data for the following functions

- Data box (My Picture, i-motion, Melody, and Music)

- Phonebook - Schedule - Holiday

- Memo

- To Do - Date counter

(Settings) ]"Others" ]"Memory status"

1 M [Menu]]

2 Select a memory to view Databox memory Display the amount of data saved in Personal info. Display the amount of data saved in the "Data box". the Phonebook, Schedule, Holiday, Memo, To do, and Date counter. UIM memory Display the amount of data saved on the UIM. Convenient Functions 291 Character Entry Character Input Entering Characters Configuring Character Input Settings Input Setting Modifying/Registering Common Phrases Edit Copying/Cutting and Pasting Characters Using the Kuten Code to Enter Characters Kuten Code Input Registering Frequently Used Words Edit dictionary Initializing Learned Data Reset learnt info Using Downloaded Dictionaries Download Dictionaries 294 295 298 299 301 301 302 303 303 For details about Kuten code list, see "Kuten Code List" (PDF format) contained in the bundled CD-ROM or available at the DOCOMO website. Adobe Reader is required to open "Kuten Code List" in PDF format. If the program is not installed on your PC, install Adobe Reader contained in the bundled CD-ROM first. For details about using the program, see "Adobe Reader Help". 293 Character Input Various operations require entering characters, such as registering to the Phonebook or creating mail. Learn how to enter characters to fully use the FOMA terminal. Character input screen The Character input screen shows the current input mode and operation guide. Switching Input Modes Switch input modes for entering various types of characters. In some input modes, you can switch between full and half-pitch characters. Depending on the input screen, it may not be possible to switch input modes. 1 Character input screen (P294) ]I [Mode]

1 2 3 Character Input screen 1 Available number of characters Indicates number of bytes or number of characters that can be input further. 2 Operation guide field Shows switching among pictographs, symbols, and emoticons, and switching between full- and half-pitch characters. 3 Input mode field Shows the input mode. Switching input modes 2 I [Change]/ J]C [Select]

Each press of I [Change] or J switches the input mode.Pressing H before [Select] switches between full and half-pitch (excluding Hiragana or Kanji input mode). After switching the input mode, you can enter characters in the selected input mode without pressing C [Select].

(kanji)Hiragana or Kanji character input mode

(katakana)Katakana character input mode a/A*(ab/AB*) Alphabetic character input mode 1 (12)Numeric input mode

*: Press M [Upper] to change to upper case. 294 Character Entry Entering Characters In the Hiragana and Kanji input mode, you can enter characters using the Prediction function that predicts conversion options from the characters being entered, and the Next phrase prediction function that predicts the next phrase. You can turn the Prediction function on or off in "Prediction" in

"Input setting". For characters that can be entered with the keys, see "Dial Key Assignments to Characters" (P357). Example: Entering characters in the Hiragana and Kanji input mode 1 Enter characters on the Character input screen

(P294)

#D Character Entry field Prediction option field

(1+ seconds) Q Q

(for 1+

seconds) Conversion options predicted by the Prediction function are displayed. If the Prediction is set to "OFF", conversion options will

not appear. When entering Kana kanji, Katakana, Kanji entry mode, approximately 1.5 seconds after characters are entered, the cursor moves to right automatically (Auto cursor function). However, this does not work in the Numeric input mode. The Auto cursor function can be disabled, or the the time before the cursor moves can be changed. P298 The cursor also moves when pressing R (the cursor moves when pressing D in other than the Hiragana and Kanji input mode). Keys and functions other than character entry Key

Description Toggle between upper and lower case.

* The key is not available for characters that cannot be toggled or in the Numeric input mode. Characters that can take a voiced symbol will be toggled after the voiced symbol is added. Insert line feeds after characters are converted/fixed. Only D is available in the Numeric input mode. Restore the previous state of characters converted or fixed. Erase the character in front of the cursor. Erase all characters converted or fixed after the cursor. When the cursor is at the end of text, all characters will be erased. Display the characters assigned to a key in the reverse order by pressing this key before characters are fixed. Character Entry 295 2 Use H to move the cursor to the conversion option field C [Set]: Fix the entered characters. In the Hiragana and Kanji input mode, press this key to fix the characters without converting them. M [KanaA1]: Display conversion options combined with Katakana and alphanumeric characters. I [Conv.]: Display conversion options without using the Prediction function. Press when there is no conversion option you want to enter at the prediction option field. 3 Move the cursor to the characters to convert ]C

[Select]

The entered characters are fixed. Conversion options predicted by the Next phrase prediction function appear in the display area. If desired characters are displayed, perform Step 2 to 3 to select and enter the characters. Press Q to cancel conversion and to resume entering characters. Converting Characters without the Prediction Function Perform the following steps if desired characters are not shown as conversion options or if Prediction is set to "OFF":

Enter characters on the Character input screen (P294) After entering characters, if the cursor is in the Predicted conversion option area, press Q to move the cursor to the character input area. I [Conv.]

Conversion options for the highlighted area will be displayed. To change the highlighted area, use J to move the cursor. Use H to move the cursor to the conversion option display area Move the cursor to the characters to convert ]C [Select]

The entered characters are fixed. As each phrase is converted, the next phrase will be highlighted. Sub Menu on the Character Input Screen Displayed items vary depending on the options or entered characters on the Character input screen. 1 Character input screen (P294)]M[Menu]]Perform the following operations:

[Common phrases]

Select and enter a saved common phrase. Input Edit

: Select and enter a saved common phrase.

: You can create and save a common phrase, or edit a saved common phrase.P299

[Edit character]

Copy or cut characters specifying a range and paste.P301

[Edit dictionary]

Register a word.P302

[Quote]

Phonebook Own number

: Quote an entry to the Phonebook.

: Quote your phone number. The security code is required to quote.

[Input setting]

Full/Half Upper/Lower

: Switch between full-/half-pitch input mode.

: Switch between upper/lower case input mode in the Alphabetic mode 296 Character Entry

: Activate or deactivate the prediction function. P298

: Set whether to automatically fix the entered characters and move the cursor.P299 Note Common phrases can be edited/registered.P299 Prediction Auto cursor

[Special input]

Space Changing line Kuten Code Pictograph Full symbol Half symbol

: Enter a space before the cursor.

: Enter a linefeed before the cursor.

: Enter a character using its Kuten code. P301

: Select and enter a pictograph from a list.*

: Select and enter a full-pitch symbol from a list. *

: Select and enter a half-pitch symbol from a list. *

: Select and enter an emoticon from a list. *

Emoticon

[Cancel]

Erase all entered characters.

* Use A to switch the input screen.P297 Entering Common Phrases Entering Pictographs/Symbols/Emoticons You can switch the input modes of pictographs/symbols/

emoticons using A. Depending on the current input screen, these characters may not be entered or modes may not be switched. 1 Character input screen (P294) ]A Each press of A switches the input mode, and the list screen opens. Pictograph input mode Full-pitch symbol input mode Half-pitch symbol input mode Emoticon input mode Pictograph list Screen You can enter text using common phrases saved in the FOMA terminal. By default, "Original-1" and "Original-2" are empty. 2 Move the cursor to the pictograph/symbol/emoticon

]C [Select]

The selected character will be entered. 1 Character input screen (P294)]M[Menu]]"Common phrases"]"Input"

The list of Common phrase category screen opens. 2 Select a type ] Select a common phrase The common phrase is entered. Character Entry 297 Available Keys on the List Screen and Their Functions Key

#E

*F Description Display list screens in the order of the screen numbers. Display list screens in the reverse order of the screen numbers. 123 Move the cursor to the left/center/right of the top row on the Pictograph/symbol list screen. 456 Move the cursor to the left/center/right of the middle row on the Pictograph/

symbol list screen. 789 Move the cursor to the left/center/right 0 of the bottom row on the Pictograph/

symbol list screen. Switch between "Pictograph1" and

"Pictograph2" "Pictograph D (Decomail Pictures)" on the Pictograph list screen. Note Depending on the current input screen, these characters may not be entered or modes may not be switched. Entering Pictographs/Symbols/Emoticons Consecutively Characters of each input mode can be consecutively entered.

]Each input mode screen I [Cont.] ] Select characters consecutively ]I I [Set]

Editing Emoticons M [Menu] ]

(Settings) ] "Others" ] "Character input" ] "Edit emoticon"

The Edit emoticon screen opens. Select a category ] Select an emoticon to edit ] I

[Edit]

The Character input screen opens with the selected emoticon entered. Change the Emoticon ]C [Set]

The new emoticon is saved overwriting the existing one. Input Setting Configuring Character Input Settings Configure various settings related to character input. Set Prediction Set whether to enable the Prediction function that displays conversion options matching with the beginning of the characters being entered, or the Next phrase prediction function that displays the predicted next phrase, in the Hiragana and Kanji input mode. 1 Character input screen (P294)]M [Menu] ] "Input setting" ] "Prediction" ]"ON"/"OFF"

298 Character Entry Character Entry Note You can also set the Prediction input by performing the following steps:

M [Menu] ] (Settings) ]"Others" ] "Character input"]"Prediction input"] "On"/"Off"

Fixing Entered Characters Automatically You can configure the input method so that cursor moves to a new position for the next input automatically after a set time so that another character can be entered with the same key. 1 Character input screen (P294)]M [Menu] ] "Input setting" ] "Auto cursor" ] Select the speed OFF

: Characters are not automatically fixed. Slow : Characters are fixed approximately two seconds after being entered. Normal : Characters are fixed approximately 1.5 seconds Fast after being entered.

: Characters are fixed approximately 1 seconds after being entered. Edit Modifying / Registering Common Phrases Register frequently used greetings or phrases as common phrases to enter them quickly. Registering Common Phrases Newly defined common phrases can be saved in "Original-

1" or "Original-2". Up to 10 common phrases can be saved. 1 Character input screen (P294)]M[Menu]]"Common phrases"]"Edit"

The common phrase types are listed. Edit common phrase List screen 2 "Original-1"/"Original-2" ]Move the cursor to a phrase type for adding a phrase ]I [Edit]

Up to 64 full-pitch or 128 half-pitch characters can be entered. Edit common Phrase screen Character Entry Character Entry 299 3 Enter text to register ]C [Set]

The common phrase is registered. Editing Pre-installed Common Phrases You can edit a pre-installed common phrase. 1 Character input screen (P294)]M [Menu] ]"Common phrases"]"Edit"]Select a common phrase type

"Greeting"

Common Phrase List Screen 2 Move the cursor to a phrase ]C [Edit The Common phrase edit screen opens with the selected common phrase entered. Press C [Select] to open the full screen with the common phrase entered. 3 Edit the common phrase ]C [Set]

The common phrase is registered. 300 Character Entry Character Entry Note You can also edit common phrases saved in a user-

defined folder. You can also perform the following steps to save or edit a common phrase. M [Menu] ] (Settings) ] "Others" ] "Character input" ] "Edit common phrase"

Common Phrase Edit Screen Sub Menu 1 The Edit common phrase screen (P299) ]M [Menu]

]Perform the following operations:

[Reset all]

Restore all common phrases to their defaults.

[Cancel]

Terminate editing a common phrase. Sub Menu on the Common Phrase List/Display 1 Common phrase list screen (P300) /Display all screen

(P299)]M [Menu] ]Perform the following operations:

[Delete 1 item]

Delete the selected common phrase.

[Reset 1 item] *1 Restore the selected common phrase to its default.

[Category reset] *2 Restore all common phrases in the category to their defaults.

[Cancel]

Terminate editing a common phrase.

*1 A common phrase whose type is "Original-1" or "Original-2"

cannot be selected.

*2 Not displayed in the sub menu for "Display all" screen. Copying/Cutting and Pasting Characters You can copy/cut characters and paste them to other locations or on other screens. Copied/cut characters can be pasted any number of times until the FOMA terminal is turned off or another copy/cut is performed. 1 Character input screen (P294) ]M [Menu] ] "Edit character" ] "Copy"/"Cut"

2 Use Kto move the cursor to the starting point ]C

[Select]

3 Use Kto move the cursor to the ending point

]C[Select]

4 Open the character input destination screen ] Use Kto move the cursor to the position to paste 5 M[Menu] ] "Edit character" ] "Paste" ] "Yes"

To undo a cut or paste operation, select M[Menu] ]

"Edit character" ] "Undo"

Note If copied or cut text contains more characters than the allowable number of characters, the excess characters are truncated when pasted. Characters can be pasted only if copied or cut text can be entered in the destination text. For example, Hiragana or Kanji characters cannot be pasted in the mail address field (half-pitch alphanumeric characters). Line feeds in a copied text string are replaced with halfpitch spaces if the text is pasted to an input screen that does not allow linefeeds. When pasting in the Deco-mail message after copying or cutting, the decoration information will also be pasted (except for some decoration information). Kuten Code Input Using the Kuten Code to Enter Characters You can enter a 4-digit Kuten Code to enter a letter, numeric character, or symbol, etc. For the "Kuten Code List", refer to the "Kuten Code List" on the contained in the bundeled CD-ROM in PDF format. Character Entry Character Entry 301 1 Character input screen (P294) ]M [Menu] ] "Special input" ] "Kuten code"

1 Character input screen (P294) ]M

[Menu] ] "Edit dictionary"

To view registered words, select a dictionary and press C. 2 I [Add] ] Select or save the following item Kuten Code input screen 2 Enter the Kuten code (4-digit number) for the character ]C [Select]

The associated character is entered. If you proceed to press [Cont.], you can enter consecutive characters using Kuten codes. You can also select characters by moving the cursor with K. Edit dictionary Registering Frequently Used Words You can register up to 100 words not listed as conversion options, or words with difficult readings, along with the readings. Registered words will be displayed as conversion options when the readings are entered.

[Reading]

Enter the reading that is used to find the registered word. Up to 14 full-pitch Hiragana characters only can be entered. Spare cannot be entered.

[Word]

Enter the word to register. Up to 14 full-pitch or 28 half-pitch characters can be entered. On the Character input screen, after the characters of a "Reading" are entered, the registered word appears as a conversion option. Linefeed cannot be entered. 3 I [Store]

The word is registered to the dictionary. Note You can also perform the following steps to register a word. M [Menu] ]

input" ] "Edit dictionary"

(Settings) ] "Others" ] "Character 302 Character Entry Character Entry Deleting Words You can delete one word or all words registered using "Edit dictionary". Example: Deleting one word 1 Move the cursor to the word to delete on the Stored word list screen (P302) 2 M [Menu] ]"Delete 1 item" ] "Yes"

The selected word will be deleted. To delete all words Select M [Menu] ] "Delete all" ] "Yes" on the Stored word list screen. Reset learnt info Initializing Learned Data Restore the learned data concerning character entry saved in the FOMA terminal to its default. 1 M [Menu] ]

input" ] "Reset learnt info" ] "Yes"/"No"

(Settings) ] "Others" ] "Character Learned Data converted by selecting from conversion options, or characters fixed by pressing C without conversion. The next time you enter the same first character, the learned word appears as the first conversion option. Download Dictionaries Using Downloaded Dictionaries You can enable dictionaries downloaded from i-mode sites, etc. and use them for character conversion. Up to five dictionaries can be enabled. Up to 10 dictionaries can be stored in the FOMA terminal. 1 M [Menu] ]

input" ] "Download dictionary"

(Settings) ] "Others" ] "Character Downloaded Dictionary screen 2 Place check marks next to dictionaries to enable ]C

[Enable]

Each checked dictionary is enabled. To disable a dictionary Select an enabled dictionary and press C [Disable]. Sub Menu on the Downloaded Dictionary Screen 1 Downloaded dictionary screen (P303) ]M [Menu] ]

Perform the following operations:

I [View]: Display details of the dictionary.

[Delete]

Delete the selected dictionary.

[Delete all]

Delete all listed dictionaries. Character Entry 303 Network Services Network Services Available The following DOCOMO network services are available for the FOMA terminal. Service name Subscription Monthly charge Service name Subscription Monthly charge Voice Mail Service Call Waiting Service Call Forwarding Service Nuisance call Blocking Service Caller ID Notification Service Required Charged Required Charged Required Free Not required Not required Free Free Free Dual Network Service English Announcement Service Multi Number Required Charged Not required Free Required Charged OFFICEED Required Charged Public mode

(Drive mode)*

Not required Public mode

(Power off)*

Not required Free Free Caller ID Display Request Service Not required

*Public Mode P71, P72 You cannot use network services while you are out of service area or where For subscription or inquirios, contact the "docomo Information Center" listed there is no signal reception. on the back of this manual.

"OFFICEED" is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription. For details, see the web page "NTT DOCOMO Business Online"

(http://www.docomo.biz/d/212/).(Japanese only) This manual contaios an overview of network services available through operation of FOMA terminal menus. For details, see "Mobil Phone User's Guide

[Network Services]. Voice Mail Service Voice mail Call Waiting Call waiting Call Forwarding Service Call forwarding Nuisance Call Blocking Service Nuisance Call Blocking Caller ID Notification Service Caller ID notification Caller ID Request Caller ID request Set In-call Arrival Act Set in-call arrival act Selecting Actions to an Incoming Call during a Call Arrival call act Dual Network Service Dual Network English Guidance English guidance Service Numbers Available Service numbers Setting Remote Control Remote Control Multi Number Multi number OFFICEED Registering and Using a New Service Additional Services (USSD Registration) Registering Additional Guidance Additional guide 306 307 309 311 312 312 312 313 313 314 314 315 315 317 317 318 305 Voice mail Voice Mail Service When your terminal is out of the service area or turned off, or you cannot answer a call, this service automatically responds to incoming voice/video calls and records messages. Up to 3 minutes can be recorded per voice message, and messages can be recorded for up to 20 voice calls and 20 video calls. Messages are retained at the center for up to 72 hours. When a message is recorded, (with the number of received messages) appears on the Stand-by display. However, if a video message is recorded, does not appear on the Standby display but an Incoming mail information(SMS) notifies you of the messages. When Record Message (P73) is activated concurrently, to use the Voice mail service first, set the ringing time of the Voice mail service shorter than the Response Time of Record Message. If you do not answer an incoming voice or video call when the Voice mail service is activated, the call is recorded as a

"Missed Call" in Received Calls and appears (with the number of the missed calls). Basic Flow of Voice Mail Service Step 1 : Activate the Voice Mail Service Step 2 : A call arrives*

Step 3 : Caller records a message Step 4 : Play the message

* When you are in a hurry, you may want to record a message without listening to the Response Greeting of the Voice mail service. In this case, you can immediately start recording a message by pressing "#". 306 Network Services Note In Step 2, if you are in service area and the FOMA terminal is turned on, a ring tone sounds until the set ring time elapses. When an incoming call is not answered while a ring tone is sounding, the call is connected to the Voice mail service center. The ring time can be changed. In Step 3, when a message is recorded, appears (the number is the number of recorded messages) on the Stand-by display, and calls are recorded in Received calls as missed calls. However, if you set "Set ring time" to 0, missed calls will not be recorded in Received calls. Even when the Voice mail service is deactivated, you can forward an incoming voice call to the Voice mail center manually using the sub menu.P69 To change the settings to connect video calls to the Voice mail center, make a voice call to "1412". Using the Voice Mail Service 1 M[Menu] ]

the following operations:

(Service) ] "Voice mail" ] Perform

[Activate]

Activate the Voice mail service.

[Set ring time]

Set time before connecting to the Voice mail service center after a call arrives.

]"Yes" ] Enter a ring time

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the Voice mail service.

[Check setting]

Check the current settings of the Voice mail service. Press M [Menu] to activate/deactivate the Voice mail service, or set a ring time.

[Play messages]

Make a call to the Voice mail service center and play the recorded voice mail message.

[Voice mail setting]

Make a call to the Voice mail service center, and change the settings according to the voice guidance.

[Check messages]

Check whether there are new messages.

[Notify missed call]

An SMS will be sent to notify you of missed calls when calls arrived while the terminal is turned off or out of service area, after the terminal is turned on or in service area. Activate call notification Deactivate Check setting

: Deactivate the Notify missed call service.

: Check the status of the Notify missed call setting.

: Activate the Notify missed call service.

[Del. Voicemail icon]

Hide displayed in the icon display area.

[Tone/Vibration message notification]

Set whether to notify you of a new recorded message with illumination and a ring tone. Note Even when you activate "SMS (Reject All SMS)", the notification will be received. Call waiting Call Waiting When a call arrives during another call, a call termination during a call tone sounds. You can place the active call on hold and answer the other call. You can also place the active call on hold to make another call. To use the "Call waiting" service, set "In-call arrival act"

(P312) to "Answer" in advance. If this option is set otherwise, an incoming voice call during another voice call cannot be answered even if the "Call waiting" service is activated. The Call waiting service is not available when:

- Dialing a number or ringing the other party

- A voice call arrives during a video call

- A video call arrives during a voice call Using Call Waiting 1 M[Menu] ]

following operations:

(Service)]"Call waiting"]Perform the Network Services 307

[Activate]

Activate the "Call waiting" service.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the "Call waiting" service.

[Check setting]

Check whether the Call waiting service is activated or deactivated. Answering a Call Placing the Active Call on Hold When a call arrives during a voice call, the call termination tone during a call sounds from the earpiece, and the Incoming call screen opens. 1 A call arrives]A The active voice call is placed on hold, and you can answer the incoming voice call. A message "Connecting 3-way"

appears on the 3-way connection screen. I [Switch]: Each press this key toggles between the active call and the held call. C [Spk on/Spk off]: Toggle Hands-free between On and Off. P: End the active call. Note If you deactivate Call waiting, you cannot answer a call even when you hear in-call arrival tone during a call with "Set in-call arrival act" activated. Making a Call Placing the Active Call on Hold You can make a new voice call placing the active voice call on hold. 1 Voice call screen (P53)]C OK ]M [Menu] ] "New call" ] Enter a phone number ]A The new call becomes active, the previous call is placed on hold, and the connecting 3-way screen opens. To switch to a held call, press C OK ] M [Menu] ]

[Switch]. To end the held call, switch to the call by performing the above steps and press P. Answering an Incoming Call Terminating the Active Answer an incoming voice call after terminating the active voice call. You can answer the call even when the Call waiting service is activated. 1 A call arrives]C OK ]M [Menu]]"End active call "

The Voice call termination screen opens, and the Incoming voice call screen for the incoming call opens. to answer the call after terminating the held call C OK ] M [Menu] ] "End the call" ] "End held call When connecting 3-way, The held call is terminated, and you answer the incoming call. 2 A 308 Network Services Sub Menu of the Incoming Call Screen during a Call Screen 1 When a call arrives during a call, press C OK ] M

[Menu] ] perform the following operations:

[Voice mail]*1 Connect the incoming call to the Voice mail service center.

[Call rejection]

Reject an incoming call and hang up.

[Call forwarding] *2 Forward an incoming call to the specified number.

[End active call]

Terminate the active call. A call is arriving.

[Mute]

Mute or un-mute the active call.

*1 This is not available unless you subscribe to the Voice mail service.

*2 This is not available unless you subscribe to the Call forwarding service and you have specified a forwarding number. Sub Menu on the 3-way Connecting Screen 1 The 3-way connecting screen C OK ]M [Menu] ]

Perform the following operations:

[Switch]

Switch between the active call and held call.

[End call]

Select and terminate a call. End active call

: Terminate the active call. The held call automatically becomes active.

: Terminate all calls. End held call End all calls

[Mute]

Mute or un-mute the active call.

[Send my info.]

Create i-mode mail with own number entered in the message text. P131

[Search phonebook] *

Search for a Phonebook entry.P87

* This cannot be used when the Phonebook is accessed. To use this function, terminate applicable functions from the task list screen. P264 Call forwarding Call Forwarding Service When your terminal is out of service area or switched off, or a call was not answered within the set ring time, this service forwards the voice/video call. Video calls are forwarded only to a video call capable destination complying with 3G-324M. The subscriber to the Call forwarding service is changed for forwarding a call to a destination. This service is not available with some billing plans. When Record message (P73) is activated concurrently, to use the Call forwarding service first, set the ring time of the Call forwarding service shorter than the Ring time of Record message. If an incoming voice or video call is not answered when the Call forwarding service is activated, the call is recorded as a Missed call in Received calls and appears (the number is the number of missed calls). Network Services 309 Basic Flow of the "Call forwarding" Service Step 1 : Register the phone number of the forwarding destination Step 2 : Activate the "Call forwarding" Service Step 3 : A call arrives Step 4 : Forward the call to the destination Note In Step 3, when you are in a service area and the terminal is turned on, a ring tone sounds until the set Ring time elapses. If an incoming call is not answered while a ring tone is sounding, it is forwarded to the forwarding destination. The ring time can be changed. In Step 4, when the call is forwarded, the call is recorded as a Missed call in Received calls. However, if you set the ring time to zero, missed calls will not be recorded in Received calls. Even when the "Call forwarding" service is deactivated, an incoming call can be forwarded to a forwarding destination manually from the sub menu. P76 You cannot answer a call if you do not subscribe to the Call waiting service even if you hear a call termination tone during a call. Using the Call Forwarding Service 1 M[Menu] ]

the following operations:

(Service) ] "Call forwarding" ]Perform 310 Network Services

[Activate]

Activate the "Call forwarding" service. Register the forwarding number Set ring time

: Register the phone number of the forwarding destination. Press M[Search]

to find the number from the Phonebook.

: Set the duration from when a call arrives until the call is forwarded.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the Call forwarding service.

[Register the forwarding number]

Register the phone number of the forwarding destination. Press M[Search] to find the number from the Phonebook. Press I [Done], a confirmation appears. Selecting "Yes"

changes the forwarding destination number and activates the Call forwarding service.

[Setting if forwarding number busy]

Set whether to connect to the Voice mail service center when the forwarding destination is busy.

[Check setting]

Check the current setting of the Call forwarding service. Enable or Disable Forwarding Guidance This cannot be operated from a menu. For details, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network services]". 1 Enter "1429" ]A Follow the voice guidance. Nuisance Call Blocking Nuisance Call Blocking Service This service rejects incoming nuisance calls. After a phone number is registered to be rejected, all incoming calls from that number will be automatically rejected, and the voice guidance is played to the caller. Up to 30 phone numbers can be registered. Even when a call arrives from the phone number to be rejected, the ring tone does not sound. Also, the call is not recorded in Received calls. 1 M[Menu] ] (Service) ] "Nuisance call blocking" ]

Perform the following operations:

[Register nuisance caller]

Register the phone number of the last incoming call you answered to set to reject calls from the number.

[Register selected number]

Set to reject the phone number you selected.

[Delete all entries]

Delete all phone numbers registered as nuisance callers.

[Delete last entry]

The last registered phone number is deleted.Repeat the same steps to delete a phone number from the last saved number, one at a time.

[Check the number of entries]

Check the number of the rejected callers. Network Services 311 Caller ID notification Caller ID Notification Service 1 M [Menu] ]

Perform the following operations:

(Service) ] "Caller ID request" ]

You can notify the other party of your caller ID (phone number) when you call. Your Caller ID will be displayed on the other party's phone if the phone is a digital phone and capable of displaying Caller ID. Your Caller ID is valuable information. Be cautious about sending your Caller ID.

[Activate]

Activate the caller ID request.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the caller ID request.

[Check setting]

Check the current status of Caller ID request. 1 M[Menu] ]

Perform the following operations:

(Service) ] "Caller ID notification" ]

[Activate/Deactivate]

Set whether to send or hide your Caller ID to the other party. The network security code is required to configure the setting.

[Check setting]

Check the current status of the Caller ID notification service. Caller ID request Caller ID Request Note This service is applicable only to calls with "User unset" set as a reason for hiding Caller ID. Set in-call arrival act Set In-call Arrival Act Activate or deactivate incoming call actions set in "Arrival call act" Also, you can check the current settings. 1 M [Menu] ]

Perform the following operations:

(Service) ] "Set in-call arrival act" ]

This service responds a voice/video call without Caller ID, plays a voice guidance requesting the caller send Caller ID, and terminates the call automatically. Calls that did not arrive due to the Caller ID request service are not recorded in Received calls, and the Missed Call notification screen does not appear.

[Activate]

Activate the actions set in "Arrival call act"

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the actions set in "Arrival call act"

[Check setting]

Check the current setting of "in-call arrival act". 312 Network Services Arrival call act Selecting Actions to an Incoming Call during a Call You can set how to respond to an incoming voice/video call during a call when you subscribe to the Voice mail, Call waiting, and Call forwarding services. You cannot respond to an incoming call during a call if you do not subscribe to the Voice mail, Call waiting, and Call forwarding services. Activate "Set in-call arrival act." to use Arrival call act. Dual Network Dual Network Service This service allows you to use the mova service with your FOMA terminal phone number. You can switch between FOMA and mova depending on the service area. You cannot use the FOMA service and mova service concurrently. Switch the services using the Dual Network service when the terminal is not accessing a network.

(Service) ] "Arrival call act" ] Perform

] Perform the following operations:

1 M[Menu] ]

(Service) ] "Others" ] "Dual network"

1 M[Menu] ]

the following operations:

Answer Voice mail Calls are received. Incoming call action will follow the settings of the Voice mail, Call waiting, and Call forwarding services when they are activated. The Voice mail service answers a call. Calls are connected to the Voice mail service even when Call waiting is activated. Call forwarding Forward a call to the registered phone number. Calls are forwarded even when the Voice mail or Call waiting is activated. Calls are rejected.. Call rejection Note Incoming voice or videophone calls are recorded in Received calls regardless of the arrival all act setting.

[Dual network switching]

Switch mova to FOMA to make the FOMA terminal available.

[Check setting]

Check the current status of the setting. Note When switching from FOMA to mova, operate from a mova terminal.

<Dual network switching>

Switching the network during communication forcibly terminates the connection. Network Services 313 English guidance English Guidance The voice guidance played when a network service such as the Voice mail service is activated or when the terminal is out of service area can be played in English. Incoming calls (Guidance to the caller) Language Japanese English Description The Japanese guidance is played. The English guidance is played. Outgoing calls (Guidance to you) Language Description Japanese Japanese+

English English+

Japanese The Japanese guidance is played. The English guidance will follow the Japanese guidance. The Japanese guidance will follow the English guidance. When the caller is using this service at the same time, the caller's settings for making calls have precedence over the receiver's settings for receiving calls. Therefore, match the caller's settings for making calls and the receiver's settings for receiving calls.For example, if receiver's language is set to Japanese+English, English guidance is not played unless caller's language is set to English. 1 M[Menu] ]

guidance" ] Perform the following operations:

(Service) ] "Others" ] "English 314 Network Services

[Guidance setting]

Configure the guidance settings. Outgoing+

Incoming call

: Set guidance languages for incoming and outgoing calls. Select the language after you select "Yes". Outgoing call : Set a guidance language for outgoing calls. Select the language after you select "Yes".

: Set a guidance language for incoming calls. Select the language after you select "Yes". Incoming call

[Check guidance setting]

Check the current setting of Guidance Setting. Service numbers Service Numbers Available You can make a call to a docomo Information Center or Contacts for Repairs. Depending on your UIM, the items displayed may differ or some items may not be displayed. 1 M[Menu] ]

numbers" ] Perform the following operations:

(Service) ] "Others" ] "Service

Call inquiries when malfunction happens. Call for overall instruction or information. Remote Control Setting Remote Control You can set so that a landline phone or pay phone with the touch tone system or a DOCOMO terminal can be used to operate the Voice mail or Call forwarding service. To use the Voice mail or Call forwarding service overseas, Remote control must be activated before leaving Japan. Number Settings Registering Additional Number(s) You can register or set a name, a number, and a ring tone for additional numbers. 1 M [Menu] ]

(Service) ] "Others" ] "Multi number"

] "Number setting" ]Perform the following operations:

1 M [Menu] ]

control" ] Perform the following operations:

(Service) ] "Others" ] "Remote

[Activate]

Activate Remote control.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate Remote control.

[Check setting]

Check the status of the remote control setting. Multi number Multi Number This service allows you to use up to 2 extra phone numbers, Additional number 1 and Additional number 2, as your FOMA terminal phone number in addition to the basic subscription phone number. On the Dialing/Incoming screen, names corresponding to Multi number (Basic number/Additional number1/Additional number2) appear. When you dial from Dialed calls or Received calls, the Multi number dialed from/received to is displayed, and this number is used to dial. Number setting screen

[Basic number: Name]

Enter a name for the Basic number.

[Phone number]

Display your phone number (Basic number).

[Additional no1: Name]

Enter a name of additional number 1.

[Phone number]

Enter a phone number of additional number 1.

[Additional no2: Name]

Enter a name of additional number 2. Network Services 315

[Phone number]

Enter a phone number of additional number 2. 2 I [Done]

Setting the Primary Number You can set a registered additional number as the default number used for making calls. 1 M [Menu] ] (Service) ] "Others" ] "Multi number"

]"Set multi number" ] "Basic number"/"Additional number1"/"Additional number2" ] "Yes"

Setting Ring Tone and Image 1 M [Menu] ] (Service) ] "Others" ] "Multi number"

] "Ring tone & image setting" ] Select an additional number ] Perform the following operations:

C[List]: List of items opens. Checking the Primary Number Settings 1 M [Menu] ] (Service) ] "Others" ] "Multi number"

] "Check setting" ] "Yes"

[Individual setting]

Select whether to set the ring tone or image. Additional Selecting Caller ID for Each Call 1 Enter a phone number 2 M [Menu] ] "Multi number" ] Select a name of the additional number 3 A 316 Network Services

[Ring alert]

Set the ring tone. Music Press D to move the cursor to the field below, and select from Chaku-Uta-Full songs saved in "Melody"

in the "Data box".P217 Go to Step 3 (P214) in "Setting a Chaku-Uta-Full Song as a Ring tone". i-motion : Press D to move the cursor to the field below, and select from videos/i-mode movies saved in "imotion"

in the "Data box".P249 Melody Press D to move the cursor to the field below, and select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".P254 No ring tone is set. OFF

[incoming image]

Set an image to be shown on the incoming call screen. Image Select from images saved in "My picture" in the "Data box".P239 i-motion Select from videos/i-motion movies saved in "imotion"

in the "Data box".P249 2 I [Done]

Note If you specify a video/i-motion with video/audio for

"Select ring tone" (P98) or "Call display"(P105), and you select "Terminal setting" for either "Ring alert" or

"Incoming image", this option will be overridden and the movie/imotion will be played when an applicable voice/video call arrives. OFFICEED

"OFFICEED" is an internal voice call service with fixed charges offered for an in-building mobile communication system IMCS. It requires a separate subscription. For details, see the web page "docomo Business Online"

(http://www.docomo.biz/html/product/officeed/?DCMB_ AREA=03&path=212) (Japanese only). Additional Services (USSD Registration) Registering and Using a New Service When DOCOMO offers a new network service, you can add the service into the menu. Up to 10 new network services can be registered. Adding Services Register a service name and "Special number"/"Service number (USSD)" given by DOCOMO. Service number (USSD) is a code to be sent to Service Center. Network Services 317 1 M [Menu] ]

(Service) ] "Others" ] "Additional service" ] Move the cursor to "Not recorded" ]I

[Edit] ]Perform the following operations:

[Delete all]*2 Delete all added services.

*1 This appears only when the recorded item is selected.

*2 This option appears only when more than one item is registered. Additional services Edit screen

[USSD code]

Register the Service number (USSD).

[Service name]

Enter a service name. 2 C [OK]

Sub Menu on Additional Service List Screen Performing Added Services 1 M [Menu] ]

service" ]Select a service Connect to Service Center.

(Service) ] "Others" ] "Additional Additional guide Registering Additional Guidance Up to 10 response messages, that correspond to a service code (USSD) returned from the service center when additional services connect to the center using the USSD, can be saved. 1 M [Menu] ]

(Service) ] "Others" ] "Additional guide" ]Move the cursor to "Not recorded" ]I [Edit]

] Perform the following operations:

1 M [Menu] ]

service" ] M [Menu] ]Perform the following operations:

(Service) ] "Others" ] "Additional

[Edit]

Modify the selected service.

[Select]*1 Perform the selected service.

[Delete]*1 Delete the selected service. 318 Network Services Additional guidance Edit screen

[USSD code]

Register Service number (USSD).

[Reply message]

Register an Additional guidance name. 2 C [OK]

Sub Menu on the Additional Guidance List Screen 1 M [Menu] ]

guide" ] M [Menu] ]Perform the following operations:

(Service) ] "Others" ] "Additional

[Edit]

Modify the selected guidance.

[Delete]*1 Delete the selected/displayed guidance.

[Delete all]*2 Delete all guidance.

*1 This appears only when the recorded item is selected.

*2 This option appears only when more than one item is registered. Network Services 319 Overseas Use Overview of International Roaming (WORLD WING) Services Available Overseas Differences in Communication Services Checking before Using Overseas Making Calls Overseas Receiving Calls Overseas Setting Telecommunication Carrier Search Mode Network Search Mode/Network Mode Setting Preferred Telecommunication Carrier Preferred NW lists Displaying the Network Name while Roaming Operator name display Activating the Roaming Guidance Roaming guidance setting Setting to Accept No Incoming Calls during Roaming Call barring Using Network Services during Roaming 322 322 323 324 328 331 332 333 333 334 334 335 321 Overview of International Roaming (WORLD WING) International roaming (WORLD WING) is a service that allows to talk or make communications over an affiliated overseas carrier's network using the same phone number as that used domestically. For details of the services available during international roaming, refer to the "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[International Services]". Also, in DOCOMO "International service website", you can see the latest information on international services and download the latest issue of the

"Mobile Phone User's Guide [International Services]". Subscribing to WORLD WING If you subscribed to the FOMA service after September 1, 2005, a separate subscription is not required. If you subscribed to the FOMA service after September 1, 2005, a separate subscription is not required. However, if you unsubscribed to the FOMA service subscription or canceled the service, a separate subscription is required. If you initially subscribed to the FOMA service before August 31, 2005 and have not subscribed to "WORLD WING", a separate subscription is required. Before use the FOMA terminal overseas, please view the followings for reference.

"Mobile Phone User's Guide [International Services]"

"Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network Services]"

Services Available Overseas Communication services available vary depending on the overseas carrier and/or network used. For details of communication services available in international roaming, refer to the "Mobile Phone User's Guide [International Services]" or DOCOMO website. Communication Services Available Service Voice call Video Calls i-mode*1 i-mode mail i-Channel*2 Description Using the same phone number as that used in Japan, you can make/receive calls in another country and make international calls to a third country. You can make or receive an international video call with a user using the terminal supporting video calls of an overseas specific 3G carrier or a FOMA terminal user in Japan. You can use i-mode to acquire information from Japan and the country you where you are. Using the same mail address as that used in Japan, you can send/receive i-

mode mail. You can download information periodically as in Japan.*3 You can also press the i-Channel assigned key to open a channel list and download detailed information.*4 322 Overseas Use Service SMS Data Communication Description You can send or receive SMS to/from a FOMA user in Japan and a user of an oversea telecommunication carrier other than DOCOMO. You can connect a PC or other devices to use data communication (packet data communication).

*1 To set overseas use in i-mode is required.

*2 This may not be available depending on the carrier or area. To set overseas use in i-mode is required.

*3 Auto Update is suspended automatically if the terminal is connected to an overseas carrier. To resume automatic update of i-Channel overseas, you need to perform i-Channel settings again. However, packet communication charges apply in addition to the monthly charge.

*4 Packet communication charges apply for i-Channel communication (including Basic Channels). 3G GSM GPRS Service Voice calls Video Calls i-mode i-mode mail SMS i-Channel Data Communication

: Available

: Not available Overseas Networks Network Description W-CDMA3G W-CDMA is a third generation mobile Differences in Communication Services You need to specify the network search mode and the preferred network to which the connection is established first, to use the terminal overseas.P332 GSM*2 GPRS*3 communication network complying with 3GPP*1 global standards. GSM is the second generation mobile communication network in a digital communication system that is most widely used around the world. GPRS is the 2.5 generation mobile communication system that enables highspeed packet communication using GSM.

*1 Abbreviation of 3rd Generation Partnership Project. This is a regional standards organization for developing common technical specifications for the third generation mobile communications system (IMT-2000). Overseas Use 323

*2 Abbreviation of Global System for Mobile Communications. This is the second generation mobile communication network in a digital communication system that is most widely used around the world.

*3 Abbreviation of General Packet Radio Service. This service offers enhanced data communication such as packet communication by increasing the speed of GSM. Checking before Using Overseas STEP1 : Preparation before departure STEP2 : Using overseas STEP3 : Setting after returning to Japan Preparation before Departure Subscription If you have not subscribed to WORLD WING (P322), subscribe to the service. Install a UIM supporting WORLD WING. (Green/White). Communication services, etc. in countries and regions For information such as countries, areas, or telecommunication carriers available, visit DOCOMO

"International service website".P332 Charging Cautions When Handling the AC Adapter P21 Charging Using the AC Adapter P43P45 Using i-mode You have to configure "International Settings" in advance. Select

"i Menu" ] select "English " ] "Options" ] "International Settings"

]i-mode Settings" to open the setup screen. i-mode setting can be done in this screen. For detailed information refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version"

Setting network services You can activate or deactivate the subscribed network services overseas. The following network services can be accessed:

Caller ID notification service*1 *2 Voice mail service*1 *3 Call forwarding service*1 *3 Caller ID request service*1 Call waiting service*1 English guidance*1 Nuisance call blocking service*1 Roaming guidance*1 Call barring

*1 This may not be activated in some service areas.

*2 Caller ID may not be sent correctly or not be sent at all.

*3 To operate overseas, you need to activate the "Remote control" (P315, P336) before leaving Japan. Convenient functions and services available overseas Functions and services Roaming guidance

[international]

Call barring Dual clock display Unit converter Description The other party is notified with a voice guidance that the terminal is in international roaming. Reject reception during international roaming. You can view the date and time in two countries or regions, and cities simultaneously. You can convert currencies by setting an exchange rate. 324 Overseas Use Recommended Guide Books in addition to This Manual Title Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version Mobile Phone User's Guide

[International Services]

Mobile Phone User's Guide

[Network Services]

Description This book describes how to use i-mode and i-mode mail overseas and their fees, etc. This book describes details about the international roaming service including contents of the service, usage fees, and precautions. This book describes contents, settings, precautions and such of network services. Billing of charges Overseas charges are billed with your monthly charge. Note that they may appear on a billing invoice of the next month or later due to the situation of the operator of your country of stay. Also note that the billing invoice for charges in the same charging period may be sent to you in a different month. Note This manual contains a quick manual for "Overseas Use" that can be used conveniently for referencing operations. Use the quick manual as a reference when using the FOMA terminal overseas. Overseas Use Network switching

"Network search mode" is set to "Auto" by default. When you use the FOMA terminal in Japan or during connecting to 3G network, it is recommended to switch "Network mode" to

"WCDMA only" to reduce the consumption of the battery pack. P332 To switch networks manually P332 Main Display The network name does not appear when the terminal is connected to the FOMA network in Japan. To display network name when roamingP333 1 2 1 Icons indicating the connected network Connected to a FOMA network in Japan Connected to a 3G network overseas Connected to a GSM network overseas Connected to a GPRS network overseas 2Connected network name Note If Auto time adjust is set to "ON", when receiving the information related to time difference from network telecommunication carrier overseas, FOMA terminal will adjust the time automatically. The time adjusted will be different depending on telecommunication carriers. Time may not be adjusted automatically. For this situation, adjust time manually.P49 Overseas Use 325 Inquiries from abroad If a UIM (Green/White) is lost or stolen overseas, contact DOCOMO quickly to have the disconnection procedure done. For loss or theft of the terminal, settlement of accumulated charges, or terminal failure while overseas, refer to "For loss or theft of the terminal or charges while overseas" or "For a terminal failure while overseas" on the back of this manual. Call and communication fees are charged to you even after the terminal was lost or stolen. Add "International Access Code (Table 1)", or

"International Prefix Number for the Universal Number

(Table 2)" that is assigned to the country you stay, to the head of your number for inquiries. For the latest information on the International access code or the International prefix number for universal numbers, visit the DOCOMO International website. Country Codes for Major Countries Area Code Area Code Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Canada China Czech Egypt Fiji Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary India Indonesia Italy Japan Korea 61 43 32 55 1 86 420 20 679 358 33 49 30 852 36 91 62 39 81 82 Macau Malaysia Maldives Netherlands New Caledonia New Zealand Norway Peru Philippines Russia Singapore Spain Sweden Switzerland Tahiti Taiwan Thailand Turkey U.K. U.S.A. Vietnam 853 60 960 31 687 64 47 51 63 7 65 34 46 41 689 886 66 90 44 1 84 326 Overseas Use DOCOMO International service website.

* From a fixed line phone, International phone call charges to Japan apply.

* The codes may be changed.

* For the codes of the other countries and details, visit the International Access Codes of the country (Table 1) International access codes for major countries are as follows:

Area Australia Belgium Brazil Canada China Czecho Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary India Indonesia Ireland Italy Korea Luxembourg Macau Code 0011 00 0021/

0014 011 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 001 00 00 001 00 00 Area Code Malaysia Monaco Netherlands New Zealand Norway Philippines Poland Portugal Russia Singapore Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand Turkey U.A.E. U.K. U.S.A. Vietnam 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 International Access Code for your Current Location

(Table2) International access numbers for major countries are as follows. Area Code Area Code Argentina Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Bulgaria Canada China Colombia Denmark Finland France Germany Hong Kong Hungary Ireland Israel Italy 00 0011 00 00 0021 00 011 00 009 00 990 00 00 001 00 00 014 00 Korea Luxembourg Malaysia Netherlands New Zealand Norway Peru Philippines Portugal Singapore South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand U.K. U.S.A. 001 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 001 09 00 00 00 00 001 00 011 The codes may be changed. For the codes of the other countries and details, visit the DOCOMO International service website. Overseas Use 327 Domestic call charges for your overseas stay may apply to calls. If you make a call from a hotel, you may be charged for the telephone usage from the hotel. In that case, you are responsible for the charge. If you make a call from a mobile phone, the domestic call charge for your overseas stay applies to that call. Setting after Returning to Japan When you return to Japan, the FOMA terminal connects to the FOMA network and appears at the top of the screen. If the FOMA network is not connected, check whether "Network The universal numbers are only available in the countries mode" and "Network search mode" are both set to "Auto". listed in "International Prefix Number for the Universal Number". Making Calls Overseas When you and the other party are using a telecommunication carrier capable to handle FOMA video calls, international video calls are also available. For information about the countries or areas, and telecommunication carriers that support FOMA video calls, visit DOCOMO "International service website.P332 Depending on the terminal of the other party of an international video call, the video streaming may fail, or the connection may not be established. Even if the Caller ID notification is set, the Caller ID may not be notified or phone number is not displayed correctly, depending on the telecommunication carrier. In this case, you cannot make a call using the Received calls. 328 Overseas Use Making an International Call (Including to Japan) Make a call prefixing "+" and a country code to the other party's phone number. Press 0 for 1+ seconds to enter "+". To call an overseas WORLD-WING user, dial "81" as the country code of Japan. 1 0 (for 1+ seconds) ]Enter "Country Code - Area Code (City Code) - Phone Number"

When making a call to a fixed phone in Japan from abroad, enter "81" as the country code. If the Area Code (City Code) starts with "0" remove "0". (In a few countries, like Italy, "0" must be removed.) When making a call to a mobile phone or PHS in Japan, omit the leading "0" as well. Country code P326, 327, 328 2 A To make a video call M[Menu] ]Select "Video phone call"

Making a Call Easily to Japan If a call is made using an entry in Redial or Received calls or the Phonebook in which a phone number with a leading

"0" is recorded/registered, the leading "0" is automatically replaced with "+ Country code (+81)". Your terminal is configured to enter "+81" (country code of Japan) automatically by default.P64 1 Display an entry in history/Phonebook Using Redial logs Open the Redial screen (P57) or the Dialed calls detail screen (P57). Using Received call log Open the Received call log screen (P59) or the Received call detail screen (P59). Using Phonebook Open the Phonebook list screen (P88) or the Phonebook detail screen (P89). 2 Select an entry in the history or Phonebook ]A When two or more phone numbers are saved in the Phonebook entry on the Phonebook list screen Press H to select the number to dial. When two or more phone numbers are saved in the Phonebook entry on the Phonebook detail screen Press H to display the phone number to call, and press I [Send]. Overseas Use 329 4 A To make a video call M[Menu] ]Select "Video phone call"

Note By default, 22 country codes are stored in the Select country screen. Country codes can be added.P65 Available operations on the Country code selection screen (P65) are the same as on the Country code list screen. Making a Domestic Call Make a call by dialing the other party's phone number from the area code (city code). If you make a call to an overseas WORLD WING user, make an international call using the same steps in "Making an International Call (Including to Japan)" (P329) even if you and the other party are in the same country or region. When "Auto international dial" is set to "ON", the Dialing confirmation screen opens if a call is made to a phone number whose area code (city code) starts with "0" from an entry in the Phonebook or Dialed/Redialed calls list. In this case, select

"Original No" to make a call. 3 A The Dialing confirmation screen shows a phone number prefixed with "+ Country code". To make a video call M[Menu] ]Select "Video phone call"

4 "International call"

Original number without changing : The leading "0" will not Cancel be replaced with

"+Country code".

: Dialing will be canceled. Note This function is available only out of the FOMA network service area (during international roaming). Making an International Call (Including to Japan) Selecting Registered Country Code Register frequently used country names and country codes in the "Country code list" in "International call" to make a call quickly. 1 Enter "Area code - other party's phone number"

2 M [Menu] ]"Int. call"

3 Select a country code The Select country screen opens. The "+ Country code" is added at the beginning of the phone number. When the entered phone number starts with "0", it is replaced with "+ Country code". 330 Overseas Use When you and the other party are using a telecommunication carrier that handles FOMA video calls, international video calls are available by pressing M

[Menu] ]Select "Video phone call" after the international call dialing procedure. For information such as countries or telecommunication carriers available, visit the DOCOMO International service website. Depending on the terminal of the other party of an international video call, the video streaming may fail, or the connection may not be established. Receiving Calls Overseas 1 A call arrives The ring tone sounds. I [Silent] : Stop the ring tone PPlace the call on response hold.P70 2 A Answer the call. Receiving video calls by still image Press A Receiving video calls by image Press C [image]

3 To end the call P Note When a call arrived during international roaming, the call will be forwarded from Japan to other countries. For caller communication fee to Japan will be charged, while for receiver fee will be charged including the international forward fee. Making calls to your FOMA terminal from Japan You can receive calls to your phone number in Japan. Receiving a call to your FOMA terminal from an overseas caller You can receive a call via Japan regardless of where you are. Similarly to making an international call to Japan, you can be called using the following steps. Make a call by entering "International Access Code*1-

81*2 your phone number excluding leading the "0"*3"

*1 When dialing to a mobile phone, you may be able to dial by entering "+" instead of the International Access Code.

*2 Enter the country code of Japan.

*3 Enter "90-XXXX-XXXX" when the number starts with

"090" or "80-XXXX-XXXX" when it starts with "080". Overseas Use 331

[Preferred NW lists]

You can prioritize networks to be searched or set.P333

[Operator name display]

Set whether to show the network name that is currently connected on the Stand-by display. P333

[Host selection]

Specify a host other than i-mode.P191

[SMS center]

Set the SMS center address.P172 Note After coming back to Japan, if the icon indicating the network status remains out of the service area, set

"Network mode" to "Auto" or "WCMDA only" and

"Network search mode" to "Auto".

<Network search mode>

Searching for networks may take a long time. When this option is set to "Auto", networks will be searched automatically when the terminal power is turned on or the terminal moves out of the service area. Network Search Mode/Network Mode Setting Telecommunication Carrier Search Mode Select a search mode to find available networks when the network is switched overseas.

"Network search mode" is set to "Auto" by default. When you use the FOMA terminal in Japan or during connecting to 3G network, it is recommended to switch "Network mode" to

"WCDMA only" to reduce the consumption of the battery pack. 1 M[Menu] ] (Settings) ] "International roaming" ]

"Network" ] Perform the following operations:

[Network search mode]

AutoAutomatically search and set the network. ManualThe Network search screen appears. Select and set a network from the list.

]"Yes" ] Select a network Available networks are followed by the circular mark. Network re-searchSearch for networks using the same method (Auto/ Manual) as the previous search.

[Network mode]

Specify the network to search for. Check available communication systems in the country of use before specifying a network.P324 Auto

: Search for all available networks regardless of their communication systems. WCDMA only : Search only for WCDMA networks. GSM only

: Search only for GSM networks. 332 Overseas Use Preferred NW lists Setting Preferred Telecommunication Carrier You can register up to 20 networks to be searched or set by priority. 1 M[Menu]] (Settings)]"International roaming"]"Network"]"Preferred NW lists"

The preferred network list screen opens. If networks have been already registered, the network names appear in order of priority. C[Change]: Replace the selected network with another network. 2 I[Add] ] Perform the following operations:

[UPLMN manual select]

Add a network to the Preferred list by entering MCC (country code) and MNC (network code).

]Enter an MCC and MNC ]I [Done] ] "Yes"

[UPLMN select by list]

Select and add a network from the default network list.

]Select a network ] "Yes"

I[Country]: Select a country name to specify an available network in the country from the list.

[Set VPLMN to UPLMN]

Add the network currently connected. Note Depending on the signal strength, a network that is not registered may be connected. The settings of this function are saved on the UIM. Sub menu of the Preferred NW lists screen 1 Preferred NW lists screen (P333)]M [Menu] ]

Perform the following operations:

[Add new]

Search and add a newly found network to the selected network. Go to Step 2 in "Setting Preferred Networks" (P333).

[Change]

Replace the selected network with another network. Go to Step 2 in "Setting Preferred Networks" (P333).

[Delete]

Delete the selected network.

[Move up]*

Move the selected network up one in the list.

[Move down]*

Move the selected network down one in the list.

* This may not appear depending on the current position in the list. Operator name display Displaying the Network Name while Roaming Specify whether to show the network name currently connected on the Stand-by display. 1 M[Menu] ] (Settings) ] "International roaming" ]

"Network" ] "Operator name display" ] "ON"/"OFF" ]

"Yes"

Overseas Use 333 Roaming guidance setting Activating the Roaming Guidance Call barring Setting to Accept No Incoming Calls during Roaming Before leaving Japan, you can set to play a voice prompt indicating that you are overseas. Setting must be done while in Japan. The service may not be operable when "" is displayed. You can set so that all incoming calls, mail, etc, are all restricted during roaming. You can also set to restrict only incoming video calls. 1 M[Menu] ]

guidance setting" ] Perform the following operations:

"Call barring" ] Perform the following operations:

(Service) ] "Others" ] "Roaming

(Settings) ] "International roaming" ]

1 M[Menu] ]

[Activate]

Activate the roaming guidance.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the roaming guidance.

[Check setting]

Activate the roaming guidance. 2 "Yes"

Note When deactivating the guidance, a call tone set by the overseas carrier sounds. Even if you activated this option, a voice guidance in a foreign language may be played due to the overseas carrier's services.

[Activate -roam]

Start call barring.

]Select from the following options ] Enter the Network security code ] "Yes"

Barring all incoming calls : Restrict all incoming calls. Data calls barring

: Restrict only incoming video calls.

(Only inside the 3G network service area).

[Deactivate - roam]

]Enter the Network security code ] "Yes"

[Check setting - roam]

Check the current status of the setting. Note This may not be set depending on international carriers. 334 Overseas Use Using Network Services during Roaming You can use network services of the Voice mail service, Call Forwarding service, and Roaming guidance overseas. To use Voice mail (int.) or Call forwarding service (Int.), subscription to Voice mail or Call forwarding service is required. To use the network service overseas, activate Remote Control beforehand. P315 International call charges to Japan apply. The services may not be operable in some countries. Some overseas carriers may not offer this option. Voice Mail (International) Operating the Voice Mail Service Overseas You can activate/deactivate the Voice mail service overseas. You can also play recorded messages or change the settings following a voice guidance. The service may not be operable when "" is displayed.

[Voice mail setting]

Change the settings following a voice guidance.

[Set ring time]

Set time before connecting to the Voice mail service center after a call arrives. 2 "Yes"

3 Operate according to the voice guidance Note To use the Voice mail service outside the service area at your overseas location, you need to turn off the terminal where signals can be received in advance. 1 M[Menu] ]

"Voice mail (Int.)" ] Perform the following operations:

(Settings) ] "International roaming" ]

[Activate]

Activate the Voice mail service.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the Voice mail service.

[Play messages]

Play a Voice mail message. Overseas Use 335 Call Forwarding (International) Operating the Call Forwarding Service Overseas You can activate/deactivate the Call forwarding service overseas. The service may not be operable when "" is displayed. 1 M[Menu] ]

"Call forwarding (Int.)" ] Perform the following operations:

(Settings) ] "International roaming" ]

[Activate]

Activate the Call forwarding service.

[Deactivate]

Deactivate the Call forwarding service.

[Call forwarding settings]

Check the current status of the setting. 2 "Yes"

3 Operate according to the voice guidance Roaming Guide (International) Operating the Roaming Guidance Overseas You can activate/deactivate the Roaming guidance overseas. The service may not be operable when "" is displayed. 1 M[Menu] ]

"Roaming guide (Int.)"

(Settings) ] "International roaming" ]

2 "Yes"

3 Operate according to the voice guidance Remote Access Setting (International) Setting the Remote Access Overseas You can activate/deactivate the Remote access overseas. The service may not be operable when "" is displayed. 1 M[Menu] ]

"Remote access setting(Int.)"

(Settings) ] "International roaming" ]

Note To use this service outside the service area at your overseas location, you need to turn off the terminal where signals can be received in advance. 2 "Yes"

3 Operate according to the voice guidance 336 Overseas Use Caller ID request (International) Operating the Caller ID Request Service Overseas You can activate/deactivate the Caller ID request service overseas. The service may not be operable when "" is displayed. Even if "Caller ID request service" is activated, an incoming call may be displayed as "Not Support" overseas. 1 M[Menu] ]

"Caller ID request (Int.)"

(Settings) ] "International roaming" ]

2 "Yes"

3 Operate according to the voice guidance Overseas Use 337 PC Connection Data Communications Available from the FOMA Terminal Precautions before Use Before Using Preparing for Data Transfer (OBEXTM Communication) Preparing for Data Communications AT Commands Using the bundled CD-ROM Introduction to DOCOMO Keitai datalink 340 341 342 343 343 344 344 344 For details about data communication, refer to the "PC Connection Manual" (PDF format) contained in the bundled CD or available at the DOCOMO website. Adobe Reader is required to open the "PC Connection Manual" in the PDF format. If the program is not installed on your PC, install Adobe Reader contained in the bundled CD. For details about using the program, see "Adobe Reader" Help. 339 Data Communications Available from the FOMA Terminal When the FOMA terminal is connected to a PC, data communication is available with packet communication and OBEXTM Communication(data transfer). This FOMA terminal does not support 64K data communication. This FOMA terminal does not support Remote Wakeup. This FOMA terminal does not support FAX communication. This FOMA terminal is not compatible with the DOCOMO PDA

"musea" or "sigmarion"

Data Transfer (OBEXTM Communication) Sends or receivers images, songs, contacts, or mails to exchange them between, for example, the FOMA terminal and a PC. Infrared Transmission

(P257) FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional) DOCOMO Keitai datalink (P344)

* This FOMA terminal can not send images to a PC. 340 PC Connection information on connection fees, contact your ISP. You can use "mopera U", DOCOMO Internet connection service. A separate subscription (fee-based) is required to use "mopera U". Setting the Internet Connection Internet service providers, etc. For packet communication, use an access point compatible with packet communication. DoPa access points cannot be connected. For service contents of "mopera" and its connection settings, visit "mopera" web site. http://www.mopera.net/mopera/index.html Conditions for Packet Communication The following conditions* must be met to connect between the FOMA terminal and a PC to perform communication. However, even if the conditions are met, communication may still not be possible depending on the amount of traffic at the base station or the signal strength. FOMAUSB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional) must be available on the PC. The FOMA terminal must be in a FOMA service area. The access point must support FOMA packet communication.

* These conditions are for domestic use in Japan. Packet communication Communication charges are based on the amount of data exchanged1. Packet communication is a suitable way of using the terminal to send and receive data when the terminal needs stay connected to the network. Communication speed depends on communication environment and network congestion. Using an access point of DOCOMO internet connection service such as "mopera U" allows you to use high-speed communication at the maximum rate of 3.6Mbps for receiving and 384kbps for sending (based on best-effort connection)*2.

*1 Communication charges become high when you exchange a large amount of data.

*2 The maximum speed of 3.6Mbps for receiving and 384kbps for sending are theoretical values and they do not show the actual performance. The actual performance depends on your communication environment and network congestion. If you connect to an area which is out of the FOMA HIGHSPEED Area or an access point that does not support HIGH-SPEED, the connection for both sending and receiving will be limited to 384kbps at maximum rate. The FOMA L-06A can use an access point even overseas that supports W-CDMA or GPRS packet communication to perform data communication. Precautions before Use Internet Service Provider Fees Fees to an Internet service provider (ISP) are required to connect to the Internet. These connection fees, paid to the ISP, are separate from the FOMA service fees. For detailed PC Connection 341 Before Using Operating Environment The following operating environment is required for a PC to use data communication:

Item Requirements PC Main Unit PC-AT compatible machine with a CD-

ROM drive USB port (in accord with Universal Serial Bus Specification Rev1.1/2.0)*

* However, this FOMA terminal does not support "USB2.0 High-Speed". Display resolution of 800x600 pixels, High Color (65,536 colors) or higher recommended Windows Vista, Windows XP, or Windows 2000 (Japanese versions) Windows Vista: 512M bytes or more Windows XP: 128M bytes or more*2 Windows 2000: 64M bytes or more*2 Available space of 5M bytes or more*2 OS*1*2 Required Memory*3 Hard Disk Space *3*4

*3 Required memory or hard disk space may vary depending on the PC system configuration.

*However, USB2.0 HIGHSPEED does not support.

*4 DOCOMO Connection Manager requires 15MB or more. The following warning screen may appear when you insert the bundled CD in a PC. This warning is displayed according to the security settings of the Internet Explorer. There is no problem with using the software. Click [ (Yes)]. Required Devices To use data communications, the following devices and software are required in addition to the FOMA terminal and a PC:

FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional) or FOMA USB Cable (optional) CD-ROM for FOMA L-06A (bundled) Note Purchase the exclusive FOMA Cable with Charge Function 01/02 or FOMA USB Cable. A generic USB cable for PC cannot be used because it does not fit the FOMA USB connector. The terminal may not work properly with a USB HUB.

*1 DOCOMO does not guarantee proper operation if you upgrade your OS.

*2 The operating environment of DOCOMO Connection Manager is Windows 2000 SP4 or later, or Windows XP SP2 or later. For detailed operating environment, check DOCOMO website. 342 PC Connection Preparing for Data Transfer

(OBEXTM Communication) To use "FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02

(optional)", install L-06A communication setting files. Download and install L-06A Communication Setting Files Install from the bundled CD or Download and install the files from the DOCOMO website Preparing for Data Communications The flow for preparing to connect the FOMA terminal and a PC for performing packet communication is as follows. For details, see "PC Communication Manual" (PDF format). Connect the FOMA terminal and a PC using a FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 Download and install L-06A Communication Setting Files Install from the bundled CD or Download and install the files from the DOCOMO Data Transfer website Check after installation Configure using the installed DOCOMO Connection Manager Configure without using the DOCOMO Connection Manager Connect PC Connection 343 Note

"L-06A Communication Setting Files (drivers)" and

"DOCOMO Connection Manager", that are software programs for data communication contained in "CD-

ROM for FOMA L-06A", can also be downloaded at the DOCOMO website. http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/support/download/

Software for Data Communication Contained in

"CD-ROM for FOMA L-06A"

L-06A Communication Setting Files (Drivers) These files (drivers) are required for communication or file transfer when the FOMA terminal and a PC are connected using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional). DOCOMO Connection Manager This software is designed to allow users to setup dial-up connection, etc. that is necessary to perform data communications quickly. AT Commands An AT command is an instruction used by a PC to check function settings or status of the FOMA terminal. For details, refer to "PC Connection Manual" (PDF format) contained in the bundled CD. Using the Bundled CD-ROM The bundled CD contains software that is necessary to perform data communication on the FOMA terminal, and

"PC Connection Manual" and "Kuten Code List" instruction manuals (PDF format). For details, refer to the bundled CDROM. Introduction to DOCOMO Keitai datalink

"DOCOMO Keitai datalink" is a software program to allow you to make a backup of Phonebook entries or mail on your terminal and edit them. It is offered at the DOCOMO website. For details and to download the software, visit the following web site. http://datalink.nttdocomo.co.jp/

(Japanese only) Note For details about downloading, transferable data, operating environment such as supported OS, installing, operating, or restrictions, visit the above web site. For operations after installing the software, see Help of the software. To use DOCOMO Keitai datalink, a USB Connection Cable (optional) is required. 344 PC Connection Appendix/Troubleshooting Menu List Dial Keys Assignments to Characters Combinations of Multiaccess Functions Combinations of Multitask Functions Services Available from the FOMA Terminal Options and Related Devices Interfacing to External Devices Video Play Software Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Error Messages Warranty and After-sales Service i-mode Malfunction Diagnosis Site Updating Software Major Specifications Number of Items that can be Stored, Registered and Protected on the FOMA Terminal SAR Certification and Other Information Export Administration Regulations Intellectual Property Issues 346 357 358 359 360 361 361 362 367 382 384 385 390 393 394 396 397 345 Function name Default settings Reference Menu List Functions with indicated in the "Default settings:"

column are those that can be initialized to their defaults with "Reset settings". P290 Function name Default settings Reference Mail setting Display Mail Mail Inbox Outbox Unsent message Compose message Check new messages Receive option SMS Compose SMS Check new SMS Template Mail setting Communicat ion Edit Welcome mail Empty Empty Pre-installed data only Receive option set: OFF Receive attach file:

All items are selected Check new messages :

All itemsare selected Edit header: None Edit signature: None Edit quotation: >

Auto attach:

"Signature" is selected P148 P149 P149 P131 P144 P144 P168 P171 P137 P162 P163 SMS Others i-mode iMenu Bookmark Screen memo Last URL Go to location Message i-Channel Input address URL history MessageR MessageF i-Channel list Ticker setting Font size: Standard Scroll: 1 line Mail list: 2 lines name Folder security: None is selected Melody auto play: ON Receiving display: Alarm mode SMS report request: OFF SMS validity period: 3 days SMS input character:

Japanese (70characters) Check setting: -

Reset setting: -

Empty Empty No entries No messages No messages Basic channels Ticker display : ON Ticker speed: Normal P163 P171 P164 P175 P182 P183 P177 P180 P180 P166 P166 P195 P196 346 Appendix/Troubleshooting Function name Default settings Reference Function name Default settings Reference i-mode i-Channel Reset i-Channel Check new messages i-mode setting Communicat ion Display i-motion Home Certificates Others Connection timeout : 60 seconds Check new messages : All items are selected Images : ON Sound effect : ON Use phone info: Yes Font size: Standard Scroll: 1 line Message list: 2 lines Auto-display: MessageR preferred Melody auto play: ON i-motion auto play: ON i-motion type: Standard type Disable, No URL All are valid Check settings : -

Reset settings : -

ippli Phonebook

& Logs P196 P165 P189 P189 P194 P194 P190 P192 P190 Software list ippli info ippli settings Security error history Auto start info Trace info Display SW info Auto start set Add to phonebook Search phonebook No. of phonebook Phonebook settings Default mode Create domain list Display image Received calls Redial Received mails Sent mails Call/Mail history Call duration Only pre-installed i-ppli No entries No information No information Not display ON Empty Show all data Show all data

@docomo.ne.jp Show Empty Empty Empty Empty P223 P234 P234 P234 P223 P233 P80 P87 P92 P93 P93 P93 P57 P57 P161 P161 P280 Appendix/Troubleshooting 347 Function name Default settings Reference Function name Default settings Reference Call costs Phonebook

& Logs My Picture Data box Music i-motion Check call costs Set call cost limit Delete call cost icon i-mode Camera Decomail picture Decomail pictograph Preinstalled Data transfer Item Animation i-mode Playlists i-mode Camera Preinstalled Data transfer OFF None None Only pre-installed files P281 P281 P282 P239 P239 P239 Only pre-installed files P239 Only pre-installed files None Only pre-installed files None None None None None Only pre-installed files None P239 P239 P239 P239 P217 P217 P249 P249 P249 P249 Melody Data box i-mode Preinstalled Data transfer MUSIC Recent played*

Music player Music life Playlists All songs Artist Genre Album Receive Receive all LifeKit Receive Ir data One touch key Custom menu None Only pre-installed files None Train : All songs, level 2 Sports timer : All songs 30 Minutes Sleeping : All songs 30 Minutes Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty 1-3: Empty My One Touch key:

Schedule P254 P254 P254 P210 P219 P215 P211 P211 P211 P211 P259 P260 P265 P278 348 Appendix/Troubleshooting Function name Default settings Reference Function name Default settings Reference Stationery Unit Converter Weight Temperature Volume Velocity Remembering Date counter Date Search dates Sounds&

Ring tone Vibration Settings P285 P285 P285 P285 P276 P277 P98 mg/g F/C Milliiter/Liter km/h/meter/sec Empty Voice call: 25 Ring01 Video call: 26 Ring02 Mail:15 Message01 Message R:16 Message02 Message F:17 Message03 SMS: 18 Message04 LifeKit Record message Camera Stationery Stopwatch Photo-mode Movie-mode Camera setting Schedule Alarm Memo To do list World time Calculator Unit Converter Rcd. msg. set Message List Saving option Shutter sound Tuning Currency Surface Length Activate record msg.:

OFF Empty Auto saving: OFF Shutter sound 1 Auto Empty Empty Empty Empty Tokyo Yen/US Dollar Acre/Hectare mm/cm P73 P75 P283 P200 P203 P206 P207 P207 P269 P267 P287 P273 P282 P286 P283 P285 P285 Appendix/Troubleshooting 349 Function name Default settings Reference Function name Default settings Reference Sub display clock Font size Dialing Menu settings Backlight Color theme Analog clock 1 User set Motion dialing: OFF Dialing quick search: ON Dialing font color: Black Simple menu: ON Menu customization: Color theme setting Menu guidance: ON Display duration : 30 seconds Display brightness :

100 %

AC connected : Display setting Sparkling wine P107 P111 P106 P108 P108 P108 P107 P108 Settings Sounds&

Vibration Effect tone Volume Vibrator Manner mode set Mail ring duration Set mute ring

(sec.) Stand-by Call display Wake-up display Display Dial sound: Digital tone Flip tone: Flip tone 1 Menu effect: Menu effect 2 Power On: 23 Power On Power Off: 24 Power Off Low battery : ON Incoming call: Level4 Mail/Message/SMS: Level4 Alarm/Schedule: Level4 Keypad tone: Level2 Flip tone: Silent Menu effect: Level2 Power On/Off: Level4 Popup: Silent Receiver Level4

(All) OFF General manner 1 cycle OFF Wallpaper : Image, drop Display items: Clock Clock type: Large digital Incoming voice call: Image, incoming_call_white Incoming video call: Image, incoming_call_white Image, pwron 350 Appendix/Troubleshooting P101 Display Settings P99 P100 P103 P102 P125 P103 P105 P106 Function name Default settings Reference Function name Default settings Reference P110 Settings Call/VT/

Dialing Incoming call Answer mode : SEND key only Auto answer:

- Auto answering:

OFF Accept/Reject call:

- Accept/Reject set:

Accept

- Reject unknown:

OFF Anonymous caller:

(All items) Disable On hold tone : Hold tone 1 Display phonebook image : ON P69 P290 P122, 123 P126 P124 P71 P107 Display Lighting LED Settings Lighting: ON Select patterns Incoming voice call:

Pattern 1/Red Incoming video call:

Pattern1/Green New mail: Patter 5/

Red&Green New message R:

Pattern 2/Red New message F:

Pattern 2/Green New SMS: Patter 6/

Red&Green New Voice mail:

Pattern 4/Red New Record message: Pattern 4/

Green Playing music: Patter 7/Red&Green Alarm: Pattern 3/Red Schedule/To do list:

Pattern 3/Green During call: OFF Missed call: ON Unread message:

ON Appendix/Troubleshooting 351 Function name Default settings Reference Function name Default settings Reference Settings Call/VT/

Dialing Prefix dial Lock/

Security Sub-address setting Earphone Lock Secret mode Display call/

mail logs Change Security code PIN code PREFIX 1 : 009130010 PREFIX 2/PREFIX 3:

Empty ON Switch call: OFF Lock all : Not set Call/Mail lock: OFF Data access lock : OFF OFF

(All items) ON Security code (4 digits):

0000 P65 P66 P288 P118 P118 P119 P121 P121 P116 P116 Videophone set:

- Displaying setting :

Other-Me

- Send camera image: OFF

- Screen size: Large

- Visual preference:

Normal

- Light: Always on

- Auto redial as voice:

OFF

- Hand-free switch:

ON Substitute image:

Default Response hold image: Default Holding image:

Default Reconnect alarm :

Alarm Off Quality alarm : Alarm Off Holding tone : Hold tone 1 Close setting : End the call Noise reduction: ON OFF P76 P76 P76 P76 P76 P76 P76 P75 P76 P76 P66 P102 P71 P70 P66 P119 Settings Call/VT/

Dialing Video phone Call feature Self mode 352 Appendix/Troubleshooting Function name Default settings Reference Function name Default settings Reference Settings International Network roaming Voice mail

(Int.) Call forwarding

(Int.) Remote access setting (Int.) Caller ID request (Int.) Roaming guide (Int.) Call barring International Auto assist dial setting IDD prefix setting Network search mode: Auto Network mode: Auto Preferred NW lists

: (The contents saved in the UIM is displayed) Operator name display : ON Host selection : i-mode SMS center :

DOCOMO Auto IDD prefix name:

(WORLDCALL) IDD prefix code :

009130010 P332 P332 P333 P333 P191 P172 P335 P336 P336 P337 P336 P334 P64 P64 Settings International Auto dial international dial Country code list Date&Time Others Set Date&Time Date&Time format Hour indication Character input Auto international dial

: ON Target country :

Japan +81 China 86, Taiwan 886, Japan 81, Korea 82, Hong Kong 852, U.S.A. 1, U.K. 44, Italy 39, India 91, Indonesia 62, Australia 61, Netherlands 31, Canada 1, Singapore 65, Spain 34, Thailand 66, Germany 49, Philippines 63, France 33, Brazil 55, Vietnam 84, and Malaysia 60 Auto time adjust: ON Date format : YYYY/MM/

DD Time format : 12-hour Set sound : OFF P64 P65 P48 P111 P290 P298 P299 P302 P303 Appendix/Troubleshooting 353 Function name Default settings Reference Function name Default settings Reference Others Settings Own number Service Voice mail Memory status Power saver mode Reset/Clear Software update Battery level Japanese OFF Empty Activate Set ring time Deactivate Check setting Play messages Voice mail setting Check messages P291 P112 P108 P127 P385 P46 P279 P306 P306 P307 P307 P307 P307 P307 Voice mail Service Call waiting Call forwarding Notify missed call Del. voicemail icon Tone/

Vibration message notification Activate Deactivate Check setting Activate Deactivate Register the forwarding number Setting if forwarding number busy Check setting P307 P307 P307 P308 P308 P308 P310 P310 P310 P310 P310 354 Appendix/Troubleshooting Function name Default settings Reference Function name Default settings Reference Service Arrival call act Others Answer Empty Empty Additional service Additional guide English guidance Service numbers Roaming guidance setting Multi number Dual network Remote control P313 P317 P318 P314 P314 P334 P315 P313 P315 Service Nuisance call blocking Caller ID notification Caller ID request Set in-call arrival act Register nuisance caller Register selected number Delete all entries Delete last entry Check the number of entries Activate/

Deactivate Check setting Activate Deactivate Check setting Activate Deactivate Check setting P311 P311 P311 P311 P311 P312 P312 P312 P312 P312 P312 P312 P312 Appendix/Troubleshooting 355 Simple Menu Item List Function name Reference Settings/

Tools Ring tone settubgs Select ring tone Select effect tone Volume Vibrator Stand-by display One touch key Alarm Calculator Call cost/duration Voice mail Normal menu Call duration Call costs Activate Deactivate Play messages P98 P101 P99 P100 P103 P265 P267 P286 P280 P281 P306 P109 Function name Reference Record msg. settings Record msg. list P87 P57 P59 P74 P75 P80 P279 P148 P148 P149 P131 P188 P175 P182 P184 P200 P203 P239 P249 P206 Phone Mail i-mode Camera Search phonebook Redial Record message Delete last entry Add to phonebook Own number Inbox Outbox Unsent message Compose message i mode information i-menu Bookmark Screen memo Photo-mode Movie-mode View photo View movie Camera Settings 356 Appendix/Troubleshooting Dial Keys Assignments to Characters Entry Modes Hiragana and Kanji Katakana Alphabetic characters Digits

*2

*2 Space

*4

(Line feed)

*2

*2

*3 Space

(Line feed)

. @ / : - *1 a b c A B C *2 d e f D E F *2 g h i G H I *2 j k l J K L *2 m n o M N O *2 p q r s P Q R S *2 t u v T U V *2 w x y z W X Y Z *2

*1 &

! ? - , ' ; ( ) " _ ? *1 &

(Line feed) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

: +P*5

*5 Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

*1 In full-pitch character entry, "" is entered.

*2 Press * to switch between upper and lower case.

*3 Lower case "" can be entered in full-pitch character entry.

*4 These can be added or entered when a character has not been set. For characters that can take only a voiced sound symbol, " "

is added, and for characters that can take both voiced and semi voiced sound symbol, ""or "" is entered.

*5 These symbols can be entered when they are valid in that field. Appendix/Troubleshooting 357 Combinations of Multiaccess Functions New communication application Application in progress Voice calls Video calls i-mode i-mode mail Packet Voice calls Video calls i-mode i-mode mail SMS Outgoing Incoming Outgoing Incoming Connect Send Receive Send Receive Packet communication connected to a PC Send Receive

*1

*2

*3

*5

*3

*3

*3

*3

*3

*4

*6

*6

: Can be launched.

: Can be launched under certain conditions

: Cannot be launched.

*1 If you subscribe to the Call waiting service, you can place the current voice call on hold and make another call.

*2 If you subscribe to the Call waiting service, you can place the current voice call on hold and answer the call. If you subscribe to the Voice mail service/Call forwarding service, the function can be launched.

*3 The call is recorded in Received call log as a missed call.

*4 The i-ppli cannot initiate communication.

*5 Available only for outgoing calls using Phone To function. In that case, i-mode will be disconnected.

*6 After i-mode or i-mode mail is terminated, mail will be received. 358 Appendix/Troubleshooting Combinations of Multitask Functions New Application Running Application Voice calls Video calls Mail i-mode i-ppli Phonebook Data box i-motion MUSIC*5 LifeKit*1 Camera Stationery Service/Settings Voice call Video Calls Mail i-mode i-ppli Phonebook Data box MUSIC LifeKit*1 Camera Stationery

*6

*4

*8

*3

*3

*3

*3

*3

*3

*7

*9

*2

*2

*2

*2

*2 Service/

Settings

: This can run concurrently.

: This cannot run concurrently.

*1 Excluding "Receive Ir Data".

*2 "Schedule", "To Do list", and "Memo" can be launched from the new task screen.

*3 This task can be launched to set a melody, a Chaku-Uta-Full song, or an image to a Schedule event or To Do task.

*4 This can be launched from the submenu.

*5 Playback will be paused before the new task is launched. After the task is finished, you can resume playback.

*6 This can be launched from "Service numbers".

*7 This can be launched from "Select ring tone", "Stand-by display", "Call display", or "Wake-up display".

*8 This can be launched from options in "Reject on list" and "Call forward".

*9 This can be launched when you add an image while adding/editing a Phonebook entry. Appendix/Troubleshooting 359 Services Available from the FOMA Terminal Phone Number

(No prefix) 104 Services Available from the FOMA Terminal Directory assistance of fixed line phones and DOCOMO mobile phones

(pay service: service and call charges)

(No assistance provided for subscribers not listed)

(No prefix) 115 Telegraph (charges apply : telegram fee)

(No prefix) 117 Time check (charges apply) Area code + 177 Weather forecast (charges apply)

(No prefix) 110 Police emergency Fire and ambulance

(No prefix) 119 Marine emergency call and accident reports (No prefix) 118 Message Dial for times of disaster

(No prefix) 171

(charges apply) Collect call (Charges apply to the receiver)

(No prefix) 106 Note If you use the collect call service (106), the receiver of the call is charged for the call cost and a commission of 90 Yen

(94.5 Yen including tax) per call (as of March 2009). When you use the directory assistance service (104), you are charged for the call cost and service charge of 100 Yen(105 Yen including tax). This service is provided free of charge for those visually impaired or physically disabled in the upper body. For details, call 116 (NTT sales contact) from a fixed line phone (as of March 2009). 360 Appendix/Troubleshooting When you use "Call Forwarding" from a fixed line phone and have specified a mobile phone as its forwarding destination, the caller may hear a ring tone even if the mobile phone is busy, out of service area, or turned off depending on the settings of the fixed line phone and mobile phone. Services such as a call to 116 (NTT sales center), Dial Q2, Message Service and credit card calls are unavailable.

(Credit card calls can be made from a fixed line phone or public phone to a FOMA terminal.). Even when the UIM is not inserted, emergency phone numbers (911, 999, 112, 000, and 08) can be dialed to make an emergency call overseas.. However, when the Self Mode is set to "ON", emergency calls cannot be made. This FOMA terminal supports " (Emergency Location Report)". When calling 110, 119 , or 118 from the FOMA terminal, your current location (location information) is automatically provided to concerned organizations such as the police. The organization may not receive accurate location information depending on your current location or the signal reception. If you do not send your Caller ID such as dialing with "184" added per call, the location information and Caller ID will not be sent. However, if the concerned organization judges the information is necessary to protect a human life, it may acquire your location information and Caller ID. Different organizations and locations may be implementing the "Emergency Location Report" system on different dates. For a call to 110, 119 or 118 from the FOMA terminal, because the police or fire department may try to contact you, inform them that you are calling using a mobile phone and give your phone number and detailed information about the place where you are. Do not move around while you are talking during an emergency call to avoid it being terminated unexpectedly. Do not turn the terminal power off immediately after the call is over; and keep the FOMA terminal ready to receive calls for approximately 10 minutes. Depending on the area you are calling from, you may not be connected to the local police or fire department. In such case, use a public phone or fixed line phone nearby. Options and Related Devices Using the FOMA terminal with various optional devices makes it more convenient for various uses, both personal and business. Some of the products listed below may be unavailable in some areas. For details, contact a service counter such as a docomo shop. For details about optional devices, see the related operation manuals. Battery Pack L02 Back Cover L10 Flat-plug Earphone/microphone with Switch P01/P02 Earphone Plug Adapter P001 Earphone/microphone with Switch P001/P002*1 FOMA Dry Battery Adapter 01 Bone conduction microphone/receiver In-Car Holder 01 FOMA Indoor Booster Antenna*2 FOMA Portable Charging Adapter 01 Carry Case S 01 FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02*3 FOMA Indoor Booster Antenna (Stand Type)*2 FOMA USB Cable*3 FOMA AC adapter 01/02*4 FOMA AC adapter 01 for Global use*4 Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set P01 Stereo Earphone Set P001*1 FOMA DC Adapter P01/P02 Desktop Holder L02

*1 Earphone Plug Adapter P001 is required for connecting with the L-06A.

*2 For domestic use.

*3 The terminal may not work properly with a USB HUB.

*4 Charging Using the AC Adapter P43 to P45 Video Play Software You need Apple Computer Inc.'s QuickTime Player (free of charge) Version 6.4 or higher (or Version 6.3 + 3GPP) to play videos (in the MP4 file format) captured with the FOMA terminal on a PC. You can download the QuickTime Player from the following web site:

http://www.apple.com/jp/quicktime/download/win.html Note You need a PC connected to the Internet to download the software. Separate communication charges may apply for downloading. For details about operating environment, downloading or operations, visit the above web site. Appendix/Troubleshooting 361 Troubleshooting Check whether the terminal software requires update first, if required, update the software (Software update refer to P384). If the problem is not improved even following the check list, please contact with a repair counter designated by DOCOMO, or the service center. Symptom The FOMA terminal cannot be powered on Charging is not available (the dial light/

charging light of FOMA terminal does not light, or illumination blinks) Check Is the battery pack inserted correctly? P42 Is the battery pack charged P45 Is the battery pack inserted correctly? P42 Is the adapter power plug correctly connected to an electric outlet or cigarette lighter socket? P45 Is the AC adapter connected to the terminal properly? P45 Is the AC adapter's connector connected to FOMA terminal or table holder (optional) properly if AC adapter (optional) is used?

Does FOMA terminal's charging terminal become dirty if table holder is used? If it becomes dirty, Wipe the connector terminals with a clean dry cloth or cotton swab.P20 Charging light may blink, if a call or other functions are operated long time while FOMA terminal is charging. Please recharge the FOMA terminal after the temperature drop down. The FOMA terminal warms up during the operation or charging Battery lifetime becomes short FOMA terminal, battery pack and adapter (including the chargers) will become warm while using, charging, or operating i-ppli, television call long time. This is normal.P20 Is FOMA terminal left out of service area long time? FOMA terminal takes more power for searching signals in a location out of service area P390 The actual time that a battery pack holds its charge depends on how the FOMA terminal is used and how close the battery pack is to the end of its useful life P390 Battery packs are consumables. Using time will become shorter and shorter by charge repeatedly.P43 Depending on the usage, a battery pack may run out of its charge extremely quickly even if it is fully charged. Purchase a new battery pack as specified in this manual. 362 Appendix/Troubleshooting Symptom The FOMA terminal powers off and powers on automatically. No operation is performed even if a key is pressed Display reaction is slow after a key is pressed FOMA card cannot be recognized A call cannot be made even if the dial button/ key is pressed The ring tone do not sound Call is not available( the icon indicating the network status is still shown as out of service area even the FOMA terminal is removed to service area, or call cannot be made or received even in the location with good signal reception) Check If the connector terminals become dirty, the contact may become loose, and the FOMA terminal power may be turned off. Wipe the connector terminals with a clean dry cloth or cotton swab. P20 Is Lock all set? P117 Display reaction may be slow if a lot of data is saved in FOMA terminal. P389 Does FOMA card is inserted correctly? P39 Is Lock all set? P118 Is Self mode set? P119 Is Silent set at Volume settings' Incoming call volume? P99 Is Public mode, Manner mode, Self mode or Privacy mode set? P71, P103, P119 Check these settings : Accept/Reject call settings, Anonymous caller settings, Set mute ring time, and Reject unknown. P122. P123. P124. P125 Is the response time of the Voice mail/Call forwarding service set at 0 second? P71 Is "To answer" time of "Record message" set at 0 second? P73 Have you sent the auto answer time to "O second"? P286 Turn off and turn it back on, or reset battery and FOMA card P39, P42, P48 Even [in service area], [Display the signal strength: State of 3 antenna bars displayed], depending on the signal, call is not available sometimes. Please move to the other place and try again P48 Is "Accept/Reject call set? P118 Calls and messages will be difficult to make and send out in the crowd. The message

[Please wait] will be displayed and accompany with a sound like the ring tone. Please move to the other place or try again later. P73 Display is not bright enough Is Display off time settings set? P108 Adjust the Backlight Display brightness. P107 Is "Power saver mode" set to "ON"? P108 Appendix/Troubleshooting 363 Symptom The other party's voice is too low or too loud during a call Images or melodies set for some functions do not work, and default settings are used A message is not automatically received i-mode, i-mode mail, i-ppli and i-Channel cannot be connected i-mode mark does not disappear and keeps blinking continuously Still images or movies look blurred Data cannot be transferred

[X] mark appears when trying to display the image, playing for demonstration or preview Image cannot be display as the attachment file is deleted A phone number is dialed, but a busy tone sounds and the call cannot be connected The icon indicating the network status remains out of service area and "Out of service area" is displayed Did you change the "Volume" setting?

Check Is the same UIM inserted that was installed when images or melodies were obtained?

P40 If you have set "Revive option setting" to "ON", set it to "OFF". Is "Host selection" set to something other than "i-mode"? P191 If you had started using the FOMA terminal before you subscribed to i-mode, turn the FOMA terminal off and then turn it back on. If i-mode access breaks down between or after i-mode(center) information or sending

/receiving mail, i-mode mark keeps blinking. i- mode is stopped automatically if there is no data being transferred. And i-mode also can be stopped by pressing power button. P174 Change to close-up mode for close-up shooting. P205 Check camera lens is dirty or have mist or not. P198 Is a USB HUB being used? The FOMA terminal may not work properly with a USB HUB. P361

[X] mark may appear when the image data is corrupted. P190 Check the [Attachment File Settings]. P139 Check the [Limit Mail Size Settings]. For the detail, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode] FOMA version". P147 Did you enter the city code? P52 Is the phone out of service area? P47 Are you out of service area, or in the location with week/poor signal reception? P48 364 Appendix/Troubleshooting Symptom The Terminal security code entry screen appears on the Stand-by display A different ring tone sounds for incoming mail Accumulated call costs are not counted

"Please wait." or "No lines/ channels are available" is displayed.

"Time out." appears and i-mode mail and SMS cannot be sent When overseas Symptom The icon indicating the network status remains as out of service area, and the international roaming service is not available Is Lock all set? P117 Check Is the sender saved in the Phonebook with a different ring tone? P81 Is the sender saved in the Phonebook under a group with a different ring tone assigned?

P85 Have you exceeded the call charge limit? Reset the accumulated call costs to restart counting. P281 Audio line/packet communication facility failed, or audio line/packet communication network is extremely busy. Try again later. P334 Check Are you out of the international roaming service area, or in a location with weak signal reception?

Check whether you are in an available service area and whether you are using an international carrier listed in the "Mobile Phone User's Guide [International Services]" or at the DOCOMO International service website. Launch "NW search mode" to search for a compatible operator. P332 Switch 3G/GSM to [Automatic] status or an available network. And please turn off the FOMA terminal then turn it back if [Automatic] status is selected in Japan. P332 A voice call or videophone call cannot be received Is "Bar incoming when roam" set to "Active"? P334 The videophone is not available during GSM/GPRS network. P323 Appendix/Troubleshooting 365 Symptom A voice call or videophone call cannot be received suddenly even it was available The other party's caller ID is not notified. The notified caller ID is not the other party's. The FOMA terminal does not perform operations using phonebook data or Valller ID Notification. Videophones, i-mode mail, SMS, and packet communication are not available Check Please check the accumulative amount at docomo Information Center. Before start using the international roaming service (WORLD WING), setting an end service approximate amount is required. Service is stopped when the amount exceed the end service approximate amount. Settle the bill can start to use this service again. P322 Check Internet settings. Application of some special networks may not be available if Internet is set as [automatic]. Change the set to [manual] and fit the network environment(3G or GSM). P332 If the used network or operator does not notify the caller ID, the caller ID does not appear on the FOMA terminal screen even when the caller ID is notified. Depending on the used network or operator, the notified caller ID may be different from the other party's. P62 Check whether you are in an available service area and whether you are using an international carrier listed in the "Mobile Phone User's Guide [International Services]" or at the DOCOMO International service website P322 Calls or mail cannot be received After returning to Japan, the network status icon still shows out of service area Switch to an available network. P332 Is "Call barring" activated? P334 Is "Network search mode" set to "Manual" ?

P332 366 Appendix/Troubleshooting Error Messages Error Messages Not enough data memory Please check address Input address Could not send to the following address (561) Move failed Some data couldn't be saved No response

(408) Same time already set Same file already exists Description There was not enough storage space in the inbox when attempting to obtain the selected received attached file. Delete unnecessary received mail. The SMS cannot be sent to the entered address. Check the address. No address was entered. Enter an address. Mail could not be sent to the displayed address properly. The file/data could not be moved because an error or another problem occurred. There is data that could not be saved because there was not enough storage space in the saving location. Delete unnecessary files. The terminal was unable to connect because there was no response from the site or web page. Try again. Another i-ppli is set to start automatically at the same time. Two or more i-ppli cannot start automatically at the same time. Two or more i-ppli cannot start automatically at the same time. The file/folder cannot be created or saved because a file/folder of the same name already exists. Description MessageF cannot be received while you are abroad. Remove the check mark from

"MessageF" in the "Check new messages"

settings. No song exists. Save a Chaku-Uta-Full song. No applicable Chaku-Uta-Full song exists. The operation cannot be performed because no song is selected. Select a song. Up to 50 songs can be registered to one playlist. Delete unnecessary Chaku-Uta-Full songs from the playlist. Images were deleted from the message because the total file size of images inserted in Deco-mail exceeded the set value. The operation could not be performed properly because the image is invalid. Images cannot be downloaded because

"Display image" is set to "OFF." Change the setting. Error Messages MessageF cannot be received while you are abroad. Check the Center Inquiry functions

(566) No song!

Cannot find file!

Select items Cannot add songs!

Too much image data Images removed from message Image size is over Reduce image in message Error in image;

cannot be displayed correctly Error in image Does not work correctly View images set to "OFF"; can't be downloaded View images to "Off"

Can't be downloaded Appendix/Troubleshooting 367 Error Messages Save image?

The number of images does over Reduce images in the message Failed to load screen memo No screen memos Cannot add screen memo Software failed Failed capture Enter MCC Out of service area Enter subject This Card cannot be recognized Can't zoom in case of this size Description The file cannot be saved because it is a Flash file that cannot be saved or an image that has only been partially downloaded. The maximum number of images that can be inserted in Deco-mail has been reached. Delete images in the message. The screen memo cannot be displayed because an error or other problem occurred. No screen memos have been registered. The screen memo cannot be added because an error or other problem occurred. The terminal failed to start the i-ppli DX. The image cannot be cropped because an error occurred. No country code (MCC) was entered. Enter the country code. The operation cannot be performed because the terminal is in a location with no signal or out of the FOMA service area. No subject was entered for schedule or To Do. Enter a subject. The UIM cannot be recognized or the wrong type of UIM is inserted. Reinsert the UIM or insert the correct UIM and then try the operation again.

"Select size" is set to "UXGA (1200x1600)" or

"SXGA (960x1280)". To use the zoom, set the image size smaller. Description MessageF cannot be received while you are abroad. Remove the check mark from

"MessageF" in the "Check new messages"

settings. No song exists. Save a Chaku-Uta-Full song. No applicable Chaku-Uta-Full song exists. The operation cannot be performed because no song is selected. Select a song. Up to 50 songs can be registered to one playlist. Delete unnecessary Chaku-Uta-Full songs from the playlist. Images were deleted from the message because the total file size of images inserted in Deco-mail exceeded the set value. The operation could not be performed properly because the image is invalid. Images cannot be downloaded because

"Display image" is set to "OFF." Change the setting. Error Messages MessageF cannot be received while you are abroad. Check the Center Inquiry functions (566) No song!

Cannot find file!

Select items Cannot add songs!

Too much image data Images removed from message Image size is over Reduce image in message Error in image;

cannot be displayed correctly Error in image Does not work correctly View images set to "OFF"; can't be downloaded View images to "Off"

Can't be downloaded 368 Appendix/Troubleshooting Error Messages Certificate is rejected.

(tampered) Unable to download. This data may not be displayed Unable to acquire Cannot forward this item Unable to acquire Set the clock to obtain data File format not supported This file cannot be attached Some functions is limited in UIM Description A problem was detected during the authentication process of the SSL. The connection will be terminated. A connection could not be established because a modified SSL certificate was received. The file cannot be downloaded because it is invalid or an error occurred. This data may not play properly. The file cannot be acquired because it is invalid or an error occurred. The selected data cannot be attached to mail. The file cannot be saved because the validity period of the i-motion or a Chaku-Uta-Full song has expired, or there are no remaining playbacks available. The data cannot be obtained because the clock has not been set. The file cannot be selected because it is in an unsupported format. The file cannot be attached to i-mode mail. Functions are limited because a different UIM card is inserted than the one that was inserted when the data was downloaded from a site, the file was attached to mail, or MessageR/F was saved. Error Messages Invalid content. Change i-motion type for replay Cannot create folder Too many items are protected Invalid content, Download failed Incomplete downloading Size overReduce the message or delete attached file Playback error Cannot play this data Unable to play Replay period has not yet started Unable to play Replay is restricted

(XXXX/XX/XX XX:XX) -

(XXXX/XX/XX XX:XX) Description The terminal is set not to obtain streaming type i-motion. Change the setting. No more folders can be added because the maximum number of folders has been reached. No more screen memos can be protected. The content cannot be downloaded because it is invalid. The data is not completely downloaded. The mail cannot be sent because it exceeds the maximum possible size for sending. Reduce the size of the message or delete attached files. The data cannot be played because it contains an error. The data cannot be played. The data could not be played because an error or other problem occurred. The file cannot be played because the playback period set to i-motion or a Chaku-Uta-

Full has not yet started. Play the file on or after the day for which playback is possible. The file cannot be played because it is not currently in the playback period set to imotion or a Chaku-Uta-Full. Play the file during the playback period.

* Where X represents year, month, day, and time. Appendix/Troubleshooting 369 Error Messages Replay is restricted XXXX/XX/XX XX:XX Unable to obtain data due to replay restriction data error no recent played info!

Size of this page is not supported Unable to download Unable to download Data exceeds maximum size

(452) Unable to download, Data exceeds maximum size Description The file cannot be played because the i-motion or a Chaku-Uta-Full song has expired. You cannot play the file after the expiration date.

* Where X represents year, month, day, and time. The data cannot be obtained because it is invalid or today's date is not in the playback period. Nothing can be played because no file has been played before. The reception was stopped because the page at the site or web is too large; only a part is displayed. The download was stopped because the data exceeded the maximum size that can be downloaded/obtained. The data cannot be obtained because the data size exceeds the maximum for retrieving. The data could not be received because it exceeds the maximum size. The data cannot be downloaded because it exceeds the maximum size of data that can be downloaded. Error Messages No more memos can be protected Up to 10 screen memos can be protected URL address changed (301 Connection failed(403) File with copyright will be deleted Cannot be deleted There is no bookmark that can be deleted There is not a message to delete There is no mail that can be deleted Failed to delete Canceled deleting Number of creating folder is 20EA Description The screen memo cannot be protected because the maximum number has been exceeded. Up to 10 screen memos can be protected. The site or web page is automatically forwarded to another URL, or the URL has changed. The terminal cannot connect to the site or web page. The terminal will delete the attached file and forward the message because the file is copyright protected. The data cannot be deleted because an error occurred. The operation cannot be performed because there is no bookmark that can be deleted. There is no message that can be deleted because all messages are protected. There is no message that can be deleted because no message exists or all messages are protected. The terminal failed to delete the data because an error or a problem occurred. Deletion was cancelled because an error or a problem occurred. A new folder cannot be created because the number of folders that can be created (20) has been reached. 370 Appendix/Troubleshooting Error Messages Service is not registered Service is not provided Not supported format Not supported Page is not found(404) No content is available (204 No requested software Requested software unavailable No messages No data Unable to retrieve the requested URL

(504) Invalid number!

Invalid address Description You have not subscribed to the i-mode service. The terminal failed to send an SMS because the service is not provided. The file cannot be specified because it is an i-

motion movie with only video or audio. The file cannot be played because it is not supported. The operation cannot be performed because it is not supported. The site or web page may not exist, or the URL may be wrong. Check the URL and then try again. There is no data available at the specified site. The specified software cannot be started because it does not exist. The operation cannot be performed because the specified software cannot be started. There were no messages that matched the conditions specified for the filter operation. There was no mail that matched the conditions specified for the filter operation. The site or web page may not exist, or the URL may be wrong. Check the URL and then try again. An invalid number was entered, or no number was entered. Enter a valid number. The message cannot be sent because the mail address is invalid. Error Messages 3 i-ppli have been already registered for auto-start Please wait Low battery. Can't update Invalid end time Invalid end date Receiving. Please wait Cannot receive message There is no empty space in the Inbox Please delete unnecessary mail to receive SMS Inbox is full Description A maximum number of 3 i-ppli can be set to start automatically. The terminal failed to send the SMS. Wait a while and then try again. There is not enough battery power. Charge the battery. The end time is set earlier the start time on the same day. Set an end time that is later than the start time. The end date is set earlier than the start date. Set the schedule event so that the end date is the same or later than the start date. The terminal is receiving data. Wait a while. The selected message cannot be received because the host address set for "Host Selection" is wrong. Check the setting and then try again. SMS cannot be received because there is not enough storage space in the Inbox. Delete unnecessary received mail. The i-mode mail cannot be received because there is not enough storage space in the Inbox. Delete unnecessary received mail. SMS cannot be moved/copied from the UIM because there is not enough storage space in the Inbox. Delete unnecessary received mail. Appendix/Troubleshooting 371 Error Messages No messages Reception rejected Canceled receiving No Certificates Schedule is full Already set Already exists Host name already exists Already exist Same URL already saved Already received message on server All data is invalid Could not parse all mail to parameters Cannot play for limit size Description There are no received messages. The SMS failed because the recipient rejected the message. The reception was cancelled. There are no SSL certificates. There is not enough storage space for Schedule. Delete unnecessary schedule events. The mail address cannot be set because it is already set for auto sort. The network cannot be registered because it is already registered. The host name cannot be registered because it is already registered. The network cannot be registered because it is already registered. The URL cannot be saved because it is already registered in the FOMA terminal. The message cannot be sent because it is already stored on the server. The operation cannot be performed because all the data is invalid. Some of the parameters are out of range. The file attached to the i-mode mail cannot be played because it is too large. Error Messages Connection failed(400) Software terminated due to security error Connection interrupted Host address is empty Host name is empty Access point is empty Connection failed Connection failed

(562) Time out Time out Resume download?

Failed set !

Self mode is set Description The terminal was unable to connect properly because of an error at the access point. i-ppli attempted to perform a prohibited activity. The connection was interrupted because an error or a problem occurred. There is no host address entered. Enter the host address. There is no host name entered. Enter the host name. There is no access point number entered. Enter the access point number. A connection cannot be established because the host address set for "Host Selection" is wrong. Check the setting and then try again. A connection cannot be established because there is a problem with the network. Wait a while and then try again. The traffic to the i-mode center is heavy. Wait a while and then try again. The attached file linked to the i-mode mail could not be downloaded within the set time. Do you want to try downloading again?

The ring tone could not be set because an error occurred. The operation cannot be performed because self mode is set. Set self mode to "OFF". 372 Appendix/Troubleshooting Error Messages Not able to insert a chosen image Service unavailable No decorations. Cannot save as template Preparing to send Address is not valid Check the address (451) Could not send mail Transmission failed (XXX) Could not send mail Server is full(551) Description The selected image could not be inserted because it exceeds a specified value. Error Messages Outbox is full The terminal cannot connect to the network because it is out of the service area or in a location with no signal. Move to a location with a strong signal and set the network. The list of networks cannot be displayed because there is no UIM inserted. Insert the UIM before using the option. The network list could not be saved with

"UPLMN select by list" in "Preferred network lists."

The template cannot be saved because there are no decorations. The terminal is preparing to send the i-mode mail. Wait a while. The mail could not be sent properly. Check the address and then try again. The mail/SMS could not be sent properly. The mail could not be sent properly.

* Where X represents a number to indicate an error type. The mail space for the recipient is full. No messages Transmission rejected Cancelled sending Software already updated This software contains an error Download canceled due to the SW error The data cannot be displayed because it is not supported Invalid title Time out Keypad dial lock Description SMS cannot be copied/moved from the UIM because there is not enough storage space in the Outbox. Delete unnecessary sent and unsent mail. There is no mail in Outbox. SMS sending was rejected. Sending was cancelled. The i-ppli cannot be updated because it has already been updated to the latest version. The i-ppli data cannot be downloaded because it contains an error. The i-ppli data cannot be downloaded because it contains an error. The data cannot be displayed because it is not supported. Invalid characters or no characters were entered for the title name. Enter a valid title name. The terminal searched for a network for the set amount of time, but no network could be found Check whether the "Network mode" setting is correct. The operation cannot be performed because Dialing Restriction is set. Remove the checkmark for "Keypad dial lock" in the Call/Mail lock settings. Appendix/Troubleshooting 373 Error Messages Download failed Already downloaded Usage is currently restricted Try again later i-mode mail service is busy Please try again later(XXX) Security code error Call rejected Failed to retrieve channel information Description The data could not be downloaded because an error or a problem occurred. i-ppli of the same version has already been downloaded. This message will be displayed when extremely large amount of data is transferred via your terminal. This message is displayed only when you subscribe to the fixed amount service for i-mode packet communication. Wait for a while and try again later after you see this message. The line is very busy. Wait a while and then try again.

* Where X represents a number to indicate an error type. The entered security code is incorrect. Enter the correct security code. An incoming call was rejected because it was from a caller not registered in the Phonebook. To receive calls from callers not in the Phonebook, set "Reject unknown" to "OFF."

An incoming call was rejected because it was from a caller registered in "Reject on list". An incoming call was rejected because "Reject all calls" is set to "Disconnect call". i-Channel information was not downloaded because a part or all channel information could not be downloaded. Move to a location with a strong signal and then press Q in stand-by to receive the information. Error Messages Connection suspended Exchange failed Battery low Invalid data Input data Receiving canceled Low battery Cannot start Photo-mode Low battery Can't use No attachable file Attached file is deleted Description The connection was suspended because the set amount of time elapsed without finding the other party. Check the distance from the other device, angle, and operating procedure. Communication failed because the operation was suspended. The battery level is low. Charge the battery. The operation cannot be performed because the data is invalid. The country name and country code were not entered. Enter the country name and country code. Downloading was suspended because the terminal is out of service area. Move to a location with a strong signal. The operation cannot be performed because there is not enough battery power. Charge the battery and try again. The function cannot be used because there is not enough battery power. Charge the battery. There is no file that can be attached. The attached file will be deleted and the mail will be forwarded because a different UIM card is inserted than the one that was inserted when the i-mode mail attachment file was received. 374 Appendix/Troubleshooting Error Messages Template is full Size over Phonebook is full No Phone number Failed Clipping Check failed Registration is in progress Wait a while and try again (554) No bookmark data Too much data was entered Input error(205 Authentication type is not supported (401 Description There is not enough storage space for Template. Delete unnecessary templates. The size of the template exceeds the specified value. Delete the message or inserted images. There is not enough storage space for the phonebook entry. Delete unnecessary phonebook entries. No entry is saved in the Phonebook. The video could not be edited because an error occurred. The terminal failed to check for new SMS. The operation cannot be performed because user registration is taking place. Wait a while and try again. The bookmark cannot be added because there is no bookmark data that can be added. Sending is not possible because too many characters were entered in the site or web page input field. Delete some characters and then try sending again. URL is too long to display. The input data contains an error. Check the input data. A connection cannot be established because the authentication type is not supported. Error Messages Authentication failed Authentication canceled(401) Enter correct network security code Enter MNC Unable to acquire remaining data Data deleted Password is not correct(401) Receiving failed Because mail to indicate can't replace it. There are no files This file is not supported Invalid File(493) Cannot find file File error File is deleted Description The wrong security code was entered. Enter the correct security code. The connection was suspended because authentication failed. The Network security code entered was incorrect. Enter the correct network security code. The MNC was not entered. Enter the MNC. While attempting to download the remaining data of a partially saved file, the data was deleted because an error occurred and the download failed. The user name or password entered in the authentication screen of a site or web page was wrong. Enter the information again. The mail cannot be received because the terminal is attempting to overwrite a message that is currently being displayed. There are no files in the folder. The file cannot be played because the data is not supported or corrupted. The operation cannot be performed because the file that was obtained is corrupted. The operation cannot be performed because the selected file does not exist. The operation cannot be performed because the file is invalid. The mail is forwarded with the pasted file deleted because it cannot be forwarded. Appendix/Troubleshooting 375 Error Messages Failed to create file Attached file size is over Cannot save file Incorrect folder name XXX folder can't delete Delete invalid address Invalid data is included Invalid title Bookmark is full Too many bookmarks Some cannot be displayed No bookmarks Description The file could not be moved/copied because an error occurred. The maximum attachment size has been exceeded. The file could not be saved because an error or a problem occurred. Invalid characters or no characters were entered for the folder name. Enter a valid folder name. The selected folder cannot be deleted.

* Where XXX represents the applicable folder name. An invalid address was deleted. The operation cannot be performed because an inappropriate file is selected. The operation cannot be performed because the data is invalid. Invalid characters or no characters were entered for the folder name. Enter a valid folder name. There is not enough storage space for the bookmark. Delete unnecessary bookmarks. Some bookmarks cannot be displayed because there are too many bookmarks. There are no bookmarks added. Error Messages Cannot add bookmark Unknown error Cannot add to playlist!

Cannot create playlist!

There is no mail to cancel protection There is not a message to protect There is no mail to protect There are no messages to protect No protected messages?

Retention period has expired(492) Fail to save Canceled saving Description The bookmark cannot be added because an error or a problem occurred. The operation cannot be performed because an unknown error occurred. The song cannot be added because the maximum number of playlists/songs in each playlist has been added. Delete unnecessary playlists/songs. Up to 10 playlists can be added. Delete unnecessary playlists. Protection cannot be cancelled because there is no protected mail. Protection cannot be cancelled because there are no protected messages. There is no mail that can be protected because any mail is already protected. There are no messages that can be protected because any messages are already protected. There are no protected messages. An attached file can no longer be obtained because the retention period at the i-mode center has expired. The data could not be saved because an error occurred. Saving was cancelled because an error or a problem occurred. 376 Appendix/Troubleshooting Description The operation cannot be performed because there is not enough storage space in the saving location. Delete unnecessary files. A connection cannot be established because the home page is not set. The home page is set to "Disable". Set it to

"Enable."

No more settings can be configured. Delete unnecessary items. The mail cannot be sent because the maximum number of characters that can be entered for a message has been exceeded. Reduce the size of the message. The mail cannot be saved because the maximum number of characters that can be entered for a message has been exceeded. Reduce the size of the message. The mail cannot be sent because the number of inserted images exceeds the specified number. Delete images in the message. The mail cannot be saved because the number of inserted images exceeds the specified number. Delete images in the message. Error Messages No save area Home page not set Home page disabled Terminal memory is full Cannot send message; for size over Delete some message Cannot save message; for size over Delete message Cannot send message; for number of images over Reduce images in the message Cannot save message; for number of images over Reduce images in the message Error Messages Message entry size exceeds limit Delete message Cannot edit message Cannot save image without playing Not registered Register from one touch key menu Unsent message mail is full No messages There's empty input Input required Empty message cannot be saved Music player is running Received invalid data Description The maximum possible number of characters for the message has been exceeded. Reduce the size of the message. The message cannot be edited. The data cannot be saved because it is a Flash file. The data cannot be saved because it is an unplayed Flash animation. A phone number/mail address or a function is not assigned to the One touch hot key. Assign them. There is not enough storage space for unsent messages. Delete unnecessary unsent or sent messages. There are no unsent messages. The operation cannot be performed because some items have not been entered. An empty message cannot be saved. The operation cannot be performed because the Music player is running. Quit the Music player. The operation cannot be performed because the received data contains an error. Appendix/Troubleshooting 377 Error Messages Invalid Data(XXX) Invalid date Invalid file name is included No messages Folder is full Message data invalid Memo is full Memory is full Not enough memory Can't save Description The specified site or web page is not supported.

* Where X represents a number to indicate an error type. Check whether the URL is correct.

* Where X represents a number to indicate an error type. The received data cannot be displayed because it contains an error.

* Where X represents a number to indicate an error type. The value is outside the setting range of the date search. The file or folder cannot be saved or created because an invalid character was entered for the file name or folder name. There is no Message F. There is no Message R. There is not enough storage space for MessageR/F. Delete unnecessary MessageR/F. The message cannot be displayed because the message data is corrupted. There is not enough storage space for memos. Delete unnecessary memos. The operation cannot be performed because there is not enough storage space in the save location. Delete unnecessary files. Up to 10 access points can be registered. Delete unnecessary access points. Error Messages Not enough memory Can't record Not enough memory Memory shortage Memory shortage Stop Browser Memory shortage Return to Main Menu Folder is full Characters are too long to enter Loading Loading Please wait. Reject list full International roaming service denied Description A video cannot be recorded because there is not enough memory. There is not enough storage space in the moving/copying destination. Delete unnecessary files. The process will be suspended because there is not enough memory. If you see this message frequently, turn off, then turn on your terminal. i-mode will be terminated because there is not enough memory. The process will be suspended because there is not enough memory. There is not enough storage space for both received mail and Message R/F. Delete unnecessary received mail and Message R/F. No more characters can be entered because the number of entered characters exceeds the limit. The data is being loaded. Please wait. The data is being loaded. Please wait. There are too many entries for the list. Delete unnecessary items. The operation cannot be performed because you have not subscribed to WORLD WING. 378 Appendix/Troubleshooting Error Messages Set a period from 2 to 31 days Can't save over 50 songs Bookmark is full Activation failure because of different UIM Invalid UIM, requested service not available Invalid UIM cannot send Activation failure because of different UIM Description The period specified is incorrect. Set a period from 2 to 31 days. Up to 50 songs can be added to the Quick playlist. Delete unnecessary Chaku-Uta-Full songs from the Quick playlist. There are too many bookmarks. Delete unnecessary bookmarks. An i-ppli could not be started automatically due to the UIM security. Insert the UIM that was inserted when the file was obtained and try again. The operation cannot be performed due to the UIM security. Insert the UIM that was inserted when the file was obtained and try again. A different UIM card is inserted than the one that was inserted when the data was downloaded from a site, or the mail attachment file or MessageR/F was saved. Insert the same UIM that was inserted when you downloaded or saved the data. The mail cannot be sent due to the UIM security. Insert the UIM that was inserted when the mail was created and try again. i-ppli could not be started automatically due to the UIM security. Insert the UIM that was inserted when the file was obtained and try again. Error Messages Invalid UIM. Requested software can't start Invalid UIM, incorrect display UIM reading UIM not ready Invalid UIM. Requested software can't start Invalid UIM. Start not possible Description An i-ppli that is linked to the UIM inserted at the time of download from a site cannot be started. Insert the UIM that was inserted when the i-ppli was downloaded. Some data subject to restrictions such as images cannot be displayed because a different UIM card is inserted than the one that was inserted when the data was downloaded from a site, or the attached file or MessageR/F was saved. Insert the same UIM that was inserted when you downloaded or saved the data. A different UIM card is inserted than the one that was inserted when the screen memo was saved. Insert the same UIM card that was inserted when you saved the screen memo. The UIM is being read. Wait a while and try again. The UIM card is not inserted. Insert the UIM and try again. The specified software cannot be started because a different card is inserted than the one inserted when the software was downloaded from a site. Insert the UIM that was inserted when the software was downloaded. An i-ppli that is linked to the UIM inserted at the time of download from a site cannot be started. Insert the UIM that was inserted when the software was downloaded. Appendix/Troubleshooting 379 Error Messages Data transmission is frequent Continue transmission?

Yes/No/

Terminate i-ppli To function is not set Cannot receive i-

Channel information The i-motion movie exceeds playable size Received data exceeds i-motion playable size Network traffic to i-mode center is heavy Please wait

(555) All items in

"Check new messages" set to OFF PIN1 (PIN2) code locked Description This message will be displayed when an i-ppli performs a lot of data transfer within a short time. Select "Yes" to continue using the i-ppli. Select "No" to continue using the i-ppli without communication. Select "Terminate" to end the i-ppli. The i-ppli cannot be started because "Site i-ppli to" is not enabled. Enable the function and try again. The i-Channel information cannot be received because the UIM is not inserted properly, or there is a problem with the UIM. Check the UIM. The data cannot be obtained because the data size exceeds the limit. Download was canceled because the data size exceeds the limit. The line facility failed, or the line is very busy. Wait a while and try again. No check marks are placed for items of the

"Check new messages" settings. Place check marks to items and try again. If an incorrect PIN1/PIN2 code is entered 3 times in a row, the PIN lock is set. Enter the PIN Unblock code. Error Messages PIN1(PIN2) code not recognized PUK code error PUK code not recognized PUK blocked No PLMN found Please check SMS Center settings SSL session cannot be established SSL session failed SSL certificate not valid SSL session terminated To do is full Description If an incorrect PIN1/PIN2 code is entered 3 times in a row, the PIN lock is set. Enter the PIN Unblock code. An incorrect PUK code was entered. Enter the correct PUK code. If you enter an incorrect PUK code 10 times in a row, the PUK code is blocked. Contact a docomo shop counter. If you enter an incorrect PUK code 10 times in a row, the PUK code is blocked. Contact a docomo shop counter. There is no network that can be selected. The terminal failed to send the SMS. Check the

"SMS Center" setting. A connection could not be established because a modified SSL certificate was received or an SSL error occurred. A problem was detected during the authentication process of SSL. The connection will be terminated. A session was not possible because of an authentication error on the server. The certificate of the FOMA terminal is set to invalid. Change the setting to establish a connection. The SSL session was terminated because you canceled it. There is not enough space in the storage location for To Do entries. Delete unnecessary To Do entries. 380 Appendix/Troubleshooting Error Messages Please set "To type" receiver URL too long to register Invalid URL No URL history Unplug the USB cable i-ppli error Description There is no address set for the To field. Set at least one address for the To field. The URL cannot be registered because it contains too many characters. The terminal cannot connect to the site or Internet because the URL is invalid. The operation cannot be performed because there is no entries in URL history. The FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 is connected. Disconnect the cable and try again. An error occurred while an i-ppli is running. Appendix/Troubleshooting 381 Warranty and After-sales Service Warranty Be sure to receive a warranty at the time you purchase your FOMA terminal. Read contents of the warranty and confirm items such as the "shop name and the date of purchase" and keep it in a safe place. If necessary items are not described, immediately contact the shop where you purchased the FOMA terminal. The warranty for free repair is valid for one year from the date of purchase. This product and its accessories are subject to change, in part or whole, for improvement without prior notice. The saved contents of phonebook and other functions may be altered or lost by failure, repair or other handling of the FOMA terminal. It is recommended that you write down the contents of the Phonebook as a precaution. If a FOMA terminal is repaired, with some exceptions, information downloaded with i-

mode or i-ppli is not transferred to the repaired FOMA terminal, because of the Copyright Law.

* If you have a PC, your Phonebook data can be transferred to and stored on your hard drive using DOCOMO keitai datalink

(P361) and FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02

(optional) or FOMA USB Cable (optional). After-sales Service If you have problems with the FOMA terminal Before requesting for repairs, read "Troubleshooting" in this manual. If the problem still persists, call the Contact for Repairs as listed on the back of this manual. 382 Appendix/Troubleshooting If Repair is required after the inquiry Take your FOMA terminal to a service center designated by DOCOMO. Repairs are accepted during business hours of the service center. Be sure to bring the warranty when you visit.Please note that depending on the malfunction, it may take more days to repair. During the Warranty period The FOMA terminal will be repaired at no charge subject to the conditions of the warranty. The warranty must be presented when requesting the repair. You will be charged for repair if the warranty is not presented or the trouble or damage is caused by your inappropriate use of the terminal. You are charged even during the warranty period for repair of failures caused by the use of devices or consumable items that are not DOCOMO-specified. You will be charged for repair of the LCD screen or the connectors. Repair may not be possible in the following cases:

At a service center, when perspiration is detected, (e.g., the moisture detection seal is reacted). When corrosion due to exposure to moisture, condensation or sweat is found in a test result; or if any of the internal boards are damaged or deformed (When the Headphone/Microphone Jack, the external connector terminals or the LCD liquid is damaged or its case is cracked, repair may not be possible).

* Since these conditions are outside the scope of the warranty, any repairs, if at all possible, will be charged. After expiration of the warranty All repairs that are requested are charged. Replacement parts Replacement parts (parts required to maintain production function) will be kept in stock for at least four years in principle after termination of production. However, repair may still not be possible due to a lack of replacement parts depending on the failure. Even after the parts holding period, some failures may be repairable. Call the Contact for Repairs as listed on the back of this manual. Notes Do not modify the FOMA terminal or its accessories.

- Fire, injury or damage may result.

- The modified FOMA terminal (in a way such as part replacement, remodeling, or painting) will be repaired only after the terminal is restored to its original condition

(containing DOCOMO genuine parts only). However, depending on the details of modification, repair may be refused. Modifications may include the following: Applying a label on the LCD or keys Decorating the FOMA terminal using adhesive Replacing the case with the one other than a DOCOMO genuine part

- Repair of failure or damage caused by modification is charged even during the warranty period. Do not remove rating stickers placed on the FOMA terminal. The inscription stickers certify that the FOMA terminal satisfies specific technical standards. If stickers are removed intentionally or are reattached in such a way that confirmation of the sticker's contents is impossible, repair or servicing may be refused because confirmation of whether or not the device conforms to relevant technical standards cannot be made. Various function settings and information including total call time may be cleared (reset) by failure, repair or other handling of FOMA terminal. In such a case, you have to make function settings again. The FOMA terminal contains magnetic components given below. Keep cash cards and other objects vulnerable to magnetism away from such components or they may become unusable. Magnetic components: Speaker and Earpiece If the FOMA terminal gets wet or moistened, immediately turn the power OFF, remove the battery pack, and bring the terminal to a DOCOMO service center. Note that, depending on the conditions of the FOMA terminal, it may not be possible to repair it. Phonebook and Downloaded Data Write down and keep separately the data you registered in your FOMA terminal. DOCOMO will not accept any liability whatsoever for changes or loss of information. The data you created, or imported or downloaded from external sources may be altered or lost as a result of changing the FOMA terminal model or repairing the terminal. DOCOMO is not responsible for data alteration or loss under these circumstances. Under some circumstances, DOCOMO may replace your FOMA terminal with its equivalent instead of repairing it. Data including images or melodies downloaded from the official i-mode site the FOMA terminal and user-defined data will be transferred to another terminal only when the terminal is repaired (some data may not be transferred. Depending on severity of the failure, data may not be transferred.)

* Depending on the volume of the data saved in a FOMA terminal, it may take more time or be unavailable to transfer the data. Appendix/Troubleshooting 383 i-mode Malfunction Diagnosis Site You can check whether your FOMA terminal is properly sending/receiving mail, downloading images or melodies yourself.

Top screen Test menu list screen Access method to "(i-mode malfunction diagnosis site)"

i-mode site: iMenu ] (Information) ]

(Service/Function) ] (i-mode) ] (i-mode malfunction diagnosis site) Note Packet communication charges free for the i-mode malfunction diagnosis.

* Charges apply when accessing from overseas. Test items will differ depending on the FOMA terminal model. Test items may change. Before diagnosing operations for each test item by performing the test, read the warnings on the site carefully. When accessing the i-mode malfunction diagnosis site, and performing the sending mail test, information unique to your FOMA terminal (such as a model name and mail address) is automatically sent to the server (i-mode malfunction diagnosis server).. The information sent is used only for i-mode malfunction diagnosis. After the diagnosis, if you think that the terminal is malfunctioning, call "Contact for Repairs" as listed on the back of the manual. 384 Appendix/Troubleshooting Software update Updating Software About Updating Software This function checks whether the FOMA terminal software requires update after connecting with network and, if required, updates the software by downloading a part of it using packet communication*. Functions and operations of FOMA terminal will be improved by updating the important part of the software.

* Packet communication for software update is free of charge When updating software is required, visit DOCOMO website or "(user support)" from "i menu". Software may be updated in the following two methods:

"Update now" and "Timed update". Update now: Update the software immediately. Timer update: The software is automatically updated at the scheduled date and time. Note Do not remove the battery pack when updating software. Update may fail. Software update can be conducted with the Phonebook data, camera image data, download data registered in FOMA terminal.Note th at data may not be able to protected depending on your terminal

(malfunction, damage, dropped in water, etc.)To make a backup for necessary data is recommended. However, please note that for some download data backup is not available. When Using Software update is available even if you set the access point other than i-mode. Fully charge the battery pack before updating software. Software update is not available when:

- Lock all is set

- Another function is running

- The date and time are not set

- The FOMA card (UIM) is not inserted

- The battery is not fully charged

- "Out of service area" appears at the top of the screen

- Self mode is set

- Terminal power is off

- International roaming Software update (downloading and rewriting) may take a while. Updating software with the "PIN1 code request" set to "ON"

displays the PIN1 code entry screen at the automatic restart after overwriting the software. You cannot make/receive calls or perform communication until you enter the correct PIN1 code. You cannot make or receive calls or use communication or other functions while updating software (you can receive voice calls while downloading).?When updating software, SSL communication will be conducted to a server

(DOCOMO website). Set "ON" in SSL certificate.

(SSL certificate settings when purchasing P192) Appendix/Troubleshooting 385 It is recommended that you update software* in a location with strong signal reception with three antenna bars displayed in stationary state.

* If the signal becomes weak during software download, or download is suspended, retry software update in a location with strong signal reception. When your software is up to date, a message indicating that "No update required Use it as usual" appears when you check availability of software update. After software is updated, an icon indicating the i-mode Center storage status disappears. When mail is delivered during software update with "Receive option" set to "ON", a screen indicating that there is mail may not appear after software update. When software is updated, information unique to your terminal (such as a terminal model and the serial number) is automatically sent to the server (software update server managed by DOCOMO). DOCOMO does not use the sent information for other purposes than Software update. If software update fails, a message indicating "Rewriting failed" appears. All operations become unavailable. In this case, bring your FOMA terminal to a DOCOMO service center. It is not available to use during overseas. Starting Software Update Check whether the FOMA terminal software update is necessary. 1 M[Menu]] (Setting) ]"Other" ]"Software update"

When software update has been reserved already, Reservation note screen will be displayed. 2 Check the contents on the confirmation screen and press "OK"]"OK"]"YES"

The communication starts to check whether software update is necessary. If update is necessary, "Update is necessary" will be displayed. You can choose either

"Update immediately" or "Reserve"

When software update is not necessary, "Update is not necessary" will appear. Use it as usual. Note Software update confirmation screen will be displayed even in default setting, software is available to update. 386 Appendix/Troubleshooting Updating Software Immediately 1 On the software update confirmation screen, select

"Update now" ] "OK" on the download start screen. Download starts, and when the download is completed, the confirmation screen for software rewriting is displayed. 3 "OK"

Note If disconnected during download, the downloaded data will be deleted. As soon as download starts, the update will be conducted whether or not select menu. 2 "OK"

The rewriting starts,automatically and the software update confirmation screen appears after completion. All operations will be disabled during rewriting.And it can not be disconnected during updating. Appendix/Troubleshooting 387 When select "Others"

After communicating with a server, the desired data and time are available to select. Whether or not the reservation is available is shown on time select screen like the followings:

: Much is available, : A little is available,

: Not available If a desired time is selected, a second time selection will appear after communicating with the server. 3 "OK"

Communicate with the server again to finish Note When software update is scheduled, the time of the server is displayed. Updating Software on Scheduled Date You can select the date and time to update software. For the situations when it takes a long time to download or a server is crowded, to set the time of starting software update through communicating with the server in advance is available. 1 Select "Reserve" on the software update confirmation screen The available date and time selection screen appear. 2 Select the date and time At the scheduled date and time, the software update starts automatically. Select "Others" on the desired date and time screen to set the desired date and time separately. 388 Appendix/Troubleshooting When the reserved time comes Confirming/changing/canceling the reserved time When the reserved time comes, software update will start automatically after 5 seconds. Note Note that if you use other functions, the software update may not start at the scheduled time. If alarm is running, the software update may not be started. If you perform "Clear memory"(P127) after the reservation is set, the software update may not be started at the scheduled time. Reschedule the time for update. Select "Software update" from setting menu and enter the terminal password to confirm the reserved time. You can change or cancel the reserved time from confirming reservation screen. Select "Change" to change the reserved time. Select "Cancel" to cancel the reserved time. Ending software update If select "NO" or "Cancel" in each screen, ending operation screen will be displayed. If select "YES", software update will be finished and go back to the stand-by screen. If select "NO", it will go back to the former screen. Appendix/Troubleshooting 389 Major Specifications Phone Model name Dimensions (HWD) Weight Continuous FOMA/3G Standby Time Continuous Call Time GSM FOMA/3G GSM Charging time Color LCD Type Size Pixels Type Size Effective Pixels Image Censor 390 Appendix/Troubleshooting L-06A Approx. 100mmApprox. 51mmApprox. 16.8mm Approx. 100g (with battery pack installed) Moving: Approx. 220 hours (3G) Moving: Approx. 200 hours (Auto) Stationary: Approx. 300 hours (Auto) Stationary Approx. 300 hours (Auto) Voice call: Approx. 150 minutes Video Call: Approx. 100 minutes Approx. 170 minutes AC Adapter: Approx. 180 minutes DC Adapter: Approx. 180 minutes Main display: TFT 262,144 colors Sub display: TFT 65536 colors Main display: Approx. 2. 4 inches Sub display: Approx. 1.3inches Main display: 76,800 pixels

(240 dot320 dot) Sub display: 20,480 pixels

(128 dot160 dot) CMOS 1/5.0 inches Approx. 2.00 M pixels Camera Storage Recorded pixels

(maximum) Zoom (Digital) Still images Continuous mode Still image file format Movie record time Movie file format Continuous playback time Chaku-Uta/

Chaku-Uta Full Music playback Capacity Approx. 200M pixels Approx. 3.4 times Approx. 544*1 (when purchased) Approx. 995*1 (after deleting preinstalled data that can be deleted) CIF(352x288) : 4 Wallpaper

(240x320)/QCIF (176x144)/

Sub-QCIF (128x96)/Phonebook

(120x160)/menu icon(80x70) : 6 JPEG Approx.60 minutes*2 MP4 Chaku-Uta-Full : Approx. 720 minutes*3 i-motion : Approx. 250 minutes*3 Approx. 102 MB

*1 Image size : 12896 Image quality: Standard File size: 10K

*2 It is maximum recording time of saving per movie into the FOMA terminal under the following conditions. Image size: Sub-QCIF Restriction of file size: none Quality: Standard (Standard, normal, etc.) Type: Image +Voice The maximum time of recording depends on record size, quality and the image being taken.

*3 File format: AAC Battery Pack Model name Dry battery Nominal voltage Nominal capacity Battery Pack L02 Lithium ion battery DC 3.7V 860mAh Continuous call time is approximate duration of time to be spent for talking with normal radio wave reception level. Continuous standby time is approximate duration of battery time while in motion. Depending on the battery level, set functions, operating environment such as ambient temperature, or radio wave reception level (Poor or weak radio wave reception level), battery life can reduced to half. When i-mode communications are performed, the call (communication)/standby time becomes shorter. Even if you do not make calls or perform i-mode communications, the call (communication)/standby time becomes short when you compose i-mode mail, start a downloaded i-ppli, start the i-ppli stand-by display, perform data communications or multiaccess, use a camera, or play videos or music. Continuous standby time in a stationary state is the average usage time in a stationary state with normal radio wave reception level while the terminal is closed. Continuous standby time in motion is the average usage time in a state combining "standstill", "in motion" and "out of service area" in an area with normal radio wave reception level while the terminal is closed. The estimated charging time is the duration of time to charge the battery pack with the FOMA terminal turned off and with a fully drained battery pack.The charging time becomes longer with the FOMA terminal turned on. Approximate Number of Savable Still Images The number of still images that can be saved on theFOMA terminal varies depending on the resolution, image quality, capture conditions, and capture objects. Quality Resolution UXGA

(12001600) SXGA 9601280 VGA 640480 CIF 352288 Wallpaper 240320 QCIF 176144 Sub-QCIF 12896 Phonebook 120160 Menu-icon 8070 Super fine Fine Standard Approx. 210 Approx. 400 Approx. 640 Approx. 450 Approx. 720 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 Approx. 995 The number of savable still images after deleting images, which can be deleted, in all the data already registered in a terminal Appendix/Troubleshooting 391 Approximate Movie Capture Duration The movie capture duration varies depending on the movie length, quality, capture conditions, and capture objects. Continuous capturing duration per video clip Capture Type Size restriction No restriction Audio and Graphics Graphics only Resolution QCIF Quality Super fine Fine Standard Super fine Fine Standard

(176x144) Approx.60 minutes Approx.60 minutes Approx.60 minutes Approx.60 minutes Approx.60 minutes Approx.60 minutes Sub-QCIF

(128x96) Approx.60 minutes Approx.60 minutes Approx.60 minutes Approx.60 minutes Approx.60 minutes Approx.60 minutes Audio only Capture Type Size restriction Approx.60 minutes 2Mbyte Resolution QCIF Audio and Graphics Graphics only Quality Super fine Fine Standard Super fine Fine Standard Sub-QCIF

(128x96)

(176x144) Approx.100 seconds Approx.186 seconds Approx.132 seconds Approx.234 seconds Approx.187 seconds Approx.315 seconds Approx.110 seconds Approx.225 seconds Approx.150 seconds Approx.297 seconds Approx.225 seconds Approx.441 seconds Audio only Approx.19 minutes 392 Appendix/Troubleshooting Capture Type Size restriction 500Kbytes Audio and Graphics Graphics only Resolution QCIF Quality Super fine Fine Standard Super fine Fine Standard

(176x144) Approx.24 seconds Approx.32 seconds Approx.46 seconds Approx.27 seconds Approx.37 minutes Approx.56 minutes Sub-QCIF

(128x96) Approx.46 seconds Approx.58 seconds Approx.78 seconds Approx.55 seconds Approx.73 seconds Approx.110 seconds Audio only Approx.364 seconds Continuous capturing duration per video clip Capture Type Audio and Graphics Graphics only Resolution QCIF Quality Super fine Fine Standard Super fine Fine Standard Sub-QCIF

(128x96)

(176x144) Approx94 minutes Approx161 minutes Approx118 minutes Approx231 minutes Approx161 minutes Approx245 minutes Approx103 minutes Approx189 minutes Approx133 minutes Approx240 minutes Approx189 minutes Approx326 minutes Audio only Approx1084 minutes The number of savable still images after deleting the images, which can be deleted, in all the data already registered in a terminal. Number of Items that can be Stored, Registered and Protected on the FOMA Terminal Databox The maximum number of items that can be stored or protected varies depending on the data size or memory usage. Type Maximum Number of Saved Items Maximum Number Protected Items Image Video/i-motion movie Melody Animation 1000*3 1000*3 1000*3 30 Type Schedule events Holiday Received mail Sent mail Unsent message Message R Message F Phonebook Schedule To Do Memo Mail Message Bookmarks Screen memo appli Maximum Number of Saved Items Maximum Number Protected Items

*1 Up to 50 entries can be saved in the UIM.

*2 Including the number of "Welcome mail" saved in "Inbox"

folder.

*3 Including data registered when purchased. 1000*1 200 100 50 50 1000*2 500 100 100 100 50 100*3 1000 500 100 100 10 Appendix/Troubleshooting 393 SAR Certification and Other Information Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of Mobile Phones Mobile phone L-06A meets the technical regulation defined by the government for absorption of radio waved to human body. This technical regulation has been established based on scientific studies so that radio waves emitted from radio devices such as mobile phones used near a human head give no bad influence to the humanc health. It defines that Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), representing the average amount of energy of radio waves absorbed to a temporal part of human body, should not exceed a permissible value of 2W/kg*. This permissible value includes a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of users, regardless of the age, body size and other conditions of individuals and is equal to the international guideline recommended by International Commission of Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) which has cooperative relationships with World Health Organization (WHO). All mobile phones should be confirmed to comply with the governmental regulation according to Radio Law before they are released. The SAR value of L-06A is 0.543 W/kg. This value has been acquired by Telecom Engineering Center (TELEC) and is the maximum value of those measured under the maximum transmission power of the mobile phone in the procedure defined by the government. Though there may be some differences in SAR value among individual products, they all meet the technical regulation. In addition, mobile phones are designed to have the lowest transmission power required for communication with base stations; therefore, the SAR value during actual phone operation becomes smaller. SAR value of this mobile phone meets the regulations of individual countries it is available. For further information about SAR, visit the following web sites:

Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications http://www.tele.soumu.go.jp/j/ele/index.htm Association of Radio Industries and Businesses http://www.arib-emf.org/index.html DOCOMO http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/product/

LG Mobile http://jp.lgmobile.com/

* The technical regulation is defined in Article 14-2 of the Ministry Ordinance Regulating Radio Equipment. Radio Frequency (RF) Signals THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS THE U.S. GOVERNMENT'S REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone contains a radio transmitter and receiver. Your phone is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of 394 Appendix/Troubleshooting measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.* Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the U.S. government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed on position and locations

(for example, at the ear and worn on the body) as required by FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone as reported to the FCC when tested for use at the ear is 0.246W/kg, and when worn on the body, is 0.052W/kg. (Body-

worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements). While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the U.S. government requirement. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after search on FCC ID BEJL705I. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory designated for this product or when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the terminal a minimum of 2.5 cm from the body. In the United States, the SAR limit for wireless mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. SAR values may vary depending upon national reporting requirements and the network band. Declaration of Conformity The product L-06A is declared to conform with the essential requirements of European Union Directive 1999/5/EC Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 3.1(a), 3.1(b) and 3.2. This mobile phone complies with the EU requirements for exposure to radio waves. Your mobile phone is a radio transceiver, designed and manufactured not to exceed the SAR* limits** for exposure to radio-frequency (RF) energy, which SAR* value, when tested for compliance against the standard was 0.569W/kg. While there may be differences between the SAR* levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet*** the EU requirements for RF exposure. The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of tissue, recommended by The Council of the European Union. The limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. Tests for SAR have been conducted using standard operating positions with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest Appendix/Troubleshooting 395 certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station antenna, the lower the power output. Important Safety Information AIRCRAFT Switch off your wireless device when boarding an aircraft or whenever you are instructed to do so by airline staff. If your device offers a 'flight mode' or similar feature consult airline staff as to whether it can be used on board. DRIVING Full attention should be given to driving at all times and local laws and regulations restricting the use of wireless devices while driving must be observed. HOSPITALS Mobile phones should be switched off wherever you are requested to do so in hospitals, clinics or health care facilities. These requests are designed to prevent possible interference with sensitive medical equipment. PETROL STATIONS Obey all posted signs with respect to the use of wireless devices or other radio equipment in locations with flammable material and chemicals. Switch off your wireless device whenever you are instructed to do so by authorized staff. INTERFERENCE Care must be taken when using the phone in close proximity to personal medical devices, such as pacemakers and hearing aids. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15cm be maintained between a mobile phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. To achieve this use the phone on the opposite ear to your pacemaker and do not carry it in a breast pocket. Hearing Aids Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. For other Medical Devices:

Please consult your physician and the device manufacturer to determine if operation of your phone may interfere with the operation of your medical device. Export Administration Regulations This product and its accessories may fall under the category of application of Japan Export Control Regulations ("Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law"

and relevant laws and regulations). U.S. Re-export Regulations (Export Administration Regulations: EAR) is applied to this product and its accessories. If you export or re-export this product or its accessories, please follow the necessary procedures at your own risk and expense. For details about the procedures, contact the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry or the U.S. Department of Commerce. 396 Appendix/Troubleshooting Powered by JBlendTM Copyright 2002-2007 Aplix Corporation. All rights reserved. JBlend and its related trademarks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aplix Corporation in Japan and/or other countries. This product preloaded with NetFront Sync Client from ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright 2007 ACCESS CO., LTD. All rights reserved. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are trademarks or registered trademarks of U.S. based Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. Other company names or product names mentioned in this content are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. Intellectual Property Issues Copyrights and Portrait Rights You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute the contents such as text, images, music, or software downloaded from web sites on the Internet, or images captured by the cameras of this product without permission from the copyright holder except for when the copy or quote is for personal use that is allowed by the Copyright Law. Note that capture or recording of live performances or exhibitions may be prohibited, even for personal use. Refrain from taking portraits of other persons and uploading such portraits on websites without consent, as this violates portrait rights. Trademarks

"docomo STYLE series", "FOMA", "mova", "i-mode", "i-ppli",

"i-ppli DX", "WORLD CALL", "WORLD WING" "Public mode",

"i-area", "i-motion", "i-motion mail", "Chaku-motion", "Deco-mail",

"mopera", "mopera U", "sigmarion", "musea", "Dual Network",

"visualnet", "V-live", "i-Channel", "DoPa", "OFFICEED", "IMCS",

"FOMA" logo, "i-mode" logo, "i-ppli" logo, "HIGH-SPEED" logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of NTT DOCOMO, INC. The name of the Free Dial Service and its logo are registered trademarks of NTT Communications Corporation.

"Multitask" is a trademark of the NEC Corporation.

"Catch Phone (Call Waiting Service)" is a registered trademark of the Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corp. Quick Time is a trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Appendix/Troubleshooting 397 Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following United States Patents and/or their counterparts in other nations;

4,901,307 5,267,262 5,101,501 5,414,796 5,228,054 5,710,784 5,504,773 5,600,754 5,511,073 5,659,569 5,544,196 5,778,338 5,109,390 5,416,797 5,267,261 5,056,109 5,337,338 5,535,239 5,490,165 5,568,483 5,506,865 5,657,420 Others Flash LiteTM developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated is installed on this product. Copyright 1995-2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. All rights reserved. Adobe, Flash and Flash Lite are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. A module developed by the Independent JPEG Group is integrated into this product. This manual abbreviates operating systems (Japanese version) as follows:

- Windows Vista is an abbreviation of Windows Vista (Home Basic, Home Premium, Business, Enterprise, and Ultimate) operating system.

- Windows XP is an abbreviation of Microsoft Windows XP Professional operating system, or Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition operating system.

- Windows 2000 is an abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating system. This product is licensed based on the MPEG-4 Patent Portfolio License. If you use MPEG-4 videos for private purpose without any profits, you are allowed to use them only when:

- Recording MPEG-4 videos that are compliant with the standard of MPEG-4 Visual.

- Playing back MPEG-4 videos that consumers recorded for non-commercial activities.

- Playing back MPEG-4 videos obtained from MPEG-LA licensees. For details, contact MPEG LA, LLC. 398 Appendix/Troubleshooting